1. fēnix 5/5S - Specifications
   URL: https://www8.garmin.com/manuals/webhelp/fenix5/EN-US/GUID-9DF0C26B-D40D-4CE9-801C-B8E6E1860F49.html
   fēnix 5/5S - Specifications

Specifications

# Specifications

Battery type

Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery

fēnix® 5S battery life

Up to 9 days in smartwatch mode

fēnix 5 battery life

Up to 14 days in smartwatch mode

Water rating

10 ATM1

Operating and storage temperature range

From -20º to 50ºC (from -4º to 122ºF)

USB charging temperature range

From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF)

Wireless frequencies

fēnix 5S: 2.4 GHz @ 7.46 dBm nominal, fēnix 5: 2.4 GHz @ 8.16 dBm nominal

1 The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

GUID-5DDC7B78-0983-4434-93BF-23EBCC967966 v4

2. fēnix 5X - Specifications
   URL: https://www8.garmin.com/manuals/webhelp/fenix5x/EN-US/GUID-9DF0C26B-D40D-4CE9-801C-B8E6E1860F49.html
   fēnix 5X - Specifications

Specifications

# Specifications

Battery type

Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery

fēnix® 5X battery life

Up to 12 days in smartwatch mode

Water rating

10 ATM1

Operating and storage temperature range

From -20º to 50ºC (from -4º to 122ºF)

USB charging temperature range

From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF)

Wireless frequencies

2.4 GHz @ 1.8 dBm nominal

1 The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

GUID-46975363-04DD-408E-95A7-17D40075FC50 v4

3. fēnix® 5/5S Owner’s Manual
   URL: https://www8.garmin.com/manuals/webhelp/fenix5/EN-US/fenix_5_5S_OM_EN-US.pdf
   ## FĒNIX ® 5/5S Owner’s Manual

© 2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Garmin. Garmin reserves the right to change or improve its
products and to make changes in the content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements. Go to www.garmin.com for current updates
and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.
Garmin ®, the Garmin logo, ANT+ ®, Auto Lap ®, Auto Pause ®, Edge ®, fēnix ®, inReach ®, TracBack ®, VIRB ®, and Virtual Partner ® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA
and other countries. Connect IQ ™, Garmin Connect ™, Garmin Explore ™, Garmin Express ™, Garmin Golf ™, Garmin Move IQ ™, HRM-Run ™, HRM-Swim ™, HRM-Tri ™, QuickFit ™, tempe ™,
TruSwing ™, TrueUp ™, Varia ™, Varia Vision ™, Vector ™, and Xero ™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
American Heart Association ® is a registered trademark of American Heart Association, Inc. Android ™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Apple ® and Mac ® are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. The Cooper Institute ®, as well as any
related trademarks, are the property of The Cooper Institute. Di2 ™ is a trademark of Shimano, Inc. Shimano ® is a registered trademark of Shimano, Inc. STRAVA and Strava ™ are trademarks of
Strava, Inc. Advanced heartbeat analytics by Firstbeat. Training Stress Score ™ (TSS), Intensity Factor ™ (IF), and Normalized Power ™ (NP) are trademarks of Peaksware, LLC. Wi‑Fi ® is a
registered mark of Wi-Fi Alliance Corporation. Windows ® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
This product is ANT+ ® certified. Visit www.thisisant.com/directory for a list of compatible products and apps.

#### Table of Contents

Introduction ... 1
Device Overview ... 1
Viewing the Controls Menu ... 1
Viewing Widgets ... 1
Charging the Device ... 1
Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device ... 1
Product Updates ... 1
Setting Up Garmin Express ... 2
Activities and Apps ... 2
Starting an Activity ... 2
Tips for Recording Activities ... 2
Stopping an Activity ... 2
Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity ... 2
Creating a Custom Activity ... 2
Indoor Activities ... 2
Calibrating the Treadmill Distance ... 2
Recording a Strength Training Activity ... 3
Outdoor Activities ... 3
Viewing Your Ski Runs ... 3
Using the Metronome ... 3
Jumpmaster ... 3
Multisport ... 3
Creating a Multisport Activity ... 3
Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities ... 3
Swimming ... 4
Swim Terminology ... 4
Stroke Types ... 4
Tips for Swimming Activities ... 4
Resting During Pool Swimming ... 4
Training with the Drill Log ... 4
Golfing ... 4
Downloading Golf Courses ... 4
Playing Golf ... 4
Hole Information ... 4
Moving the Flag ... 5
Viewing Hazards ... 5
Viewing Measured Shots ... 5
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances ... 5
Keeping Score ... 5
Updating a Score ... 5
TruSwing™ ... 5
Using the Golf Odometer ... 5
Tracking Statistics ... 5
Connected Features ... 5
Enabling Bluetooth Notifications ... 6
Viewing Notifications ... 6
Receiving an Incoming Phone Call ... 6
Replying to a Text Message ... 6
Managing Notifications ... 6
Turning Off the Bluetooth Smartphone Connection ... 6
Turning On and Off Smartphone Connection Alerts ... 6
Locating a Lost Mobile Device ... 6
Garmin Connect ... 6
Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile ... 7
Updating the Software Using Garmin Express ... 7
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer ... 7
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile ... 7
Garmin Golf™ App ... 7
Starting a GroupTrack Session ... 7
Tips for GroupTrack Sessions ... 7
Garmin Explore™ ... 7
Wi‑Fi® Connected Features ... 7
Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network ... 8
Connect IQ Features ... 8
Downloading Connect IQ Features Using Your Computer ... 8
Heart Rate Features ... 8
Wrist-based Heart Rate ... 8
Wearing the Device ... 8
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data ... 8
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget ... 8
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices ... 8
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data During an Activity ... 9
Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate Alert ... 9
Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor ... 9
Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor ... 9
Pool Swimming ... 9
Heart Rate While Swimming ... 9
Data Storage ... 9
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data ... 9
Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor ... 10
Running Dynamics ... 10
Training with Running Dynamics ... 10
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data ... 10
Ground Contact Time Balance Data ... 10
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio Data ... 11
Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data ... 11
Performance Measurements ... 11
Turning Off Performance Notifications ... 11
Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically ... 11
Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements ... 12
Training Status ... 12
Tips for Getting Your Training Status ... 12
About VO2 Max. Estimates ... 12
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running ... 12
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling ... 12
Recovery Time ... 13
Viewing Your Recovery Time ... 13
Recovery Heart Rate ... 13
Training Load ... 13
Viewing Your Predicted Race Times ... 13
About Training Effect ... 13
Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level ... 13
Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level ... 14
Performance Condition ... 14
Viewing Your Performance Condition ... 14
Lactate Threshold ... 14
Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate
Threshold ... 14
Getting Your FTP Estimate ... 14
Conducting an FTP Test ... 14
Training ... 15
Setting Up Your User Profile ... 15
Fitness Goals ... 15
About Heart Rate Zones ... 15
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones ... 15
Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones ... 15
Heart Rate Zone Calculations ... 15
Setting Your Power Zones ... 15
Activity Tracking ... 16
Auto Goal ... 16
Using the Move Alert ... 16
Sleep Tracking ... 16
Using Automated Sleep Tracking ... 16
Using Do Not Disturb Mode ... 16
Intensity Minutes ... 16
Earning Intensity Minutes ... 16
Garmin Move IQ™ ... 16
Activity Tracking Settings ... 16
Turning Off Activity Tracking ... 16
Table of Contents i
Workouts ... 17
Following a Workout From the Web ... 17
Starting a Workout ... 17
About the Training Calendar ... 17
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans ... 17
Adaptive Training Plans ... 17
Interval Workouts ... 17
Creating an Interval Workout ... 17
Starting an Interval Workout ... 17
Stopping an Interval Workout ... 17
Segments ... 17
Strava™ Segments ... 18
Viewing Segment Details ... 18
Racing a Segment ... 18
Using Virtual Partner® ... 18
Setting a Training Target ... 18
Cancelling a Training Target ... 18
Racing a Previous Activity ... 18
Personal Records ... 18
Viewing Your Personal Records ... 18
Restoring a Personal Record ... 18
Clearing a Personal Record ... 19
Clearing All Personal Records ... 19
Clock ... 19
Setting an Alarm ... 19
Deleting an Alarm ... 19
Starting the Countdown Timer ... 19
Using the Stopwatch ... 19
Adding Alternate Time Zones ... 19
Setting Clock Alerts ... 19
Syncing the Time with GPS ... 19
Navigation ... 19
Saving Your Location ... 19
Editing Your Saved Locations ... 19
Projecting a Waypoint ... 20
Navigating to a Destination ... 20
Creating and Following a Course on Your Device ... 20
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man Overboard
Location ... 20
Navigating with Sight 'N Go ... 20
Navigating to Your Starting Point During an Activity ... 20
Navigating to the Starting Point of Your Last Saved Activity ... 20
Stopping Navigation ... 20
Map ... 20
Panning and Zooming the Map ... 20
Compass ... 20
Altimeter and Barometer ... 21
History ... 21
Using History ... 21
Multisport History ... 21
Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone ... 21
Viewing Data Totals ... 21
Using the Odometer ... 21
Deleting History ... 21
Customizing Your Device ... 21
Activities and App Settings ... 21
Customizing the Data Screens ... 22
Adding a Map to an Activity ... 22
Alerts ... 22
Setting an Alert ... 22
Auto Lap ... 22
Marking Laps by Distance ... 22
Enabling Auto Pause® ... 23
Enabling Auto Climb ... 23
3D Speed and Distance ... 23
Turning On and Off the Lap Key ... 23
Using Auto Scroll ... 23
UltraTrac ... 23
Power Save Timeout Settings ... 23
Changing the Order of an Activity in the Apps List ... 23
Widgets ... 24
Customizing the Widget Loop ... 24
inReach Remote ... 24
Using the inReach Remote ... 24
VIRB Remote ... 24
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera ... 24
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity ... 24
Using the Stress Level Widget ... 25
Customizing the Controls Menu ... 25
Watch Face Settings ... 25
Customizing the Watch Face ... 25
Sensors Settings ... 25
Compass Settings ... 25
Calibrating the Compass Manually ... 25
Setting the North Reference ... 26
Altimeter Settings ... 26
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter ... 26
Barometer Settings ... 26
Calibrating the Barometer ... 26
Map Settings ... 26
GroupTrack Settings ... 26
Navigation Settings ... 26
Customizing Map Features ... 26
Heading Settings ... 26
Course Pointer ... 26
Setting Up a Heading Bug ... 26
Setting Navigation Alerts ... 27
System Settings ... 27
Time Settings ... 27
Changing the Backlight Settings ... 27
Customizing the Hot Keys ... 27
Changing the Units of Measure ... 27
Viewing Device Information ... 27
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance Information ... 27
Wireless Sensors ... 27
Pairing Your Wireless Sensors ... 27
Extended Display Mode ... 28
Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence Sensor ... 28
Training with Power Meters ... 28
Using Electronic Shifters ... 28
Situational Awareness ... 28
Foot Pod ... 28
Improving Foot Pod Calibration ... 28
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually ... 28
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance ... 28
tempe™ ... 28
Device Information ... 29
Specifications ... 29
Battery Information ... 29
HRM-Tri Specifications ... 29
Data Management ... 29
Disconnecting the USB Cable ... 29
Deleting Files ... 29
Device Maintenance ... 29
Device Care ... 29
Cleaning the Device ... 29
Cleaning the Leather Bands ... 29
Changing the QuickFit™ Bands ... 29
Metal Watch Band Adjustment ... 30
Replacing the Heart Rate Monitor Battery ... 30

ii Table of Contents

Troubleshooting ... 30
My device is in the wrong language ... 30
Is my smartphone compatible with my device? ... 30
My phone will not connect to the device ... 30
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my watch? ... 30
Restarting Your Device ... 30
Restoring All Default Settings ... 30
Acquiring Satellite Signals ... 31
Improving GPS Satellite Reception ... 31
The temperature reading is not accurate ... 31
Maximizing the Battery Life ... 31
Activity Tracking ... 31
My daily step count does not appear ... 31
My step count does not seem accurate ... 31
The step counts on my device and my Garmin Connect
account don't match ... 31
The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate ... 31
My intensity minutes are flashing ... 31
Getting More Information ... 31
Appendix ... 31
Data Fields ... 31
VO2 Max. Standard Ratings ... 35
FTP Ratings ... 35
Wheel Size and Circumference ... 35
Symbol Definitions ... 36
Index ... 37

Table of Contents iii

#### Introduction

WARNING See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other important information. Always consult your physician before you begin or modify any exercise program.

##### Device Overview

LIGHT

Select to turn the backlight on and off.
Hold to view the controls menu.
Hold to turn the device on.
Select to view the activity list and start or stop an activity.
Select to choose an option in a menu.

BACK LAP

Select to return to the previous screen. Select to record a lap, rest, or transition during a multisport activity.

DOWN

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus.
Hold to view the watch face from any screen.

UP MENU

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus.
Hold to view the menu.
Viewing the Controls Menu
The controls menu contains options, such as turning on do not
disturb mode, locking the keys, and turning the device off.
NOTE: You can add, reorder, and remove the options in the
controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page 25).
1 From any screen, hold LIGHT.

##### 2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the options.

Viewing Widgets Your device comes preloaded with several widgets, and more are available when you pair your device with a smartphone.

• Select UP or DOWN. The device scrolls through the widget loop.
• Select to view additional options and functions for a widget.
• From any screen, hold BACK to return to the watch face.

• If you are recording an activity, select BACK to return to the activity data pages.

##### Charging the Device

WARNING
This device contains a lithium-ion battery. See the Important
Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for
product warnings and other important information.
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion, thoroughly clean and dry the contacts and
the surrounding area before charging or connecting to a
computer. Refer to the cleaning instructions in the appendix.
1 Plug the small end of the USB cable into the charging port on
your device.
2 Plug the large end of the USB cable into a USB charging
port.
3 Charge the device completely.

Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device To use the connected features of the fēnix device, it must be paired directly through the Garmin Connect ™ Mobile app, instead of from the Bluetooth

®

settings on your smartphone.
1 From the app store on your smartphone, install and open the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
2 Bring your smartphone within 10 m (33 ft.) of your device.
3 Select LIGHT to turn on the device.
The first time you turn on the device, it is in pairing mode.
TIP: You can hold LIGHT and select to manually enter
pairing mode.
4 Select an option to add your device to your Garmin Connect
account:
• If this is the first time you are pairing a device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, follow the on-screen instructions.
• If you already paired another device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the or menu, select Garmin Devices > Add Device, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Product Updates
On your computer, install Garmin Express ™ (www.garmin.com
/express). On your smartphone, install the Garmin Connect
Mobile app.
This provides easy access to these services for Garmin

®

devices:

• Software updates
• Data uploads to Garmin Connect
• Product registration

Introduction 1

Setting Up Garmin Express
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Activities and Apps Your device can be used for indoor, outdoor, athletic, and fitness activities. When you start an activity, the device displays and records sensor data. You can save activities and share them with the Garmin Connect community. You can also add Connect IQ ™ activities and apps to your device using the Connect IQ website (Connect IQ Features, page 8). For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.

Starting an Activity
When you start an activity, GPS turns on automatically (if
required). When you stop the activity, the device returns to
watch mode.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 If necessary, follow the on-screen instructions to enter
additional information.
4 If necessary, wait while the device connects to your ANT+ ®
sensors.
5 If the activity requires GPS, go outside, and wait while the
device locates satellites.
6 Select to start the timer.
NOTE: The device does not record your activity data until
you start the timer.

Tips for Recording Activities

• Charge the device before starting an activity (Charging the Device, page 1).
• Select LAP to record laps.
• Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Stopping an Activity 1 Select . 2 Select an option:

• To resume your activity, select Resume.
• To save the activity and return to watch mode, select Save.
• To suspend your activity and resume it at a later time, select Resume Later.
• To mark a lap, select Lap.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select Back to Start > TracBack. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity by the most direct path, select Back to Start > Straight Line. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To discard the activity and return to watch mode, select Discard > Yes.

NOTE: After stopping the activity, the device saves it automatically after 30 minutes.

Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity
The list of your favorite activities appears when you press
from the watch face, and it provides quick access to the
activities you use most. The first time you press to start an
activity, the device prompts you to select your favorite activities.
You can add or remove favorite activities at any time.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
Your favorite activities appear at the top of the list with a
white background. Other activities appear with a black
background.
3 Select an option:
• To add a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Set as Favorite.
• To remove a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Remove from Favorites.

Creating a Custom Activity 1 From the watch face, select > Add. 2 Select an option:

• Select Copy Activity to create your custom activity starting from one of your saved activities.
• Select Other to create a new custom activity. 3 If necessary, select an activity type. 4 Select a name or enter a custom name.
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select an accent color or customize the data screens.
• Select Done to save and use the custom activity. 6 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Duplicate activity names include a number, for example: Bike(2). 5 Select an option:

Indoor Activities The fēnix device can be used for training indoors, such as running on an indoor track or using a stationary bike. GPS is turned off for indoor activities. When running or walking with GPS turned off, speed, distance, and cadence are calculated using the accelerometer in the device. The accelerometer is self-calibrating. The accuracy of the speed, distance, and cadence data improves after a few outdoor runs or walks using GPS. TIP: Holding the handrails of the treadmill reduces accuracy. You can use an optional foot pod to record pace, distance, and cadence. When cycling with GPS turned off, speed and distance are not available unless you have an optional sensor that sends speed and distance data to the device (such as a speed or cadence sensor).

Calibrating the Treadmill Distance
To record more accurate distances for your treadmill runs, you
can calibrate the treadmill distance after you run at least 1.5 km
(1 mi.) on a treadmill. If you use different treadmills, you can
manually calibrate the treadmill distance on each treadmill or
after each run.
1 Start a treadmill activity (Starting an Activity, page 2), and run
at least 1.5 km (1 mi.) on the treadmill.
2 After you complete your run, select .
3 Select an option:
• To calibrate the treadmill distance the first time, select Save.

2 Activities and Apps

The device prompts you to complete the treadmill calibration.

• To manually calibrate the treadmill distance after the first time calibration, select Calibrate & Save > Yes. 4 Check the treadmill display for the distance traveled, and enter the distance on your device.
Recording a Strength Training Activity
You can record sets during a strength training activity. A set is
multiple repetitions (reps) of a single move.
1 From the watch face, select > Strength.
The first time you record a strength training activity, you will
select which wrist your watch is on.
2 Select to start the set timer.
3 Start your first set.
The device counts your reps. Your rep count appears when
you complete at least six reps.
TIP: The device can only count reps of a single move for
each set. When you want to change moves, you should finish
the set and start a new one.
4 Select LAP to finish the set.
The watch displays the total reps for the set. After several
seconds, the rest timer appears.
5 If necessary, hold MENU, select Edit Last Set, and edit the
number of reps.
TIP: You can also add the weight used for the set.
6 When you are done resting, select LAP to start your next set.
7 Repeat for each strength training set until your activity is
complete.
8 After your last set, select to stop the set timer.
9 Select Save.

Outdoor Activities The fēnix device comes preloaded with outdoor activities, such as running and cycling. GPS is turned on for outdoor activities. You can add new activities based on default activities, such as walking or rowing. You can also add custom activities to your device (Creating a Custom Activity, page 2).

Viewing Your Ski Runs
Your device records the details of each downhill skiing or
snowboarding run using the auto run feature. This feature is
turned on by default for downhill skiing and snowboarding. It
automatically records new ski runs based on your movement.
The timer pauses when you stop moving downhill and when you
are on a chairlift. The timer remains paused during the chairlift
ride. You can start moving downhill to restart the timer. You can
view run details from the paused screen or while the timer is
running.
1 Start a skiing or snowboarding activity.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select View Runs.
4 Select UP and DOWN to view details of your last run, your
current run, and your total runs.
The run screens include time, distance traveled, maximum
speed, average speed, and total descent.
Using the Metronome
The metronome feature plays tones at a steady rhythm to help
you improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or
more consistent cadence.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.

3 Hold MENU.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Metronome > Status > On.
6 Select an option:

• Select Beats / Minute to enter a value based on the cadence you want to maintain.
• Select Alert Frequency to customize the frequency of the beats.
• Select Sounds to customize the metronome tone and vibration. 7 If necessary, select Preview to listen to the metronome feature before you run. 8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2).
The metronome starts automatically.
9 During your run, select UP or DOWN to view the metronome
screen.
10If necessary, hold MENU to change the metronome settings.

Jumpmaster

WARNING The jumpmaster feature is for use by experienced skydivers only. The jumpmaster feature should not be used as a primary skydiving altimeter. Failure to input the appropriate jump related information can lead to serious personal injury or death. The jumpmaster feature follows military guidelines for calculating the high altitude release point (HARP). The device detects automatically when you have jumped to begin navigating toward the desired impact point (DIP) using the barometer and electronic compass.

Multisport Triathletes, duathletes, and other multisport competitors can take advantage of the multisport activities, such as Triathlon or Swimrun. During a multisport activity, you can transition between activities and continue to view your total time and distance. For example, you can switch from biking to running and view your total time and distance for biking and running throughout the multisport activity. You can customize a multisport activity, or you can use the default triathlon activity set up for a standard triathlon.

Creating a Multisport Activity
1 From the watch face, select > Add > Multisport.
2 Select a multisport activity type, or enter a custom name.
Duplicate activity names include a number. For example,
Triathlon(2).
3 Select two or more activities.
4 Select an option:
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select whether to include transitions.
• Select Done to save and use the multisport activity. 5 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities

• Select to start your first activity.
• Select LAP to transition to the next activity. If transitions are turned on, the transition time is recorded separately from the activity times.
• If necessary, select LAP to start the next activity.
• Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Activities and Apps 3

##### Swimming

NOTICE The device is intended for surface swimming. Scuba diving with the device may damage the product and will void the warranty. NOTE: The device cannot record wrist heart rate data while swimming. NOTE: The device is compatible with the HRM-Tri ™ accessory and the HRM-Swim ™ accessory (Heart Rate While Swimming, page 9).

Swim Terminology Length: One trip down the pool. Interval: One or more consecutive lengths. A new interval starts after a rest. Stroke: A stroke is counted every time your arm wearing the device completes a full cycle. Swolf: Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one pool length and the number of strokes for that length. For example, 30 seconds plus 15 strokes equals a swolf score of 45. For open water swimming, swolf is calculated over 25 meters. Swolf is a measurement of swimming efficiency and, like golf, a lower score is better.

Stroke Types
Stroke type identification is available only for pool swimming.
Your stroke type is identified at the end of a length. Stroke types
appear when you are viewing interval history. You can also
select stroke type as a custom data field (Customizing the Data
Screens, page 22).
Free Freestyle
Back Backstroke
Breast Breaststroke
Fly Butterfly
Mixed More than one stroke type in an interval
Drill Used with drill logging (Training with the Drill Log, page 4)

Tips for Swimming Activities

• Before starting a pool swimming activity, follow the on-screen instructions to select your pool size or enter a custom size. The next time you start a pool swimming activity, the device uses this pool size. You can hold MENU, select the activity settings, and select Pool Size to change the size.
• Select LAP to record a rest during pool swimming. The device automatically records swim intervals and lengths for pool swimming.
• Select LAP to record an interval during open water swimming.
Resting During Pool Swimming
The default rest screen displays two rest timers. It also displays
time and distance for the last completed interval.
NOTE: Swim data is not recorded during a rest.
1 During your swim activity, select LAP to start a rest.
The display reverses to white text on a black background,
and the rest screen appears.
2 During a rest, select UP or DOWN to view other data screens
(optional).
3 Select LAP, and continue swimming.
4 Repeat for additional rest intervals.

Training with the Drill Log The drill log feature is available only for pool swimming. You can use the drill log feature to manually record kick sets, one-arm swimming, or any type of swimming that is not one of the four major strokes.

1 During your pool swim activity, select UP or DOWN to view
the drill log screen.
2 Select LAP to start the drill timer.
3 After you complete a drill interval, select LAP.
The drill timer stops, but the activity timer continues to record
the entire swim session.
4 Select a distance for the completed drill.
Distance increments are based on the pool size selected for
the activity profile.
5 Select an option:
• To start another drill interval, select LAP.
• To start a swim interval, select UP or DOWN to return to the swim training screens.
Golfing
Downloading Golf Courses
Before you play a course for the first time, you must download it
using the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
1 From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Download Golf
Courses > .
2 Select a golf course.
3 Select Download.
After the course finishes downloading, it appears in the list of
courses on your fēnix device.
Playing Golf
Before you play a course for the first time, you must download it
from the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Garmin Connect,
page 6). Courses downloaded from the Garmin Connect
Mobile app are updated automatically.
Before you play golf, you should charge the device (Charging
the Device, page 1).
1 From the watch face, select > Golf.
2 Go outside, and wait while the device locates satellites.
3 Select a course from the list of available courses.
4 Select Yes to keep score.
5 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
The device automatically transitions when you move to the
next hole.
6 After you complete your activity, select > End Round >
Yes.

Hole Information Because pin locations change, the device calculates the distance to the front, middle, and back of the green, but not the actual pin location.

Current hole number
Distance to the back of the green
Distance to the middle of the green
Distance to the front of the green
Par for the hole

4 Activities and Apps

Next hole Previous hole

Moving the Flag
You can take a closer look at the green and move the pin
location.
1 From the hole information screen, select > Move Flag.
2 Select UP or DOWN to move the pin position.
3 Select .
The distances on the hole information screen are updated to
show the new pin location. The pin location is saved for only
the current round.
Viewing Hazards
You can view distances to hazards along the fairway for par 4
and 5 holes. Hazards that affect shot selection are displayed
individually or in groups to help you determine the distance to
layup or carry.
1 From the hole information screen, select > Hazards.
• The distances to the front and back of the nearest hazard appear on the screen.
• The hazard type is listed at the top of the screen.
• The green is represented as a half circle at the top of the screen. The line below the green represents the center of the fairway.
• Hazards are shown below the green in approximate locations relative to the fairway. 2 Select UP or DOWN to view other hazards for the current hole.
Viewing Measured Shots
Before the device can automatically detect and measure shots,
you must enable scoring.
Your device features automatic shot detection and recording.
Each time you take a shot along the fairway, the device records
your shot distance so you can view it later.
TIP: Automatic shot detection works best when you wear the
device on your leading wrist and make good contact with the
ball. Putts are not detected.
1 While playing golf, select > Measure Shot.
Your last shot distance appears.
NOTE: The distance automatically resets when you hit the
ball again, putt on the green, or move to the next hole.
2 Select DOWN to view all recorded shot distances.
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances
You can view a list of layup and dogleg distances for par 4 and 5
holes.
Select > Layups.
Each layup and the distance until you reach each layup
appear on the screen.
NOTE: Distances are removed from the list as you pass
them.

Keeping Score 1 From the hole information screen, select > Scorecard.

The scorecard appears when you are on the green.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the score.
Your total score is updated.
Updating a Score
1 From the hole information screen, select > Scorecard.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to change the score for that hole.
Your total score is updated.
TruSwing ™

The TruSwing feature allows you to view swing metrics recorded from your TruSwing device. Go to www.garmin.com/golf to purchase a TruSwing device.

Using the Golf Odometer
You can use the odometer to record the time, distance, and
steps traveled. The odometer automatically starts and stops
when you start or end a round.
1 Select > Odometer.
2 If necessary, select Reset to reset the odometer to zero.
Tracking Statistics
The Stat Tracking feature enables detailed statistics tracking
while playing golf.
1 From the hole information screen, hold MENU.
2 Select the activity settings.
3 Select Stat Tracking to enable tracking statistics.

Connected Features Connected features are available for your fēnix device when you connect the device to a compatible smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology. Some features require you to install the Garmin Connect Mobile app on the connected smartphone. Go to www.garmin.com/apps for more information. Some features are also available when you connect your device to a wireless network. Phone notifications: Displays phone notifications and messages on your fēnix device. LiveTrack: Allows friends and family to follow your races and training activities in real time. You can invite followers using email or social media, allowing them to view your live data on a Garmin Connect tracking page. GroupTrack: Allows you to keep track of your connections using LiveTrack directly on screen and in real time. Activity uploads to Garmin Connect: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Connect IQ: Allows you to extend your device features with new watch faces, widgets, apps, and data fields. Software Updates: Allows you to update your device software. Weather: Allows you to view current weather conditions and weather forecasts. Bluetooth sensors: Allows you to connect Bluetooth compatible sensors, such as a heart rate monitor. Find my phone: Locates your lost smartphone that is paired with your fēnix device and currently within range. Find my device: Locates your lost fēnix device that is paired with your smarphone and currently within range.

Connected Features 5

Enabling Bluetooth Notifications
Before you can enable notifications, you must pair the fēnix
device with a compatible mobile device (Pairing Your
Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Smart Notifications > Status >
On.
3 Select During Activity.
4 Select a notification preference.
5 Select a sound preference.
6 Select Not During Activity.
7 Select a notification preference.
8 Select a sound preference.
9 Select Timeout.
10Select the amount of time the alert for a new notification
appears on the screen.
Viewing Notifications
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the notifications
widget.
2 Select , and select a notification.
3 Select DOWN for more options.
4 Select BACK to return to the previous screen.

Receiving an Incoming Phone Call When you receive a phone call on your connected smartphone, the fēnix device displays the name or phone number of the caller. You can accept or decline the call. If your device is connected to a smartphone with Android ™, you can also decline with a text message by selecting from a list of messages on your fēnix device.

• To accept the call, select Accept.
• To decline the call, select Decline.
• To decline the call and immediately send a text message reply, select Reply, and select a message from the list.
Replying to a Text Message
NOTE: This feature is available only for smartphones with
Android.
When you receive a text message notification on your fēnix
device, you can send a quick reply by selecting from a list of
messages. You can customize messages in the Garmin
Connect Mobile app.
NOTE: This feature sends text messages using your phone.
Regular text message limits and charges from your carrier and
phone plan may apply. Contact your mobile carrier for more
information about text message charges or limits.
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the notifications
widget.
2 Select , and select a text message notification.
3 Select DOWN > Reply.
4 Select a message from the list.
Your phone sends the selected message as an SMS text
message.
Managing Notifications
You can use your compatible smartphone to manage
notifications that appear on your fēnix 5/5S device.
Select an option:
• If you are using an Apple

®

smartphone, use the notifications settings on your smartphone to select the items to show on the device.

• If you are using a smartphone with Android, from the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Settings > Smart Notifications.
Turning Off the Bluetooth Smartphone
Connection
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select to turn off the Bluetooth smartphone connection on
your fēnix device.
Refer to the owner's manual for your mobile device to turn off
Bluetooth wireless technology on your mobile device.
Turning On and Off Smartphone Connection
Alerts
You can set the fēnix 5/5S device to alert you when your paired
smartphone connects and disconnects using Bluetooth wireless
technology.
NOTE: Smartphone connection alerts are turned off by default.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Alerts.
Locating a Lost Mobile Device
You can use this feature to help locate a lost mobile device that
is paired using Bluetooth wireless technology and currently
within range.
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select .
The fēnix device begins searching for your paired mobile
device. An audible alert sounds on your mobile device, and
the Bluetooth signal strength displays on the fēnix device
screen. The Bluetooth signal strength increases as you move
closer to your mobile device.
3 Select BACK to stop searching.

Garmin Connect Your Garmin Connect account allows you to track your performance and connect with your friends. It gives you the tools to track, analyze, share, and encourage each other. You can record the events of your active lifestyle, including runs, walks, rides, swims, hikes, golf games, and more. You can create your free Garmin Connect account when you pair your device with your phone using the Garmin Connect Mobile app. You can also create an account when you set up the Garmin Express application (www.garmin.com/express). Store your activities: After you complete and save a timed activity with your device, you can upload that activity to your Garmin Connect account and keep it as long as you want. Analyze your data: You can view more detailed information about your fitness and outdoor activities, including time, distance, heart rate, calories burned, cadence, an overhead map view, and pace and speed charts. You can view more detailed information about your golf games, including scorecards, statistics, and course information. You can also view customizable reports. NOTE: To view some data, you must pair an optional wireless sensor with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27).

6 Connected Features

Track your progress: You can track your daily steps, join a friendly competition with your connections, and meet your goals. Share your activities: You can connect with friends to follow each other's activities or post links to your activities on your favorite social networking sites. Manage your settings: You can customize your device and user settings on your Garmin Connect account.

Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile Before you can update your device software using the Garmin Connect Mobile app, you must have a Garmin Connect account, and you must pair the device with a compatible smartphone (Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1). Synchronize your device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 7). When new software is available, the Garmin Connect Mobile app automatically sends the update to your device.

Updating the Software Using Garmin Express
Before you can update your device software, you must
download and install the Garmin Express application and add
your device (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer,
page 7).
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
When new software is available, the Garmin Express
application sends it to your device.
2 After the Garmin Express application finishes sending the
update, disconnect the device from your computer.
Your device installs the update.
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer
The Garmin Express application connects your device to your
Garmin Connect account using a computer. You can use the
Garmin Express application to upload your activity data to your
Garmin Connect account and to send data, such as workouts or
training plans, from Garmin Connect website to your device. You
can also install device software updates and manage your
Connect IQ apps.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Download and install the Garmin Express application.
4 Open the Garmin Express application, and select Add
Device.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile 1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu. 2 Select .

Garmin Golf ™ App The Garmin Golf app allows golfers to compete with each other at different courses. More than 41,000 courses have a weekly leaderboard that anyone can join. You can set up a tournament event and invite players to compete. You can upload scorecards from your compatible Garmin device to view detailed statistics and shot analyses. The Garmin Golf app syncs your data with your Garmin Connect account. You can download the Garmin Golf app from the app store on your smartphone.

Starting a GroupTrack Session
Before you can start a GroupTrack session, you must have a
Garmin Connect account, a compatible smartphone, and the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
These instructions are for starting a GroupTrack session with
fēnix 5/5S devices. If your connections have other compatible
devices, you can see them on the map. The other devices may
not be able to display GroupTrack riders on the map.
1 Go outside, and turn on the fēnix 5/5S device.
2 Pair your smartphone with the fēnix 5/5S device (Pairing
Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
3 On the fēnix 5/5S device, hold MENU, and select Settings >
GroupTrack > Show on Map to enable viewing connections
on the map screen.
4 In the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the settings menu,
select LiveTrack > GroupTrack.
5 If you have more than one compatible device, select a device
for the GroupTrack session.
6 Select Visible to > All Connections.
7 Select Start LiveTrack.
8 On the fēnix 5/5S device, start an activity.
9 Scroll to the map to view your connections.
TIP: From the map, you can hold MENU and select Nearby
Connections to view distance, direction, and pace or speed
information for other connections in the GroupTrack session.

Tips for GroupTrack Sessions The GroupTrack feature allows you to keep track of other connections in your group using LiveTrack directly on the screen. All members of the group must be your connections in your Garmin Connect account.

• Start your activity outside using GPS.
• Pair your fēnix 5/5S device with your smartphone using Bluetooth technology.
• In the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the settings menu, select Connections to update the list of connections for your GroupTrack session.
• Make sure all of your connections pair to their smartphones and start a LiveTrack session in the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
• Make sure all your connections are in range (40 km or 25 mi.).
• During a GroupTrack session, scroll to the map to view your connections (Adding a Map to an Activity, page 22).

##### Garmin Explore ™

The Garmin Explore website allows you to plan trips and use cloud storage for your waypoints, routes, and tracks. It offers advanced planning, allowing you to share and sync data with your compatible Garmin device. You can go to explore.garmin.com.

Wi‑Fi ® Connected Features Some fēnix 5/5S models have Wi‑Fi connected features. The Garmin Connect Mobile app is not required for you to use Wi‑Fi connectivity.

Wi‑Fi ® Connected Features 7

Activity uploads to your Garmin Connect account: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Workouts and training plans: Allows you to browse for and select workouts and training plans on the Garmin Connect site. The next time your device has a Wi‑Fi connection, the files are wirelessly sent to your device. Software updates: Allows your device to download the latest software update when a Wi‑Fi connection is available. The next time you turn on or unlock the device, you can follow the on-screen instructions to install the software update.

Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network
You must connect your device to the Garmin Connect Mobile
app on your smartphone or to the Garmin Express application
on your computer before you can connect to a Wi‑Fi network.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Wi-Fi > My Networks > Add Network.
The device displays a list of nearby Wi‑Fi networks.
3 Select a network.
4 If necessary, enter the password for the network.
The device connects to the network, and the network is added to
the list of saved networks. The device reconnects to this network
automatically when it is within range.

Connect IQ Features You can add Connect IQ features to your watch from Garmin and other providers using the Connect IQ website. You can customize your device with watch faces, data fields, widgets, and apps. Watch Faces: Allow you to customize the appearance of the clock. Data Fields: Allow you to download new data fields that present sensor, activity, and history data in new ways. You can add Connect IQ data fields to built-in features and pages. Widgets: Provide information at a glance, including sensor data and notifications. Apps: Add interactive features to your watch, such as new outdoor and fitness activity types.

Downloading Connect IQ Features Using
Your Computer
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to apps.garmin.com, and sign in.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature, and download it.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Heart Rate Features The fēnix 5/5S device has a wrist-based heart rate monitor and is also compatible with chest heart rate monitors (sold separately). You can view heart rate data on the heart rate widget. If both wrist-based heart rate and chest heart rate data are available, your device uses the chest heart rate data.

##### Wrist-based Heart Rate Wearing the Device

• Wear the device above your wrist bone. NOTE: The device should be snug but comfortable. For more accurate heart rate readings on the fēnix device, it should not move while running or exercising.

NOTE: The optical sensor is located on the back of the device.

• See Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data, page 8 for more information about wrist-based heart rate.
• For more information about accuracy, go to garmin.com /ataccuracy.
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try
these tips.
• Clean and dry your arm before putting on the device.
• Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect repellent under the device.
• Avoid scratching the heart rate sensor on the back of the device.
• Wear the device above your wrist bone. The device should be snug but comfortable.
• Wait until the icon is solid before starting your activity.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes and get a heart rate reading before starting your activity. NOTE: In cold environments, warm up indoors.
• Rinse the device with fresh water after each workout.
• While exercising, use a silicone band.
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget
The widget displays your current heart rate in beats per minute
(bpm) and a graph of your heart rate for the last 4 hours.
1 From the watch face, select DOWN.
2 Select to view your average resting heart rate values for
the last 7 days.
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices
You can broadcast your heart rate data from your fēnix 5/5S
device and view it on paired Garmin devices.
NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery life.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Broadcast Heart Rate.
The fēnix 5/5S device starts broadcasting your heart rate
data, and appears.
NOTE: You can view only the heart rate widget while
broadcasting heart rate data from the heart rate widget.
3 Pair your fēnix 5/5S device with your Garmin ANT+
compatible device.
NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin
compatible device. See your owner's manual.
TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, select any
key, and select Yes.

8 Connect IQ Features

Broadcasting Heart Rate Data During an Activity You can set up your fēnix 5/5S device to broadcast your heart rate data automatically when you begin an activity. For example, you can broadcast your heart rate data to an Edge

®

device while cycling, or to a VIRB

®

action camera during an activity.
NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery life.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Broadcast During Activity.
3 Begin an activity (Starting an Activity, page 2).
The fēnix 5/5S device starts broadcasting your heart rate
data in the background.
NOTE: There is no indication that the device is broadcasting
your heart rate data during an activity.
4 If necessary, pair your fēnix 5/5S device with your Garmin
ANT+ compatible device.
NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin
compatible device. See your owner's manual.
TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, stop the
activity (Stopping an Activity, page 2).
Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate Alert
You can set the device to alert you when your heart rate
exceeds a certain number of beats per minute (bpm) after a
period of inactivity.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Abnormal HR Alert > Status > On.
3 Select Alert Threshold.
4 Select a heart rate threshold value.
Each time you exceed the threshold value, a message appears
and the device vibrates.

Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor The default value for the Wrist Heart Rate setting is Auto. The device automatically uses the wrist-based heart rate monitor unless you pair an ANT+ heart rate monitor to the device. 1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options > Status > Off.

Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor
You should wear the heart rate monitor directly on your skin, just
below your sternum. It should be snug enough to stay in place
during your activity.
1 If necessary, attach the strap extender to the heart rate
monitor.
2 Wet the electrodes on the back of the heart rate monitor to
create a strong connection between your chest and the
transmitter.

3 Wear the heart rate monitor with the Garmin logo facing right side up.

The loop and hook connection should be on your right side. 4 Wrap the heart rate monitor around your chest, and connect the strap hook to the loop. NOTE: Make sure the care tag does not fold over. After you put on the heart rate monitor, it is active and sending data.

Pool Swimming

NOTICE Hand wash the heart rate monitor after exposure to chlorine or other pool chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the heart rate monitor. The HRM-Tri accessory is designed primarily for open water swimming, but it can be used occasionally for pool swimming. The heart rate monitor should be worn under a swim suit or triathlon top during pool swimming. Otherwise, it may slide down your chest when pushing off the pool wall.

Heart Rate While Swimming NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate is not available while swimming. The HRM-Tri accessory and the HRM-Swim accessory record and store your heart rate data while swimming. Heart rate data is not visible on compatible fēnix devices while the heart rate monitor is underwater. You must start a timed activity on your paired fēnix device to view stored heart rate data later. During rest intervals when out of the water, the heart rate monitor sends your heart rate data to your fēnix device. Your fēnix device automatically downloads stored heart rate data when you save your timed swim activity. Your heart rate monitor must be out of the water, active, and within range of the device (3 m) while data is downloaded. You can review your heart rate data in the device history and on your Garmin Connect account.

Data Storage The heart rate monitor can store up to 20 hours of data in a single activity. When the heart rate monitor memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten. You can start a timed activity on your paired fēnix device, and the heart rate monitor records your heart rate data even if you move away from your device. For example, you can record heart rate data during fitness activities or team sports where watches cannot be worn. Your heart rate monitor automatically sends your stored heart rate data to your fēnix device when you save your activity. Your heart rate monitor must be active and within range (3 m) of the device while data is uploaded.

Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try
these tips.
• Reapply water to the electrodes and contact patches (if applicable).
• Tighten the strap on your chest.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes.
• Follow the care instructions (Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor, page 10).
• Wear a cotton shirt or thoroughly wet both sides of the strap. Synthetic fabrics that rub or flap against the heart rate monitor can create static electricity that interferes with heart rate signals.
• Move away from sources that can interfere with your heart rate monitor. Sources of interference may include strong electromagnetic fields, some 2.4 GHz wireless sensors, high-voltage power

lines, electric motors, ovens, microwave ovens, 2.4 GHz cordless phones, and wireless LAN access points.

Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor

Ground contact time balance: Ground contact time balance displays the left/right balance of your ground contact time while running. It displays a percentage. For example, 53.2 with an arrow pointing left or right. Stride length: Stride length is the length of your stride from one footfall to the next. It is measured in meters. Vertical ratio: Vertical ratio is the ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length. It displays a percentage. A lower number typically indicates better running form.

NOTICE A buildup of sweat and salt on the strap can decrease the ability of the heart rate monitor to report accurate data.

• Rinse the heart rate monitor after every use.
• Hand wash the heart rate monitor after every seven uses or one pool swim, using a tiny amount of mild detergent, such as dishwashing liquid. NOTE: Using too much detergent may damage the heart rate monitor.
• Do not put the heart rate monitor in a washing machine or dryer.
• When drying the heart rate monitor, hang it up or lay it flat.

Training with Running Dynamics Before you can view running dynamics, you must put on a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Tri accessory, and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27). If your fēnix 5/5S was packaged with the accessory, the devices are already paired, and the fēnix 5/5S is set to display running dynamics data screens. 1 Select an option:

• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5/5S device are already paired, skip to step 7.
• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5/5S device are not already paired, complete all the steps in this procedure. 2 Hold MENU. 3 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 4 Select an activity. 5 Select the activity settings. 6 Select Data Screens > Add New. 7 Select a running dynamics data screen.
NOTE: The running dynamics screens are not available for
all activities.
8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2).
9 Select UP or DOWN to open a running dynamics screen to
view your metrics.

Running Dynamics You can use your compatible fēnix device paired with the HRM-Tri accessory or other running dynamics accessory to provide real-time feedback about your running form. If your fēnix device was packaged with the HRM-Tri accessory, the devices are already paired. The running dynamics accessory has an accelerometer that measures torso movement in order to calculate six running metrics. Cadence: Cadence is the number of steps per minute. It displays the total steps (right and left combined). Vertical oscillation: Vertical oscillation is your bounce while running. It displays the vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters. Ground contact time: Ground contact time is the amount of time in each step that you spend on the ground while running. It is measured in milliseconds. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance are not available while walking.

Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data
The running dynamics screens display a color gauge for the primary metric. You can display cadence, vertical oscillation, ground
contact time, ground contact time balance, or vertical ratio as the primary metric. The color gauge shows you how your running
dynamics data compare to those of other runners. The color zones are based on percentiles.
Garmin has researched many runners of all different levels. The data values in the red or orange zones are typical for less
experienced or slower runners. The data values in the green, blue, or purple zones are typical for more experienced or faster
runners. More experienced runners tend to exhibit shorter ground contact times, lower vertical oscillation, lower vertical ratio, and
higher cadence than less experienced runners. However, taller runners typically have slightly slower cadences, longer strides, and
slightly higher vertical oscillation. Vertical ratio is your vertical oscillation divided by stride length. It is not correlated with height.
Go to www.garmin.com/runningdynamics for more information on running dynamics. For additional theories and interpretations of
running dynamics data, you can search reputable running publications and websites.
Color Zone Percentile in Zone Cadence Range Ground Contact Time Range
Purple >95 >183 spm <218 ms
Blue 70–95 174–183 spm 218–248 ms
Green 30–69 164–173 spm 249–277 ms
Orange 5–29 153–163 spm 278–308 ms
Red <5 <153 spm >308 ms
Ground Contact Time Balance Data
Ground contact time balance measures your running symmetry and appears as a percentage of your total ground contact time. For
example, 51.3% with an arrow pointing left indicates the runner is spending more time on the ground when on the left foot. If your
data screen displays both numbers, for example 48–52, 48% is the left foot and 52% is the right foot.
Color Zone Red Orange Green Orange Red
Symmetry Poor Fair Good Fair Poor
Percent of Other Runners 5% 25% 40% 25% 5%
Ground Contact Time Balance >52.2% L 50.8–52.2% L 50.7% L–50.7% R 50.8–52.2% R >52.2% R

| | Purple | | | >95 | | >183 spm | | | <218 ms | | | | | | | | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | Blue | | | 70–95 | | 174–183 spm | | | 218–248 ms | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Green | | | 30–69 | | 164–173 spm | | | 249–277 ms | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Orange | | | 5–29 | | 153–163 spm | | | 278–308 ms | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Red | | | <5 | | <153 spm | | | >308 ms | | | | | | | | | | |

| Color Zone | | | | | | Red | Orange | | | | Green | | | Orange | Red | | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Symmetry | | | | | | Poor | Fair | | | Good | | | | Fair | Poor | | | | |
| Percent of Other Runners | | | | | | 5% | 25% | | | 40% | | | | 25% | 5% | | | | |

10 Heart Rate Features

While developing and testing running dynamics, the Garmin team found correlations between injuries and greater imbalances with
certain runners. For many runners, ground contact time balance tends to deviate further from 50–50 when running up or down hills.
Most running coaches agree that a symmetrical running form is good. Elite runners tend to have quick and balanced strides.
You can watch the color gauge or data field during your run or view the summary on your Garmin Connect account after your run.
As with the other running dynamics data, ground contact time balance is a quantitative measurement to help you learn about your
running form.
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio Data
The data ranges for vertical oscillation and vertical ratio are slightly different depending on the sensor and whether it is positioned at
the chest (HRM-Tri or HRM-Run ™ accessories) or at the waist (Running Dynamics Pod accessory).
Color Zone Percentile in Zone Vertical Oscillation Range at
Chest

Vertical Oscillation Range at Waist

Vertical Ratio at Chest Vertical Ratio at Waist Purple >95 <6.4 cm <6.8 cm <6.1% <6.5% Blue 70–95 6.4–8.1 cm 6.8–8.9 cm 6.1–7.4% 6.5–8.3% Green 30–69 8.2–9.7 cm 9.0–10.9 cm 7.5–8.6% 8.4–10.0% Orange 5–29 9.8–11.5 cm 11.0–13.0 cm 8.7–10.1% 10.1–11.9% Red <5 >11.5 cm >13.0 cm >10.1% >11.9%

Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data If running dynamics data does not appear, you can try these tips.

• Make sure you have a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Tri accessory. Accessories with running dynamics have on the front of the module.
• Pair the running dynamics accessory with your fēnix device again, according to the instructions.
• If the running dynamics data display shows only zeros, make sure the accessory is worn right-side up. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance appears only while running. It is not calculated while walking.

Performance Measurements These performance measurements are estimates that can help you track and understand your training activities and race performances. The measurements require a few activities using wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. Cycling performance measurements require a heart rate monitor and a power meter. These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/physio.

NOTE: The estimates may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires you to complete a few activities to learn about your performance. Training status: Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. VO2 max.: VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. Recovery time: The recovery time displays how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next hard workout. Training load: Training load is the sum of your excess post exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) over the last 7 days.

EPOC is an estimate of how much energy it takes for your body to recover after exercise. Predicted race times: Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate and published data sources to provide a target race time based on your current state of fitness. This projection also presumes you have completed the proper training for the race. HRV stress test: The HRV (heart rate variability) stress test requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. The device records your heart rate variability while standing still for 3 minutes. It provides your overall stress level. The scale is 1 to 100, and a lower score indicates a lower stress level. Performance condition: Your performance condition is a real time assessment after 6 to 20 minutes of activity. It can be added as a data field so you can view your performance condition during the rest of your activity. It compares your real-time condition to your average fitness level. Functional threshold power (FTP): The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup to estimate your FTP. For a more accurate rating, you can conduct a guided test. Lactate threshold: Lactate threshold requires a chest heart rate monitor. Lactate threshold is the point where your muscles start to rapidly fatigue. Your device measures your lactate threshold level using heart rate data and pace.

Turning Off Performance Notifications
Performance notifications are turned on by default. Some
performance notifications are alerts that appear upon completion
of your activity. Some performance notifications appear during
an activity or when you achieve a new performance
measurement, such as a new VO2 max. estimate.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Performance
Notifications.
3 Select an option.
Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically
The Auto Detection feature is turned on by default. The device
can automatically detect your maximum heart rate, and lactate
threshold during an activity. When paired with a compatible
power meter, the device can automatically detect your functional
threshold power (FTP) during an activity.
NOTE: The device detects a maximum heart rate only when
your heart rate is higher than the value set in your user profile.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Auto Detection.
3 Select an option.

Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements
You can sync activities and performance measurements from
other Garmin devices to your fēnix 5/5S device using your
Garmin Connect account. This allows your device to more
accurately reflect your training status and fitness. For example,
you can record a ride with an Edge device, and view your
activity details and overall training load on your fēnix 5/5S
device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > TrueUp.
When you sync your device with your smartphone, recent
activities and performance measurements from your other
Garmin devices appear on your fēnix 5/5S device.

Training Status Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness level and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. You can use your training status to help plan future training and continue improving your fitness level. Peaking: Peaking means that you are in ideal race condition. Your recently reduced training load is allowing your body to recover and fully compensate for earlier training. You should plan ahead, since this peak state can only be maintained for a short time. Productive: Your current training load is moving your fitness level and performance in the right direction. You should plan recovery periods into your training to maintain your fitness level. Maintaining: Your current training load is enough to maintain your fitness level. To see improvement, try adding more variety to your workouts or increasing your training volume. Recovery: Your lighter training load is allowing your body to recover, which is essential during extended periods of hard training. You can return to a higher training load when you feel ready. Unproductive: Your training load is at a good level, but your fitness is decreasing. Your body may be struggling to recover, so you should pay attention to your overall health including stress, nutrition, and rest. Detraining: Detraining occurs when you are training much less than usual for a week or more, and it is affecting your fitness level. You can try increasing your training load to see improvement. Overreaching: Your training load is very high and counterproductive. Your body needs a rest. You should give yourself time to recover by adding lighter training to your schedule. No Status: The device needs one or two weeks of training history, including activities with VO2 max. results from running or cycling, to determine your training status. Tips for Getting Your Training Status The training status feature depends on updated assessments of your fitness level, including at least two VO2 max. measurements per week. Your VO2 max. estimate is updated after outdoor runs or rides during which your heart rate reached at least 70% of your maximum heart rate for several minutes. The trail run and indoor run activities do not generate a VO2 max. estimate in order to preserve the accuracy of your fitness level trend. To get the most out of the training status feature, you can try these tips.

• At least two times per week, run or ride outdoors with a power meter, and reach a heart rate higher than 70% of your maximum heart rate for at least 10 minutes. After using the device for one week, your training status should be available.
• Record all of your fitness activities on this device, or enable the Physio TrueUp ™ feature, allowing your device to learn about your performance (Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements, page 12).

About VO2 Max. Estimates VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. In simple terms, VO2 max. is an indication of athletic performance and should increase as your level of fitness improves. The fēnix 5/5S device requires wrist based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display your VO2 max. estimate. The device has separate VO2 max. estimates for running and cycling. You must run either outside with GPS or ride with a compatible power meter at a moderate level of intensity for several minutes to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate. On the device, your VO2 max. estimate appears as a number, description, and position on the color gauge. On your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about your VO2 max. estimate, including your fitness age. Your fitness age gives you an idea of how your fitness compares with a person of the same gender and different age. As you exercise, your fitness age can decrease over time.

Purple Superior Blue Excellent Green Good Orange Fair Red Poor VO2 max. data is provided by FirstBeat. VO2 max. analysis is provided with permission from The Cooper Institute

®

. For more information, see the appendix (VO2 Max. Standard Ratings, page 35), and go to www.CooperInstitute.org. Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. If you are using a chest heart rate monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27). If your fēnix 5/5S device was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already paired. For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 15), and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 15). The estimate may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires a few runs to learn about your running performance. 1 Run for at least 10 minutes outdoors. 2 After your run, select Save. 3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget. 4 Select to scroll through the performance measurements. Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling This feature requires a power meter and wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. The power meter must be paired with your fēnix 5/5S device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27). If you are using a chest heart rate monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your device. If your fēnix 5/5S device was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already paired. 12 Heart Rate Features

For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 15) and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 15). The estimate may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires a few rides to learn about your cycling performance. 1 Ride at a steady, high intensity for at least 20 minutes. 2 After your ride, select Save. 3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget. 4 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.

Recovery Time
You can use your Garmin device with wrist-based heart rate or a
compatible chest heart rate monitor to display how much time
remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next
hard workout.
NOTE: The recovery time recommendation uses your VO2 max.
estimate and may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires
you to complete a few activities to learn about your
performance.
The recovery time appears immediately following an activity.
The time counts down until it is optimal for you to attempt
another hard workout.
Viewing Your Recovery Time
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 15), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 15).
1 Go for a run.
2 After your run, select Save.
The recovery time appears. The maximum time is 4 days.
NOTE: From the watch face, you can select UP or DOWN to
view the performance widget, and select to scroll through
the performance measurements to view your recovery time.

Recovery Heart Rate If you are training with wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor, you can check your recovery heart rate value after each activity. Recovery heart rate is the difference between your exercising heart rate and your heart rate two minutes after the exercise has stopped. For example, after a typical training run, you stop the timer. Your heart rate is 140 bpm. After two minutes of no activity or cool down, your heart rate is 90 bpm. Your recovery heart rate is 50 bpm (140 minus 90). Some studies have linked recovery heart rate to cardiac health. Higher numbers generally indicate healthier hearts. TIP: For best results, you should stop moving for two minutes while the device calculates your recovery heart rate value. You can save or discard the activity after this value appears.

Training Load Training load is a measurement of your training volume over the last seven days. It is the sum of your excess post-exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) measurements for the last seven days. The gauge indicates whether your current load is low, high, or within the optimal range to maintain or improve your fitness level. The optimal range is determined based on your individual fitness level and training history. The range adjusts as your training time and intensity increase or decrease.

Viewing Your Predicted Race Times For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 15), and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 15). Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 12) and published data sources to provide a target race time based on your current state of fitness. This projection also presumes you have completed the proper training for the race.

NOTE: The projections may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires a few runs to learn about your running performance. 1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget. 2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements. Your projected race times appear for 5K, 10K, half marathon, and marathon distances.

About Training Effect Training Effect measures the impact of an activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. Training Effect accumulates during the activity. As the activity progresses, the Training Effect value increases, telling you how the activity has improved your fitness. Training Effect is determined by your user profile information, heart rate, duration, and intensity of your activity. Aerobic Training Effect uses your heart rate to measure how the accumulated intensity of an exercise affects your aerobic fitness and indicates if the workout had a maintaining or improving effect on your fitness level. Your EPOC accumulated during exercise is mapped to a range of values that account for your fitness level and training habits. Steady workouts at moderate effort or workouts involving longer intervals (>180 sec) have a positive impact on your aerobic metabolism and result in an improved aerobic Training Effect. Anaerobic Training Effect uses heart rate and speed (or power) to determine how a workout affects your ability to perform at very high intensity. You receive a value based on the anaerobic contribution to EPOC and the type of activity. Repeated high intensity intervals of 10 to 120 seconds have a highly beneficial impact on your anaerobic capability and result in an improved anaerobic Training Effect. It is important to know that your Training Effect numbers (from 0.0 to 5.0) may seem abnormally high during your first few activities. It takes several activities for the device to learn your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. You can add Training Effect as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your numbers throughout the activity. Color Zone Training Effect Aerobic Benefit Anaerobic Benefit From 0.0 to 0.9 No benefit. No benefit. From 1.0 to 1.9 Minor benefit. Minor benefit. From 2.0 to 2.9 Maintains your aerobic fitness.

Maintains your anaerobic fitness.

From 3.0 to 3.9 Improves your aerobic fitness.

Improves your anaerobic fitness.

From 4.0 to 4.9 Highly improves your aerobic fitness.

Highly improves your anaerobic fitness.

5.0 Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time.

Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time. Training effect technology is provided and supported by Firstbeat Technologies Ltd. For more information, go to www.firstbeattechnologies.com.

Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level Stress level is the result of a three-minute test performed while standing still, where the fēnix device analyzes heart rate variability to determine your overall stress. Training, sleep, nutrition, and general life stress all impact how a runner performs. The stress level range is from 1 to 100, where 1 is a very low stress state and 100 is a very high stress state. Knowing your stress level can help you decide if your body is ready for a tough training run or yoga.

Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before
you can view your heart rate variability (HRV) stress level, you
must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device
(Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27). If your fēnix 5/5S
device was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are
already paired.
TIP: Garmin recommends that you measure your stress level at
approximately the same time and under the same conditions
every day.
1 If necessary, select > Add > HRV Stress to add the stress
app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > HRV Stress > .
4 Stand still, and rest for 3 minutes.

Performance Condition As you complete your activity, such as running or cycling, the performance condition feature analyzes your pace, heart rate, and heart rate variability to make a real-time assessment of your ability to perform compared to your average fitness level. It is approximately your real-time percentage deviation from your baseline VO2 max. estimate. Performance condition values range from -20 to +20. After the first 6 to 20 minutes of your activity, the device displays your performance condition score. For example, a score of +5 means that you are rested, fresh, and capable of a good run or ride. You can add performance condition as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your ability throughout the activity. Performance condition can also be an indicator of fatigue level, especially at the end of a long training run or ride. NOTE: The device requires a few runs or rides with a heart rate monitor to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate and learn about your running or riding ability (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 12). Viewing Your Performance Condition This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. 1 Add Perform. Cond. to a data screen (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22). 2 Go for a run or ride. After 6 to 20 minutes, your performance condition appears. 3 Scroll to the data screen to view your performance condition throughout the run or ride.

Lactate Threshold Lactate threshold is the exercise intensity at which lactate (lactic acid) starts to accumulate in the bloodstream. In running, it is the estimated level of effort or pace. When a runner exceeds the threshold, fatigue starts to increase at an accelerating rate. For experienced runners, the threshold occurs at approximately 90% of their maximum heart rate and between 10k and half-marathon race pace. For average runners, the lactate threshold often occurs well below 90% of maximum heart rate. Knowing your lactate threshold can help you determine how hard to train or when to push yourself during a race. If you already know your lactate threshold heart rate value, you can enter it in your user profile settings (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 15). Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate Threshold This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before you can perform the guided test, you must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27). The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your lactate

threshold. The device will automatically detect your lactate
threshold during runs at a steady, high intensity with heart rate.
TIP: The device requires a few runs with a chest heart rate
monitor to get an accurate maximum heart rate value and VO2
max. estimate. If you are having trouble getting a lactate
threshold estimate, try manually lowering your maximum heart
rate value.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an outdoor running activity.
GPS is required to complete the test.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Lactate Threshold Guided Test.
5 Start the timer, and follow the on-screen instructions.
After you begin your run, the device displays each step
duration, the target, and current heart rate data. A message
appears when the test is complete.
6 After you complete the guided test, stop the timer and save
the activity.
If this is your first lactate threshold estimate, the device
prompts you to update your heart rate zones based on your
lactate threshold heart rate. For each additional lactate
threshold estimate, the device prompts you to accept or
decline the estimate.

Getting Your FTP Estimate Before you can get your functional threshold power (FTP) estimate, you must pair a chest heart rate monitor and power meter with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate (Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 12). The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your FTP. The device will automatically detect your FTP during rides at a steady, high intensity with heart rate and power. 1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget. 2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements. Your FTP estimate appears as a value measured in watts per kilogram, your power output in watts, and a position on the color gauge. Purple Superior Blue Excellent Green Good Orange Fair Red Untrained For more information, see the appendix (FTP Ratings, page 35). NOTE: When a performance notification alerts you to a new FTP, you can select Accept to save the new FTP, or Decline to keep your current FTP (Turning Off Performance Notifications, page 11). Conducting an FTP Test Before you can conduct a test to determine your functional threshold power (FTP), you must pair a chest heart rate monitor and a power meter with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate (Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 12). NOTE: The FTP test is a challenging workout that takes about 30 minutes to complete. Choose a practical and mostly flat route that allows you to ride at a steadily increasing effort, similar to a time trial. 1 From the watch face, select . 2 Select a cycling activity. 3 Hold MENU. 14 Heart Rate Features

4 Select Training > FTP Guided Test.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you begin your ride, the device displays each step
duration, the target, and current power data. A message
appears when the test is complete.
6 After you complete the guided test, complete the cool down,
stop the timer, and save the activity.
Your FTP appears as a value measured in watts per
kilogram, your power output in watts, and a position on the
color gauge.
7 Select an option:
• Select Accept to save the new FTP.
• Select Decline to keep your current FTP.

Training Setting Up Your User Profile You can update your gender, birth year, height, weight, heart rate zone, and power zone settings. The device uses this information to calculate accurate training data. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > User Profile. 3 Select an option.

Fitness Goals Knowing your heart rate zones can help you measure and improve your fitness by understanding and applying these principles.

• Your heart rate is a good measure of exercise intensity.
• Training in certain heart rate zones can help you improve cardiovascular capacity and strength.

If you know your maximum heart rate, you can use the table (Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 15) to determine the best heart rate zone for your fitness objectives. If you do not know your maximum heart rate, use one of the calculators available on the Internet. Some gyms and health centers can provide a test that measures maximum heart rate. The default maximum heart rate is 220 minus your age.

About Heart Rate Zones
Many athletes use heart rate zones to measure and increase
their cardiovascular strength and improve their level of fitness. A
heart rate zone is a set range of heartbeats per minute. The five
commonly accepted heart rate zones are numbered from 1 to 5
according to increasing intensity. Generally, heart rate zones are
calculated based on percentages of your maximum heart rate.
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones
The device uses your user profile information from the initial
setup to determine your default heart rate zones. You can set
separate heart rate zones for sport profiles, such as running,
cycling, and swimming. For the most accurate calorie data
during your activity, set your maximum heart rate. You can also
set each heart rate zone and enter your resting heart rate
manually. You can manually adjust your zones on the device or
using your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Heart Rate.
3 Select Max. HR, and enter your maximum heart rate.
You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically
record your maximum heart rate during an activity (Detecting
Performance Measurements Automatically, page 11).
4 Select LTHR > Enter Manually, and enter your lactate
threshold heart rate.

You can perform a guided test to estimate your lactate threshold (Lactate Threshold, page 14). You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically record your lactate threshold during an activity (Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically, page 11). 5 Select Resting HR, and enter your resting heart rate. You can use the average resting heart rate measured by your device, or you can set a custom resting heart rate. 6 Select Zones > Based On. 7 Select an option:

• Select BPM to view and edit the zones in beats per minute.
• Select %Max. HR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Select %HRR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate).
• Select %LTHR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your lactate threshold heart rate. 8 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 9 Select Add Sport Heart Rate, and select a sport profile to add separate heart rate zones (optional). 10Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add sport heart rate zones (optional). Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones The default settings allow the device to detect your maximum heart rate and set your heart rate zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Verify that your user profile settings are accurate (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 15).
• Run often with the wrist or chest heart rate monitor.
• Try a few heart rate training plans, available from your Garmin Connect account.
• View your heart rate trends and time in zones using your Garmin Connect account. Heart Rate Zone Calculations Zone % of Maximum Heart Rate

Perceived Exertion Benefits

1 50–60% Relaxed, easy pace, rhythmic breathing

Beginning-level aerobic training, reduces stress

2 60–70% Comfortable pace, slightly deeper breathing, conversation possible

Basic cardiovascular training, good recovery pace

3 70–80% Moderate pace, more difficult to hold conversation

Improved aerobic capacity, optimal cardiovascular training

4 80–90% Fast pace and a bit uncomfortable, breathing forceful

Improved anaerobic capacity and threshold, improved speed

5 90–100% Sprinting pace, unsustainable for long period of time, labored breathing

Anaerobic and muscular endurance, increased power

Setting Your Power Zones The values for the zones are default values based on gender, weight, and average ability, and may not match your personal abilities. If you know your functional threshold power (FTP) value, you can enter it and allow the software to calculate your power zones automatically. You can manually adjust your zones on the device or using your Garmin Connect account.

Training 15

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Power Zones > Based On.
3 Select an option:

• Select Watts to view and edit the zones in watts.
• Select % FTP to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your functional threshold power. 4 Select FTP, and enter your FTP value. 5 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 6 If necessary, select Minimum, and enter a minimum power value.

Activity Tracking The activity tracking feature records your daily step count, distance traveled, intensity minutes, floors climbed, calories burned, and sleep statistics for each recorded day. Your calories burned includes your base metabolism plus activity calories. The number of steps taken during the day appears on the steps widget. The step count is updated periodically. For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.

Auto Goal Your device creates a daily step goal automatically, based on your previous activity levels. As you move during the day, the device shows your progress toward your daily goal .

If you choose not to use the auto goal feature, you can set a personalized step goal on your Garmin Connect account.

Using the Move Alert Sitting for prolonged periods of time can trigger undesirable metabolic state changes. The move alert reminds you to keep moving. After one hour of inactivity, Move! and the red bar appear. Additional segments appear after every 15 minutes of inactivity. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 27). Go for a short walk (at least a couple of minutes) to reset the move alert.

Sleep Tracking While you are sleeping, the device automatically detects your sleep and monitors your movement during your normal sleep hours. You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings on your Garmin Connect account. Sleep statistics include total hours of sleep, sleep levels, and sleep movement. You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account. NOTE: Naps are not added to your sleep statistics. You can use do not disturb mode to turn off notifications and alerts, with the exception of alarms (Using Do Not Disturb Mode, page 16). Using Automated Sleep Tracking 1 Wear your device while sleeping. 2 Upload your sleep tracking data to the Garmin Connect site (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 7). You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account.

Using Do Not Disturb Mode
You can use do not disturb mode to turn off the backlight, tone
alerts, and vibration alerts. For example, you can use this mode
while sleeping or watching a movie.
NOTE: You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings
on your Garmin Connect account. You can enable the Sleep
Time option in the system settings to automatically enter do not
disturb mode during your normal sleep hours (System Settings,
page 27).
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
Intensity Minutes
To improve your health, organizations such as the U.S. Centers
for Disease Control and Prevention, the American Heart
Association

®

, and the World Health Organization, recommend at least 150 minutes per week of moderate intensity activity, such as brisk walking, or 75 minutes per week of vigorous intensity activity, such as running. The device monitors your activity intensity and tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous intensity activities (heart rate data is required to quantify vigorous intensity). You can work toward achieving your weekly intensity minutes goal by participating in at least 10 consecutive minutes of moderate to vigorous intensity activities. The device adds the amount of moderate activity minutes with the amount of vigorous activity minutes. Your total vigorous intensity minutes are doubled when added. Earning Intensity Minutes Your fēnix 5/5S device calculates intensity minutes by comparing your heart rate data to your average resting heart rate. If heart rate is turned off, the device calculates moderate intensity minutes by analyzing your steps per minute.

• Start a timed activity for the most accurate calculation of intensity minutes.
• Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or vigorous intensity level.
• Wear your device all day and night for the most accurate resting heart rate.

Garmin Move IQ ™

When your movements match familiar exercise patterns, the Move IQ feature automatically detects the event and displays it in your timeline. The Move IQ events show activity type and duration, but they do not appear in your activities list or newsfeed. The Move IQ feature can automatically start a timed activity for walking and running using time thresholds you set in the Garmin Connect Mobile app. These activities are added to your activities list.

Activity Tracking Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > Activity Tracking. Status: Turns off the activity tracking features. Move Alert: Displays a message and the move bar on the digital watch face and steps screen. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 27). Goal Alerts: Allows you to turn on and off goal alerts, or turn them off only during activities. Goal alerts appear for your daily steps goal, daily floors climbed goal, and weekly intensity minutes goal. Move IQ: Allows you to turn on and off Move IQ events. Turning Off Activity Tracking When you turn off activity tracking, your steps, floors climbed, intensity minutes, sleep tracking, and Move IQ events are not recorded.

16 Training

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activity Tracking > Status > Off.

Workouts You can create custom workouts that include goals for each workout step and for varied distances, times, and calories. You can create workouts using Garmin Connect or select a training plan that has built-in workouts from Garmin Connect, and transfer them to your device. You can schedule workouts using Garmin Connect. You can plan workouts in advance and store them on your device.

Following a Workout From the Web
Before you can download a workout from Garmin Connect, you
must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin Connect,
page 6).
1 Connect the device to your computer.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com.
3 Create and save a new workout.
4 Select Send to Device, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
5 Disconnect the device.
Starting a Workout
Before you can start a workout, you must download a workout
from your Garmin Connect account.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > My Workouts.
5 Select a workout.
NOTE: Only workouts that are compatible with the selected
activity appear in the list.
6 Select Do Workout.
7 Select to start the timer.
After you begin a workout, the device displays each step of the
workout, step notes (optional), the target (optional), and the
current workout data.
About the Training Calendar
The training calendar on your device is an extension of the
training calendar or schedule you set up in Garmin Connect.
After you have added a few workouts to the Garmin Connect
calendar, you can send them to your device. All scheduled
workouts sent to the device appear in the training calendar list
by date. When you select a day in the training calendar, you can
view or do the workout. The scheduled workout stays on your
device whether you complete it or skip it. When you send
scheduled workouts from Garmin Connect, they overwrite the
existing training calendar.
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans
Before you can download and use a training plan from Garmin
Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin
Connect, page 6), and you must pair the fēnix device with a
compatible smartphone.
1 From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Training >
Training Plans > Find a Plan.
2 Select and schedule a training plan.
3 Select , and follow the on-screen instructions.
4 Review the training plan in your calendar.
Adaptive Training Plans
Your Garmin Connect account has an adaptive training plan and
Garmin coach to fit your training goals. For example, you can
answer a few questions and find a plan to help you complete a 5

km race. The plan adjusts to your current level of fitness, coaching and schedule preferences, and race date. When you start a plan, the Garmin Coach widget is added to the widget loop on your fēnix device.

Interval Workouts You can create interval workouts based on distance or time. The device saves your custom interval workout until you create another interval workout. You can use open intervals for track workouts and when you are running a known distance.

Creating an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Edit > Interval > Type.
5 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
TIP: You can create an open-ended interval by selecting the
Open option.
6 Select Duration, enter a distance or time interval value for
the workout, and select .
7 Select BACK.
8 Select Rest > Type.
9 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
10If necessary, enter a distance or time value for the rest
interval, and select .
11Select BACK.
12Select one or more options:
• To set the number of repetitions, select Repeat.
• To add an open-ended warm up to your workout, select Warm Up > On.
• To add an open-ended cool down to your workout, select Cool Down > On.
Starting an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Do Workout.
5 Select to start the timer.
6 When your interval workout has a warm up, select LAP to
begin the first interval.
7 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you complete all of the intervals, a message appears.

Stopping an Interval Workout

• At any time, select LAP to stop the current interval or rest period and transition to the next interval or rest period.
• After all intervals and rest periods are complete, select LAP to end the interval workout and transition to a timer that can be used for cool down.
• At any time, select to stop the timer. You can resume the timer or end the interval workout.
Segments
You can send running or cycling segments from your Garmin
Connect account to your device. After a segment is saved to
your device, you can race a segment, trying to match or exceed
your personal record or other participants who have raced the
segment.
NOTE: When you download a course from your Garmin
Connect account, you can download all of the available
segments in the course.

Training 17

Strava ™ Segments You can download Strava segments to your fēnix 5/5S device. Follow Strava segments to compare your performance with your past rides, friends, and pros who have ridden the same segment. To sign up for a Strava membership, go to the segments widget in your Garmin Connect account. For more information, go to www.strava.com. The information in this manual applies to both Garmin Connect segments and Strava segments.

Viewing Segment Details
1 Select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Segments.
5 Select a segment.
6 Select an option:

• Select Race Time to view the time and average speed or pace for the segment leader.
• Select Map to view the segment on the map.
• Select Elevation Plot to view an elevation plot of the segment.
Racing a Segment
Segments are virtual race courses. You can race a segment,
and compare your performance to past activities, others'
performance, connections in your Garmin Connect account, or
other members of the running or cycling communities. You can
upload your activity data to your Garmin Connect account to
view your segment position.
NOTE: If your Garmin Connect account and Strava account are
linked, your activity is automatically sent to your Strava account
so you can review the segment position.
1 Select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Go for a run or ride.
When you approach a segment, a message appears, and
you can race the segment.
4 Start racing the segment.
A message appears when the segment is complete.

##### Using Virtual Partner ®

Your Virtual Partner is a training tool designed to help you meet
your goals. You can set a pace for the Virtual Partner and race
against it.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Virtual Partner.
6 Enter a pace or speed value.
7 Start your activity (Starting an Activity, page 2).
8 Select UP or DOWN to scroll to the Virtual Partner screen
and see who is leading.

Setting a Training Target The training target feature works with the Virtual Partner feature so you can train toward a set distance, distance and time, distance and pace, or distance and speed goal. During your training activity, the device gives you real-time feedback about how close you are to achieving your training target.

1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Set a Target.
5 Select an option:

• Select Distance Only to select a preset distance or enter a custom distance.
• Select Distance and Time to select a distance and time target.
• Select Distance and Pace or Distance and Speed to select a distance and pace or speed target.

The training target screen appears and displays your estimated finish time. The estimated finish time is based on your current performance and the time remaining. 6 Select to start the timer.

Cancelling a Training Target 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Cancel Target > Yes.

Racing a Previous Activity
You can race a previously recorded or downloaded activity. This
feature works with the Virtual Partner feature so you can see
how far ahead or behind you are during the activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Race an Activity.
5 Select an option:
• Select From History to select a previously recorded activity from your device.
• Select Downloaded to select an activity you downloaded from your Garmin Connect account. 6 Select the activity.

The Virtual Partner screen appears indicating your estimated finish time. 7 Select to start the timer. 8 After you complete your activity, select > Save.

Personal Records When you complete an activity, the device displays any new personal records you achieved during that activity. Personal records include your fastest time over several typical race distances and longest run or ride. NOTE: For cycling, personal records also include most ascent and best power (power meter required).

Viewing Your Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record.
5 Select View Record.

Restoring a Personal Record You can set each personal record back to the one previously recorded. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select History > Records. 3 Select a sport. 4 Select a record to restore. 18 Training

##### 5 Select Previous > Yes. NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.

Clearing a Personal Record
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to delete.
5 Select Clear Record > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing All Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select Clear All Records > Yes.
The records are deleted for that sport only.

#### Clock

Setting an Alarm
You can set up to ten separate alarms. You can set each alarm
to sound once or to repeat regularly.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock > Add Alarm.
3 Select Time, and enter the alarm time.
4 Select Repeat, and select when the alarm should repeat
(optional).
5 Select Sounds, and select a type of notification (optional).
6 Select Backlight > On to turn on the backlight with the alarm.
7 Select Label, and select a description for the alarm
(optional).

Deleting an Alarm
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock.
3 Select an alarm.
4 Select Delete.

Starting the Countdown Timer
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Timer.
3 Enter the time.
4 If necessary, select Restart > On to automatically restart the
timer after it expires.
5 If necessary, select Sounds, and select a type of notification.
6 Select Start Timer.

Using the Stopwatch
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Stopwatch.
3 Select to start the timer.
4 Select LAP to restart the lap timer .

The total stopwatch time continues running. 5 Select to stop both timers. 6 Select an option.

Adding Alternate Time Zones
You can display the current time of day in additional time zones
on the Alt. Time Zones widget. You can add up to four alternate
time zones.
NOTE: You may need to add the Alt. Time Zones widget to the
widget loop.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alt. Time Zones > Add Zone.
3 Select a time zone.
4 If necessary, select Yes to rename the zone.

Setting Clock Alerts 1 From the watch face, hold MENU. 2 Select Clock > Alerts. 3 Select an option:

• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunset occurs, select Til Sunset > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise occurs, select Til Sunrise > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound every hour, select Hourly > On.
Syncing the Time with GPS
Each time you turn on the device and acquire satellites, the
device automatically detects your time zones and the current
time of day. You can also manually sync the time with GPS
when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving
time.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Sync With GPS.
3 Wait while the device locates satellites (Acquiring Satellite
Signals, page 31).

Navigation Saving Your Location You can save your current location to navigate back to it later. 1 Hold LIGHT. 2 Select . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Editing Your Saved Locations You can delete a saved location or edit its name, elevation, and position information. 1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Saved Locations. 2 Select a saved location. 3 Select an option to edit the location. Clock 19

Projecting a Waypoint
You can create a new location by projecting the distance and
bearing from your current location to a new location.
1 If necessary, select > Add > Project Wpt. to add the
project waypoint app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > Project Wpt..
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the heading.
5 Select .
6 Select DOWN to select a unit of measure.
7 Select UP to enter the distance.
8 Select to save.
The projected waypoint is saved with a default name.
Navigating to a Destination
You can use your device to navigate to a destination or follow a
course.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate.
2 Select a category.
3 Respond to the on-screen prompts to choose a destination.
4 Select Go To.
Navigation information appears.
5 Select to begin navigation.
Creating and Following a Course on Your
Device
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Courses >
Create New.
2 Enter a name for the course, and select .
3 Select Add Location.
4 Select an option.
5 If necessary, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6 Select Done > Do Course.
Navigation information appears.
7 Select to begin navigation.
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man
Overboard Location
You can save a man overboard (MOB) location, and
automatically start navigation back to it.
TIP: You can customize the hold function of the keys to access
the MOB function (Customizing the Hot Keys, page 27).
From the watch face, select > Navigate > Last MOB.
Navigation information appears.
Navigating with Sight 'N Go
You can point the device at an object in the distance, such as a
water tower, lock in the direction, and then navigate to the
object.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Sight 'N Go.
2 Point the top of the watch at an object, and select .
Navigation information appears.
3 Select to begin navigation.

Navigating to Your Starting Point During an Activity You can navigate back to the starting point of your current activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled. This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.

1 During an activity, select > Back to Start.
2 Select an option:

• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select TracBack.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity in a straight line, select Straight Line.

Your current location , the track to follow , and your destination appear on the map.

Navigating to the Starting Point of Your Last
Saved Activity
You can navigate back to the starting point of your last saved
activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled. This
feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
1 Select > Navigate > Back to Start > Straight Line.
A line appears on the map from your current location to the
starting point of the last saved activity.
NOTE: You can start the timer to prevent the device from
timing out to watch mode.
2 Select DOWN to view the compass (optional).
The arrow points toward your starting point.

Stopping Navigation 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Stop Navigation.

Map represents your location on the map. Location names and symbols appear on the map. When you are navigating to a destination, your route is marked with a line on the map.

• Map navigation (Panning and Zooming the Map, page 20)
• Map settings (Map Settings, page 26)

Panning and Zooming the Map
1 While navigating, select UP or DOWN to view the map.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select Pan/Zoom.
4 Select an option:

• To toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming, select .
• To pan or zoom the map, select UP and DOWN.
• To quit, select BACK.

Compass The device has a 3-axis compass with automatic calibration. The compass features and appearance change depending on your activity, whether GPS is enabled, and whether you are navigating to a destination. You can change the compass settings manually (Compass Settings, page 25). To open the compass settings quickly, you can select from the compass widget.

20 Navigation

Altimeter and Barometer The device contains an internal altimeter and barometer. The device collects elevation and pressure data continuously, even in low-power mode. The altimeter displays your approximate elevation based on pressure changes. The barometer displays environmental pressure data based on the fixed elevation where the altimeter was most recently calibrated (Altimeter Settings, page 26). To open the altimeter or barometer settings quickly, select from the altimeter or barometer widgets.

History History includes time, distance, calories, average pace or speed, lap data, and optional sensor information. NOTE: When the device memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten.

Using History
History contains previous activities you have saved on your
device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select an option:
• To view additional information about the activity, select Details.
• To select a lap and view additional information about each lap, select Laps.
• To select an interval and view additional information about each interval, select Intervals.
• To select an exercise set and view additional information about each set, select Sets.
• To view the activity on a map, select Map.
• To view the impact of the activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness, select Training Effect (About Training Effect, page 13).
• To view your time in each heart rate zone, select Time in Zone (Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone, page 21).
• To view an elevation plot of the activity, select Elevation Plot.
• To delete the selected activity, select Delete.

Multisport History Your device stores the overall multisport summary of the activity, including overall distance, time, calories, and optional accessory data. Your device also separates the activity data for each sport segment and transition so you can compare similar training activities and track how quickly you move through the transitions. Transition history includes distance, time, average speed, and calories.

Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone
Before you can view heart rate zone data, you must complete an
activity with heart rate and save the activity.
Viewing your time in each heart rate zone can help you adjust
your training intensity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Time in Zone.
Viewing Data Totals
You can view the accumulated distance and time data saved to
your device.

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals.
3 If necessary, select an activity.
4 Select an option to view weekly or monthly totals.

Using the Odometer
The odometer automatically records the total distance traveled,
elevation gained, and time in activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals > Odometer.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view odometer totals.

Deleting History 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select History > Options. 3 Select an option:

• Select Delete All Activities to delete all activities from the history.
• Select Reset Totals to reset all distance and time totals. NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities. 4 Confirm your selection.

Customizing Your Device Activities and App Settings These settings allow you to customize each preloaded activity app based on your needs. For example, you can customize data pages and enable alerts and training features. Not all settings are available for all activity types. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an activity, and select the activity settings. 3D Distance: Calculates your distance traveled using your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. 3D Speed: Calculates your speed using your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground (3D Speed and Distance, page 23). Accent Color: Sets the accent color of each activity to help identify which activity is active. Alerts: Sets the training or navigation alerts for the activity. Auto Climb: Enables the device to detect elevation changes automatically using the built-in altimeter. Auto Lap: Sets the options for the Auto Lap

®

feature (Auto Lap,

page 22). Auto Pause: Sets the device to stop recording data when you stop moving or when you drop below a specified speed (Enabling Auto Pause

®
, page 23).
Auto Run: Enables the device to detect ski runs automatically
using the built-in accelerometer.
Auto Scroll: Enables you to move through all of the activity data
screens automatically while the timer is running (Using Auto
Scroll, page 23).
Auto Set: Enables the device to start and stop exercise sets
automatically during a strength training activity.
Background Color: Sets the background color of each activity
to black or white.
Countdown Start: Enables a countdown timer for pool
swimming intervals.
Data Screens: Enables you to customize data screens and add
new data screens for the activity (Customizing the Data
Screens, page 22).

History 21

GPS: Sets the mode for the GPS antenna. Using the GPS +
GLONASS option provides increased performance in
challenging environments and faster position acquisition.
Using the GPS + GLONASS option can reduce battery life
more than using the GPS option only. Using the UltraTrac
option records track points and sensor data less frequently
(UltraTrac, page 23).
Lap Key: Enables you to record a lap or a rest during the
activity.
Lock Keys: Locks the keys during multisport activities to
prevent accidental key presses.
Metronome: Plays tones at a steady rhythm to help you
improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or
more consistent cadence (Using the Metronome, page 3).
Pool Size: Sets the pool length for pool swimming.
Power Save Timeout: Sets the power-save timeout options for
the activity (Power Save Timeout Settings, page 23).
Rename: Sets the activity name.
Repeat: Enables the Repeat option for multisport activities. For
example, you can use this option for activities that include
multiple transitions, such as a swimrun.
Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset the activity settings.
Scoring: Enables or disables scorekeeping automatically when
you start a round of golf. The Always Ask option prompts you
when you begin a round.
Segment Alerts: Enables prompts that alert you to approaching
segments.
Stat Tracking: Enables statistics tracking while playing golf.
Stroke Detect.: Enables stroke detection for pool swimming.
Transitions: Enables transitions for multisport activities.
Customizing the Data Screens
You can show, hide, and change the layout and content of data
screens for each activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens.
6 Select a data screen to customize.
7 Select an option:
• Select Layout to adjust the number of data fields on the data screen.
• Select a field to change the data that appears in the field.
• Select Reorder to change the location of the data screen in the loop.
• Select Remove to remove the data screen from the loop. 8 If necessary, select Add New to add a data screen to the loop.

You can add a custom data screen, or select one of the predefined data screens.

Adding a Map to an Activity
You can add the map to the data screens loop for an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Map.

Alerts You can set alerts for each activity, which can help you to train toward specific goals, to increase your awareness of your

environment, and to navigate to your destination. Some alerts are available only for specific activities. There are three types of alerts: event alerts, range alerts, and recurring alerts. Event alert: An event alert notifies you once. The event is a specific value. For example, you can set the device to alert you when you reach a specified elevation. Range alert: A range alert notifies you each time the device is above or below a specified range of values. For example, you can set the device to alert you when your heart rate is below 60 beats per minute (bpm) and over 210 bpm. Recurring alert: A recurring alert notifies you each time the device records a specified value or interval. For example, you can set the device to alert you every 30 minutes. Alert Name Alert Type Description Cadence Range You can set minimum and maximum cadence values.

Calories Event, recurring

You can set the number of calories.
Custom Recurring You can select an existing message or
create a custom message and select an
alert type.
Distance Recurring You can set a distance interval.
Elevation Range You can set minimum and maximum
elevation values.
Heart Rate Range You can set minimum and maximum heart
rate values or select zone changes. See
About Heart Rate Zones, page 15 and
Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 15.
Pace Range You can set minimum and maximum pace
values.
Power Range You can set the high or low power level.
Proximity Event You can set a radius from a saved
location.
Run/Walk Recurring You can set timed walking breaks at
regular intervals.
Speed Range You can set minimum and maximum
speed values.
Stroke Rate Range You can set high or low strokes per
minute.

Time Event, recurring

You can set a time interval.

Setting an Alert
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Alerts.
6 Select an option:
• Select Add New to add a new alert for the activity.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert. 7 If necessary, select the type of alert. 8 Select a zone, enter the minimum and maximum values, or enter a custom value for the alert. 9 If necessary, turn on the alert. For event and recurring alerts, a message appears each time you reach the alert value. For range alerts, a message appears each time you exceed or drop below the specified range (minimum and maximum values).

Auto Lap

Marking Laps by Distance You can use Auto Lap to mark a lap at a specific distance automatically. This feature is helpful for comparing your 22 Customizing Your Device

performance over different parts of an activity (for example,
every 1 mile or 5 kilometers).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap.
6 Select an option:
• Select Auto Lap to turn Auto Lap on or off.
• Select Auto Distance to adjust the distance between laps. Each time you complete a lap, a message appears that displays the time for that lap. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 27). If necessary, you can customize the data pages to display additional lap data (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22). Customizing the Lap Alert Message You can customize one or two data fields that appear in the lap alert message. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity.

NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap > Lap Alert.
6 Select a data field to change it.
7 Select Preview (optional).

Enabling Auto Pause

®

You can use the Auto Pause feature to pause the timer
automatically when you stop moving. This feature is helpful if
your activity includes stop lights or other places where you must
stop.
NOTE: History is not recorded while the timer is stopped or
paused.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Pause.
6 Select an option:
• To pause the timer automatically when you stop moving, select When Stopped.
• To pause the timer automatically when your pace or speed drops below a specified level, select Custom.
Enabling Auto Climb
You can use the auto climb feature to detect elevation changes
automatically. You can use it during activities such as climbing,
hiking, running, or biking.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Climb > Status > On.
6 Select an option:
• Select Run Screen to identify which data screen appears while running.
• Select Climb Screen to identify which data screen appears while climbing.
• Select Invert Colors to reverse the display colors when changing modes.
• Select Vertical Speed to set the rate of ascent over time.
• Select Mode Switch to set how quickly the device changes modes.

3D Speed and Distance You can set 3D speed and distance to calculate your speed or distance using both your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. You can use it during activities such as skiing, climbing, navigating, hiking, running, or biking.

Turning On and Off the Lap Key
You can turn on the Lap Key setting to record a lap or a rest
during an activity using LAP. You can turn off the Lap Key
setting to avoid recording laps due to accidental key presses
during an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Lap Key.
The lap key status changes to On or Off based on the current
setting.
Using Auto Scroll
You can use the auto scroll feature to cycle through all of the
activity data screens automatically while the timer is running.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Scroll.
6 Select a display speed.

UltraTrac The UltraTrac feature is a GPS setting that records track points and sensor data less frequently. Enabling the UltraTrac feature increases battery life but decreases the quality of recorded activities. You should use the UltraTrac feature for activities that demand longer battery life and for which frequent sensor data updates are less important.

Power Save Timeout Settings
The timeout settings affect how long your device stays in
training mode, for example, when you are waiting for a race to
start. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select
an activity, and select the activity settings. Select Power Save
Timeout to adjust the timeout settings for the activity.
Normal: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after 5
minutes of inactivity.
Extended: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after
25 minutes of inactivity. The extended mode can result in
shorter battery life between charges.
Changing the Order of an Activity in the
Apps List
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.

Customizing Your Device 23

4 Select Reorder.
5 Select UP or DOWN to adjust the position of the activity in
the apps list.
Widgets
Your device comes preloaded with widgets that provide at-a
glance information. Some widgets require a Bluetooth
connection to a compatible smartphone.
Some widgets are not visible by default. You can add them to
the widget loop manually.
ABC: Displays combined altimeter, barometer, and compass
information.
Alternate time zones: Displays the current time of day in
additional time zones.
Calendar: Displays upcoming meetings from your smartphone
calendar.
Calories: Displays your calorie information for the current day.
Dog tracking: Displays your dog's location information when
you have a compatible dog tracking device paired with your
fēnix device.
Floors climbed: Tracks your floors climbed and progress
toward your goal.
Golf: Displays golf information for your last round.
Heart rate: Displays your current heart rate in beats per minute
(bpm) and a graph of your heart rate.
Intensity minutes: Tracks your time spent participating in
moderate to vigorous activities, your weekly intensity minutes
goal, and progress toward your goal.
inReach
® controls: Allows you to send messages on your
paired inReach device.
Last activity: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded
activity, such as your last run, last ride, or last swim.
Last sport: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded
sport.
Music controls: Provides music player controls for your
smartphone.
My day: Displays a dynamic summary of your activity today. The
metrics include timed activities, intensity minutes, floors
climbed, steps, calories burned, and more.
Notifications: Alerts you to incoming calls, texts, social network
updates, and more, based on your smartphone notification
settings.
Performance: Displays your current training status, training
load, VO2 max. estimates, recovery time, FTP estimate,
lactate threshold, and predicted race times.
Sensor information: Displays information from an internal
sensor or a connected ANT+ sensor.
Steps: Tracks your daily step count, step goal, and data for
previous days.
Stress: Displays your current stress level and a graph of your
stress level. You can do a breathing activity to help you relax.
Sunrise and sunset: Displays sunrise, sunset, and civil twilight
times.
VIRB controls: Provides camera controls when you have a
VIRB device paired with your fēnix device.
Weather: Displays the current temperature and weather
forecast.
Xero ™ bow sight: Displays laser location information when you
have a Xero bow sight paired with your fēnix device.
Customizing the Widget Loop
You can change the order of widgets in the widget loop, remove
widgets, and add new widgets.
1 Hold MENU.

2 Select Settings > Widgets.
3 Select a widget.
4 Select an option:

• Select Reorder to change the location of the widget in the widget loop.
• Select Remove to remove the widget from the widget loop. 5 Select Add Widgets. 6 Select a widget.

The widget is added to the widget loop.

inReach Remote
The inReach remote function allows you to control your inReach
device using your fēnix device. Go to buy.garmin.com to
purchase an inReach device.
Using the inReach Remote
Before you can use the inReach remote function, you must set
the inReach widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing
the Widget Loop, page 24).
1 Turn on the inReach device.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch
face to view the inReach widget.
3 Select to search for your inReach device.
4 Select to pair your inReach device.
5 Select , and select an option:
• To send an SOS message, select Initiate SOS. NOTE: You should only use the SOS function in a real emergency situation.
• To send a text message, select Messages > New Message, select the message contacts, and enter the message text or select a quick text option.
• To send a preset message, select Send Preset, and select a message from the list.
• To view the timer and distance traveled during an activity, select Tracking.
VIRB Remote
The VIRB remote function allows you to control your VIRB
action camera using your device. Go to www.garmin.com/VIRB
to purchase a VIRB action camera.
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera
Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable
the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series
Owner's Manual for more information. You must also set the
VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the
Widget Loop, page 24).
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch
face to view the VIRB widget.
3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
4 Select .
5 Select an option:
• To record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
• To change video and photo settings, select Settings. Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series Owner's Manual for more information. You must also set the 24 Customizing Your Device
VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the
Widget Loop, page 24).
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch
face to view the VIRB widget.
3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
When the camera is connected, a VIRB data screen is
automatically added to the activity apps.
4 During an activity, select UP or DOWN to view the VIRB data
screen.
5 Hold MENU.
6 Select VIRB Remote.
7 Select an option:
• To control the camera using the activity timer, select Settings > Timer Start/Stop. NOTE: Video recording automatically starts and stops when you start and stop an activity.
• To control the camera using the menu options, select Settings > Manual.
• To manually record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To manually stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
Using the Stress Level Widget
The stress level widget displays your current stress level and a
graph of your stress level for the last several hours. It can also
guide you through a breathing activity to help you relax.
1 While you are sitting or inactive, select UP or DOWN to view
the stress level widget.
TIP: If you are too active for the watch to determine your
stress level, a message appears instead of a stress level
number. You can check your stress level again after several
minutes of inactivity.
2 Select to view a graph of your stress level for the last four
hours.
Blue bars indicate periods of rest. Yellow bars indicate
periods of stress. Gray bars indicate times that you were too
active to determine your stress level.
3 To start a breathing activity, select DOWN > , and enter a
duration for the breathing activity in minutes.
Customizing the Controls Menu
You can add, remove, and change the order of the shortcut
menu options in the controls menu (Viewing the Controls Menu,
page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Controls.
3 Select a shortcut to customize.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the shortcut in the controls menu.
• Select Remove to remove the shortcut from the controls menu. 5 If necessary, select Add New to add an additional shortcut to the controls menu.

Watch Face Settings You can customize the appearance of the watch face by selecting the layout, colors, and additional data. You can also download custom watch faces from the Connect IQ store.

Customizing the Watch Face
Before you can activate a Connect IQ watch face, you must
install a watch face from the Connect IQ store (Connect IQ
Features, page 8).
You can customize the watch face information and appearance,
or activate an installed Connect IQ watch face.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Watch Face.
3 Select UP or DOWN to preview the watch face options.
4 Select Add New to scroll through additional pre-loaded watch
faces.
5 Select > Apply to activate a pre-loaded watch face or an
installed Connect IQ watch face.
6 If using a pre-loaded watch face, select > Customize.
7 Select an option:
• To change the style of the numbers for the analog watch face, select Dial.
• To change the style of the hands for the analog watch face, select Hands.
• To change the style of the numbers for the digital watch face, select Layout
• To change the style of the seconds for the digital watch face, select Seconds.
• To change the data that appears on the watch face, select Data.
• To add or change an accent color for the watch face, select Accent Color.
• To change the background color, select Bkgd. Color.
• To save the changes, select Done.
Sensors Settings
Compass Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Compass.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the compass sensor
(Calibrating the Compass Manually, page 25).
Display: Sets the directional heading on the compass to letters,
degrees, or milli-radians.
North Ref.: Sets the north reference of the compass (Setting the
North Reference, page 26).
Mode: Sets the compass to use electronic-sensor data only
(On), a combination of GPS and electronic-sensor data when
moving (Auto), or GPS data only (Off).
Calibrating the Compass Manually
NOTICE
Calibrate the electronic compass outdoors. To improve heading
accuracy, do not stand near objects that influence magnetic
fields, such as vehicles, buildings, and overhead power lines.
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration by default. If you experience
irregular compass behavior, for example, after moving long
distances or after extreme temperature changes, you can
manually calibrate the compass.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Compass >
Calibrate > Start.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
TIP: Move your wrist in a small figure eight motion until a
message appears.

Customizing Your Device 25

Setting the North Reference
You can set the directional reference used in calculating
heading information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Compass >
North Ref..
3 Select an option:
• To set geographic north as the heading reference, select True.
• To set the magnetic declination for your location automatically, select Magnetic.
• To set grid north (000º) as the heading reference, select Grid.
• To set the magnetic variation value manually, select User, enter the magnetic variance, and select Done.
Altimeter Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Altimeter.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the altimeter sensor.
Auto Cal.: Allows the altimeter to self-calibrate each time you
turn on GPS tracking.
Elevation: Sets the units of measure for elevation.
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting point by
default. You can manually calibrate the barometric altimeter if
you know the correct elevation.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter.
3 Select an option:
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Auto Cal., and select an option.
• To enter the current elevation, select Calibrate.
Barometer Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Barometer.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the barometer
sensor.
Plot: Sets the time scale for the chart in the barometer widget.
Storm Alert: Sets the rate of barometric pressure change that
triggers a storm alert.
Watch Mode: Sets the sensor used in watch mode. The Auto
option uses both the altimeter and barometer according to
your movement. You can use the Altimeter option when your
activity involves changes in altitude, or the Barometer option
when your activity does not involve changes in altitude.
Pressure: Sets how the device displays pressure data.
Calibrating the Barometer
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting point by
default. You can manually calibrate the barometer if you know
the correct elevation or the correct sea level pressure.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Barometer >
Calibrate.
3 Select an option:
• To enter the current elevation or sea level pressure, select Yes.
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Use GPS.

Map Settings You can customize how the map appears in the map app and data screens. Hold MENU, and select Settings > Map. Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North Up option shows north at the top of the screen. The Track Up option shows your current direction of travel at the top of the screen. User Locations: Shows or hides saved locations on the map. Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for optimal use of your map. When disabled, you must zoom in or out manually.

GroupTrack Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > GroupTrack.
Show on Map: Enables you to view connections on the map
screen during a GroupTrack session.
Activity Types: Allows you to select which activity types appear
on the map screen during a GroupTrack session.
Navigation Settings
You can customize the map features and appearance when
navigating to a destination.
Customizing Map Features
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Data Screens.
3 Select an option:
• Select Map to turn on or off the map.
• Select Guide to turn on or off the guide screen that displays the compass bearing or course to follow while navigating.
• Select Elevation Plot to turn on or off the elevation plot.
• Select a screen to add, remove, or customize.
Heading Settings
You can set the behavior of the pointer that appears when
navigating.
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Navigation > Type.
Bearing: Points in the direction of your destination.
Course: Shows your relationship to the course line leading to
the destination (Course Pointer, page 26).
Course Pointer
The course pointer is most useful when you are navigating to
your destination in a straight line, such as when you are
navigating on water. It can help you navigate back to the course
line when you go off-course to avoid obstacles or hazards.

The course pointer indicates your relationship to the course line leading to the destination. The course deviation indicator (CDI) provides the indication of drift (right or left) from the course. The dots tell you how far off course you are.

Setting Up a Heading Bug You can set up a heading indicator to display on your data pages while navigating. The indicator points to your target heading. 26 Customizing Your Device

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Heading Bug.

Setting Navigation Alerts
You can set alerts to help you navigate to your destination.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Alerts.
3 Select an option:
• To set an alert for a specified distance from your final destination, select Final Distance.
• To set an alert for the estimated time remaining until you reach your final destination, select Final ETE.
• To set an alert when you stray from the course, select Off Course. 4 If necessary, select Status to turn on the alert. 5 If necessary, enter a distance or time value, and select .
System Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System.
Language: Sets the language displayed on the device.
Time: Adjusts the time settings (Time Settings, page 27).
Backlight: Adjusts the backlight settings (Changing the
Backlight Settings, page 27).
Sounds: Sets the device sounds, such as key tones, alerts, and
vibrations.
Do Not Disturb: Turns on or off do not disturb mode. Use the
Sleep Time option to turn on do not disturb mode
automatically during your normal sleep hours. You can set
your normal sleep hours on your Garmin Connect account.
Hot Keys: Allows you to assign shortcuts to device keys
(Customizing the Hot Keys, page 27).
Auto Lock: Allows you to lock the keys automatically to prevent
accidental key presses. Use the During Activity option to lock
the keys during a timed activity. Use the Not During Activity
option to lock the keys when you are not recording a timed
activity.
Units: Sets the units of measure used on the device (Changing
the Units of Measure, page 27).
Format: Sets general format preferences, such as the pace and
speed shown during activities, the start of the week, and
geographical position format and datum options.
Data Recording: Sets how the device records activity data. The
Smart recording option (default) allows for longer activity
recordings. The Every Second recording option provides
more detailed activity recordings, but may not record entire
activities that last for longer periods of time.
USB Mode: Sets the device to use mass storage mode or
Garmin mode when connected to a computer.
Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset user data and settings
(Restoring All Default Settings, page 30).
Software Update: Allows you to install software updates
downloaded using Garmin Express.
Time Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System > Time.
Time Format: Sets the device to show time in a 12-hour, 24-
hour, or military format.
Set Time: Sets the time zone for the device. The Auto option
sets the time zone automatically based on your GPS position.
Time: Allows you to adjust the time if it is set to the Manual
option.
Alerts: Allows you to set hourly alerts, as well as sunrise and
sunset alerts that sound a specific number of minutes or
hours before the actual sunrise or sunset occurs.

Sync With GPS: Allows you to manually sync the time with GPS when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving time.

Changing the Backlight Settings
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Backlight.
3 Select an option:
• Select During Activity.
• Select Not During Activity. 4 Select an option:
• Select Keys to turn on the backlight for key presses.
• Select Alerts to turn on the backlight for alerts.
• Select Gesture to turn on the backlight by raising and turning your arm to look at your wrist.
• Select Timeout to set the length of time before the backlight turns off.
• Select Brightness to set the brightness level of the backlight.
Customizing the Hot Keys
You can customize the hold function of individual keys and
combinations of keys.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Hot Keys.
3 Select a key or combination of keys to customize.
4 Select a function.
Changing the Units of Measure
You can customize units of measure for distance, pace and
speed, elevation, weight, height, and temperature.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Units.
3 Select a measurement type.
4 Select a unit of measure.
Viewing Device Information
You can view device information, such as the unit ID, software
version, regulatory information, and license agreement.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > About.
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance
Information
The label for this device is provided electronically. The e-label
may provide regulatory information, such as identification
numbers provided by the FCC or regional compliance markings,
as well as applicable product and licensing information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 From the settings menu, select About.

Wireless Sensors Your device can be used with wireless ANT+ or Bluetooth sensors. For more information about compatibility and purchasing optional sensors, go to buy.garmin.com.

Pairing Your Wireless Sensors The first time you connect a wireless sensor to your device using ANT+ or Bluetooth technology, you must pair the device and sensor. After they are paired, the device connects to the sensor automatically when you start an activity and the sensor is active and within range.

Wireless Sensors 27

NOTE: If a heart rate monitor was bundled with your device, the
included heart rate monitor is already paired with your device.
1 If you are pairing a heart rate monitor, put on the heart rate
monitor (Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor, page 9).
The heart rate monitor does not send or receive data until
you put it on.
2 Bring the device within 3 m (10 ft.) of the sensor.
NOTE: Stay 10 m (33 ft.) away from other wireless sensors
while pairing.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
5 Select an option:
• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

After the sensor is paired with your device, the sensor status changes from Searching to Connected. Sensor data appears in the data screen loop or a custom data field.

Extended Display Mode You can use Extended Display mode to display data screens from your fēnix device on a compatible Edge device during a ride or triathlon. See your Edge owner's manual for more information.

Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence
Sensor
You can use a compatible bike speed or cadence sensor to
send data to your device.
• Pair the sensor with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27).
• Set your wheel size (Wheel Size and Circumference, page 35).
• Go for a ride (Starting an Activity, page 2).

##### Training with Power Meters

• Go to www.garmin.com/intosports for a list of ANT+ sensors that are compatible with your device (such as Vector ™).
• For more information, see the owner's manual for your power meter.
• Adjust your power zones to match your goals and abilities (Setting Your Power Zones, page 15).
• Use range alerts to be notified when you reach a specified power zone (Setting an Alert, page 22).
• Customize the power data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22).
Using Electronic Shifters
Before you can use compatible electronic shifters, such as
Shimano

®

Di2 ™ shifters, you must pair them with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 27). You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22). The fēnix 5/5S device displays current adjustment values when the sensor is in adjustment mode.

Situational Awareness
Your fēnix device can be used with the Varia Vision ™ device,
Varia ™ smart bike lights, and rearview radar to improve
situational awareness. See the owner's manual for your Varia
device for more information.
NOTE: You may need to update the fēnix software before
pairing Varia devices (Updating the Software Using Garmin
Connect Mobile, page 7).

Foot Pod Your device is compatible with the foot pod. You can use the foot pod to record pace and distance instead of using GPS when you are training indoors or when your GPS signal is weak. The foot pod is on standby and ready to send data (like the heart rate monitor). After 30 minutes of inactivity, the foot pod powers off to conserve the battery. When the battery is low, a message appears on your device. Approximately five hours of battery life remain.

Improving Foot Pod Calibration
Before you can calibrate your device, you must acquire GPS
signals and pair your device with the foot pod (Pairing Your
Wireless Sensors, page 27).
The foot pod is self-calibrating, but you can improve the
accuracy of the speed and distance data with a few outdoor runs
using GPS.
1 Stand outside for 5 minutes with a clear view of the sky.
2 Start a running activity.
3 Run on a track without stopping for 10 minutes.
4 Stop your activity, and save it.
Based on the recorded data, the foot pod calibration value
changes, if necessary. You should not need to calibrate the
foot pod again unless your running style changes.
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually
Before you can calibrate your device, you must pair your device
with the foot pod sensor (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors,
page 27).
Manual calibration is recommended if you know your calibration
factor. If you have calibrated a foot pod with another Garmin
product, you may know your calibration factor.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories.
3 Select your foot pod.
4 Select Cal. Factor > Set Value.
5 Adjust the calibration factor:
• Increase the calibration factor if your distance is too low.
• Decrease the calibration factor if your distance is too high.
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance
Before you can customize the foot pod speed and distance, you
must pair your device with the foot pod sensor (Pairing Your
Wireless Sensors, page 27).
You can set your device to calculate speed and distance using
your foot pod data instead of GPS data.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories.
3 Select your foot pod.
4 Select Speed or Distance.
5 Select an option:
• Select Indoor when you are training with GPS turned off, usually indoors.
• Select Always to use your foot pod data regardless of the GPS setting.

##### tempe ™

The tempe is an ANT+ wireless temperature sensor. You can attach the sensor to a secure strap or loop where it is exposed to ambient air, and therefore, provides a consistent source of accurate temperature data. You must pair the tempe with your device to display temperature data from the tempe.

28 Wireless Sensors

Device Information Specifications Battery type Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery fēnix 5S battery life Up to 9 days in smartwatch mode fēnix 5 battery life Up to 14 days in smartwatch mode Water rating 10 ATM1 Operating and storage temperature range

From -20º to 50ºC (from -4º to 122ºF)

USB charging temperature range

From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF) Wireless frequencies fēnix 5S: 2.4 GHz @ 7.46 dBm nominal, fēnix 5: 2.4 GHz @ 8.16 dBm nominal

Battery Information
The actual battery life depends on the features enabled on your
device, such as activity tracking, wrist-based heart rate,
smartphone notifications, GPS, internal sensors, and connected
sensors.
fēnix 5S Battery
Life

fēnix 5 Battery Life

Mode Up to 9 days Up to 14 days Smartwatch mode with activity tracking and 24/7 wrist-based heart rate monitoring Up to 14 hours Up to 24 hours GPS mode with wrist-based heart rate Up to 40 hours Up to 75 hours UltraTrac GPS mode with gyro-based dead reckoning

HRM-Tri Specifications Battery type User-replaceable CR2032, 3 V Battery life Up to 10 mo. for triathlon training (approximately 1 hr./day)

Operating temperature range

From -10° to 50°C (from 14° to 122°F)

Radio frequency/ protocol

2.4 GHz ANT+ wireless communications protocol Water rating 5 ATM2

Data Management NOTE: The device is not compatible with Windows

®

95, 98, Me,

Windows NT

®

, and Mac

®

OS 10.3 and earlier.

Disconnecting the USB Cable If your device is connected to your computer as a removable drive or volume, you must safely disconnect your device from your computer to avoid data loss. If your device is connected to your Windows computer as a portable device, it is not necessary to safely disconnect the device. 1 Complete an action:

• For Windows computers, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the system tray, and select your device.
• For Apple computers, select the device, and select File > Eject. 2 Disconnect the cable from your computer.
1 The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m. For more
information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
2 The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 50 m. For more
information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Deleting Files

NOTICE
If you do not know the purpose of a file, do not delete it. Your
device memory contains important system files that should not
be deleted.
1 Open the Garmin drive or volume.
2 If necessary, open a folder or volume.
3 Select a file.
4 Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
NOTE: If you are using an Apple computer, you must empty
the Trash folder to completely remove the files.

#### Device Maintenance Device Care

NOTICE Do not use a sharp object to clean the device. Avoid chemical cleaners, solvents, and insect repellents that can damage plastic components and finishes. Thoroughly rinse the device with fresh water after exposure to chlorine, salt water, sunscreen, cosmetics, alcohol, or other harsh chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the case. Avoid pressing the keys under water. Keep the leather band dry. Avoid swimming or showering with the leather band. Exposure to water can damage the leather band. Avoid extreme shock and harsh treatment, because it can degrade the life of the product. Do not store the device where prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures can occur, because it can cause permanent damage.

Cleaning the Device

NOTICE
Even small amounts of sweat or moisture can cause corrosion
of the electrical contacts when connected to a charger.
Corrosion can prevent charging and data transfer.
1 Wipe the device using a cloth dampened with a mild
detergent solution.
2 Wipe it dry.
After cleaning, allow the device to dry completely.
TIP: For more information, go to www.garmin.com/fitandcare.

Cleaning the Leather Bands 1 Wipe the leather bands with a dry cloth. 2 Use a leather conditioner to clean the leather bands.

Changing the QuickFit ™ Bands 1 Slide the latch on the QuickFit band, and remove the band from the watch.

Device Information 29

2 Align the new band with the watch.
3 Press the band into place.
NOTE: Make sure the band is secure. The latch should close
over the watch pin.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the other band.

Metal Watch Band Adjustment If your watch includes a metal watch band, you should take your watch to a jeweler or other professional to adjust the length of the metal band.

Replacing the Heart Rate Monitor Battery
1 Remove the sleeve from the heart rate monitor module.
2 Use a small Phillips (00) screwdriver to remove the four
screws on the front of the module.
3 Remove the cover and battery.
4 Wait 30 seconds.
5 Insert the new battery under the two plastic tabs with the
positive side facing up.
NOTE: Do not damage or lose the O-ring gasket.
The O-ring gasket should remain around the outside of the
raised plastic ring.
6 Replace the front cover and the four screws.
Observe the orientation of the front cover. The raised screw
should fit in the matching raised screw hole on the front
cover.
NOTE: Do not overtighten.
7 Replace the sleeve.
After you replace the heart rate monitor battery, you may need
to pair it with the device again.

Troubleshooting My device is in the wrong language You can change the device language selection if you have accidently selected the wrong language on the device. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Scroll down to the last item in the list, and select . 3 Scroll down to the second to last item in the list, and select . 4 Select . 5 Select your language.

Is my smartphone compatible with my
device?
The fēnix 5/5S device is compatible with smartphones using
Bluetooth wireless technology.
Go to www.garmin.com/ble for compatibility information.

My phone will not connect to the device If your phone will not connect to the device, you can try these tips.

• Turn off your smartphone and your device, and turn them back on again.
• Enable Bluetooth technology on your smartphone.
• Update the Garmin Connect Mobile app to the latest version.
• Remove your device from the Garmin Connect Mobile app to retry the pairing process. If you are using an Apple device, you should also remove your device from the Bluetooth settings on your smartphone.
• Bring your smartphone within 10 m (33 ft.) of the device.
• On your smartphone, open the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select or , and select Garmin Devices > Add Device to enter pairing mode.
• On your device, hold LIGHT, and select to turn on Bluetooth technology and enter pairing mode.
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my
watch?
The device is compatible with some Bluetooth sensors. The first
time you connect a sensor to your Garmin device, you must pair
the device and sensor. After they are paired, the device
connects to the sensor automatically when you start an activity
and the sensor is active and within range.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
3 Select an option:
• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22).

Restarting Your Device 1 Hold LIGHT until the device turns off. 2 Hold LIGHT to turn on the device.

Restoring All Default Settings NOTE: This deletes all user-entered information and activity history. You can restore all of the device settings to the factory default values. 1 Hold MENU. 30 Troubleshooting

2 Select Settings > System > Restore Defaults > Yes.

Acquiring Satellite Signals
The device may need a clear view of the sky to acquire satellite
signals. The time and date are set automatically based on the
GPS position.
1 Go outdoors to an open area.
The front of the device should be oriented toward the sky.
2 Wait while the device locates satellites.
It may take 30–60 seconds to locate satellite signals.

Improving GPS Satellite Reception

• Frequently sync the device to your Garmin Connect account:
◦ Connect your device to a computer using the USB cable and the Garmin Express application.
◦ Sync your device to the Garmin Connect Mobile app using your Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
◦ Connect your device to your Garmin Connect account using a Wi‑Fi wireless network. While connected to your Garmin Connect account, the device downloads several days of satellite data, allowing it to quickly locate satellite signals.
• Take your device outside to an open area away from tall buildings and trees.
• Remain stationary for a few minutes.

The temperature reading is not accurate Your body temperature affects the temperature reading for the internal temperature sensor. To get the most accurate temperature reading, you should remove the watch from your wrist and wait 20 to 30 minutes. You can also use an optional tempe external temperature sensor to view accurate ambient temperature readings while wearing the watch.

Maximizing the Battery Life You can do several things to extend the life of the battery.

• Reduce the backlight timeout (Changing the Backlight Settings, page 27).
• Reduce the backlight brightness.
• Use UltraTrac GPS mode for your activity (UltraTrac, page 23).
• Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology when you are not using connected features (Connected Features, page 5).
• When pausing your activity for a longer period of time, use the resume later option (Stopping an Activity, page 2).
• Turn off activity tracking (Turning Off Activity Tracking, page 16).
• Use a watch face that is not updated every second. For example, use a watch face without a second hand (Customizing the Watch Face, page 25).
• Limit the smartphone notifications the device displays (Managing Notifications, page 6).
• Stop broadcasting heart rate data to paired Garmin devices (Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices, page 8).
• Turn off wrist-based heart rate monitoring (Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor, page 9). NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate monitoring is used to calculate vigorous intensity minutes and calories burned.
Activity Tracking
For more information about activity tracking accuracy, go to
garmin.com/ataccuracy.

My daily step count does not appear The daily step count is reset every night at midnight. If dashes appear instead of your step count, allow the device to acquire satellite signals and set the time automatically.

My step count does not seem accurate If your step count does not seem accurate, you can try these tips.

• Wear the device on your non-dominant wrist.
• Carry the device in your pocket when pushing a stroller or lawn mower.
• Carry the device in your pocket when actively using your hands or arms only. NOTE: The device may interpret some repetitive motions, such as washing dishes, folding laundry, or clapping your hands, as steps.
The step counts on my device and my Garmin
Connect account don't match
The step count on your Garmin Connect account updates when
you synchronize your device.
1 Select an option:
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect application (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer, page 7).
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 7). 2 Wait while the device synchronizes your data.

Synchronizing can take several minutes. NOTE: Refreshing the Garmin Connect Mobile app or the Garmin Connect application does not synchronize your data or update your step count.

The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate Your device uses an internal barometer to measure elevation changes as you climb floors. A floor climbed is equal to 3 m (10 ft.).

• Avoid holding handrails or skipping steps while climbing stairs.
• In windy environments, cover the device with your sleeve or jacket as strong gusts can cause erratic readings.
My intensity minutes are flashing
When you exercise at an intensity level that qualifies toward
your intensity minutes goal, the intensity minutes flash.
Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or
vigorous intensity level.
Getting More Information
You can find more information about this product on the Garmin
website.
• Go to support.garmin.com for additional manuals, articles, and software updates.
• Go to www.garmin.com/outdoor.
• Go to http://buy.garmin.com, or contact your Garmin dealer for information about optional accessories and replacement parts.

#### Appendix

Data Fields
%FTP: The current power output as a percentage of functional
threshold power.

%HRR: The percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart
rate minus resting heart rate).
10s Avg. Power: The 10-second moving average of power
output.
10s Avg Balance: The 10-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
24-Hour Max.: The maximum temperature recorded in the last
24 hours from a compatible temperature sensor.
24-Hour Min.: The minimum temperature recorded in the last
24 hours from a compatible temperature sensor.
30s Avg. Power: The 30-second moving average of power
output.
30s Avg Balance: The 30-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
3s Avg. Balance: The three-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
3s Avg. Power: The 3-second moving average of power output.
500m Pace: The current rowing pace per 500 meters.
Aerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your aerobic
fitness level.
Anaerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your
anaerobic fitness level.
Average HR: The average heart rate for the current activity.
Average Pace: The average pace for the current activity.
Average Power: The average power output for the current
activity.
Average Swolf: The average swolf score for the current activity.
Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one length plus
the number of strokes for that length (Swim Terminology,
page 4). In open water swimming, 25 meters is used to
calculate your swolf score.
Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current
activity.
Avg. 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for
the current activity.
Avg. Ascent: The average vertical distance of ascent since the
last reset.
Avg. Balance: The average left/right power balance for the
current activity.
Avg. Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current
activity.
Avg. Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current
activity.
Avg. Descent: The average vertical distance of descent since
the last reset.
Avg. GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time balance for
the current session.
Avg. L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left leg for
the current activity.
Avg. L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the left
leg for the current activity.
Avg. Lap Time: The average lap time for the current activity.
Avg. Moving Speed: The average speed when moving for the
current activity.
Avg. Nautical Speed: The average speed in knots for the
current activity.
Avg. Overall Speed: The average speed for the current activity,
including both moving and stopped speeds.
Avg. PCO: The average platform center offset for the current
activity.
Avg. R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right leg for
the current activity.
Avg. R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the right
leg for the current activity.
Avg. Speed: The average speed for the current activity.
Avg. Stride Len.: The average stride length for the current
session.
Avg. Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length
during the current activity.
Avg. Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes
per minute (spm) during the current activity.
Avg. Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical oscillation for
the current activity.
Avg. Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation to
stride length for the current session.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current activity.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current activity.
Avg GCT: The average amount of ground contact time for the
current activity.
Avg HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current activity.
Balance: The current left/right power balance.
Battery Level: The remaining battery power.
Bearing: The direction from your current location to a
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Cadence: Cycling. The number of revolutions of the crank arm.
Your device must be connected to a cadence accessory for
this data to appear.
Cadence: Running. The steps per minute (right and left).
Calories: The amount of total calories burned.
Compass Hdg.: The direction you are moving based on the
compass.
Course: The direction from your starting location to a
destination. Course can be viewed as a planned or set route.
You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Dest. Location: The position of your final destination.
Dest. Wpt: The last point on the route to the destination. You
must be navigating for this data to appear.
Di2 Battery: The remaining battery power of a Di2 sensor.
Dist. Per Stroke: Paddle sports. The distance traveled per
stroke.
Dist. Remaining: The remaining distance to the final
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Distance: The distance traveled for the current track or activity.
Distance To Next: The remaining distance to the next waypoint
on the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Elapsed Time: The total time recorded. For example, if you start
the timer and run for 10 minutes, then stop the timer for 5
minutes, then start the timer and run for 20 minutes, your
elapsed time is 35 minutes.
Elevation: The altitude of your current location above or below
sea level.
Estimated Total Distance: The estimated distance from the
start to the final destination. You must be navigating for this
data to appear.
ETA: The estimated time of day when you will reach the final
destination (adjusted to the local time of the destination). You
must be navigating for this data to appear.

ETA at Next: The estimated time of day when you will reach the
next waypoint on the route (adjusted to the local time of the
waypoint). You must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETE: The estimated time remaining until you reach the final
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Floors Climbed: The total number of floors climbed up for the
day.
Floors Descended: The total number of floors climbed down for
the day.
Floors per Minute: The number of floors climbed up per minute.
Front: The front bike gear from a gear position sensor.
GCT: The amount of time in each step that you spend on the
ground while running, measured in milliseconds. Ground
contact time is not calculated while walking.
GCT Balance: The left/right balance of ground contact time
while running.
Gear Battery: The battery status of a gear position sensor.
Gear Combo: The current gear combination from a gear
position sensor.
Gear Ratio: The number of teeth on the front and rear bike
gears, as detected by a gear position sensor.
Gears: The front and rear bike gears from a gear position
sensor.
Glide Ratio: The ratio of horizontal distance traveled to the
change in vertical distance.
Glide Ratio Dest.: The glide ratio required to descend from your
current position to the destination elevation. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
GPS: The strength of the GPS satellite signal.
GPS Elevation: The altitude of your current location using GPS.
GPS Heading: The direction you are moving based on GPS.
Grade: The calculation of rise (elevation) over run (distance).
For example, if for every 3 m (10 ft.) you climb you travel
60 m (200 ft.), the grade is 5%.
Heading: The direction you are moving.
Heart Rate: Your heart rate in beats per minute (bpm). Your
device must be connected to a compatible heart rate monitor.
HR %Max.: The percentage of maximum heart rate.
HR Zone: The current range of your heart rate (1 to 5). The
default zones are based on your user profile and maximum
heart rate (220 minus your age).
Int. Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current
swim interval.
Int. Avg. %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Avg. HR: The average heart rate for the current swim
interval.
Int. Distance: The distance traveled for the current interval.
Int. Max. %HRR: The maximum percentage of heart rate
reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the
current swim interval.
Int. Max. %Max.: The maximum percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Max. HR: The maximum heart rate for the current swim
interval.
Int. Pace: The average pace for the current interval.
Int. Swolf: The average swolf score for the current interval.
Intensity Factor: The Intensity Factor ™ for the current activity.
Interval Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during
the current interval.
Interval Time: The stopwatch time for the current interval.
Int Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length
during the current interval.
Int Strk Rate: The average number of strokes per minute (spm)
during the current interval.
Int Strk Type: The current stroke type for the interval.
L. Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Stk. Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap.
L. Lap Stk. Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap.
L. Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed lap.
L. Len. Stk. Rate: The average number strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed pool length.
L. Len. Stk. Type: The stroke type used during the last completed pool length.
L. Len. Strokes: The total number of strokes for the last completed pool length. Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current lap. Lap 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for the current lap. Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the current lap. Lap Balance: The average left/right power balance for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the current lap. Lap Distance: The distance traveled for the current lap. Lap Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current lap. Lap Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current lap. Lap GCT: The average amount of ground contact time for the current lap. Lap GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time balance for the current lap. Lap HR: The average heart rate for the current lap. Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the current lap. Lap L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left leg for the current lap. Lap L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the left leg for the current lap. Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the current lap. Lap Pace: The average pace for the current lap. Lap PCO: The average platform center offset for the current lap. Lap Power: The average power output for the current lap. Lap R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right leg for the current lap. Lap R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the right leg for the current lap. Laps: The number of laps completed for the current activity.

Lap Speed: The average speed for the current lap.
Lap Stride Len.: The average stride length for the current lap.
Lap Strk Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per
minute (spm) during the current lap.
Lap Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes
per minute (spm) during the current lap.
Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the
current lap.
Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the
current lap.
Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the current lap.
Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the current lap.
Lap Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical oscillation for
the current lap.
Lap Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation to stride
length for the current lap.
Last Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Cad.: Cycling. The average cadence for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Cad.: Running. The average cadence for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Dist.: The distance traveled for the last completed lap.
Last Lap HR: The average heart rate for the last completed lap.
Last Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Pace: The average pace for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Power: The average power output for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Speed: The average speed for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the last completed lap.
Last Len. Pace: The average pace for your last completed pool
length.
Last Len. Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed pool
length.
Lat/Lon: The current position in latitude and longitude
regardless of the selected position format setting.
Left PP: The current power phase angle for the left leg. Power
phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power is
produced.
Left PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the left leg.
Power phase peak is the angle range over which the rider
produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during the
current activity.
LL 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for
the last lap.
L Lap Dist P Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per
stroke during the last completed lap.
L Lap Dist P Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the last completed lap.
Location: The current position using the selected position
format setting.
Max. Ascent: The maximum rate of ascent in feet per minute or
meters per minute since the last reset.
Max. Descent: The maximum rate of descent in meters per
minute or feet per minute since the last reset.
Max. Elevation: The highest elevation reached since the last
reset.
Max. Lap Power: The top power output for the current lap.
Max. Nautical Speed: The maximum speed in knots for the
current activity.
Maximum Speed: The top speed for the current activity.
Max Power: The top power output for the current activity.
Min. Elevation: The lowest elevation reached since the last
reset.
Moving Time: The total time moving for the current activity.
Multisport Time: The total time for all sports in a multisport
activity, including transitions.
Muscle O2 Sat. %: The estimated muscle oxygen saturation
percentage for the current activity.
Nautical Dist: The distance traveled in nautical meters or
nautical feet.
Nautical Speed: The current speed in knots.
Next Waypoint: The next point on the route. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
NP: The Normalized Power ™ for the current activity.
Off Course: The distance to the left or right by which you have
strayed from the original path of travel. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
Pace: The current pace.
PCO: The platform center offset. Platform center offset is the
location on the pedal platform where force is applied.
Pedal Smooth.: The measurement of how evenly a rider is
applying force to the pedals throughout each pedal stroke.
Perform. Cond.: The performance condition score is a real-time
assessment of your ability to perform.
Power: The current power output in watts.
Power to Weight: The current power measured in watts per
kilogram.
Power Zone: The current range of power output (1 to 7) based
on your FTP or custom settings.
Rear: The rear bike gear from a gear position sensor.
Repeat On: The timer for the last interval plus the current rest
(pool swimming).
Reps: During a strength training activity, the number of
repetitions in a workout set.
Rest Timer: The timer for the current rest (pool swimming).
Right PP: The current power phase angle for the right leg.
Power phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power
is produced.
Right PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the right
leg. Power phase peak is the angle range over which the
rider produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Set Timer: During a strength training activity, the amount of time
spent in the current workout set.
Speed: The current rate of travel.
Stopped Time: The total time stopped for the current activity.
Stride Length: The length of your stride from one footfall to the
next, measured in meters.
Stroke Rate: Swimming. The number of strokes per minute
(spm).
Stroke Rate: Paddle sports. The number of strokes per minute
(spm).
Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current
activity.
Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the
current activity.

Total Ascent: The total elevation distance ascended since the
last reset.
Total Descent: The total elevation distance descended since
the last reset.
Total Hemoglobin: The estimated muscle oxygen total for the
current activity.
TSS: The Training Stress Score ™ for the current activity.
V Dist to Dest: The elevation distance between your current
position and the final destination. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Vert. Spd.: The rate of ascent or descent over time.
Vertical Osc.: The amount of bounce while you are running.
The vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters for
each step.
Vertical Ratio: The ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length.
Vert Spd to Tgt: The rate of ascent or descent to a
predetermined altitude. You must be navigating for this data
to appear.
VMG: The speed at which you are closing on a destination along
a route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Work: The accumulated work performed (power output) in
kilojoules.

Sunrise: The time of sunrise based on your GPS position. Sunset: The time of sunset based on your GPS position. Temperature: The temperature of the air. Your body temperature affects the temperature sensor. You can pair a tempe sensor with your device to provide a consistent source of accurate temperature data. Time in Zone: The time elapsed in each heart rate or power zone. Time of Day: The time of day based on your current location and time settings (format, time zone, daylight saving time). Timer: The current time of the countdown timer. Time Seat.: The time spent seated while pedaling for the current activity. Time Seat. Lap: The time spent seated while pedaling for the current lap. Time Stand.: The time spent standing while pedaling for the current activity. Time Stand. Lap: The time spent standing while pedaling for the current lap. Time to Next: The estimated time remaining before you reach the next waypoint in the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Torque Eff.: The measurement of how efficiently a rider is pedaling.

| These tables include standardized classifications for VO2 max. estimates by age and gender. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Males | | | | Percentile | | | 20–29 | | 30–39 | | | | 40–49 | | | | | | 50–59 | | | | | 60–69 | | 70–79 | | | |
| Superior | | | | 95 | | | 55.4 | | 54 | | | | 52.5 | | | | | | 48.9 | | | | | 45.7 | | 42.1 | | | |
| Excellent | | | | 80 | | | 51.1 | | 48.3 | | | | 46.4 | | | | | | 43.4 | | | | | 39.5 | | 36.7 | | | |
| Good | | | | 60 | | | 45.4 | | 44 | | | | 42.4 | | | | | | 39.2 | | | | | 35.5 | | 32.3 | | | |
| Fair | | | | 40 | | | 41.7 | | 40.5 | | | | 38.5 | | | | | | 35.6 | | | | | 32.3 | | 29.4 | | | |
| Poor | | | | 0–40 | | | <41.7 | | <40.5 | | | | <38.5 | | | | | | <35.6 | | | | | <32.3 | | <29.4 | | | |
| Females | | | | Percentile | | | 20–29 | | 30–39 | | | | 40–49 | | | | | | 50–59 | | | | | 60–69 | | 70–79 | | | |
| Superior | | | | 95 | | | 49.6 | | 47.4 | | | | 45.3 | | | | | | 41.1 | | | | | 37.8 | | 36.7 | | | |
| Excellent | | | | 80 | | | 43.9 | | 42.4 | | | | 39.7 | | | | | | 36.7 | | | | | 33 | | 30.9 | | | |
| Good | | | | 60 | | | 39.5 | | 37.8 | | | | 36.3 | | | | | | 33 | | | | | 30 | | 28.1 | | | |
| Fair | | | | 40 | | | 36.1 | | 34.4 | | | | 33 | | | | | | 30.1 | | | | | 27.5 | | 25.9 | | | |
| Poor | | | | 0–40 | | | <36.1 | | <34.4 | | | | <33 | | | | | | <30.1 | | | | | <27.5 | | <25.9 | | | |

VO2 Max. Standard Ratings Data reprinted with permission from The Cooper Institute. For more information, go to www.CooperInstitute.org.

FTP ratings are based on research by Hunter Allen and Andrew Coggan, PhD, Training and Racing with a Power Meter (Boulder, CO: VeloPress, 2010).

FTP Ratings
These tables include classifications for functional threshold
power (FTP) estimates by gender.
Males Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 5.05 and greater
Excellent From 3.93 to 5.04
Good From 2.79 to 3.92
Fair From 2.23 to 2.78
Untrained Less than 2.23
Females Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 4.30 and greater
Excellent From 3.33 to 4.29
Good From 2.36 to 3.32
Fair From 1.90 to 2.35
Untrained Less than 1.90
Wheel Size and Circumference
Your speed sensor automatically detects your wheel size. If
necessary, you can manually enter your wheel circumference in
the speed sensor settings.
The tire size is marked on both sides of the tire. This is not a
comprehensive list. You can also measure the circumference of
your wheel or use one of the calculators available on the
internet.
Tire Size Wheel Circumference (mm)
20 × 1.75 1515
20 × 1-3/8 1615
22 × 1-3/8 1770
22 × 1-1/2 1785
24 × 1 1753
24 × 3/4 Tubular 1785
24 × 1-1/8 1795

Tire Size Wheel Circumference (mm)
24 × 1.75 1890
24 × 1-1/4 1905
24 × 2.00 1925
24 × 2.125 1965
26 × 7/8 1920
26 × 1-1.0 1913
26 × 1 1952
26 × 1.25 1953
26 × 1-1/8 1970
26 × 1.40 2005
26 × 1.50 2010
26 × 1.75 2023
26 × 1.95 2050
26 × 2.00 2055
26 × 1-3/8 2068
26 × 2.10 2068
26 × 2.125 2070
26 × 2.35 2083
26 × 1-1/2 2100
26 × 3.00 2170
27 × 1 2145
27 × 1-1/8 2155
27 × 1-1/4 2161
27 × 1-3/8 2169
29 x 2.1 2288
29 x 2.2 2298
29 x 2.3 2326
650 x 20C 1938
650 x 23C 1944
650 × 35A 2090
650 × 38B 2105
650 × 38A 2125
700 × 18C 2070
700 × 19C 2080
700 × 20C 2086
700 × 23C 2096
700 × 25C 2105
700C Tubular 2130
700 × 28C 2136
700 × 30C 2146
700 × 32C 2155
700 × 35C 2168
700 × 38C 2180
700 × 40C 2200
700 × 44C 2235
700 × 45C 2242
700 × 47C 2268

Symbol Definitions
These symbols may appear on the device or accessory labels.
Alternating current. The device is suitable for alternating current.
Direct current. The device is suitable for direct current only.
Fuse. Indicates a fuse specification or location.
WEEE disposal and recycling symbol. The WEEE symbol is
attached to the product in compliance with the EU directive
2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE).
It is intended to deter the improper disposal of this product and to
promote reuse and recycling.

#### Index

A accessories 27, 28, 30, 31 activities 2, 3, 21, 23 custom 2, 3 favorites 2 saving 2 starting 2 activity tracking 16 alarms 19, 22 alerts 19, 22, 23, 27 heart rate 9 altimeter 21, 26 calibrating 26 ANT+ sensors 27, 28 applications 5, 7, 8 smartphone 1 auto climb 23 Auto Lap 22, 23 Auto Pause 23 auto scroll 23 B backlight 1, 27 bands 29, 30 barometer 21, 26 calibrating 26 battery 29 charging 1 life 29 maximizing 6, 23, 31 replacing 30 bike sensors 28 Bluetooth sensors 27 Bluetooth technology 5, 6, 30 C cadence 3, 10 alerts 22 sensors 28 calendar 17 calibrating altimeter 26 compass 25 calorie, alerts 22 charging 1 cleaning the device 10, 29 clock 19 compass 20, 25, 26 calibrating 25 settings 26 Connect IQ 8 connecting 6, 8 controls menu 1, 25 coordinates 20 countdown timer 19 courses 26 creating 20 downloading 4 playing 4 selecting 4 customizing the device 22, 25, 27 D data pages 22 sharing 28 storing 6, 7, 9 transferring 6, 7 uploading 7 data fields 8 deleting all user data 29 history 21 personal records 19 distance 23 alerts 22, 27 dogleg 5 drills 4

E extended display 28 F fitness 13 foot pod 28 G Garmin Connect 1, 5–7, 17 storing data 7 Garmin Express 2, 7 updating software 1 GLONASS 27 goals 18 GPS 23, 27 signal 31 green view, pin location 5 ground contact time 10 GroupTrack 7, 26 H hazards 5 heading setting 26 heart rate 8 alerts 9, 22 monitor 8–13, 30 pairing sensors 8, 9 zones 11, 15, 21 history 21 deleting 21 sending to computer 6, 7

I
indoor training 2
inReach remote 24
inReach remote 24
intensity minutes 16, 31
intervals 4
workouts 17

J jumpmaster 3 K keys 1, 27 customizing 23

L lactate threshold 11, 14 language 27 layup 5 lengths 4 LiveTrack 7 locations 20 deleting 19 editing 19 saving 19

M main menu, customizing 24 man overboard (MOB) 20 map 26 maps 22, 26 browsing 20 navigating 20 measurements 5 measuring a shot 5 menu 1 metronome 3 MOB 20 multisport 2, 3, 21 N navigation 22, 26, 27 Sight 'N Go 20 stopping 20 north reference 26 notifications 6 phone calls 6 text messages 6

O odometer 5, 21 P pairing ANT+ sensors 8, 9 Bluetooth sensors 30 sensors 27 smartphone 1, 30 performance condition 11, 14 personal records 18 deleting 19 phone calls 6 power (force) 11 alerts 22 meters 12, 14, 28, 35 zones 15 profiles 2 user 15 projected finish time 13 R racing 18 recovery 11, 13 replacing the battery 30 resetting the device 30 routes 20 running dynamics 10, 11 S satellite signals 31 saving activities 3 scorecard 5 screen 27 segments 17, 18 settings 16, 21, 23–27, 30 sharing data 28 shortcuts 1, 25 Sight 'N Go 20 skiing alpine 3 snowboarding 3 sleep mode 16 smartphone 7, 8, 24, 30 applications 5, 7 pairing 1, 30 snowboarding 3 software license 27 updating 1, 7 version 27 specifications 29 speed 23 speed and cadence sensors 28 statistics 5 stopwatch 19 storing data 6, 7 stress level 13, 25 stress score 14 stride length 10 strokes 4 sunrise and sunset times 19 swimming 4, 9 swing analysis 5 swolf score 4 system settings 27 T target 18 tempe 28, 31 temperature 28, 31 text messages 6 time alerts 22 settings 27 zones and formats 27 time zones 19 timer 3, 21 countdown 19 tones 3, 19 TracBack 2, 20 Index 37

tracks 20
training 5, 17, 18
plans 17
Training Effect 11, 13
training load 13
training status 12
treadmill 2
triathlon training 3
troubleshooting 8, 9, 11, 30, 31
U
UltraTrac 23
unit ID 27
units of measure 27
updates, software 7
uploading data 7
USB 7
disconnecting 29
user data, deleting 29
user profile 15
V
vertical oscillation 10, 11
vertical ratio 10, 11
VIRB remote 24
Virtual Partner 18
VO2 max. 11–13, 35
W
watch faces 8, 25
watch mode 23
water resistance 29
waypoints, projecting 20
wheel sizes 35
Wi‑Fi 8
connecting 7
widgets 1, 8, 9, 24, 25
workouts 17
loading 17

Z zones heart rate 15 power 15 time 19

38 Index

### support.garmin.com

April 2020 GUID-5DDC7B78-0983-4434-93BF-23EBCC967966 v4

4. FĒNIX® 5/5S
   URL: https://static.garmin.com/pumac/fenix55s_OM_EN-SG.pdf
   ## FĒNIX® 5/5S Owner’s Manual

© 2016 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Garmin. Garmin reserves the right to change or improve its
products and to make changes in the content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements. Go to www.garmin.com for current updates
and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.
Garmin®, the Garmin logo, ANT+®, Auto Lap®, Auto Pause®, Edge®, fēnix®, TracBack®, VIRB®, and Virtual Partner® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA
and other countries. Connect IQ™, Garmin Connect™, Garmin Express™, Garmin Move IQ™, HRM-Run™, HRM-Swim™, HRM-Tri™, QuickFit™, tempe™, TruSwing™, Varia™, Varia
Vision™, and Vector™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
American Heart Association® is a registered trademark of American Heart Association, Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Apple® and Mac® are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. The Cooper Institute®, as well
as any related trademarks, are the property of The Cooper Institute. Di2™ is a trademark of Shimano, Inc. Shimano® is a registered trademark of Shimano, Inc. Advanced heartbeat analytics by
Firstbeat. Training Stress Score™ (TSS), Intensity Factor™ (IF), and Normalized Power™ (NP) are trademarks of Peaksware, LLC. Wi‑Fi® is a registered mark of Wi-Fi Alliance Corporation.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product may contain a library (Kiss FFT) licensed by Mark Borgerding under the 3-Clause BSD License (http://opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause).
This product is ANT+® certified. Visit www.thisisant.com/directory for a list of compatible products and apps.

#### Table of Contents

Introduction ... 1
Device Overview ... 1
Viewing the Controls Menu ... 1
Viewing Widgets ... 1
Charging the Device ... 1
Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device ... 1
Product Updates ... 1
Setting Up Garmin Express ... 2
Activities ... 2
Starting an Activity ... 2
Tips for Recording Activities ... 2
Stopping an Activity ... 2
Creating a Custom Activity ... 2
Indoor Activities ... 2
Outdoor Activities ... 2
Viewing Your Ski Runs ... 2
Using the Metronome ... 2
Jumpmaster ... 3
Multisport ... 3
Creating a Multisport Activity ... 3
Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities ... 3
Swimming ... 3
Swim Terminology ... 3
Stroke Types ... 3
Tips for Swimming Activities ... 3
Resting During Pool Swimming ... 3
Training with the Drill Log ... 3
Golfing ... 4
Playing Golf ... 4
Hole Information ... 4
Moving the Flag ... 4
Measuring a Shot ... 4
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances ... 4
Keeping Score ... 4
Updating a Score ... 4
TruSwing™ ... 4
Using the Golf Odometer ... 4
Tracking Statistics ... 4
Heart Rate Features ... 4
Wrist-based Heart Rate ... 4
Wearing the Device and Heart Rate ... 4
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data ... 5
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget ... 5
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices ... 5
Turning Off the Wrist Heart Rate Monitor ... 5
Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor ... 5
Pool Swimming ... 5
Heart Rate While Swimming ... 5
Data Storage ... 6
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data ... 6
Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor ... 6
Running Dynamics ... 6
Training with Running Dynamics ... 6
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data ... 6
Ground Contact Time Balance Data ... 7
Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data ... 7
Performance Measurements ... 7
Turning On Performance Notifications ... 7
Automatically Detecting Performance Measurements ... 8
Training Status ... 8
About VO2 Max. Estimates ... 8
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running ... 8
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling ... 8
Recovery Time ... 8
Viewing Your Recovery Time ... 9
Training Load ... 9
Viewing Your Predicted Race Times ... 9
Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level ... 9
Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level ... 9
Performance Condition ... 9
Viewing Your Performance Condition ... 9
Getting Your FTP Estimate ... 9
Conducting an FTP Test ... 9
Lactate Threshold ... 10
Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate
Threshold ... 10
Recovery Heart Rate ... 10
About Training Effect ... 10
Training ... 10
Setting Up Your User Profile ... 10
Fitness Goals ... 10
About Heart Rate Zones ... 11
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones ... 11
Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones ... 11
Heart Rate Zone Calculations ... 11
About Lifetime Athletes ... 11
Setting Your Power Zones ... 11
Activity Tracking ... 11
Auto Goal ... 11
Using the Move Alert ... 12
Sleep Tracking ... 12
Using Automated Sleep Tracking ... 12
Using Do Not Disturb Mode ... 12
Intensity Minutes ... 12
Earning Intensity Minutes ... 12
Garmin Move IQ™ Events ... 12
Activity Tracking Settings ... 12
Turning Off Activity Tracking ... 12
Workouts ... 12
Following a Workout From the Web ... 12
Starting a Workout ... 12
About the Training Calendar ... 13
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans ... 13
Interval Workouts ... 13
Creating an Interval Workout ... 13
Starting an Interval Workout ... 13
Stopping an Interval Workout ... 13
Segments ... 13
Using Virtual Partner® ... 13
Setting a Training Target ... 13
Cancelling a Training Target ... 13
Racing a Previous Activity ... 14
Personal Records ... 14
Viewing Your Personal Records ... 14
Restoring a Personal Record ... 14
Clearing a Personal Record ... 14
Clearing All Personal Records ... 14
Clock ... 14
Setting an Alarm ... 14
Starting the Countdown Timer ... 14
Using the Stopwatch ... 14
Setting Sunrise and Sunset Alerts ... 14
Syncing the Time with GPS ... 14
Navigation ... 15
Saving Your Location ... 15
Editing Your Saved Locations ... 15
Deleting All Saved Locations ... 15
Projecting a Waypoint ... 15

Table of Contents i

Navigating to a Destination ... 15
Creating and Following a Course on Your Device ... 15
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man Overboard
Location ... 15
Navigating with Sight 'N Go ... 15
Navigating to Your Starting Point ... 15
Stopping Navigation ... 15
Map ... 15
Panning and Zooming the Map ... 15
Compass ... 16
Altimeter and Barometer ... 16
History ... 16
Using History ... 16
Multisport History ... 16
Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone ... 16
Viewing Data Totals ... 16
Using the Odometer ... 16
Deleting History ... 16
Connected Features ... 16
Enabling Bluetooth Notifications ... 16
Viewing Notifications ... 17
Managing Notifications ... 17
Turning Off Bluetooth Technology ... 17
Turning On and Off Bluetooth Connection Alerts ... 17
Locating a Lost Mobile Device ... 17
Garmin Connect ... 17
Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile ... 17
Updating the Software Using Garmin Express ... 17
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer ... 17
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile ... 17
Wi‑Fi® Connected Features ... 18
Setting Up Wi‑Fi Connectivity ... 18
Connect IQ Features ... 18
Downloading Connect IQ Features ... 18
Downloading Connect IQ Features Using Your Computer ... 18
Customizing Your Device ... 18
Widgets ... 18
Customizing the Widget Loop ... 18
VIRB Remote ... 18
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera ... 19
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity ... 19
Activities and App Settings ... 19
Customizing the Data Screens ... 19
Adding a Map to an Activity ... 20
Alerts ... 20
Setting an Alert ... 20
Auto Lap ... 20
Marking Laps by Distance ... 20
Enabling Auto Pause® ... 20
Enabling Auto Climb ... 21
3D Speed and Distance ... 21
Turning On and Off the Lap Key ... 21
Using Auto Scroll ... 21
UltraTrac ... 21
Power Save Timeout Settings ... 21
Removing an Activity or App ... 21
Changing the Order of an Activity in the Apps List ... 21
Watch Face Settings ... 21
Customizing the Watch Face ... 21
Sensors Settings ... 22
Compass Settings ... 22
Calibrating the Compass Manually ... 22
Setting the North Reference ... 22
Altimeter Settings ... 22
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter ... 22
Barometer Settings ... 22
Map Settings ... 22
Navigation Settings ... 22
Customizing Map Features ... 22
Heading Settings ... 22
Course Pointer ... 22
Setting Up a Heading Bug ... 23
Setting Navigation Alerts ... 23
System Settings ... 23
Time Settings ... 23
Backlight Settings ... 23
Customizing the Controls Menu ... 23
Customizing the Hot Keys ... 23
Changing the Units of Measure ... 23
Viewing Device Information ... 23
Viewing Regulatory and Compliance Information ... 23
ANT+ Sensors ... 24
Pairing ANT+ Sensors ... 24
Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence Sensor ... 24
Training with Power Meters ... 24
Using Electronic Shifters ... 24
Situational Awareness ... 24
Foot Pod ... 24
Improving Foot Pod Calibration ... 24
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually ... 24
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance ... 24
tempe ... 25
Device Information ... 25
fēnix 5/5S Specifications ... 25
Battery Information ... 25
HRM-Tri Specifications ... 25
Data Management ... 25
Disconnecting the USB Cable ... 25
Deleting Files ... 25
Device Maintenance ... 25
Device Care ... 25
Cleaning the Device ... 25
Cleaning the Leather Bands ... 25
Changing the QuickFit™ Bands ... 26
Metal Watch Band Adjustment ... 26
Replacing the Heart Rate Monitor Battery ... 26
Troubleshooting ... 26
My device is in the wrong language ... 26
Is my smartphone compatible with my device? ... 26
My phone will not connect to the device ... 26
Resetting Your Device ... 26
Restoring All Default Settings ... 26
Acquiring Satellite Signals ... 26
Improving GPS Satellite Reception ... 26
The temperature reading is not accurate ... 27
Maximizing the Battery Life ... 27
Activity Tracking ... 27
My daily step count does not appear ... 27
My step count does not seem accurate ... 27
The step counts on my device and my Garmin Connect
account don't match ... 27
The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate ... 27
My intensity minutes are flashing ... 27
Getting More Information ... 27
Appendix ... 27
Data Fields ... 27
VO2 Max. Standard Ratings ... 31
FTP Ratings ... 31
Wheel Size and Circumference ... 31

ii Table of Contents

BSD 3-Clause License ... 32
Symbol Definitions ... 32
Index ... 33

Table of Contents iii

#### Introduction

WARNING See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other important information. Always consult your physician before you begin or modify any exercise program.

##### Device Overview

À LIGHT

Select to turn the backlight on and off. Hold to view the controls menu. Hold to turn the device on. Á Select to view the activity list and start or stop an activity. Select to choose an option in a menu.

Â BACK LAP

Select to return to the previous screen.
Select to record a lap, rest, or transition during an activity.

Ã DOWN

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus.
Hold to view the watch face from any screen.
Ä
UP
MENU
Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus.
Hold to view the menu.

Viewing the Controls Menu The controls menu contains shortcut menu options, such as turning on do not disturb mode, locking the keys, and turning the device off. NOTE: You can add, reorder, and remove the shortcut menu options in the controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page 23). 1 From any screen, hold LIGHT.

##### 2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the options.

Viewing Widgets Your device comes preloaded with several widgets, and more are available when you pair your device with a smartphone.

• Select UP or DOWN. The device scrolls through the widget loop.
• Select to view additional options and functions for a widget.
• From any screen, hold DOWN to return to the watch face.
• If you are recording an activity, select BACK to return to the activity data pages.
Charging the Device
WARNING
This device contains a lithium-ion battery. See the Important
Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for
product warnings and other important information.
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion, thoroughly clean and dry the contacts and
the surrounding area before charging or connecting to a
computer. Refer to the cleaning instructions in the appendix.
1 Plug the small end of the USB cable into the charging port on
your device.
2 Plug the large end of the USB cable into a USB port on your
computer.
3 Charge the device completely.

Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device To use the connected features of the fēnix device, it must be paired directly through the Garmin Connect ™ Mobile app, instead of from the Bluetooth

®

settings on your smartphone.
1 From the app store on your smartphone, install and open the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
2 Bring your smartphone within 10 m (33 ft.) of your device.
3 Hold LIGHT to turn on the device.
The first time you turn on the device, it is in pairing mode.
TIP: You can hold LIGHT and select to manually enter
pairing mode.
4 Select an option to add your device to your Garmin Connect
account:
• If this is the first time you are pairing a device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, follow the on-screen instructions.
• If you already paired another device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the settings menu, select Garmin Devices > Add Device, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Product Updates
On your computer, install Garmin Express ™ (www.garmin.com
/express). On your smartphone, install the Garmin Connect
Mobile app.
This provides easy access to these services for Garmin

®

devices:

• Software updates
• Data uploads to Garmin Connect
• Product registration

Introduction 1

Setting Up Garmin Express
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

#### Activities

Your device can be used for indoor, outdoor, athletic, and fitness activities. When you start an activity, the device displays and records sensor data. You can save activities and share them with the Garmin Connect community. You can also add Connect IQ ™ activity apps to your device using your Garmin Connect account (Connect IQ Features, page 18). For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.

Starting an Activity
When you start an activity, GPS turns on automatically (if
required). When you stop the activity, the device returns to
watch mode.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 If necessary, follow the on-screen instructions to enter
additional information.
4 If necessary, wait while the device connects to your ANT+ ®
sensors.
5 If the activity requires GPS, go outside, and wait while the
device locates satellites.
6 Select to start the timer.
NOTE: The device does not record your activity data until
you start the timer.

Tips for Recording Activities

• Charge the device before starting an activity (Charging the Device, page 1).
• Select LAP to record laps.
• Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Stopping an Activity 1 Select . 2 Select an option:

• To resume your activity, select Resume.
• To save the activity and return to watch mode, select Save.
• To suspend your activity and resume it at a later time, select Resume Later.
• To mark a lap, select Lap.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select Back to Start > TracBack. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity, select Back to Start > Straight Line. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To discard the activity and return to watch mode, select Discard.

NOTE: After stopping the activity, the device saves it automatically after 25 minutes.

Creating a Custom Activity 1 From the watch face, select > Add.

2 Select an option:

• Select Copy Activity to create your custom activity starting from one of your saved activities.
• Select Other to create a new custom activity. 3 If necessary, select an activity type. 4 Select a name or enter a custom name.
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select an accent color or customize the data screens.
• Select Done to save and use the custom activity. 6 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Duplicate activity names include a number, for example: Bike(2). 5 Select an option:

Indoor Activities The fēnix device can be used for training indoors, such as running on an indoor track or using a stationary bike. GPS is turned off for indoor activities. When running or walking with GPS turned off, speed, distance, and cadence are calculated using the accelerometer in the device. The accelerometer is self-calibrating. The accuracy of the speed, distance, and cadence data improves after a few outdoor runs or walks using GPS. TIP: Holding the handrails of the treadmill reduces accuracy. You can use an optional foot pod to record pace, distance, and cadence. When cycling with GPS turned off, speed and distance are not available unless you have an optional sensor that sends speed and distance data to the device (such as a speed or cadence sensor).

Outdoor Activities The fēnix device comes preloaded with apps for outdoor activities, such as running, hiking, and open water swimming. GPS is turned on for outdoor activities. You can add apps using default profiles, such as walking and tactical. You can also add custom sport apps to your device (Creating a Custom Activity, page 2).

Viewing Your Ski Runs
Your device records the details of each skiing or snowboarding
run using the auto run feature. This feature is turned on by
default for downhill skiing and snowboarding. It automatically
records new ski runs based on your movement. The timer
pauses when you stop moving downhill and when you are on a
chairlift. The timer remains paused during the chairlift ride. You
can start moving downhill to restart the timer. You can view run
details from the paused screen or while the timer is running.
1 Start a skiing or snowboarding activity.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select View Runs.
4 Select UP and DOWN to view details of your last run, your
current run, and your total runs.
The run screens include time, distance traveled, maximum
speed, average speed, and total descent.

Using the Metronome The metronome feature plays tones at a steady rhythm to help you improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or more consistent cadence. NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity. 2 Activities

4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Metronome > Status > On.
6 Select an option:

• Select Beats / Minute to enter a value based on the cadence you want to maintain.
• Select Alert Frequency to customize the frequency of the beats.
• Select Sounds to customize the metronome tone and vibration. 7 If necessary, select Preview to listen to the metronome feature before you run. 8 Hold DOWN to return to the clock. 9 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2).
The metronome starts automatically.
10During your run, select UP or DOWN to view the metronome
screen.
11If necessary, hold MENU to change the metronome settings.

Jumpmaster

WARNING The jumpmaster feature is for use by experienced skydivers only. The jumpmaster feature should not be used as a primary skydiving altimeter. Failure to input the appropriate jump related information can lead to serious personal injury or death. The jumpmaster feature follows military guidelines for calculating the high altitude release point (HARP). The device detects automatically when you have jumped to begin navigating toward the desired impact point (DIP) using the barometer and electronic compass.

Multisport Triathletes, duathletes, and other multisport competitors can take advantage of the multisport activities, such as Triathlon or Swimrun. During a multisport activity, you can transition between activities and continue to view your total time and distance. For example, you can switch from biking to running and view your total time and distance for biking and running throughout the multisport activity. You can customize a multisport activity, or you can use the default triathlon activity set up for a standard triathlon.

Creating a Multisport Activity
1 From the watch face, select > Add > Multisport.
2 Select a multisport activity type, or enter a custom name.
Duplicate activity names include a number, for example:
Triathlon(2).
3 Select two or more activity profiles.
4 Select an option:
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select whether to include transitions.
• Select Done to save and use the multisport activity. 5 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities

• Select to start your first activity.
• Select LAP to transition to the next activity. If transitions are turned on, the transition time is recorded separately from the activity times.
• If necessary, select LAP to start the next activity.
• Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

##### Swimming

NOTICE The device is intended for surface swimming. Scuba diving with the device may damage the product and will void the warranty. NOTE: The device cannot record heart rate data while swimming. NOTE: The device is compatible with the HRM-Tri ™ accessory and the HRM-Swim ™ accessory (Heart Rate While Swimming, page 5).

Swim Terminology Length: One trip down the pool. Interval: One or more consecutive lengths. A new interval starts after a rest. Stroke: A stroke is counted every time your arm wearing the device completes a full cycle. Swolf: Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one pool length and the number of strokes for that length. For example, 30 seconds plus 15 strokes equals a swolf score of 45. For open water swimming, swolf is calculated over 25 meters. Swolf is a measurement of swimming efficiency and, like golf, a lower score is better.

Stroke Types
Stroke type identification is available only for pool swimming.
Your stroke type is identified at the end of a length. Stroke types
appear when you are viewing interval history. You can also
select stroke type as a custom data field (Customizing the Data
Screens, page 19).
Free Freestyle
Back Backstroke
Breast Breaststroke
Fly Butterfly
Mixed More than one stroke type in an interval
Drill Used with drill logging (Training with the Drill Log, page 3)

Tips for Swimming Activities

• Before starting a pool swimming activity, follow the on-screen instructions to select your pool size or enter a custom size.
• Select LAP to record a rest during pool swimming. The device automatically records swim intervals and lengths for pool swimming.
• Select LAP to record an interval during open water swimming.
Resting During Pool Swimming
The default rest screen displays two rest timers. It also displays
time and distance for the last completed interval.
NOTE: Swim data is not recorded during a rest.
1 During your swim activity, select LAP to start a rest.
The display reverses to white text on a black background,
and the rest screen appears.
2 During a rest, select UP or DOWN to view other data screens
(optional).
3 Select LAP, and continue swimming.
4 Repeat for additional rest intervals.

Training with the Drill Log The drill log feature is available only for pool swimming. You can use the drill log feature to manually record kick sets, one-arm swimming, or any type of swimming that is not one of the four major strokes. 1 During your pool swim activity, select UP or DOWN to view the drill log screen. 2 Select LAP to start the drill timer. Activities 3

3 After you complete a drill interval, select LAP.
The drill timer stops, but the activity timer continues to record
the entire swim session.
4 Select a distance for the completed drill.
Distance increments are based on the pool size selected for
the activity profile.
5 Select an option:
• To start another drill interval, select LAP.
• To start a swim interval, select UP or DOWN to return to the swim training screens.
Golfing
Playing Golf
Before you play a course for the first time, you must download it
from the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Garmin Connect,
page 17). Courses downloaded from the Garmin Connect
Mobile app are updated automatically.
Before you play golf, you should charge the device (Charging
the Device, page 1).
1 From the watch face, select > Golf.
2 Go outside, and wait while the device locates satellites.
3 Select a course from the list of available courses.
4 Select Yes to keep score.
5 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
The device automatically transitions when you move to the
next hole.
6 After you complete your activity, select > End Round >
Yes.

Hole Information Because pin locations change, the device calculates the distance to the front, middle, and back of the green, but not the actual pin location.

À Current hole number
Á Distance to the back of the green
Â Distance to the middle of the green
Ã Distance to the front of the green
Ä Par for the hole
Next hole
Previous hole
Moving the Flag
You can take a closer look at the green and move the pin
location.
1 From the hole information screen, select > Move Flag.
2 Select UP or DOWN to move the pin position.
3 Select .
The distances on the hole information screen are updated to
show the new pin location. The pin location is saved for only
the current round.

Measuring a Shot 1 Take a shot, and watch where your ball lands.

2 Select > Measure Shot.
3 Walk or drive to your ball.
The distance automatically resets when you move to the next
hole.
4 If necessary, select Reset to reset the distance at any time.
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances
You can view a list of layup and dogleg distances for par 4 and 5
holes.
Select > Layups.
Each layup and the distance until you reach each layup
appear on the screen.
NOTE: Distances are removed from the list as you pass
them.
Keeping Score
1 From the hole information screen, select > Scorecard.
The scorecard appears when you are on the green.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the score.
Your total score is updated.
Updating a Score
1 From the hole information screen, select > Scorecard.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to change the score for that hole.
Your total score is updated.
TruSwing ™

The TruSwing feature allows you to view swing metrics recorded from your TruSwing device. Go to www.garmin.com/golf to purchase a TruSwing device.

Using the Golf Odometer
You can use the odometer to record the time, distance, and
steps traveled. The odometer automatically starts and stops
when you start or end a round.
1 Select > Odometer.
2 If necessary, select Reset to reset the odometer to zero.
Tracking Statistics
The Stat Tracking feature enables detailed statistics tracking
while playing golf.
1 From the hole information screen, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Stat Tracking to enable tracking statistics.

#### Heart Rate Features

The fēnix 5/5S device has a wrist-based heart rate monitor and is also compatible with ANT+ and Bluetooth chest heart rate monitors (sold separately). You can view wrist-based heart rate data on the heart rate widget. If both wrist-based heart rate and chest heart rate data are available, your device uses the chest heart rate data.

Wrist-based Heart Rate Wearing the Device and Heart Rate

• Wear the fēnix 5/5S device above your wrist bone. NOTE: The device should be snug but comfortable, and it should not move while running or exercising.

NOTE: The heart rate sensor is located on the back of the device.

• See Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data, page 5 for more information about wrist-based heart rate.
• For more information about the accuracy of wrist-based heart rate, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try
these tips.
• Clean and dry your arm before putting on the device.
• Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect repellent under the device.
• Avoid scratching the heart rate sensor on the back of the device.
• Wear the device above your wrist bone. The device should be snug but comfortable.
• Wait until the icon is solid before starting your activity.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes and get a heart rate reading before starting your activity. NOTE: In cold environments, warm up indoors.
• Rinse the device with fresh water after each workout.
• While exercising, use a silicone band.
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget
The widget displays your current heart rate in beats per minute
(bpm), your resting heart rate for today, and a graph of your
heart rate for the last 4 hours.
1 From the watch face, select DOWN.
2 Select to view your average resting heart rate values for
the last 7 days.

Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices You can broadcast your heart rate data from your fēnix 5/5S device and view it on paired Garmin devices. For example, you can broadcast your heart rate data to an Edge

®

device while cycling, or to a VIRB

®

action camera during an activity. NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery life. 1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options. 3 Select an option:

• Select Broadcast Heart Rate to start broadcasting heart rate data now.
• Select Broadcast During Activity to broadcast heart rate during timed activities (Starting an Activity, page 2).

The fēnix 5/5S device starts broadcasting your heart rate data, and appears.

NOTE: You can view only the heart rate widget while broadcasting heart rate data. 4 Pair your fēnix 5/5S device with your Garmin ANT+ compatible device. NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin compatible device. See your owner's manual. TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, select any key, and select Yes.

Turning Off the Wrist Heart Rate Monitor The default value for the Wrist Heart Rate setting is Auto. The device automatically uses the wrist-based heart rate monitor unless you pair an ANT+ heart rate monitor to the device. 1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options > Status > Off.

Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor
You should wear the heart rate monitor directly on your skin, just
below your sternum. It should be snug enough to stay in place
during your activity.
1 If necessary, attach the strap extender to the heart rate
monitor.
2 Wet the electrodes À on the back of the heart rate monitor to
create a strong connection between your chest and the
transmitter.

3 Wear the heart rate monitor with the Garmin logo facing right side up.

The loop Á and hook Â connection should be on your right side. 4 Wrap the heart rate monitor around your chest, and connect the strap hook to the loop. NOTE: Make sure the care tag does not fold over. After you put on the heart rate monitor, it is active and sending data.

Pool Swimming

NOTICE Hand wash the heart rate monitor after exposure to chlorine or other pool chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the heart rate monitor. The HRM-Tri accessory is designed primarily for open water swimming, but it can be used occasionally for pool swimming. The heart rate monitor should be worn under a swim suit or triathlon top during pool swimming. Otherwise, it may slide down your chest when pushing off the pool wall.

Heart Rate While Swimming NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate is not available while swimming. The HRM-Tri accessory and the HRM-Swim accessory record and store your heart rate data while swimming. Heart rate data

Heart Rate Features 5

is not visible on compatible fēnix devices while the heart rate monitor is underwater. You must start a timed activity on your paired fēnix device to view stored heart rate data later. During rest intervals when out of the water, the heart rate monitor sends your heart rate data to your fēnix device. Your fēnix device automatically downloads stored heart rate data when you save your timed swim activity. Your heart rate monitor must be out of the water, active, and within range of the device (3 m) while data is downloaded. You can review your heart rate data in the device history and on your Garmin Connect account.

Data Storage The heart rate monitor can store up to 20 hours of data in a single activity. When the heart rate monitor memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten. You can start a timed activity on your paired fēnix device, and the heart rate monitor records your heart rate data even if you move away from your device. For example, you can record heart rate data during fitness activities or team sports where watches cannot be worn. Your heart rate monitor automatically sends your stored heart rate data to your fēnix device when you save your activity. Your heart rate monitor must be active and within range (3 m) of the device while data is uploaded.

Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try
these tips.
• Reapply water to the electrodes and contact patches (if applicable).
• Tighten the strap on your chest.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes.
• Follow the care instructions (Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor, page 6).
• Wear a cotton shirt or thoroughly wet both sides of the strap. Synthetic fabrics that rub or flap against the heart rate monitor can create static electricity that interferes with heart rate signals.
• Move away from sources that can interfere with your heart rate monitor. Sources of interference may include strong electromagnetic fields, some 2.4 GHz wireless sensors, high-voltage power lines, electric motors, ovens, microwave ovens, 2.4 GHz cordless phones, and wireless LAN access points.
Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor
NOTICE
A buildup of sweat and salt on the strap can decrease the ability
of the heart rate monitor to report accurate data.
• Rinse the heart rate monitor after every use.
• Hand wash the heart rate monitor after every seven uses or one pool swim, using a tiny amount of mild detergent, such as dishwashing liquid. NOTE: Using too much detergent may damage the heart rate monitor.
• Do not put the heart rate monitor in a washing machine or dryer.

• When drying the heart rate monitor, hang it up or lay it flat.

Running Dynamics You can use your compatible fēnix device paired with the HRM-Tri accessory or other running dynamics accessory to provide real-time feedback about your running form. If your fēnix device was packaged with the HRM-Tri accessory, the devices are already paired. The running dynamics accessory has an accelerometer that measures torso movement in order to calculate six running metrics. Cadence: Cadence is the number of steps per minute. It displays the total steps (right and left combined). Vertical oscillation: Vertical oscillation is your bounce while running. It displays the vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters. Ground contact time: Ground contact time is the amount of time in each step that you spend on the ground while running. It is measured in milliseconds. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance are not available while walking. Ground contact time balance: Ground contact time balance displays the left/right balance of your ground contact time while running. It displays a percentage. For example, 53.2 with an arrow pointing left or right. Stride length: Stride length is the length of your stride from one footfall to the next. It is measured in meters. Vertical ratio: Vertical ratio is the ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length. It displays a percentage. A lower number typically indicates better running form.

Training with Running Dynamics Before you can view running dynamics, you must put on a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Tri accessory, and pair it with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24). If your fēnix 5/5S was packaged with the accessory, the devices are already paired, and the fēnix 5/5S is set to display running dynamics data screens. 1 Select an option:

• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5/5S device are already paired, skip to step 7.
• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5/5S device are not already paired, complete all the steps in this procedure. 2 Hold MENU. 3 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 4 Select an activity. 5 Select the activity settings. 6 Select Data Screens > Add New. 7 Select a running dynamics data screen.
NOTE: The running dynamics screens are not available for
all activities.
8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2).
9 Select UP or DOWN to open a running dynamics screen to
view your metrics.
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data
The running dynamics screens display a color gauge for the primary metric. You can display cadence, vertical oscillation, ground
contact time, ground contact time balance, or vertical ratio as the primary metric. The color gauge shows you how your running
dynamics data compare to those of other runners. The color zones are based on percentiles.
Garmin has researched many runners of all different levels. The data values in the red or orange zones are typical for less
experienced or slower runners. The data values in the green, blue, or purple zones are typical for more experienced or faster
runners. More experienced runners tend to exhibit shorter ground contact times, lower vertical oscillation, lower vertical ratio, and

higher cadence than less experienced runners. However, taller runners typically have slightly slower cadences, longer strides, and
slightly higher vertical oscillation. Vertical ratio is your vertical oscillation divided by stride length. It is not correlated with height.
NOTE: The color gauge for ground contact time balance is different (Ground Contact Time Balance Data, page 7).
Go to www.garmin.com for more information on running dynamics. For additional theories and interpretations of running dynamics
data, you can search reputable running publications and websites.
Color Zone Percentile in Zone Cadence Range Vertical Oscillation Range Vertical Ratio Ground Contact Time Range
Purple >95 >183 spm <6.4 cm <6.1% <218 ms
Blue 70–95 174–183 spm 6.4–8.1 cm 6.1–7.4% 218–248 ms
Green 30–69 164–173 spm 8.2–9.7 cm 7.5–8.6% 249–277 ms
Orange 5–29 153–163 spm 9.8–11.5 cm 8.7–10.1% 278–308 ms
Red <5 <153 spm >11.5 cm >10.1% >308 ms

| | Purple | | >95 | | >183 spm | | | <6.4 cm | | | | | | | <6.1% | | | <218 ms | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | Blue | | 70–95 | | 174–183 spm | | | 6.4–8.1 cm | | | | | | | 6.1–7.4% | | | 218–248 ms | | | |
| | Green | | 30–69 | | 164–173 spm | | | 8.2–9.7 cm | | | | | | | 7.5–8.6% | | | 249–277 ms | | | |
| | Orange | | 5–29 | | 153–163 spm | | | 9.8–11.5 cm | | | | | | | 8.7–10.1% | | | 278–308 ms | | | |
| | Red | | <5 | | <153 spm | | | >11.5 cm | | | | | | | >10.1% | | | >308 ms | | | |

| Color Zone | | | | | Red | Orange | | | Green | | | | | | Orange | | | Red | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Symmetry | | | | | Poor | Fair | | | Good | | | | | Fair | | | | Poor | | | |
| Percent of Other Runners | | | | | 5% | 25% | | | 40% | | | | | 25% | | | | 5% | | | |

Ground Contact Time Balance Data
Ground contact time balance measures your running symmetry and appears as a percentage of your total ground contact time. For
example, 51.3% with an arrow pointing left indicates the runner is spending more time on the ground when on the left foot. If your
data screen displays both numbers, for example 48–52, 48% is the left foot and 52% is the right foot.
Color Zone Red Orange Green Orange Red
Symmetry Poor Fair Good Fair Poor
Percent of Other Runners 5% 25% 40% 25% 5%
Ground Contact Time Balance >52.2% L 50.8–52.2% L 50.7% L–50.7% R 50.8–52.2% R >52.2% R
While developing and testing running dynamics, the Garmin team found correlations between injuries and greater imbalances with
certain runners. For many runners, ground contact time balance tends to deviate further from 50–50 when running up or down hills.
Most running coaches agree that a symmetrical running form is good. Elite runners tend to have quick and balanced strides.
You can watch the color gauge or data field during your run or view the summary on your Garmin Connect account after your run.
As with the other running dynamics data, ground contact time balance is a quantitative measurement to help you learn about your
running form.

Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data If running dynamics data does not appear, you can try these tips.

• Make sure you have a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Tri accessory. Accessories with running dynamics have on the front of the module.
• Pair the running dynamics accessory with your fēnix device again, according to the instructions.
• If the running dynamics data display shows only zeros, make sure the accessory is worn right-side up. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance appears only while running. It is not calculated while walking.

VO2 max.: VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. Recovery time: The recovery time displays how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next hard workout. Training load: Training load is the sum of your excess post exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) over the last 7 days. EPOC is an estimate of how much energy it takes for your body to recover after exercise. Predicted race times: Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate and published data sources to provide a target race time based on your current state of fitness. This projection also presumes you have completed the proper training for the race. HRV stress test: The HRV (heart rate variability) stress test requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. The device records your heart rate variability while standing still for 3 minutes. It provides your overall stress level. The scale is 1 to 100, and a lower score indicates a lower stress level. Performance condition: Your performance condition is a real time assessment after 6 to 20 minutes of activity. It can be added as a data field so you can view your performance condition during the rest of your activity. It compares your real-time condition to your average fitness level. Functional threshold power (FTP): The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup to estimate your FTP. For a more accurate rating, you can conduct a guided test. Lactate threshold: Lactate threshold requires a chest heart rate monitor. Lactate threshold is the point where your muscles start to rapidly fatigue. Your device measures your lactate threshold level using heart rate data and pace.

Performance Measurements These performance measurements require a few activities using wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. The measurements are estimates that can help you track and understand your training activities and race performances. These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat.

NOTE: The estimates may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires you to complete a few activities to learn about your performance. Training status: Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period.

Turning On Performance Notifications Performance notifications are alerts that appear upon completion of your activity. You can turn on notifications for performance measurements, such as your performance condition and recovery time. Some performance notifications Heart Rate Features 7

appear when you achieve a new performance measurement,
such as a new VO2 max. estimate.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Performance
Notifications.
3 Select an option.
Automatically Detecting Performance Measurements
You can enable the device to automatically detect your
maximum heart rate, lactate threshold, and functional threshold
power (FTP) during an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Auto Detection.
3 Select an option.

Training Status Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness level and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. You can use you your training status to help plan future training and continue improving your fitness level. No status: The device needs one or two weeks of training history, including activities with VO2 max. results from running or cycling, to determine your training status. Detraining: Detraining occurs when you are training much less than usual for a week or more, and it is affecting your fitness level. You can try increasing your training load to see improvement. Recovery: Your lighter training load is allowing your body to recover, which is essential during extended periods of hard training. You can return to a higher training load when you feel ready. Maintaining: Your current training load is enough to maintain your fitness level. To see improvement, try adding more variety to your workouts or increasing your training volume. Productive: Your current training load is moving your fitness level and performance in the right direction. It is important to plan recovery periods into your training to maintain your fitness level. Peaking: Peaking means that you are in ideal race condition. Your recently reduced training load is allowing your body to recover and fully compensate for earlier training. You should plan ahead, since this peak state can only be maintained for a short time. Overreaching: Your training load is very high and counterproductive. Your body needs a rest. You should give yourself time to recover by adding lighter training to your schedule. Unproductive: Your training load is at a good level, but your fitness is decreasing. Your body may be struggling to recover, so you should pay attention to your overall health including stress, nutrition, and rest.

About VO2 Max. Estimates VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. In simple terms, VO2 max. is an indication of athletic performance and should increase as your level of fitness improves. The fēnix 5/5S device requires wrist based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display your VO2 max. estimate. The device has separate VO2 max. estimates for running and cycling. You can pair your device with a compatible power meter to display your cycling VO2 max. estimate. Your VO2 max. estimate appears as a number and position on the color gauge.

Purple Superior Blue Excellent Green Good Orange Fair Red Poor VO2 max. data and analysis is provided with permission from The Cooper Institute

®

. For more information, see the appendix
(VO2 Max. Standard Ratings, page 31), and go to
www.CooperInstitute.org.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running
This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible
chest heart rate monitor. If you are using a chest heart rate
monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your device (Pairing
ANT+ Sensors, page 24). If your fēnix 5/5S device was
packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already
paired.
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 10), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones,
page 11). The estimate may seem inaccurate at first. The
device requires a few runs to learn about your running
performance.
1 Run for at least 10 minutes outdoors.
2 After your run, select Save.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
4 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling
This feature requires a power meter and wrist-based heart rate
or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. The power meter must
be paired with your fēnix 5/5S device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors,
page 24). If you are using a chest heart rate monitor, you must
put it on and pair it with your device. If your fēnix 5/5S device
was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already
paired.
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 10) and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones,
page 11). The estimate may seem inaccurate at first. The
device requires a few rides to learn about your cycling
performance.
1 Ride at a steady, high intensity for at least 20 minutes.
2 After your ride, select Save.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
4 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.

Recovery Time You can use your Garmin device with wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next hard workout. Recovery time: The recovery time appears immediately following an activity. The time counts down until it is optimal for you to attempt another hard workout.

Viewing Your Recovery Time
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 10), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones,
page 11).
1 Go for a run.
After 6 to 20 minutes, your performance condition appears
(Viewing Your Performance Condition, page 9).
2 After your run, select Save.
The recovery time appears. The maximum time is 4 days.
NOTE: From the watch face, you can select UP or DOWN to
view the performance widget, and select to scroll through
the performance measurements to view your recovery time.

Training Load Training load is a measurement of your training volume over the last seven days. It is the sum of your EPOC measurements for the last seven days. The gauge indicates whether your current load is low, high, or within the optimal range to maintain or improve your fitness level. The optimal range is determined based on your individual fitness level and training history. The range adjusts as your training time and intensity increase or decrease.

Viewing Your Predicted Race Times
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 10), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones,
page 11).
Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate (About VO2 Max.
Estimates, page 8) and published data sources to provide a
target race time based on your current state of fitness. This
projection also presumes you have completed the proper
training for the race.
NOTE: The projections may seem inaccurate at first. The device
requires a few runs to learn about your running performance.
1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Your projected race times appear for 5K, 10K, half marathon,
and marathon distances.
Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
Stress level is the result of a three-minute test performed while
standing still, where the fēnix device analyzes heart rate
variability to determine your overall stress. Training, sleep,
nutrition, and general life stress all impact how a runner
performs. The stress level range is from 1 to 100, where 1 is a
very low stress state and 100 is a very high stress state.
Knowing your stress level can help you decide if your body is
ready for a tough training run or yoga.
Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before
you can view your heart rate variability (HRV) stress level, you
must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device
(Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24). If your fēnix 5/5S device
was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already
paired.
TIP: Garmin recommends that you measure your stress level at
approximately the same time and under the same conditions
every day.
1 If necessary, select > Add > HRV Stress to add the stress
app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > HRV Stress > .
4 Stand still, and rest for 3 minutes.

Performance Condition As you complete your activity, such as running or cycling, the performance condition feature analyzes your pace, heart rate, and heart rate variability to make a real-time assessment of your ability to perform compared to your average fitness level. Performance condition values range from -20 to +20. After the first 6 to 20 minutes of your activity, the device displays your performance condition score. For example, a score of +5 means that you are rested, fresh, and capable of a good run or ride. You can add performance condition as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your ability throughout the activity. Performance condition can also be an indicator of fatigue level, especially at the end of a long training run or ride. NOTE: The device requires a few runs or rides with a heart rate monitor to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate and learn about your running or riding ability (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 8). Viewing Your Performance Condition This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. If you are using a chest heart rate monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24). If your fēnix 5/5S device was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already paired. Your device analyzes your performance condition based on heart rate and power data. 1 Add Perform. Cond. to a data screen (Customizing the Data Screens, page 19). 2 Go for a run or ride. After 6 to 20 minutes, your performance condition appears. 3 Scroll to the data screen to view your performance condition throughout the run or ride.

Getting Your FTP Estimate
Before you can get your functional threshold power (FTP)
estimate, you must pair a chest heart rate monitor and power
meter with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24), and
you must get your VO2 max. estimate for cycling (Getting Your
VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 8).
The device uses your user profile information from the initial
setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your FTP.
1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Your FTP estimate appears as a value measured in watts per
kilogram, your power output in watts, and a position on the
color gauge.
Purple Superior
Blue Excellent
Green Good
Orange Fair
Red Untrained
For more information, see the appendix (FTP Ratings,
page 31).
NOTE: When a performance notification alerts you to a new
FTP, you can select Accept to save the new FTP, or Decline
to keep your current FTP (Turning On Performance
Notifications, page 7).
Conducting an FTP Test
Before you can conduct a test to determine your functional
threshold power (FTP), you must pair a chest heart rate monitor
and a power meter with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors,
page 24), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate for
cycling (Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 8).
1 From the watch face, select .

Heart Rate Features 9

2 Select a cycling activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > FTP Guided Test.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you begin your ride, the device displays each step
duration, the target, and current power data. A message
appears when the test is complete.
6 After you complete the guided test, complete the cool down.
Your FTP appears as a value measured in watts per
kilogram, your power output in watts, and a position on the
color gauge.
7 Select an option:
• Select Accept to save the new FTP.
• Select Decline to keep your current FTP.
Lactate Threshold
Lactate threshold is the exercise intensity at which lactate (lactic
acid) starts to accumulate in the bloodstream. In running, it is
the estimated level of effort or pace. When a runner exceeds the
threshold, fatigue starts to increase at an accelerating rate. For
experienced runners, the threshold occurs at approximately 90%
of their maximum heart rate and between 10k and half-marathon
race pace. For average runners, the lactate threshold often
occurs well below 90% of maximum heart rate. Knowing your
lactate threshold can help you determine how hard to train or
when to push yourself during a race.
If you already know your lactate threshold heart rate value, you
can enter it in your user profile settings (Setting Your Heart Rate
Zones, page 11).
Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate
Threshold
This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before
you can perform the guided test, you must put on a heart rate
monitor and pair it with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors,
page 24). You must also have a VO2 max. estimate from a
previous run (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 8).
TIP: The device requires a few runs with a chest heart rate
monitor to get an accurate maximum heart rate value and VO2
max. estimate.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an outdoor running activity.
GPS is required to complete the test.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Lactate Threshold Guided Test.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Recovery Heart Rate If you are training with wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor, you can check your recovery heart rate value after each activity. Recovery heart rate is the difference between your exercising heart rate and your heart rate two minutes after the exercise has stopped. For example, after a typical training run, you stop the timer. Your heart rate is 140 bpm. After two minutes of no activity or cool down, your heart rate is 90 bpm. Your recovery heart rate is 50 bpm (140 minus 90). Some studies have linked recovery heart rate to cardiac health. Higher numbers generally indicate healthier hearts. TIP: For best results, you should stop moving for two minutes while the device calculates your recovery heart rate value. You can save or discard the activity after this value appears.

About Training Effect Training Effect measures the impact of an activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. Training Effect accumulates during the activity. As the activity progresses, the Training Effect value increases, telling you how the activity has improved your fitness. Training Effect is determined by your user profile information, heart rate, duration, and intensity of your activity. Aerobic Training Effect uses your heart rate to measure how the accumulated intensity of an exercise affects your aerobic fitness and indicates if the workout had a maintaining or improving effect on your fitness level. Your EPOC accumulated during exercise is mapped to a range of values that account for your fitness level and training habits. Steady workouts at moderate effort or workouts involving longer intervals (>180 sec) have a positive impact on your aerobic metabolism and result in an improved aerobic Training Effect. Anaerobic Training Effect uses heart rate and speed (or power) to determine how a workout affects your ability to perform at very high intensity. You receive a value based on the anaerobic contribution to EPOC and the type of activity. Repeated high intensity intervals of 10 to 120 seconds have a highly beneficial impact on your anaerobic capability and result in an improved anaerobic Training Effect. It is important to know that your Training Effect numbers (from 0.0 to 5.0) may seem abnormally high during your first few activities. It takes several activities for the device to learn your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. Color Zone Training Effect Aerobic Benefit Anaerobic Benefit From 0.0 to 0.9 No benefit. No benefit. From 1.0 to 1.9 Minor benefit. Minor benefit. From 2.0 to 2.9 Maintains your aerobic fitness.

Maintains your anaerobic fitness.

From 3.0 to 3.9 Improves your aerobic fitness.

Improves your anaerobic fitness.

From 4.0 to 4.9 Highly improves your aerobic fitness.

Highly improves your anaerobic fitness.

5.0 Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time.

Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time. Training effect technology is provided and supported by Firstbeat Technologies Ltd. For more information, go to www.firstbeattechnologies.com.

Training Setting Up Your User Profile You can update your gender, birth year, height, weight, heart rate zone, and power zone settings. The device uses this information to calculate accurate training data. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > User Profile. 3 Select an option.

Fitness Goals Knowing your heart rate zones can help you measure and improve your fitness by understanding and applying these principles.

• Your heart rate is a good measure of exercise intensity.
• Training in certain heart rate zones can help you improve cardiovascular capacity and strength.
• Knowing your heart rate zones can prevent you from overtraining and can decrease your risk of injury.

10 Training

If you know your maximum heart rate, you can use the table (Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 11) to determine the best heart rate zone for your fitness objectives. If you do not know your maximum heart rate, use one of the calculators available on the Internet. Some gyms and health centers can provide a test that measures maximum heart rate. The default maximum heart rate is 220 minus your age.

About Heart Rate Zones
Many athletes use heart rate zones to measure and increase
their cardiovascular strength and improve their level of fitness. A
heart rate zone is a set range of heartbeats per minute. The five
commonly accepted heart rate zones are numbered from 1 to 5
according to increasing intensity. Generally, heart rate zones are
calculated based on percentages of your maximum heart rate.
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones
The device uses your user profile information from the initial
setup to determine your default heart rate zones. You can set
separate heart rate zones for sport profiles, such as running,
cycling, and swimming. For the most accurate calorie data
during your activity, set your maximum heart rate. You can also
set each heart rate zone and enter your resting heart rate
manually. You can manually adjust your zones on the device or
using your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Heart Rate.
3 Select Max. HR, and enter your maximum heart rate.
You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically
record your maximum heart rate during an activity
(Automatically Detecting Performance Measurements,
page 8).
4 Select LTHR > Enter Manually, and enter your lactate
threshold heart rate.
You can perform a guided test to estimate your lactate
threshold (Lactate Threshold, page 10).
5 Select Resting HR, and enter your resting heart rate.
You can use the average resting heart rate based on your
user profile information, or you can set a custom resting heart
rate.
6 Select Zones > Based On.
7 Select an option:
• Select BPM to view and edit the zones in beats per minute.
• Select %Max. HR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Select %HRR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate).
• Select %LTHR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your lactate threshold heart rate. 8 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 9 Select Add Sport Heart Rate, and select a sport profile to add separate heart rate zones (optional). 10Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add sport heart rate zones (optional). Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones The default settings allow the device to detect your maximum heart rate and set your heart rate zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Verify that your user profile settings are accurate (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 10).
• Run often with the wrist or chest heart rate monitor.
• Try a few heart rate training plans, available from your Garmin Connect account.
• View your heart rate trends and time in zones using your Garmin Connect account.
Heart Rate Zone Calculations
Zone % of
Maximum
Heart Rate

Perceived Exertion Benefits

1 50–60% Relaxed, easy pace, rhythmic breathing

Beginning-level aerobic training, reduces stress

2 60–70% Comfortable pace, slightly deeper breathing, conversation possible

Basic cardiovascular training, good recovery pace

3 70–80% Moderate pace, more difficult to hold conversation

Improved aerobic capacity, optimal cardiovascular training

4 80–90% Fast pace and a bit uncomfortable, breathing forceful

Improved anaerobic capacity and threshold, improved speed

5 90–100% Sprinting pace, unsustainable for long period of time, labored breathing

Anaerobic and muscular endurance, increased power

About Lifetime Athletes A lifetime athlete is an individual who has trained intensely for many years (with the exception of minor injuries) and has a resting heart rate of 60 beats per minute (bpm) or less.

Setting Your Power Zones
The values for the zones are default values and may not match
your personal abilities. If you know your functional threshold
power (FTP) value, you can enter it and allow the software to
calculate your power zones automatically. You can manually
adjust your zones on the device or using your Garmin Connect
account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Power Zones > Based On.
3 Select an option:
• Select Watts to view and edit the zones in watts.
• Select % FTP to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your functional threshold power. 4 Select FTP, and enter your FTP value. 5 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 6 If necessary, select Minimum, and enter a minimum power value.

Activity Tracking The activity tracking feature records your daily step count, distance traveled, intensity minutes, floors climbed, calories burned, and sleep statistics for each recorded day. Your calories burned includes your base metabolism plus activity calories. The number of steps taken during the day appears on the steps widget. The step count is updated periodically.

Auto Goal Your device creates a daily step goal automatically, based on your previous activity levels. As you move during the day, the device shows your progress toward your daily goal À.

Training 11

If you choose not to use the auto goal feature, you can set a personalized step goal on your Garmin Connect account.

Using the Move Alert Sitting for prolonged periods of time can trigger undesirable metabolic state changes. The move alert reminds you to keep moving. After one hour of inactivity, Move! and the red bar appear. Additional segments appear after every 15 minutes of inactivity. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 23). Go for a short walk (at least a couple of minutes) to reset the move alert.

Sleep Tracking
While you are sleeping, the device monitors your movement.
Sleep statistics include total hours of sleep, sleep levels, and
sleep movement. You can set your normal sleep hours in the
user settings on your Garmin Connect account. You can view
your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account.
Using Automated Sleep Tracking
1 Wear your device while sleeping.
2 Upload your sleep tracking data to the Garmin Connect site
(Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile,
page 17).
You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect
account.
Using Do Not Disturb Mode
You can use do not disturb mode to turn off the backlight and
vibration alerts. For example, you can use this mode while
sleeping or watching a movie.
NOTE: You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings
on your Garmin Connect account. You can enable the Sleep
Time option in the system settings to automatically enter do not
disturb mode during your normal sleep hours (System Settings,
page 23).
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
Intensity Minutes
To improve your health, organizations such as the U.S. Centers
for Disease Control and Prevention, the American Heart
Association

®

, and the World Health Organization, recommend at least 150 minutes per week of moderate intensity activity, such as brisk walking, or 75 minutes per week of vigorous intensity activity, such as running. The device monitors your activity intensity and tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous intensity activities (heart rate data is required to quantify vigorous intensity). You can work toward achieving your weekly intensity minutes goal by participating in at least 10 consecutive minutes of moderate to vigorous intensity activities. The device adds the amount of moderate activity minutes with the amount of vigorous activity minutes. Your total vigorous intensity minutes are doubled when added. Earning Intensity Minutes Your fēnix 5/5S device calculates intensity minutes by comparing your heart rate data during an activity to your average resting heart rate. If heart rate is turned off, the device calculates moderate intensity minutes by analyzing your steps per minute.

• Start a timed activity for the most accurate calculation of intensity minutes.
• Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or vigorous intensity level.

Garmin Move IQ ™ Events The Move IQ feature automatically detects activity patterns, such as walking, running, biking, swimming, and elliptical training, for at least 10 minutes. You can view the event type and duration on your Garmin Connect timeline, but they do not appear in your activities list, snapshots, or newsfeed. For more detail and accuracy, you can record a timed activity on your device.

Activity Tracking Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Activity Tracking.
Status: Turns off the activity tracking feature.
Move Alert: Displays a message and the move bar on the
digital watch face and steps screen. The device also beeps
or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings,
page 23).
Goal Alerts: Allows you to turn on and off goal alerts. Goal
alerts appear for your daily steps goal, daily floors climbed
goal, and weekly intensity minutes goal.
Move IQ: Allows you to turn on and off Move IQ events.
Turning Off Activity Tracking
When you turn off activity tracking, your steps, floors climbed,
intensity minutes, sleep tracking, and Move IQ events are not
recorded.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activity Tracking > Status > Off.

Workouts You can create custom workouts that include goals for each workout step and for varied distances, times, and calories. You can create workouts using Garmin Connect or select a training plan that has built-in workouts from Garmin Connect, and transfer them to your device. You can schedule workouts using Garmin Connect. You can plan workouts in advance and store them on your device.

Following a Workout From the Web
Before you can download a workout from Garmin Connect, you
must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin Connect,
page 17).
1 Connect the device to your computer.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com.
3 Create and save a new workout.
4 Select Send to Device, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
5 Disconnect the device.
Starting a Workout
Before you can start a workout, you must download a workout
from your Garmin Connect account.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > My Workouts.
5 Select a workout.
6 Select Do Workout.
7 Select to start the timer.

12 Training

After you begin a workout, the device displays each step of the workout, step notes (optional), the target (optional), and the current workout data.

About the Training Calendar
The training calendar on your device is an extension of the
training calendar or schedule you set up in Garmin Connect.
After you have added a few workouts to the Garmin Connect
calendar, you can send them to your device. All scheduled
workouts sent to the device appear in the training calendar list
by date. When you select a day in the training calendar, you can
view or do the workout. The scheduled workout stays on your
device whether you complete it or skip it. When you send
scheduled workouts from Garmin Connect, they overwrite the
existing training calendar.
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans
Before you can download and use a training plan from Garmin
Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin
Connect, page 17).
You can browse Garmin Connect to find a training plan,
schedule workouts and courses, and download the plan to your
device.
1 Connect the device to your computer.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com.
3 Select and schedule a training plan.
4 Review the training plan in your calendar.
5 Select , and follow the on-screen instructions.

Interval Workouts You can create interval workouts based on distance or time. The device saves your custom interval workout until you create another interval workout. You can use open intervals for track workouts and when you are running a known distance.

Creating an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Edit > Interval > Type.
5 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
TIP: You can create an open-ended interval by selecting the
Open option.
6 Select Duration, enter a distance or time interval value for
the workout, and select .
7 Select BACK.
8 Select Rest > Type.
9 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
10If necessary, enter a distance or time value for the rest
interval, and select .
11Select BACK.
12Select one or more options:
• To set the number of repetitions, select Repeat.
• To add an open-ended warm up to your workout, select Warm Up > On.
• To add an open-ended cool down to your workout, select Cool Down > On.

Starting an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Do Workout.
5 Select to start the timer.

6 When your interval workout has a warm up, select LAP to
begin the first interval.
7 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you complete all of the intervals, a message appears.

Stopping an Interval Workout

• At any time, select LAP to end an interval.
• At any time, select to stop the timer.
• If you added a cool down to your interval workout, select LAP to end the interval workout.
Segments
You can send running or cycling segments from your Garmin
Connect account to your device. After a segment is saved to
your device, you can race a segment, trying to match or exceed
your personal record or other participants who have raced the
segment.
NOTE: When you download a course from your Garmin
Connect account, all segments in the course are downloaded
automatically.

##### Using Virtual Partner

®

Your Virtual Partner is a training tool designed to help you meet
your goals. You can set a pace for the Virtual Partner and race
against it.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Virtual Partner.
6 Enter a pace or speed value.
7 Start your activity (Starting an Activity, page 2).
8 Select UP or DOWN to scroll to the Virtual Partner screen
and see who is leading.
Setting a Training Target
The training target feature works with the Virtual Partner feature
so you can train toward a set distance, distance and time,
distance and pace, or distance and speed goal. During your
training activity, the device gives you real-time feedback about
how close you are to achieving your training target.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Set a Target.
5 Select an option:
• Select Distance Only to select a preset distance or enter a custom distance.
• Select Distance and Time to select a distance and time target.
• Select Distance and Pace or Distance and Speed to select a distance and pace or speed target.

The training target screen appears and displays your estimated finish time. The estimated finish time is based on your current performance and the time remaining. 6 Select to start the timer.

Cancelling a Training Target 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Cancel Target > Yes.

Training 13

Racing a Previous Activity
You can race a previously recorded or downloaded activity. This
feature works with the Virtual Partner feature so you can see
how far ahead or behind you are during the activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Race an Activity.
5 Select an option:
• Select From History to select a previously recorded activity from your device.
• Select Downloaded to select an activity you downloaded from your Garmin Connect account. 6 Select the activity.

The Virtual Partner screen appears indicating your estimated finish time. 7 Select to start the timer. 8 After you complete your activity, select > Save.

Personal Records When you complete an activity, the device displays any new personal records you achieved during that activity. Personal records include your fastest time over several typical race distances and longest run or ride. NOTE: For cycling, personal records also include most ascent and best power (power meter required).

Viewing Your Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record.
5 Select View Record.

Restoring a Personal Record
You can set each personal record back to the one previously
recorded.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to restore.
5 Select Previous > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing a Personal Record
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to delete.
5 Select Clear Record > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing All Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select Clear All Records > Yes.
The records are deleted for that sport only.

#### Clock

Setting an Alarm
You can set up to ten separate alarms. You can set each alarm
to sound once or to repeat regularly.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock > Add Alarm.
3 Select Time, and enter the alarm time.
4 Select Repeat, and select when the alarm should repeat
(optional).
5 Select Sounds, and select a type of notification (optional).
6 Select Backlight > On to turn on the backlight with the alarm.
Starting the Countdown Timer
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Timer.
3 Enter the time.
4 If necessary, select Restart > On to automatically restart the
timer after it expires.
5 If necessary, select Sounds, and select a type of notification.
6 Select Start Timer.

Using the Stopwatch
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Stopwatch.
3 Select to start the timer.
4 Select DOWN to restart the lap timerÀ.

The total stopwatch time Á continues running. 5 Select to stop both timers. 6 Select DOWN to reset both timers.

Setting Sunrise and Sunset Alerts
You can set the sunrise and sunset alerts to sound a specific
number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise or sunset
occurs.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alerts.
3 Select an option:
• Select Til Sunset > Status > On.
• Select Til Sunrise > Status > On. 4 Select Time, and enter the time.
Syncing the Time with GPS
Each time you turn on the device and acquire satellites, the
device automatically detects your time zones and the current
time of day. You can also manually sync the time with GPS
when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving
time.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Sync With GPS.

14 Clock

3 Wait while the device locates satellites (Acquiring Satellite Signals, page 26).

Navigation Saving Your Location You can save your current location to navigate back to it later. 1 Hold LIGHT. 2 Select . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Editing Your Saved Locations
You can delete a saved location or edit its name, elevation, and
position information.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Saved
Locations.
2 Select a saved location.
3 Select an option to edit the location.
Deleting All Saved Locations
You can delete all of your saved locations at once.
From the watch face, select > Navigate > Saved
Locations > Delete All.
Projecting a Waypoint
You can create a new location by projecting the distance and
bearing from your current location to a new location.
1 If necessary, select > Add > Project Wpt. to add the
project waypoint app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > Project Wpt..
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the heading.
5 Select .
6 Select DOWN to select a unit of measure.
7 Select UP to enter the distance.
8 Select to save.
The projected waypoint is saved with a default name.
Navigating to a Destination
You can use your device to navigate to a destination or follow a
course.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate.
2 Select a category.
3 Respond to the on-screen prompts to choose a destination.
4 Select Go To.
Navigation information appears.
5 Select to begin navigation.
Creating and Following a Course on Your
Device
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Courses >
Create New.
2 Enter a name for the course, and select .
3 Select Add Location.
4 Select an option.
5 If necessary, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6 Select Done > Do Course.
Navigation information appears.
7 Select to begin navigation.
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man
Overboard Location
You can save a man overboard (MOB) location, and
automatically start navigation back to it.
TIP: You can customize the hold function of the keys to access
the MOB function (Customizing the Hot Keys, page 23).
From the watch face, select > Navigate > Last MOB.
Navigation information appears.
Navigating with Sight 'N Go
You can point the device at an object in the distance, such as a
water tower, lock in the direction, and then navigate to the
object.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Sight 'N Go.
2 Point the top of the watch at an object, and select .
Navigation information appears.
3 Select to begin navigation.

Navigating to Your Starting Point You can navigate back to the starting point of your activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled. This feature is available only for activities that use GPS. 1 During an activity, select > Back to Start. 2 Select an option:

• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select TracBack.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity in a straight line, select Straight Line.

Your current location À, the track to follow Á, and your destination Â appear on the map.

Stopping Navigation 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Stop Navigation.

Map represents your location on the map. Location names and symbols appear on the map. When you are navigating to a destination, your route is marked with a line on the map.

• Map navigation (Panning and Zooming the Map, page 15)
• Map settings (Map Settings, page 22)

Panning and Zooming the Map
1 While navigating, select UP or DOWN to view the map.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select Pan/Zoom.
4 Select an option:

• To toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming, select .
• To pan or zoom the map, select UP and DOWN.
• To quit, select BACK.

Navigation 15

Compass The device has a 3-axis compass with automatic calibration. The compass features and appearance change depending on your activity, whether GPS is enabled, and whether you are navigating to a destination. You can change the compass settings manually (Compass Settings, page 22). To open the compass settings quickly, you can select from the compass widget.

Altimeter and Barometer The device contains an internal altimeter and barometer. The device collects elevation and pressure data continuously, even in low-power mode. The altimeter displays your approximate elevation based on pressure changes. The barometer displays environmental pressure data based on the fixed elevation where the altimeter was most recently calibrated (Altimeter Settings, page 22). To open the altimeter or barometer settings quickly, select from the altimeter or barometer widgets.

#### History

History includes time, distance, calories, average pace or speed, lap data, and optional ANT+ sensor information. NOTE: When the device memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten.

Using History
History contains previous activities you have saved on your
device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select an option:
• To view additional information about the activity, select Details.
• To select a lap and view additional information about each lap, select Laps.
• To select an interval and view additional information about each interval, select Intervals.
• To view the activity on a map, select Map.
• To view the impact of the activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness, select Training Effect (About Training Effect, page 10).
• To view your time in each heart rate zone, select Time in Zone (Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone, page 16).
• To view an elevation plot of the activity, select Elevation Plot.
• To delete the selected activity, select Delete.

Multisport History Your device stores the overall multisport summary of the activity, including overall distance, time, calories, and optional accessory data. Your device also separates the activity data for each sport segment and transition so you can compare similar training activities and track how quickly you move through the transitions. Transition history includes distance, time, average speed, and calories.

Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone
Before you can view heart rate zone data, you must complete an
activity with heart rate and save the activity.
Viewing your time in each heart rate zone can help you adjust
your training intensity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.

3 Select an activity.
4 Select Time in Zone.

Viewing Data Totals
You can view the accumulated distance and time data saved to
your device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals.
3 If necessary, select an activity.
4 Select an option to view weekly or monthly totals.
Using the Odometer
The odometer automatically records the total distance traveled,
elevation gained, and time in activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals > Odometer.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view odometer totals.

Deleting History 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select History > Options. 3 Select an option:

• Select Delete All Activities to delete all activities from the history.
• Select Reset Totals to reset all distance and time totals. NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities. 4 Confirm your selection.

#### Connected Features

Connected features are available for your fēnix device when you connect the device to a compatible smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology. Some features require you to install the Garmin Connect Mobile app on the connected smartphone. Go to www.garmin.com/apps for more information. Some features are also available when you connect your device to a wireless network. Phone notifications: Displays phone notifications and messages on your fēnix device. LiveTrack: Allows friends and family to follow your races and training activities in real time. You can invite followers using email or social media, allowing them to view your live data on a Garmin Connect tracking page. Activity uploads to Garmin Connect: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Connect IQ: Allows you to extend your device features with new watch faces, widgets, apps, and data fields. Bluetooth sensors: Allows you to connect Bluetooth compatible sensors, such as a heart rate monitor. Find my phone: Locates your lost smartphone that is paired with your fēnix device and currently within range. Find my watch: Locates your lost fēnix device that is paired with your smarphone and currently within range.

Enabling Bluetooth Notifications
Before you can enable notifications, you must pair the fēnix
device with a compatible mobile device (Pairing Your
Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Smart Notifications > Status >
On.

16 History

3 Select During Activity.
4 Select a notification preference.
5 Select a sound preference.
6 Select Watch Mode.
7 Select a notification preference.
8 Select a sound preference.
9 Select Timeout.
10Select the amount of time the alert for a new notification
appears on the screen.

Viewing Notifications
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the notifications
widget.
2 Select , and select a notification.
3 Select DOWN for more options.
4 Select BACK to return to the previous screen.
Managing Notifications
You can use your compatible smartphone to manage
notifications that appear on your fēnix 5/5S device.
Select an option:
• If you are using an Apple

®

device, use the notification center settings on your smartphone to select the items to show on the device.

• If you are using an Android ™ device, use the app settings in the Garmin Connect Mobile app to select the items to show on the device.
Turning Off Bluetooth Technology
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select to turn off Bluetooth wireless technology on your
fēnix device.
Refer to the owner's manual for your mobile device to turn off
Bluetooth wireless technology on your mobile device.
Turning On and Off Bluetooth Connection Alerts
You can set the fēnix 5/5S device to alert you when your paired
smartphone connects and disconnects using Bluetooth wireless
technology.
NOTE: Bluetooth connection alerts are turned off by default.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Alerts.
Locating a Lost Mobile Device
You can use this feature to help locate a lost mobile device that
is paired using Bluetooth wireless technology and currently
within range.
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select .
The fēnix device begins searching for your paired mobile
device. An audible alert sounds on your mobile device, and
the Bluetooth signal strength displays on the fēnix device
screen. The Bluetooth signal strength increases as you move
closer to your mobile device.
3 Select BACK to stop searching.

Garmin Connect You can connect with your friends on your Garmin Connect account. Garmin Connect gives you the tools to track, analyze, share, and encourage each other. Record the events of your active lifestyle including runs, walks, rides, swims, hikes, golf games, and more. Garmin Connect is also your online statistics tracker where you can analyze and share all your rounds of golf. To sign up for a free account, go to www.garminconnect.com /start.

Store your activities: After you complete and save a timed activity with your device, you can upload that activity to your Garmin Connect account and keep it as long as you want. Analyze your data: You can view more detailed information about your fitness and outdoor activities, including time, distance, heart rate, calories burned, cadence, an overhead map view, and pace and speed charts. You can view more detailed information about your golf games, including scorecards, statistics, and course information. You can also view customizable reports.

Track your progress: You can track your daily steps, join a friendly competition with your connections, and meet your goals. Share your activities: You can connect with friends to follow each other's activities or post links to your activities on your favorite social networking sites. Manage your settings: You can customize your device and user settings on your Garmin Connect account. Access the Connect IQ store: You can download apps, watch faces, data fields, and widgets.

Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile
Before you can update your device software using the Garmin
Connect Mobile app, you must have a Garmin Connect account,
and you must pair the device with a compatible smartphone
(Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
1 Synchronize your device with the Garmin Connect Mobile
app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile,
page 17).
When new software is available, the Garmin Connect Mobile
app automatically sends the update to your device.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Updating the Software Using Garmin Express
Before you can update your device software, you must have a
Garmin Connect account, and you must download and install
the Garmin Express application.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
When new software is available, Garmin Express sends it to
your device.
2 Disconnect the device from your computer.
Your device alerts you to update the software.
3 Select an option.
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer
If you have not paired your fēnix device with your smartphone,
you can upload all of your activity data to your Garmin Connect
account using your computer.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com/start.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile 1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu. 2 Select . Connected Features 17

##### Wi‑Fi

®

Connected Features Some fēnix 5/5S models have Wi‑Fi connected features. The Garmin Connect Mobile app is not required for you to use Wi‑Fi connectivity. Activity uploads to your Garmin Connect account: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Workouts and training plans: Allows you to browse for and select workouts and training plans on the Garmin Connect site. The next time your device has a Wi‑Fi connection, the files are wirelessly sent to your device. Software updates: Your device downloads the latest software update when a Wi‑Fi connection is available. The next time you turn on or unlock the device, you can follow the on screen instructions to install the software update.

Setting Up Wi‑Fi Connectivity
1 Go to www.garminconnect.com/start, and download the
Garmin Express application.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up Wi‑Fi connectivity
with Garmin Express.

Connect IQ Features You can add Connect IQ features to your watch from Garmin and other providers using the Garmin Connect Mobile app. You can customize your device with watch faces, data fields, widgets, and apps. Watch Faces: Allow you to customize the appearance of the clock. Data Fields: Allow you to download new data fields that present sensor, activity, and history data in new ways. You can add Connect IQ data fields to built-in features and pages. Widgets: Provide information at a glance, including sensor data and notifications. Apps: Add interactive features to your watch, such as new outdoor and fitness activity types.

Downloading Connect IQ Features
Before you can download Connect IQ features from the Garmin
Connect Mobile app, you must pair your fēnix 5/5S device with
your smartphone.
1 From the settings in the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select
Connect IQ Store.
2 If necessary, select your device.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Downloading Connect IQ Features Using
Your Computer
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to garminconnect.com and sign in.
3 From your devices widget, select Connect IQ Store.
4 Select a Connect IQ feature, and download it.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.

#### Customizing Your Device

Widgets Your device comes preloaded with widgets that provide at-a glance information. Some widgets require a Bluetooth connection to a compatible smartphone.

Some widgets are not visible by default. You can add them to the widget loop manually. Notifications: Alerts you to incoming calls, texts, social network updates, and more, based on your smartphone notification settings. Calendar: Displays upcoming meetings from your smartphone calendar. Music controls: Provides music player controls for your smartphone. Weather: Displays the current temperature and weather forecast. My day: Displays a dynamic summary of your activity today. The metrics include your last recorded activity, intensity minutes, floors climbed, steps, calories burned, and more. Steps: Tracks your daily step count, step goal, and distance traveled. Intensity minutes: Tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous activities, your weekly intensity minutes goal, and progress toward your goal. Heart rate: Displays your current heart rate in beats per minute (bpm), lowest resting heart rate (RHR) for today, and a graph of your heart rate. Performance: Displays your current training status, training load, VO2 max. estimates, recovery time, FTP estimate, lactate threshold, and predicted race times. Last sport: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded sport and your total distance for the week. ABC: Displays combined altimeter, barometer, and compass information. Sensor information: Displays information from an internal sensor or a connected ANT+ sensor. VIRB controls: Provides camera controls when you have a VIRB device paired with your fēnix device. Last activity: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded activity, such as your last run, last ride, or last swim. Calories: Displays your calorie information for the current day. Golf: Displays golf information for your last round. Floors climbed: Tracks your floors climbed and progress toward your goal. Dog tracking: Displays your dog's location information when you have a compatible dog tracking device paired with your fēnix device.

Customizing the Widget Loop
You can change the order of widgets in the widget loop, remove
widgets, and add new widgets.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Widgets.
3 Select a widget.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the widget in the widget loop.
• Select Remove to remove the widget from the widget loop. 5 Select Add Widgets. 6 Select a widget.

The widget is added to the widget loop.

VIRB Remote The VIRB remote function allows you to control your VIRB action camera using your device. Go to www.garmin.com/VIRB to purchase a VIRB action camera.

18 Connect IQ Features

Controlling a VIRB Action Camera
Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable
the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series
Owner's Manual for more information. You must also set the
VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the
Widget Loop, page 18).
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch
face to view the VIRB widget.
3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
4 Select .
5 Select an option:
• To record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
• To change video and photo settings, select Settings. Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series Owner's Manual for more information. You must also set the VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the Widget Loop, page 18). 1 Turn on your VIRB camera. 2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch face to view the VIRB widget. 3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
• To control the camera using the activity timer, select Settings > Timer Start/Stop. NOTE: Video recording automatically starts and stops when you start and stop an activity.
• To control the camera using the menu options, select Settings > Manual.
• To manually record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To manually stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.

When the camera is connected, a VIRB data screen is automatically added to the activity apps. 4 During an activity, select UP or DOWN to view the VIRB data screen. 5 Hold MENU. 6 Select VIRB Remote. 7 Select an option:

Activities and App Settings
These settings allow you to customize each preloaded activity
app based on your needs. For example, you can customize data
pages and enable alerts and training features. Not all settings
are available for all activity types.
Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an
activity, and select the activity settings.
Data Screens: Enables you to customize data screens and add
new data screens for the activity (Customizing the Data
Screens, page 19).
Transitions: Enables transitions for multisport activities.
Lock Keys: Locks the keys during multisport activities to
prevent accidental key presses.

Repeat: Enables the repeat option for multisport activities. For example, you can use this option for activities that include multiple transitions, such as a swimrun. Alerts: Sets the training or navigation alerts for the activity. Metronome: Plays tones at a steady rhythm to help you improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or more consistent cadence (Using the Metronome, page 2). Auto Lap: Sets the options for the Auto Lap

®

feature (Auto Lap,

page 20). Auto Pause: Sets the device to stop recording data when you stop moving or when you drop below a specified speed (Enabling Auto Pause

® , page 20). Auto Climb: Enables the device to detect elevation changes automatically using the built-in altimeter. Auto Run: Enables the device to detect ski runs automatically using the built-in accelerometer. 3D Speed: Calculates your speed using your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground (3D Speed and Distance, page 21). 3D Distance: Calculates your distance traveled using your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. Lap Key: Enables you to record a lap or a rest during the activity. Auto Scroll: Enables you to move through all of the activity data screens automatically while the timer is running (Using Auto Scroll, page 21). Segment Alerts: Enables prompts that alert you to approaching segments. GPS: Sets the mode for the GPS antenna. Using GPS + GLONASS provides increased performance in challenging environments and faster position acquisition. Using the GPS + GLONASS option can reduce battery life more than using the GPS option only. Using the UltraTrac option records track points and sensor data less frequently (UltraTrac, page 21). Pool Size: Sets the pool length for pool swimming. Stroke Detect.: Enables stroke detection for pool swimming. Power Save Timeout: Sets the power-save timeout setting for the activity (Power Save Timeout Settings, page 21). Background Color: Sets the background color of each activity to black or white. Accent Color: Sets the accent color of each activity to help identify which activity is active. Rename: Sets the activity name. Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset the activity settings.

Customizing the Data Screens
You can show, hide, and change the layout and content of data
screens for each activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens.
6 Select a data screen to customize.
7 Select an option:
• Select Layout to adjust the number of data fields on the data screen.
• Select a field to change the data that appears in the field.
• Select Reorder to change the location of the data screen in the loop.
• Select Remove to remove the data screen from the loop. 8 If necessary, select Add New to add a data screen to the loop. Customizing Your Device 19

You can add a custom data screen, or select one of the predefined data screens.

Adding a Map to an Activity
You can add the map to the data screens loop for an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Map.

Alerts You can set alerts for each activity, which can help you to train toward specific goals, to increase your awareness of your environment, and to navigate to your destination. Some alerts are available only for specific activities. There are three types of alerts: event alerts, range alerts, and recurring alerts. Event alert: An event alert notifies you once. The event is a specific value. For example, you can set the device to alert you when you reach a specified elevation. Range alert: A range alert notifies you each time the device is above or below a specified range of values. For example, you can set the device to alert you when your heart rate is below 60 beats per minute (bpm) and over 210 bpm. Recurring alert: A recurring alert notifies you each time the device records a specified value or interval. For example, you can set the device to alert you every 30 minutes. Alert Name Alert Type Description Cadence Range You can set minimum and maximum cadence values.

Calories Event, recurring

You can set the number of calories.
Custom Recurring You can select an existing message or
create a custom message and select an
alert type.
Distance Recurring You can set a distance interval.
Elevation Range You can set minimum and maximum
elevation values.
Heart Rate Range You can set minimum and maximum heart
rate values or select zone changes. See
About Heart Rate Zones, page 11 and
Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 11.
Pace Range You can set minimum and maximum pace
values.
Power Range You can set the high or low power level.
Proximity Event You can set a radius from a saved
location.
Run/Walk Recurring You can set timed walking breaks at
regular intervals.
Speed Range You can set minimum and maximum
speed values.
Stroke Rate Range You can set high or low strokes per
minute.

Time Event, recurring

You can set a time interval.

Setting an Alert
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Alerts.
6 Select an option:
• Select Add New to add a new alert for the activity.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert. 7 If necessary, select the type of alert. 8 Select a zone, enter the minimum and maximum values, or enter a custom value for the alert. 9 If necessary, turn on the alert. For event and recurring alerts, a message appears each time you reach the alert value. For range alerts, a message appears each time you exceed or drop below the specified range (minimum and maximum values).

Auto Lap

Marking Laps by Distance
You can use Auto Lap to mark a lap at a specific distance
automatically. This feature is helpful for comparing your
performance over different parts of an activity (for example,
every 1 mile or 5 kilometers).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap.
6 Select an option:
• Select Auto Lap to turn Auto Lap on or off.
• Select Auto Distance to adjust the distance between laps. Each time you complete a lap, a message appears that displays the time for that lap. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 23). If necessary, you can customize the data pages to display additional lap data (Customizing the Data Screens, page 19). Customizing the Lap Alert Message You can customize one or two data fields that appear in the lap alert message. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity.

NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap > Lap Alert.
6 Select a data field to change it.
7 Select Preview (optional).

Enabling Auto Pause

®

You can use the Auto Pause feature to pause the timer
automatically when you stop moving. This feature is helpful if
your activity includes stop lights or other places where you must
stop.
NOTE: History is not recorded while the timer is stopped or
paused.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Pause.
6 Select an option:
• To pause the timer automatically when you stop moving, select When Stopped.
• To pause the timer automatically when your pace or speed drops below a specified level, select Custom.

20 Customizing Your Device

Enabling Auto Climb
You can use the auto climb feature to detect elevation changes
automatically. You can use it during activities such as climbing,
hiking, running, or biking.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Climb > Status > On.
6 Select an option:
• Select Run Screen to identify which data screen appears while running.
• Select Climb Screen to identify which data screen appears while climbing.
• Select Invert Colors to reverse the display colors when changing modes.
• Select Vertical Speed to set the rate of ascent over time.
• Select Mode Switch to set how quickly the device changes modes.

3D Speed and Distance You can set 3D speed and distance to calculate your speed or distance using both your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. You can use it during activities such as skiing, climbing, navigating, hiking, running, or biking.

Turning On and Off the Lap Key
You can turn on the Lap Key setting to record a lap or a rest
during an activity using LAP. You can turn off the Lap Key
setting to avoid recording laps due to accidental key presses
during an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Lap Key.
The lap key status changes to On or Off based on the current
setting.
Using Auto Scroll
You can use the auto scroll feature to cycle through all of the
activity data screens automatically while the timer is running.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Scroll.
6 Select a display speed.

UltraTrac The UltraTrac feature is a GPS setting that records track points and sensor data less frequently. Enabling the UltraTrac feature increases battery life but decreases the quality of recorded activities. You should use the UltraTrac feature for activities that demand longer battery life and for which frequent sensor data updates are less important.

Power Save Timeout Settings The timeout settings affect how long your device stays in training mode, for example, when you are waiting for a race to start. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an activity, and select the activity settings. Select Power Save Timeout to adjust the timeout settings for the activity.

Normal: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after 5
minutes of inactivity.
Extended: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after
25 minutes of inactivity. The extended mode can result in
shorter battery life between charges.

Removing an Activity or App
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select an option:

• To remove an activity from your list of favorites, select Remove from Favorites.
• To delete the activity from the apps list, select Remove.
Changing the Order of an Activity in the
Apps List
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Reorder.
5 Select UP or DOWN to adjust the position of the activity in
the apps list.

Watch Face Settings You can customize the appearance of the watch face by selecting the layout, colors, and additional data. You can also download custom watch faces from the Connect IQ store.

Customizing the Watch Face
Before you can activate a Connect IQ watch face, you must
install a watch face from the Connect IQ store (Connect IQ
Features, page 18).
You can customize the watch face information and appearance,
or activate an installed Connect IQ watch face.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Watch Face.
3 Select UP or DOWN to preview the watch face options.
4 Select Add New to scroll through additional pre-loaded watch
faces.
5 Select > Apply to activate a pre-loaded watch face or an
installed Connect IQ watch face.
6 If using a pre-loaded watch face, select > Customize.
7 Select an option:
• To change the style of the numbers for the analog watch face, select Dial.
• To change the style of the hands for the analog watch face, select Hands.
• To change the style of the numbers for the digital watch face, select Layout
• To change the style of the seconds for the digital watch face, select Seconds.
• To change the data that appears on the watch face, select Additional Data.
• To add or change an accent color for the watch face, select Accent Color.
• To change the background color, select Bkgd. Color.
• To save the changes, select Done.

Customizing Your Device 21

##### Sensors Settings

Compass Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Compass.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the compass sensor
(Calibrating the Compass Manually, page 22).
Display: Sets the directional heading on the compass to letters,
degrees, or milli-radians.
North Ref.: Sets the north reference of the compass (Setting the
North Reference, page 22).
Mode: Sets the compass to use electronic-sensor data only
(On), a combination of GPS and electronic-sensor data when
moving (Auto), or GPS data only (Off).
Calibrating the Compass Manually
NOTICE
Calibrate the electronic compass outdoors. To improve heading
accuracy, do not stand near objects that influence magnetic
fields, such as vehicles, buildings, and overhead power lines.
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration by default. If you experience
irregular compass behavior, for example, after moving long
distances or after extreme temperature changes, you can
manually calibrate the compass.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Compass >
Calibrate > Start.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
TIP: Move your wrist in a small figure eight motion until a
message appears.
Setting the North Reference
You can set the directional reference used in calculating
heading information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Compass >
North Ref..
3 Select an option:
• To set geographic north as the heading reference, select True.
• To set the magnetic declination for your location automatically, select Magnetic.
• To set grid north (000º) as the heading reference, select Grid.
• To set the magnetic variation value manually, select User, enter the magnetic variance, and select Done.
Altimeter Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Altimeter.
Auto Cal.: Allows the altimeter to self-calibrate each time you
turn on GPS tracking.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the altimeter sensor.
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting point by
default. You can manually calibrate the barometric altimeter if
you know the correct elevation.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter.
3 Select an option:
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Auto Cal. > On.
• To enter the current elevation, select Calibrate.

Barometer Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Barometer. Plot: Sets the time scale for the chart in the barometer widget. Storm Alert: Sets the rate of barometric pressure change that triggers a storm alert. Watch Mode: Sets the sensor used in watch mode. The Auto option uses both the altimeter and barometer according to your movement. You can use the Altimeter option when your activity involves changes in altitude, or the Barometer option when your activity does not involve changes in altitude.

Map Settings You can customize how the map appears in the map app and data screens. Hold MENU, and select Settings > Map. Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North Up option shows north at the top of the screen. The Track Up option shows your current direction of travel at the top of the screen. User Locations: Shows or hides saved locations on the map. Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for optimal use of your map. When disabled, you must zoom in or out manually.

Navigation Settings
You can customize the map features and appearance when
navigating to a destination.
Customizing Map Features
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Data Screens.
3 Select an option:
• Select Map to turn on or off the map.
• Select Guide to turn on or off the guide screen that displays the compass bearing or course to follow while navigating.
• Select Elevation Plot to turn on or off the elevation plot.
• Select a screen to add, remove, or customize.
Heading Settings
You can set the behavior of the pointer that appears when
navigating.
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Navigation > Type.
Bearing: Points in the direction of your destination.
Course: Shows your relationship to the course line leading to
the destination (Course Pointer, page 22).
Course Pointer
The course pointer is most useful when you are navigating to
your destination in a straight line, such as when you are
navigating on water. It can help you navigate back to the course
line when you go off-course to avoid obstacles or hazards.

The course pointer À indicates your relationship to the course line leading to the destination. The course deviation indicator

22 Customizing Your Device

(CDI) Á provides the indication of drift (right or left) from the course. The dots Â tell you how far off course you are.

Setting Up a Heading Bug
You can set up a heading indicator to display on your data
pages while navigating. The indicator points to your target
heading.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Heading Bug.
Setting Navigation Alerts
You can set alerts to help you navigate to your destination.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Alerts.
3 Select an option:
• To set an alert for a specified distance from your final destination, select Final Distance.
• To set an alert for the estimated time remaining until you reach your final destination, select Final ETE. 4 Select Status to turn on the alert. 5 Enter a distance or time value, and select .
System Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System.
Language: Sets the language displayed on the device.
Time: Adjusts the time settings (Time Settings, page 23).
Backlight: Adjusts the backlight settings (Backlight Settings,
page 23).
Sounds: Sets the device sounds, such as key tones, alerts, and
vibrations.
Do Not Disturb: Turns on or off do not disturb mode. Use the
Sleep Time option to turn on do not disturb mode
automatically during your normal sleep hours. You can set
your normal sleep hours on your Garmin Connect account.
Controls Menu: Allows you to add, reorder, and remove the
shortcut menu options in the controls menu (Customizing the
Controls Menu, page 23).
Hot Keys: Allows you to assign shortcuts to device keys
(Customizing the Hot Keys, page 23).
Auto Lock: Allows you to lock the keys automatically to prevent
accidental key presses. Use the During Activity option to lock
the keys during a timed activity. Use the Watch Mode option
to lock the keys when you are not recording a timed activity.
Units: Sets the units of measure used on the device (Changing
the Units of Measure, page 23).
Format: Sets general format preferences, such as the pace and
speed shown during activities, the start of the week, and
geographical position format and datum options.
Data Recording: Sets how the device records activity data. The
Smart recording option (default) allows for longer activity
recordings. The Every Second recording option provides
more detailed activity recordings, but may not record entire
activities that last for longer periods of time.
USB Mode: Sets the device to use mass storage mode or
Garmin mode when connected to a computer.
Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset user data and settings
(Restoring All Default Settings, page 26).
Software Update: Allows you to install software updates
downloaded using Garmin Express.
Time Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System > Time.
Time Format: Sets the device to show time in a 12-hour or 24-
hour format.

Set Time: Sets the time zone for the device. The Auto option sets the time zone automatically based on your GPS position. Time: Allows you to adjust the time if it is set to the Manual option. Alerts: Allows you to set sunrise and sunset alerts to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise or sunset occurs. Sync With GPS: Allows you to manually sync the time with GPS when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving time.

Backlight Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System > Backlight.
Mode: Sets the backlight to turn on manually or automatically.
The Auto option allows you to separately set the backlight for
keys, alerts, and gestures.
NOTE: When you set Gesture to On, you trigger the backlight
by raising and turning your arm to look at your wrist.
Timeout: Sets the length of time before the backlight turns off.
Brightness: Sets the brightness level of the backlight.
Customizing the Controls Menu
You can add, remove, and change the order of the shortcut
menu options in the controls menu (Viewing the Controls Menu,
page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Controls Menu.
3 Select a shortcut to customize.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the shortcut in the controls menu.
• Select Remove to remove the shortcut from the controls menu. 5 If necessary, select Add New to add an additional shortcut to the controls menu.
Customizing the Hot Keys
You can customize the hold function of individual keys and
combinations of keys.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Hot Keys.
3 Select a key or combination of keys to customize.
4 Select a function.
Changing the Units of Measure
You can customize units of measure for distance, pace and
speed, elevation, weight, height, and temperature.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Units.
3 Select a measurement type.
4 Select a unit of measure.
Viewing Device Information
You can view device information, such as the unit ID, software
version, regulatory information, and license agreement.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > About.

Viewing Regulatory and Compliance Information 1 From the settings, select About. 2 Select DOWN until regulatory information appears.

Customizing Your Device 23

#### ANT+ Sensors

The device is compatible with these optional, wireless ANT+ accessories.

• Heart rate monitor, such as HRM-Run ™ (Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor, page 5)
• Bike speed and cadence sensor (Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence Sensor, page 24)
• Foot pod (Foot Pod, page 24)
• Power sensor, such as Vector ™
• tempe ™ wireless temperature sensor (tempe, page 25) For information about compatibility and purchasing additional sensors, go to http://buy.garmin.com.
Pairing ANT+ Sensors
The first time you connect a sensor to your device using ANT+
wireless technology, you must pair the device and sensor. After
they are paired, the device connects to the sensor automatically
when you start an activity and the sensor is active and within
range.
NOTE: If a heart rate monitor was bundled with your device, the
included heart rate monitor is already paired with your device.
1 If you are pairing a heart rate monitor, put on the heart rate
monitor (Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor, page 5).
The heart rate monitor does not send or receive data until
you put it on.
2 Bring the device within 3 m (10 ft.) of the sensor.
NOTE: Stay 10 m (33 ft.) away from other ANT+ sensors
while pairing.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
5 Select an option:
• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

After the sensor is paired with your device, the sensor status changes from Searching to Connected. Sensor data appears in the data page loop or a custom data field.

Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence
Sensor
You can use a compatible bike speed or cadence sensor to
send data to your device.
• Pair the sensor with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24).
• Update your fitness user profile information (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 10).
• Set your wheel size (Wheel Size and Circumference, page 31).
• Go for a ride (Starting an Activity, page 2).

##### Training with Power Meters

• Go to www.garmin.com/intosports for a list of ANT+ sensors that are compatible with your device (such as Vector).
• For more information, see the owner's manual for your power meter.
• Adjust your power zones to match your goals and abilities (Setting Your Power Zones, page 11).
• Use range alerts to be notified when you reach a specified power zone (Setting an Alert, page 20).
• Customize the power data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 19).
Using Electronic Shifters
Before you can use compatible electronic shifters, such as
Shimano

®

Di2 ™ shifters, you must pair them with your device (Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24). You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 19). The fēnix 5/5S device displays current adjustment values when the sensor is in adjustment mode.

Situational Awareness
Your fēnix device can be used with the Varia Vision ™ device,
Varia ™ smart bike lights, and rearview radar to improve
situational awareness. See the owner's manual for your Varia
device for more information.
NOTE: You may need to update the fēnix software before
pairing Varia devices (Updating the Software Using Garmin
Connect Mobile, page 17).

Foot Pod Your device is compatible with the foot pod. You can use the foot pod to record pace and distance instead of using GPS when you are training indoors or when your GPS signal is weak. The foot pod is on standby and ready to send data (like the heart rate monitor). After 30 minutes of inactivity, the foot pod powers off to conserve the battery. When the battery is low, a message appears on your device. Approximately five hours of battery life remain.

Improving Foot Pod Calibration
Before you can calibrate your device, you must acquire GPS
signals and pair your device with the foot pod (Pairing ANT+
Sensors, page 24).
The foot pod is self-calibrating, but you can improve the
accuracy of the speed and distance data with a few outdoor runs
using GPS.
1 Stand outside for 5 minutes with a clear view of the sky.
2 Start a running activity.
3 Run on a track without stopping for 10 minutes.
4 Stop your activity, and save it.
Based on the recorded data, the foot pod calibration value
changes, if necessary. You should not need to calibrate the
foot pod again unless your running style changes.
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually
Before you can calibrate your device, you must pair your device
with the foot pod sensor (Pairing ANT+ Sensors, page 24).
Manual calibration is recommended if you know your calibration
factor. If you have calibrated a foot pod with another Garmin
product, you may know your calibration factor.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories.
3 Select your foot pod.
4 Select Cal. Factor > Set Value.
5 Adjust the calibration factor:
• Increase the calibration factor if your distance is too low.
• Decrease the calibration factor if your distance is too high.
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance
Before you can customize the foot pod speed and distance, you
must pair your device with the foot pod sensor (Pairing ANT+
Sensors, page 24).
You can set your device to calculate pace and distance from
your foot pod data instead of GPS data.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories.

24 ANT+ Sensors

3 Select your foot pod.
4 Select Speed.
5 Select an option:

• Select Indoor when you are training with GPS turned off, usually indoors.
• Select Always to use your foot pod data regardless of the GPS setting.

tempe The tempe is an ANT+ wireless temperature sensor. You can attach the sensor to a secure strap or loop where it is exposed to ambient air, and therefore, provides a consistent source of accurate temperature data. You must pair the tempe with your device to display temperature data from the tempe.

##### Device Information fēnix 5/5S Specifications

Battery type Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery
fēnix 5 battery life Up to 2 weeks
fēnix 5S battery life Up to 9 days
Water rating 10 ATM*
Operating temperature range From -20º to 50ºC (from -4º to 122ºF)
Charging temperature range From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF)
Radio frequency 2.4 GHz
Radio protocols ANT+ wireless technology
Bluetooth Smart device
Wi‑Fi technology (applicable models)
*The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m.
For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
Battery Information
The actual battery life depends on the features enabled on your
device, such as activity tracking, wrist-based heart rate,
smartphone notifications, GPS, internal sensors, and connected
ANT+ sensors.
fēnix 5 Battery
Life

fēnix 5S Battery Life

Mode Up to 2 weeks Up to 9 days Smartwatch mode with activity tracking and 24/7 wrist-based heart rate monitoring Up to 24 hours Up to 14 hours GPS mode with wrist-based heart rate Up to 75 hours Up to 40 hours UltraTrac GPS mode with gyro-based dead reckoning

##### HRM-Tri Specifications

Battery type User-replaceable CR2032, 3 V Battery life Up to 10 mo. for triathlon training (approximately 1 hr./day)

Operating temperature range

From -10° to 50°C (from 14° to 122°F) Radio frequency/protocol 2.4 GHz ANT+ wireless communications protocol Water rating 5 ATM* *The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 50 m. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Data Management NOTE: The device is not compatible with Windows

®

95, 98, Me,

Windows NT

®

, and Mac

®

OS 10.3 and earlier.

Disconnecting the USB Cable If your device is connected to your computer as a removable drive or volume, you must safely disconnect your device from your computer to avoid data loss. If your device is connected to your Windows computer as a portable device, it is not necessary to safely disconnect the device. 1 Complete an action:

• For Windows computers, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the system tray, and select your device.
• For Apple computers, select the device, and select File > Eject. 2 Disconnect the cable from your computer.

Deleting Files

NOTICE
If you do not know the purpose of a file, do not delete it. Your
device memory contains important system files that should not
be deleted.
1 Open the Garmin drive or volume.
2 If necessary, open a folder or volume.
3 Select a file.
4 Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
NOTE: If you are using an Apple computer, you must empty
the Trash folder to completely remove the files.

#### Device Maintenance Device Care

NOTICE Do not use a sharp object to clean the device. Avoid chemical cleaners, solvents, and insect repellents that can damage plastic components and finishes. Thoroughly rinse the device with fresh water after exposure to chlorine, salt water, sunscreen, cosmetics, alcohol, or other harsh chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the case. Avoid pressing the keys under water. Keep the leather band dry. Avoid swimming or showering with the leather band. Exposure to water can damage the leather band. Avoid extreme shock and harsh treatment, because it can degrade the life of the product. Do not store the device where prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures can occur, because it can cause permanent damage.

Cleaning the Device

NOTICE
Even small amounts of sweat or moisture can cause corrosion
of the electrical contacts when connected to a charger.
Corrosion can prevent charging and data transfer.
1 Wipe the device using a cloth dampened with a mild
detergent solution.
2 Wipe it dry.
After cleaning, allow the device to dry completely.
TIP: For more information, go to www.garmin.com/fitandcare.

Cleaning the Leather Bands 1 Wipe the leather bands with a dry cloth. 2 Use a leather conditioner to clean the leather bands.

Device Information 25

Changing the QuickFit ™ Bands 1 Slide the latch on the QuickFit band, and remove the band from the watch.

2 Align the new band with the watch.
3 Press the band into place.
NOTE: Make sure the band is secure. The latch should close
over the watch pin.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the other band.

Metal Watch Band Adjustment If your watch includes a metal watch band, you should take your watch to a jeweler or other professional to adjust the length of the metal band.

Replacing the Heart Rate Monitor Battery
1 Remove the sleeve À from the heart rate monitor module.
2 Use a small Phillips (00) screwdriver to remove the four
screws on the front of the module.
3 Remove the cover and battery.
4 Wait 30 seconds.
5 Insert the new battery under the two plastic tabs Á with the
positive side facing up.
NOTE: Do not damage or lose the O-ring gasket.
The O-ring gasket should remain around the outside of the
raised plastic ring.
6 Replace the front cover and the four screws.
Observe the orientation of the front cover. The raised screw
Â should fit in the matching raised screw hole on the front
cover.
NOTE: Do not overtighten.
7 Replace the sleeve.
After you replace the heart rate monitor battery, you may need
to pair it with the device again.

Troubleshooting My device is in the wrong language You can change the device language selection if you have accidently selected the wrong language on the device. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Scroll down to the last item in the list, and select . 3 Scroll down to the second to last item in the list, and select . 4 Select . 5 Select your language.

Is my smartphone compatible with my
device?
The fēnix 5/5S device is compatible with smartphones using
Bluetooth Smart wireless technology.
Go to www.garmin.com/ble for compatibility information.

##### My phone will not connect to the device

• Enable Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone.
• Bring your phone within 10 m (33 ft.) of the device.
• On your smartphone, open the Garmin Connect Mobile app, and enter pairing mode.
• On your device, hold LIGHT, and select to turn on Bluetooth technology and enter pairing mode.

Resetting Your Device 1 Hold LIGHT for at least 25 seconds. 2 Hold LIGHT for one second to turn on the device.

Restoring All Default Settings
NOTE: This deletes all user-entered information and activity
history.
You can restore all of the device settings to the factory default
values.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Restore Defaults > Yes.
Acquiring Satellite Signals
The device may need a clear view of the sky to acquire satellite
signals. The time and date are set automatically based on the
GPS position.
1 Go outdoors to an open area.
The front of the device should be oriented toward the sky.
2 Wait while the device locates satellites.
It may take 30–60 seconds to locate satellite signals.

Improving GPS Satellite Reception

• Frequently sync the device to your Garmin Connect account:
◦ Connect your device to a computer using the USB cable and the Garmin Express application.
◦ Sync your device to the Garmin Connect Mobile app using your Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
◦ Connect your device to your Garmin Connect account using a Wi‑Fi wireless network. While connected to your Garmin Connect account, the device downloads several days of satellite data, allowing it to quickly locate satellite signals.
• Take your device outside to an open area away from tall buildings and trees.
• Remain stationary for a few minutes.

26 Troubleshooting

The temperature reading is not accurate Your body temperature affects the temperature reading for the internal temperature sensor. To get the most accurate temperature reading, you should remove the watch from your wrist and wait 20 to 30 minutes. You can also use an optional tempe external temperature sensor to view accurate ambient temperature readings while wearing the watch.

Maximizing the Battery Life You can do several things to extend the life of the battery.

• Reduce the backlight timeout (Backlight Settings, page 23).
• Reduce the backlight brightness.
• Use UltraTrac GPS mode for your activity (UltraTrac, page 21).
• Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology when you are not using connected features (Connected Features, page 16).
• When pausing your activity for a longer period of time, use the resume later option (Stopping an Activity, page 2).
• Turn off activity tracking (Turning Off Activity Tracking, page 12).
• Use a Connect IQ watch face that is not updated every second. For example, use a watch face without a second hand (Customizing the Watch Face, page 21).
• Limit the smartphone notifications the device displays (Managing Notifications, page 17).
• Stop broadcasting heart rate data to paired Garmin devices (Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices, page 5).
• Turn off wrist-based heart rate monitoring (Turning Off the Wrist Heart Rate Monitor, page 5). NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate monitoring is used to calculate vigorous intensity minutes and calories burned.
Activity Tracking
For more information about activity tracking accuracy, go to
garmin.com/ataccuracy.

My daily step count does not appear The daily step count is reset every night at midnight. If dashes appear instead of your step count, allow the device to acquire satellite signals and set the time automatically.

My step count does not seem accurate If your step count does not seem accurate, you can try these tips.

• Wear the device on your non-dominant wrist.
• Carry the device in your pocket when pushing a stroller or lawn mower.
• Carry the device in your pocket when actively using your hands or arms only. NOTE: The device may interpret some repetitive motions, such as washing dishes, folding laundry, or clapping your hands, as steps.
The step counts on my device and my Garmin
Connect account don't match
The step count on your Garmin Connect account updates when
you synchronize your device.
1 Select an option:
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect application (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer, page 17).
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 17). 2 Wait while the device synchronizes your data.

Synchronizing can take several minutes. NOTE: Refreshing the Garmin Connect Mobile app or the Garmin Connect application does not synchronize your data or update your step count.

The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate Your device uses an internal barometer to measure elevation changes as you climb floors. A floor climbed is equal to 3 m (10 ft.).

• Avoid holding handrails or skipping steps while climbing stairs.
My intensity minutes are flashing
When you exercise at an intensity level that qualifies toward
your intensity minutes goal, the intensity minutes flash.
Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or
vigorous intensity level.
Getting More Information
You can find more information about this product on the Garmin
website.
• Go to support.garmin.com.
• Go to www.garmin.com/outdoor.
• Go to http://buy.garmin.com, or contact your Garmin dealer for information about optional accessories and replacement parts.

#### Appendix

Data Fields
%FTP: The current power output as a percentage of functional
threshold power.
%HRR: The percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart
rate minus resting heart rate).
10s Avg. Power: The 10-second moving average of power
output.
10s Avg Balance: The 10-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
24-Hour Max.: The maximum temperature recorded in the last
24 hours from a compatible temperature sensor.
24-Hour Min.: The minimum temperature recorded in the last
24 hours from a compatible temperature sensor.
30s Avg. Power: The 30-second moving average of power
output.
30s Avg Balance: The 30-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
3s Avg. Balance: The three-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
3s Avg. Power: The 3-second moving average of power output.
500m Pace: The current swimming pace per 500 meters.
Aerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your aerobic
fitness level.
Ambient Press.: The uncalibrated ambient pressure.
Anaerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your
anaerobic fitness level.
Average HR: The average heart rate for the current activity.
Average Pace: The average pace for the current activity.
Average Power: The average power output for the current
activity.

Appendix 27

Average Swolf: The average swolf score for the current activity.
Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one length plus
the number of strokes for that length (Swim Terminology,
page 3). In open water swimming, 25 meters is used to
calculate your swolf score.
Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current
activity.
Avg. 500m Pace: The average swimming pace per 500 meters
for the current activity.
Avg. Ascent: The average vertical distance of ascent since the
last reset.
Avg. Balance: The average left/right power balance for the
current activity.
Avg. Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current
activity.
Avg. Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current
activity.
Avg. Descent: The average vertical distance of descent since
the last reset.
Avg. GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time balance for
the current session.
Avg. L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left leg for
the current activity.
Avg. L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the left
leg for the current activity.
Avg. Lap Time: The average lap time for the current activity.
Avg. Moving Speed: The average speed when moving for the
current activity.
Avg. Overall Speed: The average speed for the current activity,
including both moving and stopped speeds.
Avg. PCO: The average platform center offset for the current
activity.
Avg. R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right leg for
the current activity.
Avg. R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the right
leg for the current activity.
Avg. Speed: The average speed for the current activity.
Avg. Stride Len.: The average stride length for the current
session.
Avg. Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length
during the current activity.
Avg. Strk Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per
minute (spm) during the current activity.
Avg. Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes
per minute (spm) during the current activity.
Avg. Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical oscillation for
the current activity.
Avg. Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation to
stride length for the current session.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current activity.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current activity.
Avg GCT: The average amount of ground contact time for the
current activity.
Avg HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current activity.
Balance: The current left/right power balance.
Baro. Pressure: The calibrated current pressure.
Battery Level: The remaining battery power.
Bearing: The direction from your current location to a
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Cadence: Cycling. The number of revolutions of the crank arm.
Your device must be connected to a cadence accessory for
this data to appear.
Cadence: Running. The steps per minute (right and left).
Calories: The amount of total calories burned.
Compass Hdg.: The direction you are moving based on the
compass.
Course: The direction from your starting location to a
destination. Course can be viewed as a planned or set route.
You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Dest. Location: The position of your final destination.
Dest. Wpt: The last point on the route to the destination. You
must be navigating for this data to appear.
Di2 Battery: The remaining battery power of a Di2 sensor.
Dist. Per Stroke: Swimming. The distance traveled per stroke.
Dist. Per Stroke: Paddle sports. The distance traveled per
stroke.
Dist. Remaining: The remaining distance to the final
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Distance: The distance traveled for the current track or activity.
Distance To Next: The remaining distance to the next waypoint
on the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Elapsed Time: The total time recorded. For example, if you start
the timer and run for 10 minutes, then stop the timer for 5
minutes, then start the timer and run for 20 minutes, your
elapsed time is 35 minutes.
Elevation: The altitude of your current location above or below
sea level.
ETA: The estimated time of day when you will reach the final
destination (adjusted to the local time of the destination). You
must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETA at Next: The estimated time of day when you will reach the
next waypoint on the route (adjusted to the local time of the
waypoint). You must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETE: The estimated time remaining until you reach the final
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Front: The front bike gear from a gear position sensor.
GCT: The amount of time in each step that you spend on the
ground while running, measured in milliseconds. Ground
contact time is not calculated while walking.
GCT Balance: The left/right balance of ground contact time
while running.
Gear Combo: The current gear combination from a gear
position sensor.
Gear Ratio: The number of teeth on the front and rear bike
gears, as detected by a gear position sensor.
Gears: The front and rear bike gears from a gear position
sensor.
Glide Ratio: The ratio of horizontal distance traveled to the
change in vertical distance.
Glide Ratio Dest.: The glide ratio required to descend from your
current position to the destination elevation. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
GPS: The strength of the GPS satellite signal.
GPS Elevation: The altitude of your current location using GPS.
GPS Heading: The direction you are moving based on GPS.
Grade: The calculation of rise (elevation) over run (distance).
For example, if for every 3 m (10 ft.) you climb you travel
60 m (200 ft.), the grade is 5%.
Heading: The direction you are moving.

Heart Rate: Your heart rate in beats per minute (bpm). Your
device must be connected to a compatible heart rate monitor.
HR %Max.: The percentage of maximum heart rate.
HR Zone: The current range of your heart rate (1 to 5). The
default zones are based on your user profile and maximum
heart rate (220 minus your age).
Int. Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current
swim interval.
Int. Avg. %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Avg. HR: The average heart rate for the current swim
interval.
Int. Distance: The distance traveled for the current interval.
Int. Max. %HRR: The maximum percentage of heart rate
reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the
current swim interval.
Int. Max. %Max.: The maximum percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Max. HR: The maximum heart rate for the current swim
interval.
Int. Pace: The average pace for the current interval.
Int. Swolf: The average swolf score for the current interval.
Intensity Factor: The Intensity Factor ™ for the current activity.
Interval Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during
the current interval.
Interval Time: The stopwatch time for the current interval.
Int Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length
during the current interval.
Int Strk Rate: The average number of strokes per minute (spm)
during the current interval.
Int Strk Type: The current stroke type for the interval.
L. Lap Stk. Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap.
L. Lap Stk. Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap.
L. Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed lap.
L. Len. Stk. Rate: The average number strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed pool length.
L. Len. Stk. Type: The stroke type used during the last completed pool length.
L. Len. Strokes: The total number of strokes for the last completed pool length. Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current lap. Lap 500m Pace: The average swimming pace per 500 meters for the current lap. Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the current lap. Lap Balance: The average left/right power balance for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the current lap. Lap Distance: The distance traveled for the current lap.
Lap Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per
stroke during the current lap.
Lap Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current lap.
Lap GCT: The average amount of ground contact time for the
current lap.
Lap GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time balance for the
current lap.
Lap HR: The average heart rate for the current lap.
Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current lap.
Lap L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left leg for
the current lap.
Lap L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the left
leg for the current lap.
Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the current lap.
Lap Pace: The average pace for the current lap.
Lap PCO: The average platform center offset for the current lap.
Lap Power: The average power output for the current lap.
Lap R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right leg for
the current lap.
Lap R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the right
leg for the current lap.
Laps: The number of laps completed for the current activity.
Lap Speed: The average speed for the current lap.
Lap Stride Len.: The average stride length for the current lap.
Lap Strk Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per
minute (spm) during the current lap.
Lap Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes
per minute (spm) during the current lap.
Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the
current lap.
Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the
current lap.
Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the current lap.
Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the current lap.
Lap Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical oscillation for
the current lap.
Lap Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation to stride
length for the current lap.
Last Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Cad.: Cycling. The average cadence for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Cad.: Running. The average cadence for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Dist.: The distance traveled for the last completed lap.
Last Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Pace: The average pace for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Power: The average power output for the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Speed: The average speed for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the last completed lap.
Last Len. Pace: The average pace for your last completed pool
length.
Last Len. Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed pool
length.

Appendix 29

Lat/Lon: The current position in latitude and longitude
regardless of the selected position format setting.
Left PP: The current power phase angle for the left leg. Power
phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power is
produced.
Left PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the left leg.
Power phase peak is the angle range over which the rider
produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during the
current activity.
LL 500m Pace: The average swimming pace per 500 meters for
the last lap.
L Lap Dist P Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per
stroke during the last completed lap.
L Lap Dist P Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the last completed lap.
Location: The current position using the selected position
format setting.
Max. Ascent: The maximum rate of ascent in feet per minute or
meters per minute since the last reset.
Max. Descent: The maximum rate of descent in meters per
minute or feet per minute since the last reset.
Max. Elevation: The highest elevation reached since the last
reset.
Max. Lap Power: The top power output for the current lap.
Maximum Speed: The top speed for the current activity.
Max Power: The top power output for the current activity.
Min. Elevation: The lowest elevation reached since the last
reset.
Moving Time: The total time moving for the current activity.
Multisport Time: The total time for all sports in a multisport
activity, including transitions.
Muscle O2 Sat. %: The estimated muscle oxygen saturation
percentage for the current activity.
Nautical Dist: The distance traveled in nautical meters or
nautical feet.
Nautical Speed: The current speed in knots.
Next Waypoint: The next point on the route. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
NP: The Normalized Power ™ for the current activity.
Off Course: The distance to the left or right by which you have
strayed from the original path of travel. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
Pace: The current pace.
PCO: The platform center offset. Platform center offset is the
location on the pedal platform where force is applied.
Pedal Smooth.: The measurement of how evenly a rider is
applying force to the pedals throughout each pedal stroke.
Perform. Cond.: The performance condition score is a real-time
assessment of your ability to perform.
Power: The current power output in watts.
Power to Weight: The current power measured in watts per
kilogram.
Power Zone: The current range of power output (1 to 7) based
on your FTP or custom settings.
Rear: The rear bike gear from a gear position sensor.
Repeat On: The timer for the last interval plus the current rest
(pool swimming).
Rest Timer: The timer for the current rest (pool swimming).
Right PP: The current power phase angle for the right leg.
Power phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power
is produced.
Right PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the right
leg. Power phase peak is the angle range over which the
rider produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Speed: The current rate of travel.
Stopped Time: The total time stopped for the current activity.
Stride Length: The length of your stride from one footfall to the
next, measured in meters.
Stroke Rate: Swimming. The number of strokes per minute
(spm).
Stroke Rate: Paddle sports. The number of strokes per minute
(spm).
Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current
activity.
Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the
current activity.
Sunrise: The time of sunrise based on your GPS position.
Sunset: The time of sunset based on your GPS position.
Temperature: The temperature of the air. Your body
temperature affects the temperature sensor. You can pair a
tempe sensor with your device to provide a consistent source
of accurate temperature data.
Time in Zone: The time elapsed in each heart rate or power
zone.
Time of Day: The time of day based on your current location
and time settings (format, time zone, daylight saving time).
Timer: The current time of the countdown timer.
Time Seat.: The time spent seated while pedaling for the current
activity.
Time Seat. Lap: The time spent seated while pedaling for the
current lap.
Time Stand.: The time spent standing while pedaling for the
current activity.
Time Stand. Lap: The time spent standing while pedaling for
the current lap.
Time to Next: The estimated time remaining before you reach
the next waypoint in the route. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Torque Eff.: The measurement of how efficiently a rider is
pedaling.
Total Ascent: The total elevation distance ascended since the
last reset.
Total Descent: The total elevation distance descended since
the last reset.
Total Hemoglobin: The estimated muscle oxygen total for the
current activity.
Training Effect: The current impact (1.0 to 5.0) on your aerobic
fitness.
TSS: The Training Stress Score ™ for the current activity.
V Dist to Dest: The elevation distance between your current
position and the final destination. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Vert. Spd.: The rate of ascent or descent over time.
Vertical Osc.: The amount of bounce while you are running.
The vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters for
each step.
Vertical Ratio: The ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length.
Vert Spd to Tgt: The rate of ascent or descent to a
predetermined altitude. You must be navigating for this data
to appear.
VMG: The speed at which you are closing on a destination along
a route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.

Work: The accumulated work performed (power output) in kilojoules.

VO2 Max. Standard Ratings These tables include standardized classifications for VO2 max. estimates by age and gender. Males Percentile 20–29 30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79 Superior 95 55.4 54 52.5 48.9 45.7 42.1 Excellent 80 51.1 48.3 46.4 43.4 39.5 36.7 Good 60 45.4 44 42.4 39.2 35.5 32.3 Fair 40 41.7 40.5 38.5 35.6 32.3 29.4 Poor 0–40 <41.7 <40.5 <38.5 <35.6 <32.3 <29.4

Females Percentile 20–29 30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79 Superior 95 49.6 47.4 45.3 41.1 37.8 36.7 Excellent 80 43.9 42.4 39.7 36.7 33 30.9 Good 60 39.5 37.8 36.3 33 30 28.1 Fair 40 36.1 34.4 33 30.1 27.5 25.9 Poor 0–40 <36.1 <34.4 <33 <30.1 <27.5 <25.9

Data reprinted with permission from The Cooper Institute. For more information, go to www.CooperInstitute.org.

FTP Ratings
These tables include classifications for functional threshold
power (FTP) estimates by gender.
Males Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 5.05 and greater
Excellent From 3.93 to 5.04
Good From 2.79 to 3.92
Fair From 2.23 to 2.78
Untrained Less than 2.23

Females Watts per Kilogram (W/kg) Superior 4.30 and greater Excellent From 3.33 to 4.29 Good From 2.36 to 3.32 Fair From 1.90 to 2.35 Untrained Less than 1.90

FTP ratings are based on research by Hunter Allen and Andrew Coggan, PhD, Training and Racing with a Power Meter (Boulder, CO: VeloPress, 2010).

Wheel Size and Circumference The wheel size is marked on both sides of the tire. This is not a comprehensive list. You can also use one of the calculators available on the Internet. Wheel Size L (mm) 12 × 1.75 935 14 × 1.5 1020 14 × 1.75 1055 16 × 1.5 1185 16 × 1.75 1195 18 × 1.5 1340 18 × 1.75 1350 20 × 1.75 1515 20 × 1-3/8 1615 22 × 1-3/8 1770 22 × 1-1/2 1785 24 × 1 1753 24 × 3/4 Tubular 1785 24 × 1-1/8 1795

Wheel Size L (mm)
24 × 1-1/4 1905
24 × 1.75 1890
24 × 2.00 1925
24 × 2.125 1965
26 × 7/8 1920
26 × 1(59) 1913
26 × 1(65) 1952
26 × 1.25 1953
26 × 1-1/8 1970
26 × 1-3/8 2068
26 × 1-1/2 2100
26 × 1.40 2005
26 × 1.50 2010
26 × 1.75 2023
26 × 1.95 2050
26 × 2.00 2055
26 × 2.10 2068
26 × 2.125 2070
26 × 2.35 2083
26 × 3.00 2170
27 × 1 2145
27 × 1-1/8 2155
27 × 1-1/4 2161
27 × 1-3/8 2169
650 × 35A 2090
650 × 38A 2125
650 × 38B 2105
700 × 18C 2070
700 × 19C 2080
700 × 20C 2086
700 × 23C 2096
700 × 25C 2105
700 × 28C 2136
700 × 30C 2170
700 × 32C 2155
700C Tubular 2130
700 × 35C 2168
Appendix 31

Wheel Size L (mm) 700 × 38C 2180 700 × 40C 2200

BSD 3-Clause License
Copyright © 2003-2010, Mark Borgerding
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the author nor the names of any contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Symbol Definitions
These symbols may appear on the device or accessory labels.
Alternating current. The device is suitable for alternating current.
Direct current. The device is suitable for direct current only.
Fuse. Indicates a fuse specification or location.
WEEE disposal and recycling symbol. The WEEE symbol is
attached to the product in compliance with the EU directive
2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE). It is intended to deter the improper disposal of this
product and to promote reuse and recycling.

#### Index

A accessories 24, 27 activities 2, 19, 21 custom 2, 3 saving 2 starting 2 activity tracking 11, 12 alarms 14, 20 alerts 14, 20, 23 altimeter 16, 22 calibrating 22 ANT+ sensors 24 applications 16, 18 smartphone 1 auto climb 21 Auto Lap 20 Auto Pause 20 auto scroll 21 B backlight 1, 23 bands 26 barometer 16, 22 battery 25 charging 1 life 25 maximizing 17, 21, 27 replacing 26 bike sensors 24 Bluetooth technology 16, 17, 26 C cadence 2, 6 alerts 20 sensors 24 calendar 13 calibrating altimeter 22 compass 22 calorie, alerts 20 charging 1 cleaning the device 6, 25 clock 14 compass 16, 22 calibrating 22 settings 22 Connect IQ 18 connecting 17 controls menu 1, 23 coordinates 15 countdown timer 14 courses 22 creating 15 playing 4 selecting 4 customizing the device 19, 23 D data pages 19 storing 6, 17 transferring 17 uploading 17 data fields 18 deleting all user data 25 history 16 personal records 14 distance 21 alerts 20, 23 dogleg 4 drills 3 F fitness 10 foot pod 24

G Garmin Connect 1, 12, 13, 16–18 storing data 17 Garmin Express 2, 18 updating software 1 GLONASS 23 goals 13, 14 GPS 21, 23 signal 26 green view, pin location 4 ground contact time 6, 7 H heading setting 23 heart rate 4, 5 alerts 20 monitor 5–10, 24, 26 pairing sensors 5 zones 8, 10, 11, 16 history 16 deleting 16 sending to computer 17

I
indoor training 2
intensity minutes 12, 27
intervals 3
workouts 13

J jumpmaster 3 K keys 1, 23 customizing 21

L lactate threshold 8, 10 language 23 layup 4 lengths 3 lifetime athlete 11 locations 15 deleting 15 editing 15 saving 15

M main menu, customizing 18 man overboard (MOB) 15 map 22 maps 20, 22 browsing 15 navigating 15 measurements 4 measuring a shot 4 menu 1 metronome 2 MOB 15 multisport 2, 3, 16 N navigation 20, 22, 23 Sight 'N Go 15 stopping 15 north reference 22 notifications 16, 17 O odometer 4, 16 P pairing ANT+ sensors 5, 24 smartphone 1, 26 performance condition 7, 9 personal records 14 deleting 14 power (force) 8 alerts 20 meters 8, 9, 24, 31 zones 11

profiles 2
user 10
projected finish time 9
R
racing 14
recovery 7–9
replacing the battery 26
resetting the device 26
routes 15
running dynamics 6, 7
S
satellite signals 26
scorecard 4
screen 23
segments 13
settings 12, 18, 19, 21–23, 26
shortcuts 1, 23
Sight 'N Go 15
skiing
alpine 2
snowboarding 2
sleep mode 12
smartphone 18, 26
applications 16, 18
pairing 1, 26
snowboarding 2
software
license 23
updating 1, 17
version 23
specifications 25
speed 21
speed and cadence sensors 24
statistics 4
stopwatch 14
storing data 17
stress level 9
stress score 9
stride length 6
strokes 3
sunrise and sunset times 14
swimming 3, 5
swing analysis 4
swolf score 3
system settings 23
T
target 13
tempe 25, 27
temperature 25, 27
time
alerts 20
settings 23
zones and formats 23
time zones 14
timer 16
countdown 14
tones 2, 14
TracBack 2, 15
tracks 15
training 13, 14, 16
plans 12, 13
Training Effect 7, 10
training load 9
training status 8
triathlon training 3
troubleshooting 5–7, 26, 27
U
UltraTrac 21
unit ID 23
units of measure 23
updates, software 17
uploading data 17
USB 17
disconnecting 25
user data, deleting 25
user profile 10
Index 33

| VO2 max. | | 7–9, 31 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| W | | | |
| watch faces | | 18, 21 | |
| watch mode | | 21 | |
| water resistance | | | 25 |

V
vertical oscillation 6
vertical ratio 6
VIRB remote 18, 19
Virtual Partner 13, 14
waypoints, projecting 15
wheel sizes 31
Wi‑Fi, connecting 18
widgets 1, 5, 18
workouts 12
loading 12

Z zones heart rate 11 power 11 time 14

34 Index

### support.garmin.com

1800 235 822 +43 (0) 820 220230 + 32 2 672 52 54 0800 770 4960

1-866-429-9296 +385 1 5508 272 +385 1 5508 271 +420 221 985466 +420 221 985465 + 45 4810 5050 + 358 9 6937 9758 + 331 55 69 33 99 + 39 02 36 699699 (+52) 001-855-792-7671

0800 427 652 0800 0233937 +47 815 69 555 00800 4412 454 +44 2380 662 915 +35 1214 447 460 +386 4 27 92 500

0861 GARMIN (427 646) +27 (0)11 251 9800 +34 93 275 44 97 + 46 7744 52020 +886 2 2642-9199 ext 2

0808 238 0000 +44 870 850 1242 +49 (0) 89 858364880 zum Ortstarif - Mobilfunk kann abweichen

913-397-8200
1-800-800-1020

February 2017 190-02148-00 _ 0A

5. Garmin Fēnix 5 GPS Watch : Product Manual : Page 31
   URL: https://www.manualshelf.com/manual/garmin/010-01688-02/product-manual-english/page-31.html
   Garmin Fēnix 5 GPS Watch : Product Manual : Page 31

3

Select your foot pod.

4

Select Speed.

5

Select an option:

• Select Indoor when you are training with GPS turned off,

usually indoors.

• Select Always to use your foot pod data regardless of the

GPS setting.

tempe

The tempe is an ANT+ wireless temperature sensor. You can

attach the sensor to a secure strap or loop where it is exposed

to ambient air, and therefore, provides a consistent source of

accurate temperature data. You must pair the tempe with your

device to display temperature data from the tempe.

Device Information

fēnix 5/5S Specifications

Battery type Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery

fēnix 5 battery life Up to 2 weeks

fēnix 5S battery life Up to 9 days

Water rating 10 ATM*

Operating temperature range From -20º to 50ºC (from -4º to 122ºF)

Charging temperature range From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF)

Radio frequency 2.4 GHz

Radio protocols ANT+ wireless technology

Bluetooth Smart device

Wi‑Fi technology (applicable models)

*The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m.

For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Battery Information

The actual battery life depends on the features enabled on your

device, such as activity tracking, wrist-based heart rate,

smartphone notifications, GPS, internal sensors, and connected

ANT+ sensors.

fēnix 5 Battery

Life

fēnix 5S Battery

Life

Mode

Up to 2 weeks Up to 9 days Smartwatch mode with activity

tracking and 24/7 wrist-based

heart rate monitoring

Up to 24 hours Up to 14 hours GPS mode with wrist-based

heart rate

Up to 75 hours Up to 40 hours UltraTrac GPS mode with

gyro-based dead reckoning

HRM-Tri Specifications

Battery type User-replaceable CR2032, 3 V

Battery life Up to 10 mo. for triathlon training

(approximately 1 hr./day)

Operating temperature

range

From -10° to 50°C (from 14° to 122°F)

Radio frequency/protocol 2.4 GHz ANT+ wireless communications

protocol

Water rating 5 ATM*

*The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 50 m.

For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

Data Management

NOTE: The device is not compatible with Windows

®

95, 98, Me,

Windows NT

®

, and Mac

®

OS 10.3 and earlier.

Disconnecting the USB Cable

If your device is connected to your computer as a removable

drive or volume, you must safely disconnect your device from

your computer to avoid data loss. If your device is connected to

your Windows computer as a portable device, it is not necessary

to safely disconnect the device.

1

Complete an action:

• For Windows computers, select the Safely Remove

Hardware icon in the system tray, and select your device.

• For Apple computers, select the device, and select File >

Eject.

2

Disconnect the cable from your computer.

Deleting Files

NOTICE

If you do not know the purpose of a file, do not delete it. Your

device memory contains important system files that should not

be deleted.

1

Open the Garmin drive or volume.

2

If necessary, open a folder or volume.

3

Select a file.

4

Press the Delete key on your keyboard.

NOTE: If you are using an Apple computer, you must empty

the Trash folder to completely remove the files.

Device Maintenance

Device Care

NOTICE

Do not use a sharp object to clean the device.

Avoid chemical cleaners, solvents, and insect repellents that can

damage plastic components and finishes.

Thoroughly rinse the device with fresh water after exposure to

chlorine, salt water, sunscreen, cosmetics, alcohol, or other

harsh chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can

damage the case.

Avoid pressing the keys under water.

Keep the leather band dry. Avoid swimming or showering with

the leather band. Exposure to water can damage the leather

band.

Avoid extreme shock and harsh treatment, because it can

degrade the life of the product.

Do not store the device where prolonged exposure to extreme

temperatures can occur, because it can cause permanent

damage.

Cleaning the Device

NOTICE

Even small amounts of sweat or moisture can cause corrosion

of the electrical contacts when connected to a charger.

Corrosion can prevent charging and data transfer.

1

Wipe the device using a cloth dampened with a mild

detergent solution.

2

Wipe it dry.

After cleaning, allow the device to dry completely.

TIP: For more information, go to www.garmin.com/fitandcare.

Cleaning the Leather Bands

1

Wipe the leather bands with a dry cloth.

2

Use a leather conditioner to clean the leather bands.

Device Information 25

Previous page Next page

6. fēnix® 5X Owner’s Manual
   URL: https://www8.garmin.com/manuals/webhelp/fenix5x/EN-US/fenix_5X_OM_EN-US.pdf
   ## FĒNIX ® 5X Owner’s Manual

© 2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Garmin. Garmin reserves the right to change or improve its
products and to make changes in the content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements. Go to www.garmin.com for current updates
and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.
Garmin ®, the Garmin logo, ANT+ ®, Auto Lap ®, Auto Pause ®, Edge ®, fēnix ®, inReach ®, TracBack ®, VIRB ®, and Virtual Partner ® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA
and other countries. Connect IQ ™, Garmin Connect ™, Garmin Explore ™, Garmin Express ™, Garmin Golf ™, Garmin Move IQ ™, HRM-Run ™, HRM-Swim ™, HRM-Tri ™, QuickFit ™, tempe ™,
TruSwing ™, TrueUp ™, Varia ™, Varia Vision ™, Vector ™, and Xero ™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
American Heart Association ® is a registered trademark of American Heart Association, Inc. Android ™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Apple ® and Mac ® are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. The Cooper Institute ®, as well as any
related trademarks, are the property of The Cooper Institute. Di2 ™ is a trademark of Shimano, Inc. Shimano ® is a registered trademark of Shimano, Inc. STRAVA and Strava ™ are trademarks of
Strava, Inc. Advanced heartbeat analytics by Firstbeat. Training Stress Score ™ (TSS), Intensity Factor ™ (IF), and Normalized Power ™ (NP) are trademarks of Peaksware, LLC. Wi‑Fi ® is a
registered mark of Wi-Fi Alliance Corporation. Windows ® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
This product is ANT+ ® certified. Visit www.thisisant.com/directory for a list of compatible products and apps.

#### Table of Contents

Introduction ... 1
Device Overview ... 1
Viewing the Controls Menu ... 1
Viewing Widgets ... 1
Charging the Device ... 1
Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device ... 1
Product Updates ... 1
Setting Up Garmin Express ... 2
Activities and Apps ... 2
Starting an Activity ... 2
Tips for Recording Activities ... 2
Stopping an Activity ... 2
Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity ... 2
Creating a Custom Activity ... 2
Indoor Activities ... 2
Calibrating the Treadmill Distance ... 2
Recording a Strength Training Activity ... 3
Outdoor Activities ... 3
Viewing Your Ski Runs ... 3
Using the Metronome ... 3
Jumpmaster ... 3
Multisport ... 3
Creating a Multisport Activity ... 3
Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities ... 3
Swimming ... 4
Swim Terminology ... 4
Stroke Types ... 4
Tips for Swimming Activities ... 4
Resting During Pool Swimming ... 4
Training with the Drill Log ... 4
Golfing ... 4
Playing Golf ... 4
Hole Information ... 4
Moving the Flag ... 4
Viewing Hazards ... 4
Viewing Measured Shots ... 5
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances ... 5
Keeping Score ... 5
Updating a Score ... 5
TruSwing™ ... 5
Using the Golf Odometer ... 5
Tracking Statistics ... 5
Connected Features ... 5
Enabling Bluetooth Notifications ... 5
Viewing Notifications ... 6
Receiving an Incoming Phone Call ... 6
Replying to a Text Message ... 6
Managing Notifications ... 6
Turning Off the Bluetooth Smartphone Connection ... 6
Turning On and Off Smartphone Connection Alerts ... 6
Locating a Lost Mobile Device ... 6
Garmin Connect ... 6
Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile ... 7
Updating the Software Using Garmin Express ... 7
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer ... 7
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile ... 7
Garmin Golf™ App ... 7
Starting a GroupTrack Session ... 7
Tips for GroupTrack Sessions ... 7
Garmin Explore™ ... 7
Wi‑Fi® Connected Features ... 7
Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network ... 7
Connect IQ Features ... 8
Downloading Connect IQ Features Using Your Computer ... 8
Heart Rate Features ... 8
Wrist-based Heart Rate ... 8
Wearing the Device ... 8
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data ... 8
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget ... 8
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices ... 8
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data During an Activity ... 8
Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate Alert ... 9
Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor ... 9
Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor ... 9
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data ... 9
Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor ... 9
Running Dynamics ... 9
Training with Running Dynamics ... 9
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data ... 10
Ground Contact Time Balance Data ... 10
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio Data ... 10
Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data ... 10
Performance Measurements ... 10
Turning Off Performance Notifications ... 11
Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically ... 11
Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements ... 11
Training Status ... 11
Tips for Getting Your Training Status ... 11
About VO2 Max. Estimates ... 12
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running ... 12
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling ... 12
Recovery Time ... 12
Viewing Your Recovery Time ... 12
Recovery Heart Rate ... 12
Training Load ... 12
Viewing Your Predicted Race Times ... 13
About Training Effect ... 13
Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level ... 13
Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level ... 13
Performance Condition ... 13
Viewing Your Performance Condition ... 13
Lactate Threshold ... 13
Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate
Threshold ... 14
Getting Your FTP Estimate ... 14
Conducting an FTP Test ... 14
Training ... 14
Setting Up Your User Profile ... 14
Fitness Goals ... 14
About Heart Rate Zones ... 14
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones ... 14
Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones ... 15
Heart Rate Zone Calculations ... 15
Setting Your Power Zones ... 15
Activity Tracking ... 15
Auto Goal ... 15
Using the Move Alert ... 15
Sleep Tracking ... 16
Using Automated Sleep Tracking ... 16
Using Do Not Disturb Mode ... 16
Intensity Minutes ... 16
Earning Intensity Minutes ... 16
Garmin Move IQ™ ... 16
Activity Tracking Settings ... 16
Turning Off Activity Tracking ... 16
Workouts ... 16
Following a Workout From the Web ... 16
Starting a Workout ... 16
About the Training Calendar ... 16
Table of Contents i
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans ... 17
Adaptive Training Plans ... 17
Interval Workouts ... 17
Creating an Interval Workout ... 17
Starting an Interval Workout ... 17
Stopping an Interval Workout ... 17
Segments ... 17
Strava™ Segments ... 17
Viewing Segment Details ... 17
Racing a Segment ... 17
Using Virtual Partner® ... 17
Setting a Training Target ... 18
Cancelling a Training Target ... 18
Racing a Previous Activity ... 18
Personal Records ... 18
Viewing Your Personal Records ... 18
Restoring a Personal Record ... 18
Clearing a Personal Record ... 18
Clearing All Personal Records ... 18
Clock ... 18
Setting an Alarm ... 18
Deleting an Alarm ... 18
Starting the Countdown Timer ... 18
Using the Stopwatch ... 19
Adding Alternate Time Zones ... 19
Setting Clock Alerts ... 19
Syncing the Time with GPS ... 19
Navigation ... 19
Saving Your Location ... 19
Editing Your Saved Locations ... 19
Projecting a Waypoint ... 19
Navigating to a Destination ... 19
Navigating to a Point of Interest ... 19
Points of Interest ... 20
Creating and Following a Course on Your Device ... 20
Creating a Round-Trip Course ... 20
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man Overboard
Location ... 20
Navigating with Sight 'N Go ... 20
Navigating to Your Starting Point During an Activity ... 20
Navigating to the Starting Point of Your Last Saved Activity ... 20
Stopping Navigation ... 20
Map ... 20
Viewing the Map ... 20
Saving or Navigating to a Location on the Map ... 21
Navigating with the Around Me Feature ... 21
Compass ... 21
Altimeter and Barometer ... 21
History ... 21
Using History ... 21
Multisport History ... 21
Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone ... 21
Viewing Data Totals ... 21
Using the Odometer ... 22
Deleting History ... 22
Customizing Your Device ... 22
Activities and App Settings ... 22
Customizing the Data Screens ... 22
Adding a Map to an Activity ... 22
Alerts ... 22
Setting an Alert ... 23
Activity Map Settings ... 23
Routing Settings ... 23
Auto Lap ... 23
Marking Laps by Distance ... 23
Enabling Auto Pause® ... 24
Enabling Auto Climb ... 24
3D Speed and Distance ... 24
Turning On and Off the Lap Key ... 24
Using Auto Scroll ... 24
UltraTrac ... 24
Power Save Timeout Settings ... 24
Changing the Order of an Activity in the Apps List ... 24
Widgets ... 24
Customizing the Widget Loop ... 25
inReach Remote ... 25
Using the inReach Remote ... 25
VIRB Remote ... 25
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera ... 25
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity ... 25
Using the Stress Level Widget ... 26
Customizing the Controls Menu ... 26
Watch Face Settings ... 26
Customizing the Watch Face ... 26
Sensors Settings ... 26
Compass Settings ... 26
Calibrating the Compass Manually ... 26
Setting the North Reference ... 26
Altimeter Settings ... 26
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter ... 27
Barometer Settings ... 27
Calibrating the Barometer ... 27
Map Settings ... 27
Marine Map Settings ... 27
Showing and Hiding Map Data ... 27
GroupTrack Settings ... 27
Navigation Settings ... 27
Customizing Map Features ... 27
Setting Up a Heading Bug ... 27
Setting Navigation Alerts ... 27
System Settings ... 28
Time Settings ... 28
Changing the Backlight Settings ... 28
Customizing the Hot Keys ... 28
Changing the Units of Measure ... 28
Viewing Device Information ... 28
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance Information ... 28
Wireless Sensors ... 28
Pairing Your Wireless Sensors ... 28
Extended Display Mode ... 29
Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence Sensor ... 29
Training with Power Meters ... 29
Using Electronic Shifters ... 29
Situational Awareness ... 29
Foot Pod ... 29
Improving Foot Pod Calibration ... 29
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually ... 29
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance ... 29
tempe™ ... 29
Device Information ... 29
Specifications ... 29
Battery Information ... 30
Data Management ... 30
Disconnecting the USB Cable ... 30
Deleting Files ... 30
Device Maintenance ... 30
Device Care ... 30
Cleaning the Device ... 30
Cleaning the Leather Bands ... 30
Changing the QuickFit™ Bands ... 30

ii Table of Contents

Metal Watch Band Adjustment ... 30
Troubleshooting ... 30
My device is in the wrong language ... 30
Is my smartphone compatible with my device? ... 31
My phone will not connect to the device ... 31
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my watch? ... 31
Restarting Your Device ... 31
Restoring All Default Settings ... 31
Acquiring Satellite Signals ... 31
Improving GPS Satellite Reception ... 31
The temperature reading is not accurate ... 31
Maximizing the Battery Life ... 31
Activity Tracking ... 31
My daily step count does not appear ... 31
My step count does not seem accurate ... 31
The step counts on my device and my Garmin Connect
account don't match ... 32
The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate ... 32
My intensity minutes are flashing ... 32
Getting More Information ... 32
Appendix ... 32
Data Fields ... 32
VO2 Max. Standard Ratings ... 35
FTP Ratings ... 36
Wheel Size and Circumference ... 36
Symbol Definitions ... 36
Index ... 37

Table of Contents iii

#### Introduction

WARNING See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other important information. Always consult your physician before you begin or modify any exercise program.

##### Device Overview

LIGHT

Select to turn the backlight on and off.
Hold to view the controls menu.
Hold to turn the device on.
Select to view the activity list and start or stop an activity.
Select to choose an option in a menu.

BACK LAP

Select to return to the previous screen. Select to record a lap, rest, or transition during a multisport activity.

DOWN

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus.
Hold to view the watch face from any screen.

UP MENU

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus.
Hold to view the menu.
Viewing the Controls Menu
The controls menu contains options, such as turning on do not
disturb mode, locking the keys, and turning the device off.
NOTE: You can add, reorder, and remove the options in the
controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page 26).
1 From any screen, hold LIGHT.

##### 2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the options.

Viewing Widgets Your device comes preloaded with several widgets, and more are available when you pair your device with a smartphone.

• Select UP or DOWN. The device scrolls through the widget loop.
• Select to view additional options and functions for a widget.
• From any screen, hold BACK to return to the watch face.

• If you are recording an activity, select BACK to return to the activity data pages.

##### Charging the Device

WARNING
This device contains a lithium-ion battery. See the Important
Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for
product warnings and other important information.
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion, thoroughly clean and dry the contacts and
the surrounding area before charging or connecting to a
computer. Refer to the cleaning instructions in the appendix.
1 Plug the small end of the USB cable into the charging port on
your device.
2 Plug the large end of the USB cable into a USB charging
port.
3 Charge the device completely.

Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device To use the connected features of the fēnix device, it must be paired directly through the Garmin Connect ™ Mobile app, instead of from the Bluetooth

®

settings on your smartphone.
1 From the app store on your smartphone, install and open the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
2 Bring your smartphone within 10 m (33 ft.) of your device.
3 Select LIGHT to turn on the device.
The first time you turn on the device, it is in pairing mode.
TIP: You can hold LIGHT and select to manually enter
pairing mode.
4 Select an option to add your device to your Garmin Connect
account:
• If this is the first time you are pairing a device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, follow the on-screen instructions.
• If you already paired another device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the or menu, select Garmin Devices > Add Device, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Product Updates
On your computer, install Garmin Express ™ (www.garmin.com
/express). On your smartphone, install the Garmin Connect
Mobile app.
This provides easy access to these services for Garmin

®

devices:

• Software updates
• Map updates
• Data uploads to Garmin Connect
• Product registration

Introduction 1

Setting Up Garmin Express
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Activities and Apps Your device can be used for indoor, outdoor, athletic, and fitness activities. When you start an activity, the device displays and records sensor data. You can save activities and share them with the Garmin Connect community. You can also add Connect IQ ™ activities and apps to your device using the Connect IQ website (Connect IQ Features, page 8). For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.

Starting an Activity
When you start an activity, GPS turns on automatically (if
required). When you stop the activity, the device returns to
watch mode.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 If necessary, follow the on-screen instructions to enter
additional information.
4 If necessary, wait while the device connects to your ANT+ ®
sensors.
5 If the activity requires GPS, go outside, and wait while the
device locates satellites.
6 Select to start the timer.
NOTE: The device does not record your activity data until
you start the timer.

Tips for Recording Activities

• Charge the device before starting an activity (Charging the Device, page 1).
• Select LAP to record laps.
• Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Stopping an Activity 1 Select . 2 Select an option:

• To resume your activity, select Resume.
• To save the activity and return to watch mode, select Save.
• To suspend your activity and resume it at a later time, select Resume Later.
• To mark a lap, select Lap.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select Back to Start > TracBack. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity by the most direct path, select Back to Start > Route. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To discard the activity and return to watch mode, select Discard > Yes.

NOTE: After stopping the activity, the device saves it automatically after 30 minutes.

Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity
The list of your favorite activities appears when you press
from the watch face, and it provides quick access to the
activities you use most. The first time you press to start an
activity, the device prompts you to select your favorite activities.
You can add or remove favorite activities at any time.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
Your favorite activities appear at the top of the list with a
white background. Other activities appear with a black
background.
3 Select an option:
• To add a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Set as Favorite.
• To remove a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Remove from Favorites.

Creating a Custom Activity 1 From the watch face, select > Add. 2 Select an option:

• Select Copy Activity to create your custom activity starting from one of your saved activities.
• Select Other to create a new custom activity. 3 If necessary, select an activity type. 4 Select a name or enter a custom name.
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select an accent color or customize the data screens.
• Select Done to save and use the custom activity. 6 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Duplicate activity names include a number, for example: Bike(2). 5 Select an option:

Indoor Activities The fēnix device can be used for training indoors, such as running on an indoor track or using a stationary bike. GPS is turned off for indoor activities. When running or walking with GPS turned off, speed, distance, and cadence are calculated using the accelerometer in the device. The accelerometer is self-calibrating. The accuracy of the speed, distance, and cadence data improves after a few outdoor runs or walks using GPS. TIP: Holding the handrails of the treadmill reduces accuracy. You can use an optional foot pod to record pace, distance, and cadence. When cycling with GPS turned off, speed and distance are not available unless you have an optional sensor that sends speed and distance data to the device (such as a speed or cadence sensor).

Calibrating the Treadmill Distance
To record more accurate distances for your treadmill runs, you
can calibrate the treadmill distance after you run at least 1.5 km
(1 mi.) on a treadmill. If you use different treadmills, you can
manually calibrate the treadmill distance on each treadmill or
after each run.
1 Start a treadmill activity (Starting an Activity, page 2), and run
at least 1.5 km (1 mi.) on the treadmill.
2 After you complete your run, select .
3 Select an option:
• To calibrate the treadmill distance the first time, select Save.

2 Activities and Apps

The device prompts you to complete the treadmill calibration.

• To manually calibrate the treadmill distance after the first time calibration, select Calibrate & Save > Yes. 4 Check the treadmill display for the distance traveled, and enter the distance on your device.
Recording a Strength Training Activity
You can record sets during a strength training activity. A set is
multiple repetitions (reps) of a single move.
1 From the watch face, select > Strength.
The first time you record a strength training activity, you will
select which wrist your watch is on.
2 Select to start the set timer.
3 Start your first set.
The device counts your reps. Your rep count appears when
you complete at least six reps.
TIP: The device can only count reps of a single move for
each set. When you want to change moves, you should finish
the set and start a new one.
4 Select LAP to finish the set.
The watch displays the total reps for the set. After several
seconds, the rest timer appears.
5 If necessary, hold MENU, select Edit Last Set, and edit the
number of reps.
TIP: You can also add the weight used for the set.
6 When you are done resting, select LAP to start your next set.
7 Repeat for each strength training set until your activity is
complete.
8 After your last set, select to stop the set timer.
9 Select Save.

Outdoor Activities The fēnix device comes preloaded with outdoor activities, such as running and cycling. GPS is turned on for outdoor activities. You can add new activities based on default activities, such as walking or rowing. You can also add custom activities to your device (Creating a Custom Activity, page 2).

Viewing Your Ski Runs
Your device records the details of each downhill skiing or
snowboarding run using the auto run feature. This feature is
turned on by default for downhill skiing and snowboarding. It
automatically records new ski runs based on your movement.
The timer pauses when you stop moving downhill and when you
are on a chairlift. The timer remains paused during the chairlift
ride. You can start moving downhill to restart the timer. You can
view run details from the paused screen or while the timer is
running.
1 Start a skiing or snowboarding activity.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select View Runs.
4 Select UP and DOWN to view details of your last run, your
current run, and your total runs.
The run screens include time, distance traveled, maximum
speed, average speed, and total descent.
Using the Metronome
The metronome feature plays tones at a steady rhythm to help
you improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or
more consistent cadence.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.

3 Hold MENU.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Metronome > Status > On.
6 Select an option:

• Select Beats / Minute to enter a value based on the cadence you want to maintain.
• Select Alert Frequency to customize the frequency of the beats.
• Select Sounds to customize the metronome tone and vibration. 7 If necessary, select Preview to listen to the metronome feature before you run. 8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2).
The metronome starts automatically.
9 During your run, select UP or DOWN to view the metronome
screen.
10If necessary, hold MENU to change the metronome settings.

Jumpmaster

WARNING The jumpmaster feature is for use by experienced skydivers only. The jumpmaster feature should not be used as a primary skydiving altimeter. Failure to input the appropriate jump related information can lead to serious personal injury or death. The jumpmaster feature follows military guidelines for calculating the high altitude release point (HARP). The device detects automatically when you have jumped to begin navigating toward the desired impact point (DIP) using the barometer and electronic compass.

Multisport Triathletes, duathletes, and other multisport competitors can take advantage of the multisport activities, such as Triathlon or Swimrun. During a multisport activity, you can transition between activities and continue to view your total time and distance. For example, you can switch from biking to running and view your total time and distance for biking and running throughout the multisport activity. You can customize a multisport activity, or you can use the default triathlon activity set up for a standard triathlon.

Creating a Multisport Activity
1 From the watch face, select > Add > Multisport.
2 Select a multisport activity type, or enter a custom name.
Duplicate activity names include a number. For example,
Triathlon(2).
3 Select two or more activities.
4 Select an option:
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select whether to include transitions.
• Select Done to save and use the multisport activity. 5 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities

• Select to start your first activity.
• Select LAP to transition to the next activity. If transitions are turned on, the transition time is recorded separately from the activity times.
• If necessary, select LAP to start the next activity.
• Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Activities and Apps 3

##### Swimming

NOTICE The device is intended for surface swimming. Scuba diving with the device may damage the product and will void the warranty. NOTE: The device cannot record wrist heart rate data while swimming.

Swim Terminology Length: One trip down the pool. Interval: One or more consecutive lengths. A new interval starts after a rest. Stroke: A stroke is counted every time your arm wearing the device completes a full cycle. Swolf: Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one pool length and the number of strokes for that length. For example, 30 seconds plus 15 strokes equals a swolf score of 45. For open water swimming, swolf is calculated over 25 meters. Swolf is a measurement of swimming efficiency and, like golf, a lower score is better.

Stroke Types
Stroke type identification is available only for pool swimming.
Your stroke type is identified at the end of a length. Stroke types
appear when you are viewing interval history. You can also
select stroke type as a custom data field (Customizing the Data
Screens, page 22).
Free Freestyle
Back Backstroke
Breast Breaststroke
Fly Butterfly
Mixed More than one stroke type in an interval
Drill Used with drill logging (Training with the Drill Log, page 4)

Tips for Swimming Activities

• Before starting a pool swimming activity, follow the on-screen instructions to select your pool size or enter a custom size. The next time you start a pool swimming activity, the device uses this pool size. You can hold MENU, select the activity settings, and select Pool Size to change the size.
• Select LAP to record a rest during pool swimming. The device automatically records swim intervals and lengths for pool swimming.
• Select LAP to record an interval during open water swimming.
Resting During Pool Swimming
The default rest screen displays two rest timers. It also displays
time and distance for the last completed interval.
NOTE: Swim data is not recorded during a rest.
1 During your swim activity, select LAP to start a rest.
The display reverses to white text on a black background,
and the rest screen appears.
2 During a rest, select UP or DOWN to view other data screens
(optional).
3 Select LAP, and continue swimming.
4 Repeat for additional rest intervals.

Training with the Drill Log The drill log feature is available only for pool swimming. You can use the drill log feature to manually record kick sets, one-arm swimming, or any type of swimming that is not one of the four major strokes. 1 During your pool swim activity, select UP or DOWN to view the drill log screen.

2 Select LAP to start the drill timer.
3 After you complete a drill interval, select LAP.
The drill timer stops, but the activity timer continues to record
the entire swim session.
4 Select a distance for the completed drill.
Distance increments are based on the pool size selected for
the activity profile.
5 Select an option:
• To start another drill interval, select LAP.
• To start a swim interval, select UP or DOWN to return to the swim training screens.
Golfing
Playing Golf
Before you play golf, you should charge the device (Charging
the Device, page 1).
1 From the watch face, select > Golf.
2 Go outside, and wait while the device locates satellites.
3 Select a course from the list of available courses.
4 Select Yes to keep score.
5 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
The device automatically transitions when you move to the
next hole.
6 After you complete your activity, select > End Round >
Yes.

Hole Information Because pin locations change, the device calculates the distance to the front, middle, and back of the green, but not the actual pin location.

Current hole number
Distance to the back of the green
Distance to the middle of the green
Distance to the front of the green
Par for the hole
Next hole
Previous hole
Moving the Flag
You can take a closer look at the green and move the pin
location.
1 From the hole information screen, select > Move Flag.
2 Select UP or DOWN to move the pin position.
3 Select .
The distances on the hole information screen are updated to
show the new pin location. The pin location is saved for only
the current round.

Viewing Hazards You can view distances to hazards along the fairway for par 4 and 5 holes. Hazards that affect shot selection are displayed

4 Activities and Apps

individually or in groups to help you determine the distance to layup or carry. 1 From the hole information screen, select > Hazards.

• The distances to the front and back of the nearest hazard appear on the screen.
• The hazard type is listed at the top of the screen.
• The green is represented as a half circle at the top of the screen. The line below the green represents the center of the fairway.
• Hazards are shown below the green in approximate locations relative to the fairway. 2 Select UP or DOWN to view other hazards for the current hole.
Viewing Measured Shots
Before the device can automatically detect and measure shots,
you must enable scoring.
Your device features automatic shot detection and recording.
Each time you take a shot along the fairway, the device records
your shot distance so you can view it later.
TIP: Automatic shot detection works best when you wear the
device on your leading wrist and make good contact with the
ball. Putts are not detected.
1 While playing golf, select > Measure Shot.
Your last shot distance appears.
NOTE: The distance automatically resets when you hit the
ball again, putt on the green, or move to the next hole.
2 Select DOWN to view all recorded shot distances.
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances
You can view a list of layup and dogleg distances for par 4 and 5
holes.
Select > Layups.
Each layup and the distance until you reach each layup
appear on the screen.
NOTE: Distances are removed from the list as you pass
them.
Keeping Score
1 From the hole information screen, select > Scorecard.
The scorecard appears when you are on the green.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the score.
Your total score is updated.
Updating a Score
1 From the hole information screen, select > Scorecard.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to change the score for that hole.
Your total score is updated.

TruSwing ™

The TruSwing feature allows you to view swing metrics recorded from your TruSwing device. Go to www.garmin.com/golf to purchase a TruSwing device.

Using the Golf Odometer
You can use the odometer to record the time, distance, and
steps traveled. The odometer automatically starts and stops
when you start or end a round.
1 Select > Odometer.
2 If necessary, select Reset to reset the odometer to zero.
Tracking Statistics
The Stat Tracking feature enables detailed statistics tracking
while playing golf.
1 From the hole information screen, hold MENU.
2 Select the activity settings.
3 Select Stat Tracking to enable tracking statistics.

Connected Features Connected features are available for your fēnix device when you connect the device to a compatible smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology. Some features require you to install the Garmin Connect Mobile app on the connected smartphone. Go to www.garmin.com/apps for more information. Some features are also available when you connect your device to a wireless network. Phone notifications: Displays phone notifications and messages on your fēnix device. LiveTrack: Allows friends and family to follow your races and training activities in real time. You can invite followers using email or social media, allowing them to view your live data on a Garmin Connect tracking page. GroupTrack: Allows you to keep track of your connections using LiveTrack directly on screen and in real time. Activity uploads to Garmin Connect: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Connect IQ: Allows you to extend your device features with new watch faces, widgets, apps, and data fields. Software Updates: Allows you to update your device software. Weather: Allows you to view current weather conditions and weather forecasts. Bluetooth sensors: Allows you to connect Bluetooth compatible sensors, such as a heart rate monitor. Find my phone: Locates your lost smartphone that is paired with your fēnix device and currently within range. Find my device: Locates your lost fēnix device that is paired with your smarphone and currently within range.

Enabling Bluetooth Notifications Before you can enable notifications, you must pair the fēnix device with a compatible mobile device (Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1). 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Phone > Smart Notifications > Status > On. 3 Select During Activity. 4 Select a notification preference. 5 Select a sound preference. 6 Select Not During Activity. 7 Select a notification preference. 8 Select a sound preference. Connected Features 5

9 Select Timeout.
10Select the amount of time the alert for a new notification
appears on the screen.
Viewing Notifications
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the notifications
widget.
2 Select , and select a notification.
3 Select DOWN for more options.
4 Select BACK to return to the previous screen.

Receiving an Incoming Phone Call When you receive a phone call on your connected smartphone, the fēnix device displays the name or phone number of the caller. You can accept or decline the call. If your device is connected to a smartphone with Android ™, you can also decline with a text message by selecting from a list of messages on your fēnix device.

• To accept the call, select Accept.
• To decline the call, select Decline.
• To decline the call and immediately send a text message reply, select Reply, and select a message from the list.
Replying to a Text Message
NOTE: This feature is available only for smartphones with
Android.
When you receive a text message notification on your fēnix
device, you can send a quick reply by selecting from a list of
messages. You can customize messages in the Garmin
Connect Mobile app.
NOTE: This feature sends text messages using your phone.
Regular text message limits and charges from your carrier and
phone plan may apply. Contact your mobile carrier for more
information about text message charges or limits.
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the notifications
widget.
2 Select , and select a text message notification.
3 Select DOWN > Reply.
4 Select a message from the list.
Your phone sends the selected message as an SMS text
message.
Managing Notifications
You can use your compatible smartphone to manage
notifications that appear on your fēnix 5X device.
Select an option:
• If you are using an Apple

®

smartphone, use the notifications settings on your smartphone to select the items to show on the device.

• If you are using a smartphone with Android, from the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Settings > Smart Notifications.
Turning Off the Bluetooth Smartphone
Connection
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select to turn off the Bluetooth smartphone connection on
your fēnix device.
Refer to the owner's manual for your mobile device to turn off
Bluetooth wireless technology on your mobile device.
Turning On and Off Smartphone Connection
Alerts
You can set the fēnix 5X device to alert you when your paired
smartphone connects and disconnects using Bluetooth wireless
technology.
NOTE: Smartphone connection alerts are turned off by default.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Alerts.
Locating a Lost Mobile Device
You can use this feature to help locate a lost mobile device that
is paired using Bluetooth wireless technology and currently
within range.
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select .
The fēnix device begins searching for your paired mobile
device. An audible alert sounds on your mobile device, and
the Bluetooth signal strength displays on the fēnix device
screen. The Bluetooth signal strength increases as you move
closer to your mobile device.
3 Select BACK to stop searching.

Garmin Connect Your Garmin Connect account allows you to track your performance and connect with your friends. It gives you the tools to track, analyze, share, and encourage each other. You can record the events of your active lifestyle, including runs, walks, rides, swims, hikes, golf games, and more. You can create your free Garmin Connect account when you pair your device with your phone using the Garmin Connect Mobile app. You can also create an account when you set up the Garmin Express application (www.garmin.com/express). Store your activities: After you complete and save a timed activity with your device, you can upload that activity to your Garmin Connect account and keep it as long as you want. Analyze your data: You can view more detailed information about your fitness and outdoor activities, including time, distance, heart rate, calories burned, cadence, an overhead map view, and pace and speed charts. You can view more detailed information about your golf games, including scorecards, statistics, and course information. You can also view customizable reports. NOTE: To view some data, you must pair an optional wireless sensor with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 28).

Track your progress: You can track your daily steps, join a friendly competition with your connections, and meet your goals. Share your activities: You can connect with friends to follow each other's activities or post links to your activities on your favorite social networking sites. Manage your settings: You can customize your device and user settings on your Garmin Connect account. 6 Connected Features

Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile Before you can update your device software using the Garmin Connect Mobile app, you must have a Garmin Connect account, and you must pair the device with a compatible smartphone (Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1). Synchronize your device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 7). When new software is available, the Garmin Connect Mobile app automatically sends the update to your device.

Updating the Software Using Garmin Express
Before you can update your device software, you must
download and install the Garmin Express application and add
your device (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer,
page 7).
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
When new software is available, the Garmin Express
application sends it to your device.
2 After the Garmin Express application finishes sending the
update, disconnect the device from your computer.
Your device installs the update.
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer
The Garmin Express application connects your device to your
Garmin Connect account using a computer. You can use the
Garmin Express application to upload your activity data to your
Garmin Connect account and to send data, such as workouts or
training plans, from Garmin Connect website to your device. You
can also install device software updates and manage your
Connect IQ apps.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Download and install the Garmin Express application.
4 Open the Garmin Express application, and select Add
Device.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile 1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu. 2 Select .

Garmin Golf ™ App The Garmin Golf app allows golfers to compete with each other at different courses. More than 41,000 courses have a weekly leaderboard that anyone can join. You can set up a tournament event and invite players to compete. You can upload scorecards from your compatible Garmin device to view detailed statistics and shot analyses. The Garmin Golf app syncs your data with your Garmin Connect account. You can download the Garmin Golf app from the app store on your smartphone.

Starting a GroupTrack Session
Before you can start a GroupTrack session, you must have a
Garmin Connect account, a compatible smartphone, and the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
These instructions are for starting a GroupTrack session with
fēnix 5X devices. If your connections have other compatible
devices, you can see them on the map. The other devices may
not be able to display GroupTrack riders on the map.
1 Go outside, and turn on the fēnix 5X device.
2 Pair your smartphone with the fēnix 5X device (Pairing Your
Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
3 On the fēnix 5X device, hold MENU, and select Settings >
GroupTrack > Show on Map to enable viewing connections
on the map screen.
4 In the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the settings menu,
select LiveTrack > GroupTrack.
5 If you have more than one compatible device, select a device
for the GroupTrack session.
6 Select Visible to > All Connections.
7 Select Start LiveTrack.
8 On the fēnix 5X device, start an activity.
9 Scroll to the map to view your connections.
TIP: From the map, you can hold MENU and select Nearby
Connections to view distance, direction, and pace or speed
information for other connections in the GroupTrack session.

Tips for GroupTrack Sessions The GroupTrack feature allows you to keep track of other connections in your group using LiveTrack directly on the screen. All members of the group must be your connections in your Garmin Connect account.

• Start your activity outside using GPS.
• Pair your fēnix 5X device with your smartphone using Bluetooth technology.
• In the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the settings menu, select Connections to update the list of connections for your GroupTrack session.
• Make sure all of your connections pair to their smartphones and start a LiveTrack session in the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
• Make sure all your connections are in range (40 km or 25 mi.).
• During a GroupTrack session, scroll to the map to view your connections (Adding a Map to an Activity, page 22).

##### Garmin Explore ™

The Garmin Explore website allows you to plan trips and use cloud storage for your waypoints, routes, and tracks. It offers advanced planning, allowing you to share and sync data with your compatible Garmin device. You can go to explore.garmin.com.

Wi‑Fi ® Connected Features Some fēnix 5X models have Wi‑Fi connected features. The Garmin Connect Mobile app is not required for you to use Wi‑Fi connectivity. Activity uploads to your Garmin Connect account: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Workouts and training plans: Allows you to browse for and select workouts and training plans on the Garmin Connect site. The next time your device has a Wi‑Fi connection, the files are wirelessly sent to your device. Software updates: Allows your device to download the latest software update when a Wi‑Fi connection is available. The next time you turn on or unlock the device, you can follow the on-screen instructions to install the software update.

Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network
You must connect your device to the Garmin Connect Mobile
app on your smartphone or to the Garmin Express application
on your computer before you can connect to a Wi‑Fi network.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Wi-Fi > My Networks > Add Network.
The device displays a list of nearby Wi‑Fi networks.
3 Select a network.
4 If necessary, enter the password for the network.

Wi‑Fi ® Connected Features 7

The device connects to the network, and the network is added to the list of saved networks. The device reconnects to this network automatically when it is within range.

Connect IQ Features You can add Connect IQ features to your watch from Garmin and other providers using the Connect IQ website. You can customize your device with watch faces, data fields, widgets, and apps. Watch Faces: Allow you to customize the appearance of the clock. Data Fields: Allow you to download new data fields that present sensor, activity, and history data in new ways. You can add Connect IQ data fields to built-in features and pages. Widgets: Provide information at a glance, including sensor data and notifications. Apps: Add interactive features to your watch, such as new outdoor and fitness activity types.

Downloading Connect IQ Features Using
Your Computer
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to apps.garmin.com, and sign in.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature, and download it.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Heart Rate Features The fēnix 5X device has a wrist-based heart rate monitor and is also compatible with chest heart rate monitors (sold separately). You can view heart rate data on the heart rate widget. If both wrist-based heart rate and chest heart rate data are available, your device uses the chest heart rate data.

##### Wrist-based Heart Rate Wearing the Device

• Wear the device above your wrist bone. NOTE: The device should be snug but comfortable. For more accurate heart rate readings on the fēnix device, it should not move while running or exercising.

NOTE: The optical sensor is located on the back of the device.

• See Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data, page 8 for more information about wrist-based heart rate.
• For more information about accuracy, go to garmin.com /ataccuracy.
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try
these tips.
• Clean and dry your arm before putting on the device.
• Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect repellent under the device.
• Avoid scratching the heart rate sensor on the back of the device.
• Wear the device above your wrist bone. The device should be snug but comfortable.
• Wait until the icon is solid before starting your activity.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes and get a heart rate reading before starting your activity. NOTE: In cold environments, warm up indoors.
• Rinse the device with fresh water after each workout.
• While exercising, use a silicone band.
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget
The widget displays your current heart rate in beats per minute
(bpm) and a graph of your heart rate for the last 4 hours.
1 From the watch face, select DOWN.
2 Select to view your average resting heart rate values for
the last 7 days.
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices
You can broadcast your heart rate data from your fēnix 5X
device and view it on paired Garmin devices.
NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery life.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Broadcast Heart Rate.
The fēnix 5X device starts broadcasting your heart rate data,
and appears.
NOTE: You can view only the heart rate widget while
broadcasting heart rate data from the heart rate widget.
3 Pair your fēnix 5X device with your Garmin ANT+ compatible
device.
NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin
compatible device. See your owner's manual.
TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, select any
key, and select Yes.
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data During an Activity
You can set up your fēnix 5X device to broadcast your heart rate
data automatically when you begin an activity. For example, you
can broadcast your heart rate data to an Edge

®

device while cycling, or to a VIRB

®

action camera during an activity.
NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery life.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Broadcast During Activity.
3 Begin an activity (Starting an Activity, page 2).
The fēnix 5X device starts broadcasting your heart rate data
in the background.
NOTE: There is no indication that the device is broadcasting
your heart rate data during an activity.
4 If necessary, pair your fēnix 5X device with your Garmin
ANT+ compatible device.
NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin
compatible device. See your owner's manual.
TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, stop the
activity (Stopping an Activity, page 2).

8 Connect IQ Features

Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate Alert
You can set the device to alert you when your heart rate
exceeds a certain number of beats per minute (bpm) after a
period of inactivity.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Abnormal HR Alert > Status > On.
3 Select Alert Threshold.
4 Select a heart rate threshold value.
Each time you exceed the threshold value, a message appears
and the device vibrates.

Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor The default value for the Wrist Heart Rate setting is Auto. The device automatically uses the wrist-based heart rate monitor unless you pair an ANT+ heart rate monitor to the device. 1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options > Status > Off.

Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor
You should wear the heart rate monitor directly on your skin, just
below your sternum. It should be snug enough to stay in place
during your activity.
1 If necessary, attach the strap extender to the heart rate
monitor.
2 Wet the electrodes on the back of the heart rate monitor to
create a strong connection between your chest and the
transmitter.

3 Wear the heart rate monitor with the Garmin logo facing right side up.

The loop and hook connection should be on your right side. 4 Wrap the heart rate monitor around your chest, and connect the strap hook to the loop. NOTE: Make sure the care tag does not fold over. After you put on the heart rate monitor, it is active and sending data.

Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try
these tips.
• Reapply water to the electrodes and contact patches (if applicable).
• Tighten the strap on your chest.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes.
• Follow the care instructions (Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor, page 9).
• Wear a cotton shirt or thoroughly wet both sides of the strap. Synthetic fabrics that rub or flap against the heart rate monitor can create static electricity that interferes with heart rate signals.
• Move away from sources that can interfere with your heart rate monitor. Sources of interference may include strong electromagnetic fields, some 2.4 GHz wireless sensors, high-voltage power lines, electric motors, ovens, microwave ovens, 2.4 GHz cordless phones, and wireless LAN access points.

Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor

NOTICE A buildup of sweat and salt on the strap can decrease the ability of the heart rate monitor to report accurate data.

• Rinse the heart rate monitor after every use.
• Hand wash the heart rate monitor after every seven uses or one pool swim, using a tiny amount of mild detergent, such as dishwashing liquid. NOTE: Using too much detergent may damage the heart rate monitor.
• Do not put the heart rate monitor in a washing machine or dryer.
• When drying the heart rate monitor, hang it up or lay it flat.

Running Dynamics You can use your compatible fēnix device paired with the HRM-Tri ™ accessory or other running dynamics accessory to provide real-time feedback about your running form. If your fēnix device was packaged with the HRM-Tri accessory, the devices are already paired. The running dynamics accessory has an accelerometer that measures torso movement in order to calculate six running metrics. Cadence: Cadence is the number of steps per minute. It displays the total steps (right and left combined). Vertical oscillation: Vertical oscillation is your bounce while running. It displays the vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters. Ground contact time: Ground contact time is the amount of time in each step that you spend on the ground while running. It is measured in milliseconds. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance are not available while walking. Ground contact time balance: Ground contact time balance displays the left/right balance of your ground contact time while running. It displays a percentage. For example, 53.2 with an arrow pointing left or right. Stride length: Stride length is the length of your stride from one footfall to the next. It is measured in meters. Vertical ratio: Vertical ratio is the ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length. It displays a percentage. A lower number typically indicates better running form.

Training with Running Dynamics Before you can view running dynamics, you must put on a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Tri accessory, and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 28). If your fēnix 5X was packaged with the accessory, the devices are already paired, and the fēnix 5X is set to display running dynamics data screens. 1 Select an option:

• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5X device are already paired, skip to step 7.
• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5X device are not already paired, complete all the steps in this procedure. 2 Hold MENU. 3 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. Heart Rate Features 9

8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2). 9 Select UP or DOWN to open a running dynamics screen to view your metrics.

4 Select an activity.
5 Select the activity settings.
6 Select Data Screens > Add New.
7 Select a running dynamics data screen.
NOTE: The running dynamics screens are not available for
all activities.

| | | Purple | | >95 | | >183 spm | | | | <218 ms | | | | | | | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | Blue | | 70–95 | | 174–183 spm | | | | 218–248 ms | | | | | | | | | |
| | | Green | | 30–69 | | 164–173 spm | | | | 249–277 ms | | | | | | | | | |
| | | Orange | | 5–29 | | 153–163 spm | | | | 278–308 ms | | | | | | | | | |
| | | Red | | <5 | | <153 spm | | | | >308 ms | | | | | | | | | |

Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data
The running dynamics screens display a color gauge for the primary metric. You can display cadence, vertical oscillation, ground
contact time, ground contact time balance, or vertical ratio as the primary metric. The color gauge shows you how your running
dynamics data compare to those of other runners. The color zones are based on percentiles.
Garmin has researched many runners of all different levels. The data values in the red or orange zones are typical for less
experienced or slower runners. The data values in the green, blue, or purple zones are typical for more experienced or faster
runners. More experienced runners tend to exhibit shorter ground contact times, lower vertical oscillation, lower vertical ratio, and
higher cadence than less experienced runners. However, taller runners typically have slightly slower cadences, longer strides, and
slightly higher vertical oscillation. Vertical ratio is your vertical oscillation divided by stride length. It is not correlated with height.
Go to www.garmin.com/runningdynamics for more information on running dynamics. For additional theories and interpretations of
running dynamics data, you can search reputable running publications and websites.
Color Zone Percentile in Zone Cadence Range Ground Contact Time Range
Purple >95 >183 spm <218 ms
Blue 70–95 174–183 spm 218–248 ms
Green 30–69 164–173 spm 249–277 ms
Orange 5–29 153–163 spm 278–308 ms
Red <5 <153 spm >308 ms
Ground Contact Time Balance Data
Ground contact time balance measures your running symmetry and appears as a percentage of your total ground contact time. For
example, 51.3% with an arrow pointing left indicates the runner is spending more time on the ground when on the left foot. If your
data screen displays both numbers, for example 48–52, 48% is the left foot and 52% is the right foot.
Color Zone Red Orange Green Orange Red
Symmetry Poor Fair Good Fair Poor
Percent of Other Runners 5% 25% 40% 25% 5%
Ground Contact Time Balance >52.2% L 50.8–52.2% L 50.7% L–50.7% R 50.8–52.2% R >52.2% R
While developing and testing running dynamics, the Garmin team found correlations between injuries and greater imbalances with
certain runners. For many runners, ground contact time balance tends to deviate further from 50–50 when running up or down hills.
Most running coaches agree that a symmetrical running form is good. Elite runners tend to have quick and balanced strides.
You can watch the color gauge or data field during your run or view the summary on your Garmin Connect account after your run.
As with the other running dynamics data, ground contact time balance is a quantitative measurement to help you learn about your
running form.
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio Data
The data ranges for vertical oscillation and vertical ratio are slightly different depending on the sensor and whether it is positioned at
the chest (HRM-Tri or HRM-Run ™ accessories) or at the waist (Running Dynamics Pod accessory).
Color Zone Percentile in Zone Vertical Oscillation Range at
Chest

| Color Zone | | | | | | Red | | | Orange | | Green | | Orange | Red | | | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Symmetry | | | | | | Poor | Fair | | | | Good | | Fair | Poor | | | | | |
| Percent of Other Runners | | | | | | 5% | 25% | | | | 40% | | 25% | 5% | | | | | |

Vertical Oscillation Range at Waist

Vertical Ratio at Chest Vertical Ratio at Waist Purple >95 <6.4 cm <6.8 cm <6.1% <6.5% Blue 70–95 6.4–8.1 cm 6.8–8.9 cm 6.1–7.4% 6.5–8.3% Green 30–69 8.2–9.7 cm 9.0–10.9 cm 7.5–8.6% 8.4–10.0% Orange 5–29 9.8–11.5 cm 11.0–13.0 cm 8.7–10.1% 10.1–11.9% Red <5 >11.5 cm >13.0 cm >10.1% >11.9%

NOTE: Ground contact time and balance appears only while running. It is not calculated while walking.

Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data If running dynamics data does not appear, you can try these tips.

• Make sure you have a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Tri accessory. Accessories with running dynamics have on the front of the module.
• Pair the running dynamics accessory with your fēnix device again, according to the instructions.
• If the running dynamics data display shows only zeros, make sure the accessory is worn right-side up.

Performance Measurements These performance measurements are estimates that can help you track and understand your training activities and race performances. The measurements require a few activities using wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. Cycling performance measurements require a heart rate monitor and a power meter. These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/physio.

10 Heart Rate Features

NOTE: The estimates may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires you to complete a few activities to learn about your performance. Training status: Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. VO2 max.: VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. Recovery time: The recovery time displays how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next hard workout. Training load: Training load is the sum of your excess post exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) over the last 7 days. EPOC is an estimate of how much energy it takes for your body to recover after exercise. Predicted race times: Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate and published data sources to provide a target race time based on your current state of fitness. This projection also presumes you have completed the proper training for the race. HRV stress test: The HRV (heart rate variability) stress test requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. The device records your heart rate variability while standing still for 3 minutes. It provides your overall stress level. The scale is 1 to 100, and a lower score indicates a lower stress level. Performance condition: Your performance condition is a real time assessment after 6 to 20 minutes of activity. It can be added as a data field so you can view your performance condition during the rest of your activity. It compares your real-time condition to your average fitness level. Functional threshold power (FTP): The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup to estimate your FTP. For a more accurate rating, you can conduct a guided test. Lactate threshold: Lactate threshold requires a chest heart rate monitor. Lactate threshold is the point where your muscles start to rapidly fatigue. Your device measures your lactate threshold level using heart rate data and pace.

Turning Off Performance Notifications
Performance notifications are turned on by default. Some
performance notifications are alerts that appear upon completion
of your activity. Some performance notifications appear during
an activity or when you achieve a new performance
measurement, such as a new VO2 max. estimate.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Performance
Notifications.
3 Select an option.

Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically The Auto Detection feature is turned on by default. The device can automatically detect your maximum heart rate, and lactate threshold during an activity. When paired with a compatible power meter, the device can automatically detect your functional threshold power (FTP) during an activity.

NOTE: The device detects a maximum heart rate only when
your heart rate is higher than the value set in your user profile.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Auto Detection.
3 Select an option.

Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements You can sync activities and performance measurements from other Garmin devices to your fēnix 5X device using your Garmin Connect account. This allows your device to more accurately reflect your training status and fitness. For example, you can record a ride with an Edge device, and view your activity details and overall training load on your fēnix 5X device. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > TrueUp. When you sync your device with your smartphone, recent activities and performance measurements from your other Garmin devices appear on your fēnix 5X device.

Training Status Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness level and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. You can use your training status to help plan future training and continue improving your fitness level. Peaking: Peaking means that you are in ideal race condition. Your recently reduced training load is allowing your body to recover and fully compensate for earlier training. You should plan ahead, since this peak state can only be maintained for a short time. Productive: Your current training load is moving your fitness level and performance in the right direction. You should plan recovery periods into your training to maintain your fitness level. Maintaining: Your current training load is enough to maintain your fitness level. To see improvement, try adding more variety to your workouts or increasing your training volume. Recovery: Your lighter training load is allowing your body to recover, which is essential during extended periods of hard training. You can return to a higher training load when you feel ready. Unproductive: Your training load is at a good level, but your fitness is decreasing. Your body may be struggling to recover, so you should pay attention to your overall health including stress, nutrition, and rest. Detraining: Detraining occurs when you are training much less than usual for a week or more, and it is affecting your fitness level. You can try increasing your training load to see improvement. Overreaching: Your training load is very high and counterproductive. Your body needs a rest. You should give yourself time to recover by adding lighter training to your schedule. No Status: The device needs one or two weeks of training history, including activities with VO2 max. results from running or cycling, to determine your training status. Tips for Getting Your Training Status The training status feature depends on updated assessments of your fitness level, including at least two VO2 max. measurements per week. Your VO2 max. estimate is updated after outdoor runs or rides during which your heart rate reached at least 70% of your maximum heart rate for several minutes. The trail run and indoor run activities do not generate a VO2 max. estimate in order to preserve the accuracy of your fitness level trend. To get the most out of the training status feature, you can try these tips. Heart Rate Features 11

• At least two times per week, run or ride outdoors with a power meter, and reach a heart rate higher than 70% of your maximum heart rate for at least 10 minutes. After using the device for one week, your training status should be available.
• Record all of your fitness activities on this device, or enable the Physio TrueUp ™ feature, allowing your device to learn about your performance (Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements, page 11).

About VO2 Max. Estimates VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. In simple terms, VO2 max. is an indication of athletic performance and should increase as your level of fitness improves. The fēnix 5X device requires wrist based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display your VO2 max. estimate. The device has separate VO2 max. estimates for running and cycling. You must run either outside with GPS or ride with a compatible power meter at a moderate level of intensity for several minutes to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate. On the device, your VO2 max. estimate appears as a number, description, and position on the color gauge. On your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about your VO2 max. estimate, including your fitness age. Your fitness age gives you an idea of how your fitness compares with a person of the same gender and different age. As you exercise, your fitness age can decrease over time.

Purple Superior Blue Excellent Green Good Orange Fair Red Poor VO2 max. data is provided by FirstBeat. VO2 max. analysis is provided with permission from The Cooper Institute

®

. For more
information, see the appendix (VO2 Max. Standard Ratings,
page 35), and go to www.CooperInstitute.org.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running
This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible
chest heart rate monitor. If you are using a chest heart rate
monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your device (Pairing
Your Wireless Sensors, page 28). If your fēnix 5X device was
packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are already
paired.
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 14), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 14).
The estimate may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires
a few runs to learn about your running performance.
1 Run for at least 10 minutes outdoors.
2 After your run, select Save.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
4 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling
This feature requires a power meter and wrist-based heart rate
or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. The power meter must
be paired with your fēnix 5X device (Pairing Your Wireless
Sensors, page 28). If you are using a chest heart rate monitor,
you must put it on and pair it with your device. If your fēnix 5X
device was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are
already paired.
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 14) and set your maximum
heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 14). The
estimate may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires a few
rides to learn about your cycling performance.
1 Ride at a steady, high intensity for at least 20 minutes.
2 After your ride, select Save.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
4 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Recovery Time
You can use your Garmin device with wrist-based heart rate or a
compatible chest heart rate monitor to display how much time
remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next
hard workout.
NOTE: The recovery time recommendation uses your VO2 max.
estimate and may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires
you to complete a few activities to learn about your
performance.
The recovery time appears immediately following an activity.
The time counts down until it is optimal for you to attempt
another hard workout.
Viewing Your Recovery Time
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 14), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 14).
1 Go for a run.
2 After your run, select Save.
The recovery time appears. The maximum time is 4 days.
NOTE: From the watch face, you can select UP or DOWN to
view the performance widget, and select to scroll through
the performance measurements to view your recovery time.

Recovery Heart Rate If you are training with wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor, you can check your recovery heart rate value after each activity. Recovery heart rate is the difference between your exercising heart rate and your heart rate two minutes after the exercise has stopped. For example, after a typical training run, you stop the timer. Your heart rate is 140 bpm. After two minutes of no activity or cool down, your heart rate is 90 bpm. Your recovery heart rate is 50 bpm (140 minus 90). Some studies have linked recovery heart rate to cardiac health. Higher numbers generally indicate healthier hearts. TIP: For best results, you should stop moving for two minutes while the device calculates your recovery heart rate value. You can save or discard the activity after this value appears.

Training Load Training load is a measurement of your training volume over the last seven days. It is the sum of your excess post-exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) measurements for the last seven days. The gauge indicates whether your current load is low, high, or within the optimal range to maintain or improve your fitness level. The optimal range is determined based on your individual fitness level and training history. The range adjusts as your training time and intensity increase or decrease.

12 Heart Rate Features

Viewing Your Predicted Race Times
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 14), and set your
maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 14).
Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate (About VO2 Max.
Estimates, page 12) and published data sources to provide a
target race time based on your current state of fitness. This
projection also presumes you have completed the proper
training for the race.
NOTE: The projections may seem inaccurate at first. The device
requires a few runs to learn about your running performance.
1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Your projected race times appear for 5K, 10K, half marathon,
and marathon distances.

About Training Effect Training Effect measures the impact of an activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. Training Effect accumulates during the activity. As the activity progresses, the Training Effect value increases, telling you how the activity has improved your fitness. Training Effect is determined by your user profile information, heart rate, duration, and intensity of your activity. Aerobic Training Effect uses your heart rate to measure how the accumulated intensity of an exercise affects your aerobic fitness and indicates if the workout had a maintaining or improving effect on your fitness level. Your EPOC accumulated during exercise is mapped to a range of values that account for your fitness level and training habits. Steady workouts at moderate effort or workouts involving longer intervals (>180 sec) have a positive impact on your aerobic metabolism and result in an improved aerobic Training Effect. Anaerobic Training Effect uses heart rate and speed (or power) to determine how a workout affects your ability to perform at very high intensity. You receive a value based on the anaerobic contribution to EPOC and the type of activity. Repeated high intensity intervals of 10 to 120 seconds have a highly beneficial impact on your anaerobic capability and result in an improved anaerobic Training Effect. It is important to know that your Training Effect numbers (from 0.0 to 5.0) may seem abnormally high during your first few activities. It takes several activities for the device to learn your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. You can add Training Effect as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your numbers throughout the activity. Color Zone Training Effect Aerobic Benefit Anaerobic Benefit From 0.0 to 0.9 No benefit. No benefit. From 1.0 to 1.9 Minor benefit. Minor benefit. From 2.0 to 2.9 Maintains your aerobic fitness.

Maintains your anaerobic fitness.

From 3.0 to 3.9 Improves your aerobic fitness.

Improves your anaerobic fitness.

From 4.0 to 4.9 Highly improves your aerobic fitness.

Highly improves your anaerobic fitness.

5.0 Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time.

Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time. Training effect technology is provided and supported by Firstbeat Technologies Ltd. For more information, go to www.firstbeattechnologies.com.

Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
Stress level is the result of a three-minute test performed while
standing still, where the fēnix device analyzes heart rate
variability to determine your overall stress. Training, sleep,
nutrition, and general life stress all impact how a runner
performs. The stress level range is from 1 to 100, where 1 is a
very low stress state and 100 is a very high stress state.
Knowing your stress level can help you decide if your body is
ready for a tough training run or yoga.
Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before
you can view your heart rate variability (HRV) stress level, you
must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device
(Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 28). If your fēnix 5X
device was packaged with a heart rate monitor, the devices are
already paired.
TIP: Garmin recommends that you measure your stress level at
approximately the same time and under the same conditions
every day.
1 If necessary, select > Add > HRV Stress to add the stress
app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > HRV Stress > .
4 Stand still, and rest for 3 minutes.

Performance Condition As you complete your activity, such as running or cycling, the performance condition feature analyzes your pace, heart rate, and heart rate variability to make a real-time assessment of your ability to perform compared to your average fitness level. It is approximately your real-time percentage deviation from your baseline VO2 max. estimate. Performance condition values range from -20 to +20. After the first 6 to 20 minutes of your activity, the device displays your performance condition score. For example, a score of +5 means that you are rested, fresh, and capable of a good run or ride. You can add performance condition as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your ability throughout the activity. Performance condition can also be an indicator of fatigue level, especially at the end of a long training run or ride. NOTE: The device requires a few runs or rides with a heart rate monitor to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate and learn about your running or riding ability (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 12). Viewing Your Performance Condition This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. 1 Add Perform. Cond. to a data screen (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22). 2 Go for a run or ride. After 6 to 20 minutes, your performance condition appears. 3 Scroll to the data screen to view your performance condition throughout the run or ride.

Lactate Threshold Lactate threshold is the exercise intensity at which lactate (lactic acid) starts to accumulate in the bloodstream. In running, it is the estimated level of effort or pace. When a runner exceeds the threshold, fatigue starts to increase at an accelerating rate. For experienced runners, the threshold occurs at approximately 90% of their maximum heart rate and between 10k and half-marathon race pace. For average runners, the lactate threshold often occurs well below 90% of maximum heart rate. Knowing your lactate threshold can help you determine how hard to train or when to push yourself during a race.

Heart Rate Features 13

If you already know your lactate threshold heart rate value, you
can enter it in your user profile settings (Setting Your Heart Rate
Zones, page 14).
Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate
Threshold
This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before
you can perform the guided test, you must put on a heart rate
monitor and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless
Sensors, page 28).
The device uses your user profile information from the initial
setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your lactate
threshold. The device will automatically detect your lactate
threshold during runs at a steady, high intensity with heart rate.
TIP: The device requires a few runs with a chest heart rate
monitor to get an accurate maximum heart rate value and VO2
max. estimate. If you are having trouble getting a lactate
threshold estimate, try manually lowering your maximum heart
rate value.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an outdoor running activity.
GPS is required to complete the test.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Lactate Threshold Guided Test.
5 Start the timer, and follow the on-screen instructions.
After you begin your run, the device displays each step
duration, the target, and current heart rate data. A message
appears when the test is complete.
6 After you complete the guided test, stop the timer and save
the activity.
If this is your first lactate threshold estimate, the device
prompts you to update your heart rate zones based on your
lactate threshold heart rate. For each additional lactate
threshold estimate, the device prompts you to accept or
decline the estimate.
Getting Your FTP Estimate
Before you can get your functional threshold power (FTP)
estimate, you must pair a chest heart rate monitor and power
meter with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors,
page 28), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate (Getting
Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 12).
The device uses your user profile information from the initial
setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your FTP. The
device will automatically detect your FTP during rides at a
steady, high intensity with heart rate and power.
1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget.
2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements.
Your FTP estimate appears as a value measured in watts per
kilogram, your power output in watts, and a position on the
color gauge.
Purple Superior
Blue Excellent
Green Good
Orange Fair
Red Untrained
For more information, see the appendix (FTP Ratings,
page 36).
NOTE: When a performance notification alerts you to a new
FTP, you can select Accept to save the new FTP, or Decline
to keep your current FTP (Turning Off Performance
Notifications, page 11).
Conducting an FTP Test
Before you can conduct a test to determine your functional
threshold power (FTP), you must pair a chest heart rate monitor
and a power meter with your device (Pairing Your Wireless
Sensors, page 28), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate
(Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 12).
NOTE: The FTP test is a challenging workout that takes about
30 minutes to complete. Choose a practical and mostly flat route
that allows you to ride at a steadily increasing effort, similar to a
time trial.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select a cycling activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > FTP Guided Test.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you begin your ride, the device displays each step
duration, the target, and current power data. A message
appears when the test is complete.
6 After you complete the guided test, complete the cool down,
stop the timer, and save the activity.
Your FTP appears as a value measured in watts per
kilogram, your power output in watts, and a position on the
color gauge.
7 Select an option:
• Select Accept to save the new FTP.
• Select Decline to keep your current FTP.

Training Setting Up Your User Profile You can update your gender, birth year, height, weight, heart rate zone, and power zone settings. The device uses this information to calculate accurate training data. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > User Profile. 3 Select an option.

Fitness Goals Knowing your heart rate zones can help you measure and improve your fitness by understanding and applying these principles.

• Your heart rate is a good measure of exercise intensity.
• Training in certain heart rate zones can help you improve cardiovascular capacity and strength.

If you know your maximum heart rate, you can use the table (Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 15) to determine the best heart rate zone for your fitness objectives. If you do not know your maximum heart rate, use one of the calculators available on the Internet. Some gyms and health centers can provide a test that measures maximum heart rate. The default maximum heart rate is 220 minus your age.

About Heart Rate Zones Many athletes use heart rate zones to measure and increase their cardiovascular strength and improve their level of fitness. A heart rate zone is a set range of heartbeats per minute. The five commonly accepted heart rate zones are numbered from 1 to 5 according to increasing intensity. Generally, heart rate zones are calculated based on percentages of your maximum heart rate. Setting Your Heart Rate Zones The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup to determine your default heart rate zones. You can set separate heart rate zones for sport profiles, such as running, cycling, and swimming. For the most accurate calorie data

14 Training

during your activity, set your maximum heart rate. You can also
set each heart rate zone and enter your resting heart rate
manually. You can manually adjust your zones on the device or
using your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Heart Rate.
3 Select Max. HR, and enter your maximum heart rate.
You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically
record your maximum heart rate during an activity (Detecting
Performance Measurements Automatically, page 11).
4 Select LTHR > Enter Manually, and enter your lactate
threshold heart rate.
You can perform a guided test to estimate your lactate
threshold (Lactate Threshold, page 13). You can use the
Auto Detection feature to automatically record your lactate
threshold during an activity (Detecting Performance
Measurements Automatically, page 11).
5 Select Resting HR, and enter your resting heart rate.
You can use the average resting heart rate measured by your
device, or you can set a custom resting heart rate.
6 Select Zones > Based On.
7 Select an option:
• Select BPM to view and edit the zones in beats per minute.
• Select %Max. HR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Select %HRR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate).
• Select %LTHR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your lactate threshold heart rate. 8 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 9 Select Add Sport Heart Rate, and select a sport profile to add separate heart rate zones (optional). 10Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add sport heart rate zones (optional). Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones The default settings allow the device to detect your maximum heart rate and set your heart rate zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Verify that your user profile settings are accurate (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 14).
• Run often with the wrist or chest heart rate monitor.
• Try a few heart rate training plans, available from your Garmin Connect account.
• View your heart rate trends and time in zones using your Garmin Connect account. Heart Rate Zone Calculations Zone % of Maximum Heart Rate

Perceived Exertion Benefits

1 50–60% Relaxed, easy pace, rhythmic breathing

Beginning-level aerobic training, reduces stress

2 60–70% Comfortable pace, slightly deeper breathing, conversation possible

Basic cardiovascular training, good recovery pace

3 70–80% Moderate pace, more difficult to hold conversation

Improved aerobic capacity, optimal cardiovascular training

Zone % of Maximum Heart Rate

Perceived Exertion Benefits

4 80–90% Fast pace and a bit uncomfortable, breathing forceful

Improved anaerobic capacity and threshold, improved speed

5 90–100% Sprinting pace, unsustainable for long period of time, labored breathing

Anaerobic and muscular endurance, increased power

Setting Your Power Zones
The values for the zones are default values based on gender,
weight, and average ability, and may not match your personal
abilities. If you know your functional threshold power (FTP)
value, you can enter it and allow the software to calculate your
power zones automatically. You can manually adjust your zones
on the device or using your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Power Zones > Based On.
3 Select an option:
• Select Watts to view and edit the zones in watts.
• Select % FTP to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your functional threshold power. 4 Select FTP, and enter your FTP value. 5 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 6 If necessary, select Minimum, and enter a minimum power value.

Activity Tracking The activity tracking feature records your daily step count, distance traveled, intensity minutes, floors climbed, calories burned, and sleep statistics for each recorded day. Your calories burned includes your base metabolism plus activity calories. The number of steps taken during the day appears on the steps widget. The step count is updated periodically. For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.

Auto Goal Your device creates a daily step goal automatically, based on your previous activity levels. As you move during the day, the device shows your progress toward your daily goal .

If you choose not to use the auto goal feature, you can set a personalized step goal on your Garmin Connect account.

Using the Move Alert Sitting for prolonged periods of time can trigger undesirable metabolic state changes. The move alert reminds you to keep moving. After one hour of inactivity, Move! and the red bar appear. Additional segments appear after every 15 minutes of inactivity. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 28). Go for a short walk (at least a couple of minutes) to reset the move alert.

Training 15

Sleep Tracking While you are sleeping, the device automatically detects your sleep and monitors your movement during your normal sleep hours. You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings on your Garmin Connect account. Sleep statistics include total hours of sleep, sleep levels, and sleep movement. You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account. NOTE: Naps are not added to your sleep statistics. You can use do not disturb mode to turn off notifications and alerts, with the exception of alarms (Using Do Not Disturb Mode, page 16). Using Automated Sleep Tracking 1 Wear your device while sleeping. 2 Upload your sleep tracking data to the Garmin Connect site (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 7). You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account. Using Do Not Disturb Mode You can use do not disturb mode to turn off the backlight, tone alerts, and vibration alerts. For example, you can use this mode while sleeping or watching a movie. NOTE: You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings on your Garmin Connect account. You can enable the Sleep Time option in the system settings to automatically enter do not disturb mode during your normal sleep hours (System Settings, page 28). 1 Hold LIGHT. 2 Select .

Intensity Minutes
To improve your health, organizations such as the U.S. Centers
for Disease Control and Prevention, the American Heart
Association

®

, and the World Health Organization, recommend at least 150 minutes per week of moderate intensity activity, such as brisk walking, or 75 minutes per week of vigorous intensity activity, such as running. The device monitors your activity intensity and tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous intensity activities (heart rate data is required to quantify vigorous intensity). You can work toward achieving your weekly intensity minutes goal by participating in at least 10 consecutive minutes of moderate to vigorous intensity activities. The device adds the amount of moderate activity minutes with the amount of vigorous activity minutes. Your total vigorous intensity minutes are doubled when added. Earning Intensity Minutes Your fēnix 5X device calculates intensity minutes by comparing your heart rate data to your average resting heart rate. If heart rate is turned off, the device calculates moderate intensity minutes by analyzing your steps per minute.

• Start a timed activity for the most accurate calculation of intensity minutes.
• Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or vigorous intensity level.
• Wear your device all day and night for the most accurate resting heart rate.

Garmin Move IQ ™

When your movements match familiar exercise patterns, the Move IQ feature automatically detects the event and displays it in your timeline. The Move IQ events show activity type and duration, but they do not appear in your activities list or newsfeed. The Move IQ feature can automatically start a timed activity for walking and running using time thresholds you set in the Garmin Connect Mobile app. These activities are added to your activities list.

Activity Tracking Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Activity Tracking.
Status: Turns off the activity tracking features.
Move Alert: Displays a message and the move bar on the
digital watch face and steps screen. The device also beeps
or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings,
page 28).
Goal Alerts: Allows you to turn on and off goal alerts, or turn
them off only during activities. Goal alerts appear for your
daily steps goal, daily floors climbed goal, and weekly
intensity minutes goal.
Move IQ: Allows you to turn on and off Move IQ events.
Turning Off Activity Tracking
When you turn off activity tracking, your steps, floors climbed,
intensity minutes, sleep tracking, and Move IQ events are not
recorded.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activity Tracking > Status > Off.

Workouts You can create custom workouts that include goals for each workout step and for varied distances, times, and calories. You can create workouts using Garmin Connect or select a training plan that has built-in workouts from Garmin Connect, and transfer them to your device. You can schedule workouts using Garmin Connect. You can plan workouts in advance and store them on your device.

Following a Workout From the Web
Before you can download a workout from Garmin Connect, you
must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin Connect,
page 6).
1 Connect the device to your computer.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com.
3 Create and save a new workout.
4 Select Send to Device, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
5 Disconnect the device.
Starting a Workout
Before you can start a workout, you must download a workout
from your Garmin Connect account.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > My Workouts.
5 Select a workout.
NOTE: Only workouts that are compatible with the selected
activity appear in the list.
6 Select Do Workout.
7 Select to start the timer.
After you begin a workout, the device displays each step of the
workout, step notes (optional), the target (optional), and the
current workout data.

About the Training Calendar The training calendar on your device is an extension of the training calendar or schedule you set up in Garmin Connect. After you have added a few workouts to the Garmin Connect calendar, you can send them to your device. All scheduled workouts sent to the device appear in the training calendar list by date. When you select a day in the training calendar, you can view or do the workout. The scheduled workout stays on your device whether you complete it or skip it. When you send

16 Training

scheduled workouts from Garmin Connect, they overwrite the
existing training calendar.
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans
Before you can download and use a training plan from Garmin
Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin
Connect, page 6), and you must pair the fēnix device with a
compatible smartphone.
1 From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Training >
Training Plans > Find a Plan.
2 Select and schedule a training plan.
3 Select , and follow the on-screen instructions.
4 Review the training plan in your calendar.
Adaptive Training Plans
Your Garmin Connect account has an adaptive training plan and
Garmin coach to fit your training goals. For example, you can
answer a few questions and find a plan to help you complete a 5
km race. The plan adjusts to your current level of fitness,
coaching and schedule preferences, and race date. When you
start a plan, the Garmin Coach widget is added to the widget
loop on your fēnix device.

Interval Workouts You can create interval workouts based on distance or time. The device saves your custom interval workout until you create another interval workout. You can use open intervals for track workouts and when you are running a known distance.

Creating an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Edit > Interval > Type.
5 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
TIP: You can create an open-ended interval by selecting the
Open option.
6 Select Duration, enter a distance or time interval value for
the workout, and select .
7 Select BACK.
8 Select Rest > Type.
9 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
10If necessary, enter a distance or time value for the rest
interval, and select .
11Select BACK.
12Select one or more options:
• To set the number of repetitions, select Repeat.
• To add an open-ended warm up to your workout, select Warm Up > On.
• To add an open-ended cool down to your workout, select Cool Down > On.
Starting an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Do Workout.
5 Select to start the timer.
6 When your interval workout has a warm up, select LAP to
begin the first interval.
7 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you complete all of the intervals, a message appears.

Stopping an Interval Workout

• At any time, select LAP to stop the current interval or rest period and transition to the next interval or rest period.
• After all intervals and rest periods are complete, select LAP to end the interval workout and transition to a timer that can be used for cool down.
• At any time, select to stop the timer. You can resume the timer or end the interval workout.
Segments
You can send running or cycling segments from your Garmin
Connect account to your device. After a segment is saved to
your device, you can race a segment, trying to match or exceed
your personal record or other participants who have raced the
segment.
NOTE: When you download a course from your Garmin
Connect account, you can download all of the available
segments in the course.

Strava ™ Segments You can download Strava segments to your fēnix 5X device. Follow Strava segments to compare your performance with your past rides, friends, and pros who have ridden the same segment. To sign up for a Strava membership, go to the segments widget in your Garmin Connect account. For more information, go to www.strava.com. The information in this manual applies to both Garmin Connect segments and Strava segments.

Viewing Segment Details
1 Select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Segments.
5 Select a segment.
6 Select an option:

• Select Race Time to view the time and average speed or pace for the segment leader.
• Select Map to view the segment on the map.
• Select Elevation Plot to view an elevation plot of the segment.
Racing a Segment
Segments are virtual race courses. You can race a segment,
and compare your performance to past activities, others'
performance, connections in your Garmin Connect account, or
other members of the running or cycling communities. You can
upload your activity data to your Garmin Connect account to
view your segment position.
NOTE: If your Garmin Connect account and Strava account are
linked, your activity is automatically sent to your Strava account
so you can review the segment position.
1 Select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Go for a run or ride.
When you approach a segment, a message appears, and
you can race the segment.
4 Start racing the segment.
A message appears when the segment is complete.

##### Using Virtual Partner ®

Your Virtual Partner is a training tool designed to help you meet your goals. You can set a pace for the Virtual Partner and race against it.

Training 17

NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Virtual Partner.
6 Enter a pace or speed value.
7 Start your activity (Starting an Activity, page 2).
8 Select UP or DOWN to scroll to the Virtual Partner screen
and see who is leading.

Setting a Training Target
The training target feature works with the Virtual Partner feature
so you can train toward a set distance, distance and time,
distance and pace, or distance and speed goal. During your
training activity, the device gives you real-time feedback about
how close you are to achieving your training target.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Set a Target.
5 Select an option:
• Select Distance Only to select a preset distance or enter a custom distance.
• Select Distance and Time to select a distance and time target.
• Select Distance and Pace or Distance and Speed to select a distance and pace or speed target.

The training target screen appears and displays your estimated finish time. The estimated finish time is based on your current performance and the time remaining. 6 Select to start the timer.

Cancelling a Training Target 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Cancel Target > Yes.

Racing a Previous Activity
You can race a previously recorded or downloaded activity. This
feature works with the Virtual Partner feature so you can see
how far ahead or behind you are during the activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Race an Activity.
5 Select an option:
• Select From History to select a previously recorded activity from your device.
• Select Downloaded to select an activity you downloaded from your Garmin Connect account. 6 Select the activity.

The Virtual Partner screen appears indicating your estimated finish time. 7 Select to start the timer. 8 After you complete your activity, select > Save.

Personal Records When you complete an activity, the device displays any new personal records you achieved during that activity. Personal records include your fastest time over several typical race distances and longest run or ride. NOTE: For cycling, personal records also include most ascent and best power (power meter required).

Viewing Your Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record.
5 Select View Record.

Restoring a Personal Record
You can set each personal record back to the one previously
recorded.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to restore.
5 Select Previous > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing a Personal Record
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to delete.
5 Select Clear Record > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing All Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select Clear All Records > Yes.
The records are deleted for that sport only.

#### Clock

Setting an Alarm
You can set up to ten separate alarms. You can set each alarm
to sound once or to repeat regularly.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock > Add Alarm.
3 Select Time, and enter the alarm time.
4 Select Repeat, and select when the alarm should repeat
(optional).
5 Select Sounds, and select a type of notification (optional).
6 Select Backlight > On to turn on the backlight with the alarm.
7 Select Label, and select a description for the alarm
(optional).

Deleting an Alarm
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock.
3 Select an alarm.
4 Select Delete.

Starting the Countdown Timer 1 From the watch face, hold MENU. 18 Clock

2 Select Clock > Timer.
3 Enter the time.
4 If necessary, select Restart > On to automatically restart the
timer after it expires.
5 If necessary, select Sounds, and select a type of notification.
6 Select Start Timer.
Using the Stopwatch
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Stopwatch.
3 Select to start the timer.
4 Select LAP to restart the lap timer .

The total stopwatch time continues running. 5 Select to stop both timers. 6 Select an option.

Adding Alternate Time Zones
You can display the current time of day in additional time zones
on the Alt. Time Zones widget. You can add up to four alternate
time zones.
NOTE: You may need to add the Alt. Time Zones widget to the
widget loop.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alt. Time Zones > Add Zone.
3 Select a time zone.
4 If necessary, select Yes to rename the zone.

Setting Clock Alerts 1 From the watch face, hold MENU. 2 Select Clock > Alerts. 3 Select an option:

• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunset occurs, select Til Sunset > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise occurs, select Til Sunrise > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound every hour, select Hourly > On.
Syncing the Time with GPS
Each time you turn on the device and acquire satellites, the
device automatically detects your time zones and the current
time of day. You can also manually sync the time with GPS
when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving
time.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Sync With GPS.
3 Wait while the device locates satellites (Acquiring Satellite
Signals, page 31).

Navigation Saving Your Location You can save your current location to navigate back to it later. 1 Hold LIGHT. 2 Select . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Editing Your Saved Locations
You can delete a saved location or edit its name, elevation, and
position information.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Saved
Locations.
2 Select a saved location.
3 Select an option to edit the location.
Projecting a Waypoint
You can create a new location by projecting the distance and
bearing from your current location to a new location.
1 If necessary, select > Add > Project Wpt. to add the
project waypoint app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > Project Wpt..
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the heading.
5 Select .
6 Select DOWN to select a unit of measure.
7 Select UP to enter the distance.
8 Select to save.
The projected waypoint is saved with a default name.
Navigating to a Destination
You can use your device to navigate to a destination or follow a
course.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate.
2 Select a category.
3 Respond to the on-screen prompts to choose a destination.
4 Select Go To.
Navigation information appears.
5 Select to begin navigation.
Navigating to a Point of Interest
If the map data installed on your device includes points of
interest, you can navigate to them.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Points of Interest, and select a
category.
A list of points of interest near your current location appears.
5 If necessary, select an option:
• To search near a different location, select Search Near, and select a location.
• To search for a point of interest by name, select Spell Search, enter a name, select Search Near, and select a location. 6 Select a point of interest from the search results. 7 Select Go.

Navigation information appears. 8 Select to begin navigation.

Navigation 19

Points of Interest A point of interest is a place that you may find useful or interesting. Points of interest are organized by category and can include popular travel destinations such as gas stations, restaurants, hotels, and entertainment venues.

Creating and Following a Course on Your
Device
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Courses >
Create New.
2 Enter a name for the course, and select .
3 Select Add Location.
4 Select an option.
5 If necessary, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6 Select Done > Do Course.
Navigation information appears.
7 Select to begin navigation.
Creating a Round-Trip Course
The device can create a round-trip course based on a specified
distance and direction of navigation.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select Run or Bike.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Round-Trip Course.
5 Enter the total distance for the course.
6 Select a direction heading.
The device creates up to three courses. You can select
DOWN to view the courses.
7 Select to select a course.
8 Select an option:
• To begin navigation, select Go.
• To view the course on the map and pan or zoom the map, select Map.
• To view a list of turns in the course, select Turn By Turn.
• To view an elevation plot of the course, select Elevation Plot.
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man
Overboard Location
You can save a man overboard (MOB) location, and
automatically start navigation back to it.
TIP: You can customize the hold function of the keys to access
the MOB function (Customizing the Hot Keys, page 28).
From the watch face, select > Navigate > Last MOB.
Navigation information appears.
Navigating with Sight 'N Go
You can point the device at an object in the distance, such as a
water tower, lock in the direction, and then navigate to the
object.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Sight 'N Go.
2 Point the top of the watch at an object, and select .
Navigation information appears.
3 Select to begin navigation.
Navigating to Your Starting Point During an
Activity
You can navigate back to the starting point of your current
activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled. This
feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
1 During an activity, select > Back to Start.
2 Select an option:
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select TracBack.
• If you do not have a supported map or are using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the starting point of your activity in a straight line.
• If you are not using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the starting point of your activity using turn-by-turn directions.

Your current location , the track to follow , and your destination appear on the map.

Navigating to the Starting Point of Your Last
Saved Activity
You can navigate back to the starting point of your last saved
activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled. This
feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
1 Select > Navigate > Back to Start > Route.
Turn-by-turn directions help you navigate to the starting point
of your last saved activity if you have a supported map or are
using direct routing. A line appears on the map from your
current location to the starting point of the last saved activity
if you are not using direct routing.
NOTE: You can start the timer to prevent the device from
timing out to watch mode.
2 Select DOWN to view the compass (optional).
The arrow points toward your starting point.

Stopping Navigation 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Stop Navigation.

Map Your device comes preloaded with maps and can display several types of Garmin map data, including topographical contours and nearby points of interest. To purchase additional map data and view compatibility information, go to garmin.com /maps. represents your location on the map. When you are navigating to a destination, your route is marked with a line on the map.

Viewing the Map 1 From the watch face, select > Map. 2 Hold MENU, and select an option:

• To pan or zoom the map, select Pan/Zoom. TIP: You can select to toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming. You can hold to select the point indicated by the crosshairs.

20 Navigation

• To see nearby points of interest and waypoints, select Around Me.

Saving or Navigating to a Location on the Map
You can select any location on the map. You can save the
location or start navigating to it.
1 From the map, hold MENU.
2 Select Pan/Zoom.
Controls and crosshairs appear on the map.

3 Pan and zoom the map to center the location in the
crosshairs.
4 Hold to select the point indicated by the crosshairs.
5 If necessary, select a nearby point of interest.
6 Select an option:

• To start navigating to the location, select Go.
• To save the location, select Save Location.
• To view information about the location, select Review.
Navigating with the Around Me Feature
You can use the around me feature to navigate to nearby points
of interest and waypoints.
NOTE: The map data installed on your device must include
points of interest to navigate to them.
1 From the map, hold MENU.
2 Select Around Me.
Icons indicating points of interest and waypoints appear on
the map.
3 Select UP or DOWN to highlight a section of the map.
4 Select .
A list of points of interest and waypoints in the highlighted
map section appear.
5 Select to select a location.
6 Select an option:
• To start navigating to the location, select Go.
• To view the location on the map, select Map.
• To save the location, select Save Location.
• To view information about the location, select Review.

Compass The device has a 3-axis compass with automatic calibration. The compass features and appearance change depending on your activity, whether GPS is enabled, and whether you are navigating to a destination. You can change the compass settings manually (Compass Settings, page 26). To open the compass settings quickly, you can select from the compass widget.

Altimeter and Barometer The device contains an internal altimeter and barometer. The device collects elevation and pressure data continuously, even in low-power mode. The altimeter displays your approximate elevation based on pressure changes. The barometer displays environmental pressure data based on the fixed elevation where the altimeter was most recently calibrated (Altimeter Settings, page 26). To open the altimeter or barometer settings quickly, select from the altimeter or barometer widgets.

History History includes time, distance, calories, average pace or speed, lap data, and optional sensor information. NOTE: When the device memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten.

Using History
History contains previous activities you have saved on your
device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select an option:
• To view additional information about the activity, select Details.
• To select a lap and view additional information about each lap, select Laps.
• To select an interval and view additional information about each interval, select Intervals.
• To select an exercise set and view additional information about each set, select Sets.
• To view the activity on a map, select Map.
• To view the impact of the activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness, select Training Effect (About Training Effect, page 13).
• To view your time in each heart rate zone, select Time in Zone (Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone, page 21).
• To view an elevation plot of the activity, select Elevation Plot.
• To delete the selected activity, select Delete.

Multisport History Your device stores the overall multisport summary of the activity, including overall distance, time, calories, and optional accessory data. Your device also separates the activity data for each sport segment and transition so you can compare similar training activities and track how quickly you move through the transitions. Transition history includes distance, time, average speed, and calories.

Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone
Before you can view heart rate zone data, you must complete an
activity with heart rate and save the activity.
Viewing your time in each heart rate zone can help you adjust
your training intensity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Time in Zone.
Viewing Data Totals
You can view the accumulated distance and time data saved to
your device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals.
3 If necessary, select an activity.
4 Select an option to view weekly or monthly totals.

History 21

Using the Odometer
The odometer automatically records the total distance traveled,
elevation gained, and time in activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals > Odometer.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view odometer totals.

Deleting History 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select History > Options. 3 Select an option:

• Select Delete All Activities to delete all activities from the history.
• Select Reset Totals to reset all distance and time totals. NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities. 4 Confirm your selection.
Customizing Your Device
Activities and App Settings
These settings allow you to customize each preloaded activity
app based on your needs. For example, you can customize data
pages and enable alerts and training features. Not all settings
are available for all activity types.
Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an
activity, and select the activity settings.
3D Distance: Calculates your distance traveled using your
elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground.
3D Speed: Calculates your speed using your elevation change
and your horizontal movement over ground (3D Speed and
Distance, page 24).
Accent Color: Sets the accent color of each activity to help
identify which activity is active.
Alerts: Sets the training or navigation alerts for the activity.
Auto Climb: Enables the device to detect elevation changes
automatically using the built-in altimeter.
Auto Lap: Sets the options for the Auto Lap
®
feature (Auto Lap,
page 23).
Auto Pause: Sets the device to stop recording data when you
stop moving or when you drop below a specified speed
(Enabling Auto Pause
®
, page 24).
Auto Run: Enables the device to detect ski runs automatically
using the built-in accelerometer.
Auto Scroll: Enables you to move through all of the activity data
screens automatically while the timer is running (Using Auto
Scroll, page 24).
Auto Set: Enables the device to start and stop exercise sets
automatically during a strength training activity.
Background Color: Sets the background color of each activity
to black or white.
Countdown Start: Enables a countdown timer for pool
swimming intervals.
Data Screens: Enables you to customize data screens and add
new data screens for the activity (Customizing the Data
Screens, page 22).
GPS: Sets the mode for the GPS antenna. Using the GPS +
GLONASS option provides increased performance in
challenging environments and faster position acquisition.
Using the GPS + GLONASS option can reduce battery life
more than using the GPS option only. Using the UltraTrac
option records track points and sensor data less frequently
(UltraTrac, page 24).
Lap Key: Enables you to record a lap or a rest during the
activity.
Lock Keys: Locks the keys during multisport activities to
prevent accidental key presses.
Map: Sets the display preferences for the map data screen for
the activity (Activity Map Settings, page 23).
Metronome: Plays tones at a steady rhythm to help you
improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or
more consistent cadence (Using the Metronome, page 3).
Pool Size: Sets the pool length for pool swimming.
Power Save Timeout: Sets the power-save timeout options for
the activity (Power Save Timeout Settings, page 24).
Rename: Sets the activity name.
Repeat: Enables the Repeat option for multisport activities. For
example, you can use this option for activities that include
multiple transitions, such as a swimrun.
Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset the activity settings.
Routing: Sets the preferences for calculating routes for the
activity (Routing Settings, page 23).
Scoring: Enables or disables scorekeeping automatically when
you start a round of golf. The Always Ask option prompts you
when you begin a round.
Segment Alerts: Enables prompts that alert you to approaching
segments.
Stat Tracking: Enables statistics tracking while playing golf.
Stroke Detect.: Enables stroke detection for pool swimming.
Transitions: Enables transitions for multisport activities.
Customizing the Data Screens
You can show, hide, and change the layout and content of data
screens for each activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens.
6 Select a data screen to customize.
7 Select an option:
• Select Layout to adjust the number of data fields on the data screen.
• Select a field to change the data that appears in the field.
• Select Reorder to change the location of the data screen in the loop.
• Select Remove to remove the data screen from the loop. 8 If necessary, select Add New to add a data screen to the loop.

You can add a custom data screen, or select one of the predefined data screens.

Adding a Map to an Activity
You can add the map to the data screens loop for an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Map.

Alerts You can set alerts for each activity, which can help you to train toward specific goals, to increase your awareness of your environment, and to navigate to your destination. Some alerts are available only for specific activities. There are three types of alerts: event alerts, range alerts, and recurring alerts. 22 Customizing Your Device

Event alert: An event alert notifies you once. The event is a specific value. For example, you can set the device to alert you when you reach a specified elevation. Range alert: A range alert notifies you each time the device is above or below a specified range of values. For example, you can set the device to alert you when your heart rate is below 60 beats per minute (bpm) and over 210 bpm. Recurring alert: A recurring alert notifies you each time the device records a specified value or interval. For example, you can set the device to alert you every 30 minutes. Alert Name Alert Type Description Cadence Range You can set minimum and maximum cadence values.

Calories Event, recurring

You can set the number of calories.
Custom Recurring You can select an existing message or
create a custom message and select an
alert type.
Distance Recurring You can set a distance interval.
Elevation Range You can set minimum and maximum
elevation values.
Heart Rate Range You can set minimum and maximum heart
rate values or select zone changes. See
About Heart Rate Zones, page 14 and
Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 15.
Pace Range You can set minimum and maximum pace
values.
Power Range You can set the high or low power level.
Proximity Event You can set a radius from a saved
location.
Run/Walk Recurring You can set timed walking breaks at
regular intervals.
Speed Range You can set minimum and maximum
speed values.
Stroke Rate Range You can set high or low strokes per
minute.

Time Event, recurring

You can set a time interval.

Setting an Alert
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Alerts.
6 Select an option:
• Select Add New to add a new alert for the activity.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert. 7 If necessary, select the type of alert. 8 Select a zone, enter the minimum and maximum values, or enter a custom value for the alert. 9 If necessary, turn on the alert. For event and recurring alerts, a message appears each time you reach the alert value. For range alerts, a message appears each time you exceed or drop below the specified range (minimum and maximum values).
Activity Map Settings
You can customize the appearance of the map data screen for
each activity.
Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an
activity, select the activity settings, and select Map.
Configure Maps: Shows or hides data from installed map
products.
Use Sys. Settings: Enables the device to use the preferences
from the system map settings.
Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North Up
option shows north at the top of the screen. The Track Up
option shows your current direction of travel at the top of the
screen.
User Locations: Shows or hides saved locations on the map.
Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for optimal
use of your map. When disabled, you must zoom in or out
manually.
Lock on Road: Locks the position icon, which represents your
position on the map, onto the nearest road.
Track Log: Shows or hides the track log, or the path you have
traveled, as a colored line on the map.
Track Color: Changes the track log color.
Detail: Sets the amount of detail shown on the map. Showing
more detail may cause the map to redraw more slowly.
Marine: Sets the map to display data in marine mode (Marine
Map Settings, page 27).
Draw Segments: Shows or hides segments, as a colored line
on the map.

Routing Settings You can change the routing settings to customize the way the device calculates routes for each activity. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an activity, select the activity settings, and select Routing. Activity: Sets an activity for routing. The device calculates routes optimized for the type of activity you are doing. Courses: Sets how you navigate courses using the device. Use the Follow Course option to navigate a course exactly as it appears, without recalculating. Use the Use Map option to navigate a course using routable maps, and recalculate the route if you stray from the course. Calculation Method: Sets the calculation method to minimize the time, distance, or ascent in routes. Avoidances: Sets the road or transportation types to avoid in routes. Type: Sets the behavior of the pointer that appears during direct routing.

Auto Lap

Marking Laps by Distance
You can use Auto Lap to mark a lap at a specific distance
automatically. This feature is helpful for comparing your
performance over different parts of an activity (for example,
every 1 mile or 5 kilometers).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap.
6 Select an option:
• Select Auto Lap to turn Auto Lap on or off.
• Select Auto Distance to adjust the distance between laps. Each time you complete a lap, a message appears that displays the time for that lap. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 28). If necessary, you can customize the data pages to display additional lap data (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22).

Customizing the Lap Alert Message
You can customize one or two data fields that appear in the lap
alert message.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap > Lap Alert.
6 Select a data field to change it.
7 Select Preview (optional).

Enabling Auto Pause

®

You can use the Auto Pause feature to pause the timer
automatically when you stop moving. This feature is helpful if
your activity includes stop lights or other places where you must
stop.
NOTE: History is not recorded while the timer is stopped or
paused.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Pause.
6 Select an option:
• To pause the timer automatically when you stop moving, select When Stopped.
• To pause the timer automatically when your pace or speed drops below a specified level, select Custom.
Enabling Auto Climb
You can use the auto climb feature to detect elevation changes
automatically. You can use it during activities such as climbing,
hiking, running, or biking.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Climb > Status > On.
6 Select an option:
• Select Run Screen to identify which data screen appears while running.
• Select Climb Screen to identify which data screen appears while climbing.
• Select Invert Colors to reverse the display colors when changing modes.
• Select Vertical Speed to set the rate of ascent over time.
• Select Mode Switch to set how quickly the device changes modes.

3D Speed and Distance You can set 3D speed and distance to calculate your speed or distance using both your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. You can use it during activities such as skiing, climbing, navigating, hiking, running, or biking.

Turning On and Off the Lap Key You can turn on the Lap Key setting to record a lap or a rest during an activity using LAP. You can turn off the Lap Key setting to avoid recording laps due to accidental key presses during an activity.

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Lap Key.
The lap key status changes to On or Off based on the current
setting.
Using Auto Scroll
You can use the auto scroll feature to cycle through all of the
activity data screens automatically while the timer is running.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Scroll.
6 Select a display speed.

UltraTrac The UltraTrac feature is a GPS setting that records track points and sensor data less frequently. Enabling the UltraTrac feature increases battery life but decreases the quality of recorded activities. You should use the UltraTrac feature for activities that demand longer battery life and for which frequent sensor data updates are less important.

Power Save Timeout Settings
The timeout settings affect how long your device stays in
training mode, for example, when you are waiting for a race to
start. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select
an activity, and select the activity settings. Select Power Save
Timeout to adjust the timeout settings for the activity.
Normal: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after 5
minutes of inactivity.
Extended: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after
25 minutes of inactivity. The extended mode can result in
shorter battery life between charges.
Changing the Order of an Activity in the
Apps List
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Reorder.
5 Select UP or DOWN to adjust the position of the activity in
the apps list.

Widgets Your device comes preloaded with widgets that provide at-a glance information. Some widgets require a Bluetooth connection to a compatible smartphone. Some widgets are not visible by default. You can add them to the widget loop manually. ABC: Displays combined altimeter, barometer, and compass information. Alternate time zones: Displays the current time of day in additional time zones. Calendar: Displays upcoming meetings from your smartphone calendar. Calories: Displays your calorie information for the current day. Dog tracking: Displays your dog's location information when you have a compatible dog tracking device paired with your fēnix device. 24 Customizing Your Device

Floors climbed: Tracks your floors climbed and progress
toward your goal.
Golf: Displays golf information for your last round.
Heart rate: Displays your current heart rate in beats per minute
(bpm) and a graph of your heart rate.
Intensity minutes: Tracks your time spent participating in
moderate to vigorous activities, your weekly intensity minutes
goal, and progress toward your goal.
inReach
® controls: Allows you to send messages on your
paired inReach device.
Last activity: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded
activity, such as your last run, last ride, or last swim.
Last sport: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded
sport.
Music controls: Provides music player controls for your
smartphone.
My day: Displays a dynamic summary of your activity today. The
metrics include timed activities, intensity minutes, floors
climbed, steps, calories burned, and more.
Notifications: Alerts you to incoming calls, texts, social network
updates, and more, based on your smartphone notification
settings.
Performance: Displays your current training status, training
load, VO2 max. estimates, recovery time, FTP estimate,
lactate threshold, and predicted race times.
Sensor information: Displays information from an internal
sensor or a connected ANT+ sensor.
Steps: Tracks your daily step count, step goal, and data for
previous days.
Stress: Displays your current stress level and a graph of your
stress level. You can do a breathing activity to help you relax.
Sunrise and sunset: Displays sunrise, sunset, and civil twilight
times.
VIRB controls: Provides camera controls when you have a
VIRB device paired with your fēnix device.
Weather: Displays the current temperature and weather
forecast.
Xero ™ bow sight: Displays laser location information when you
have a Xero bow sight paired with your fēnix device.
Customizing the Widget Loop
You can change the order of widgets in the widget loop, remove
widgets, and add new widgets.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Widgets.
3 Select a widget.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the widget in the widget loop.
• Select Remove to remove the widget from the widget loop. 5 Select Add Widgets. 6 Select a widget.

The widget is added to the widget loop.

inReach Remote The inReach remote function allows you to control your inReach device using your fēnix device. Go to buy.garmin.com to purchase an inReach device. Using the inReach Remote Before you can use the inReach remote function, you must set the inReach widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the Widget Loop, page 25).

1 Turn on the inReach device.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch
face to view the inReach widget.
3 Select to search for your inReach device.
4 Select to pair your inReach device.
5 Select , and select an option:

• To send an SOS message, select Initiate SOS. NOTE: You should only use the SOS function in a real emergency situation.
• To send a text message, select Messages > New Message, select the message contacts, and enter the message text or select a quick text option.
• To send a preset message, select Send Preset, and select a message from the list.
• To view the timer and distance traveled during an activity, select Tracking.
VIRB Remote
The VIRB remote function allows you to control your VIRB
action camera using your device. Go to www.garmin.com/VIRB
to purchase a VIRB action camera.
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera
Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable
the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series
Owner's Manual for more information. You must also set the
VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the
Widget Loop, page 25).
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch
face to view the VIRB widget.
3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
4 Select .
5 Select an option:
• To record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
• To change video and photo settings, select Settings. Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series Owner's Manual for more information. You must also set the VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the Widget Loop, page 25). 1 Turn on your VIRB camera. 2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch face to view the VIRB widget. 3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
• To control the camera using the activity timer, select Settings > Timer Start/Stop. NOTE: Video recording automatically starts and stops when you start and stop an activity.

When the camera is connected, a VIRB data screen is automatically added to the activity apps. 4 During an activity, select UP or DOWN to view the VIRB data screen. 5 Hold MENU. 6 Select VIRB Remote. 7 Select an option:

• To control the camera using the menu options, select Settings > Manual.
• To manually record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To manually stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
Using the Stress Level Widget
The stress level widget displays your current stress level and a
graph of your stress level for the last several hours. It can also
guide you through a breathing activity to help you relax.
1 While you are sitting or inactive, select UP or DOWN to view
the stress level widget.
TIP: If you are too active for the watch to determine your
stress level, a message appears instead of a stress level
number. You can check your stress level again after several
minutes of inactivity.
2 Select to view a graph of your stress level for the last four
hours.
Blue bars indicate periods of rest. Yellow bars indicate
periods of stress. Gray bars indicate times that you were too
active to determine your stress level.
3 To start a breathing activity, select DOWN > , and enter a
duration for the breathing activity in minutes.
Customizing the Controls Menu
You can add, remove, and change the order of the shortcut
menu options in the controls menu (Viewing the Controls Menu,
page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Controls.
3 Select a shortcut to customize.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the shortcut in the controls menu.
• Select Remove to remove the shortcut from the controls menu. 5 If necessary, select Add New to add an additional shortcut to the controls menu.

Watch Face Settings You can customize the appearance of the watch face by selecting the layout, colors, and additional data. You can also download custom watch faces from the Connect IQ store.

Customizing the Watch Face
Before you can activate a Connect IQ watch face, you must
install a watch face from the Connect IQ store (Connect IQ
Features, page 8).
You can customize the watch face information and appearance,
or activate an installed Connect IQ watch face.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Watch Face.
3 Select UP or DOWN to preview the watch face options.
4 Select Add New to scroll through additional pre-loaded watch
faces.
5 Select > Apply to activate a pre-loaded watch face or an
installed Connect IQ watch face.
6 If using a pre-loaded watch face, select > Customize.
7 Select an option:
• To change the style of the numbers for the analog watch face, select Dial.
• To change the style of the hands for the analog watch face, select Hands.
• To change the style of the numbers for the digital watch face, select Layout
• To change the style of the seconds for the digital watch face, select Seconds.
• To change the data that appears on the watch face, select Data.
• To add or change an accent color for the watch face, select Accent Color.
• To change the background color, select Bkgd. Color.
• To save the changes, select Done.

##### Sensors Settings

Compass Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Compass.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the compass sensor
(Calibrating the Compass Manually, page 26).
Display: Sets the directional heading on the compass to letters,
degrees, or milli-radians.
North Ref.: Sets the north reference of the compass (Setting the
North Reference, page 26).
Mode: Sets the compass to use electronic-sensor data only
(On), a combination of GPS and electronic-sensor data when
moving (Auto), or GPS data only (Off).
Calibrating the Compass Manually
NOTICE
Calibrate the electronic compass outdoors. To improve heading
accuracy, do not stand near objects that influence magnetic
fields, such as vehicles, buildings, and overhead power lines.
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration by default. If you experience
irregular compass behavior, for example, after moving long
distances or after extreme temperature changes, you can
manually calibrate the compass.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Compass >
Calibrate > Start.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
TIP: Move your wrist in a small figure eight motion until a
message appears.
Setting the North Reference
You can set the directional reference used in calculating
heading information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Compass >
North Ref..
3 Select an option:
• To set geographic north as the heading reference, select True.
• To set the magnetic declination for your location automatically, select Magnetic.
• To set grid north (000º) as the heading reference, select Grid.
• To set the magnetic variation value manually, select User, enter the magnetic variance, and select Done.

Altimeter Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter. Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the altimeter sensor. 26 Customizing Your Device

Auto Cal.: Allows the altimeter to self-calibrate each time you
turn on GPS tracking.
Elevation: Sets the units of measure for elevation.
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting point by
default. You can manually calibrate the barometric altimeter if
you know the correct elevation.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter.
3 Select an option:
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Auto Cal., and select an option.
• To enter the current elevation, select Calibrate.
Barometer Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Barometer.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the barometer
sensor.
Plot: Sets the time scale for the chart in the barometer widget.
Storm Alert: Sets the rate of barometric pressure change that
triggers a storm alert.
Watch Mode: Sets the sensor used in watch mode. The Auto
option uses both the altimeter and barometer according to
your movement. You can use the Altimeter option when your
activity involves changes in altitude, or the Barometer option
when your activity does not involve changes in altitude.
Pressure: Sets how the device displays pressure data.
Calibrating the Barometer
Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the
device uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting point by
default. You can manually calibrate the barometer if you know
the correct elevation or the correct sea level pressure.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Barometer >
Calibrate.
3 Select an option:
• To enter the current elevation or sea level pressure, select Yes.
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Use GPS.
Map Settings
You can customize how the map appears in the map app and
data screens.
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Map.
Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North Up
option shows north at the top of the screen. The Track Up
option shows your current direction of travel at the top of the
screen.
User Locations: Shows or hides saved locations on the map.
Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for optimal
use of your map. When disabled, you must zoom in or out
manually.
Lock on Road: Locks the position icon, which represents your
position on the map, onto the nearest road.
Track Log: Shows or hides the track log, or the path you have
traveled, as a colored line on the map.
Track Color: Changes the track log color.
Detail: Sets the amount of detail shown on the map. Showing
more detail may cause the map to redraw more slowly.
Marine: Sets the map to display data in marine mode (Marine
Map Settings, page 27).
Draw Segments: Shows or hides segments, as a colored line
on the map.
Marine Map Settings
You can customize how the map appears in marine mode.
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Map > Marine.
Marine Chart Mode: Enables the nautical chart when displaying
marine data. This option displays various map features in
different colors so the marine POIs are more readable, and
so the map reflects the drawing scheme of paper charts.
Spot Soundings: Enables depth measurements on the chart.
Light Sectors: Shows and configures the appearance of light
sectors on the chart.
Symbol Set: Sets the chart symbols in marine mode. The
NOAA option displays the National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration chart symbols. The International option
displays the International Association of Lighthouse
Authorities chart symbols.
Showing and Hiding Map Data
If you have multiple maps installed on your device, you can
choose the map data to show on the map.
1 Select > Map.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select the map settings.
4 Select Map > Configure Maps.
5 Select a map to activate the toggle switch, which shows or
hides the map data.
GroupTrack Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > GroupTrack.
Show on Map: Enables you to view connections on the map
screen during a GroupTrack session.
Activity Types: Allows you to select which activity types appear
on the map screen during a GroupTrack session.
Navigation Settings
You can customize the map features and appearance when
navigating to a destination.
Customizing Map Features
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Data Screens.
3 Select an option:
• Select Map to turn on or off the map.
• Select Guide to turn on or off the guide screen that displays the compass bearing or course to follow while navigating.
• Select Elevation Plot to turn on or off the elevation plot.
• Select a screen to add, remove, or customize.
Setting Up a Heading Bug
You can set up a heading indicator to display on your data
pages while navigating. The indicator points to your target
heading.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Heading Bug.
Setting Navigation Alerts
You can set alerts to help you navigate to your destination.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Alerts.

3 Select an option:

• To set an alert for a specified distance from your final destination, select Final Distance.
• To set an alert for the estimated time remaining until you reach your final destination, select Final ETE.
• To set an alert when you stray from the course, select Off Course. 4 If necessary, select Status to turn on the alert. 5 If necessary, enter a distance or time value, and select .
System Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System.
Language: Sets the language displayed on the device.
Time: Adjusts the time settings (Time Settings, page 28).
Backlight: Adjusts the backlight settings (Changing the
Backlight Settings, page 28).
Sounds: Sets the device sounds, such as key tones, alerts, and
vibrations.
Do Not Disturb: Turns on or off do not disturb mode. Use the
Sleep Time option to turn on do not disturb mode
automatically during your normal sleep hours. You can set
your normal sleep hours on your Garmin Connect account.
Hot Keys: Allows you to assign shortcuts to device keys
(Customizing the Hot Keys, page 28).
Auto Lock: Allows you to lock the keys automatically to prevent
accidental key presses. Use the During Activity option to lock
the keys during a timed activity. Use the Not During Activity
option to lock the keys when you are not recording a timed
activity.
Units: Sets the units of measure used on the device (Changing
the Units of Measure, page 28).
Format: Sets general format preferences, such as the pace and
speed shown during activities, the start of the week, and
geographical position format and datum options.
Data Recording: Sets how the device records activity data. The
Smart recording option (default) allows for longer activity
recordings. The Every Second recording option provides
more detailed activity recordings, but may not record entire
activities that last for longer periods of time.
USB Mode: Sets the device to use mass storage mode or
Garmin mode when connected to a computer.
Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset user data and settings
(Restoring All Default Settings, page 31).
Software Update: Allows you to install software updates
downloaded using Garmin Express.

Time Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > System > Time. Time Format: Sets the device to show time in a 12-hour, 24hour, or military format. Set Time: Sets the time zone for the device. The Auto option sets the time zone automatically based on your GPS position. Time: Allows you to adjust the time if it is set to the Manual option. Alerts: Allows you to set hourly alerts, as well as sunrise and sunset alerts that sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise or sunset occurs. Sync With GPS: Allows you to manually sync the time with GPS when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving time.

Changing the Backlight Settings 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > System > Backlight.

3 Select an option:

• Select During Activity.
• Select Not During Activity. 4 Select an option:
• Select Keys to turn on the backlight for key presses.
• Select Alerts to turn on the backlight for alerts.
• Select Gesture to turn on the backlight by raising and turning your arm to look at your wrist.
• Select Timeout to set the length of time before the backlight turns off.
• Select Brightness to set the brightness level of the backlight.
Customizing the Hot Keys
You can customize the hold function of individual keys and
combinations of keys.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Hot Keys.
3 Select a key or combination of keys to customize.
4 Select a function.
Changing the Units of Measure
You can customize units of measure for distance, pace and
speed, elevation, weight, height, and temperature.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Units.
3 Select a measurement type.
4 Select a unit of measure.
Viewing Device Information
You can view device information, such as the unit ID, software
version, regulatory information, and license agreement.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > About.
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance
Information
The label for this device is provided electronically. The e-label
may provide regulatory information, such as identification
numbers provided by the FCC or regional compliance markings,
as well as applicable product and licensing information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 From the settings menu, select About.

Wireless Sensors Your device can be used with wireless ANT+ or Bluetooth sensors. For more information about compatibility and purchasing optional sensors, go to buy.garmin.com.

Pairing Your Wireless Sensors
The first time you connect a wireless sensor to your device
using ANT+ or Bluetooth technology, you must pair the device
and sensor. After they are paired, the device connects to the
sensor automatically when you start an activity and the sensor is
active and within range.
1 If you are pairing a heart rate monitor, put on the heart rate
monitor (Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor, page 9).
The heart rate monitor does not send or receive data until
you put it on.
2 Bring the device within 3 m (10 ft.) of the sensor.
NOTE: Stay 10 m (33 ft.) away from other wireless sensors
while pairing.

28 Wireless Sensors

3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
5 Select an option:

• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

After the sensor is paired with your device, the sensor status changes from Searching to Connected. Sensor data appears in the data screen loop or a custom data field.

Extended Display Mode You can use Extended Display mode to display data screens from your fēnix device on a compatible Edge device during a ride or triathlon. See your Edge owner's manual for more information.

Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence
Sensor
You can use a compatible bike speed or cadence sensor to
send data to your device.
• Pair the sensor with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 28).
• Set your wheel size (Wheel Size and Circumference, page 36).
• Go for a ride (Starting an Activity, page 2).

##### Training with Power Meters

• Go to www.garmin.com/intosports for a list of ANT+ sensors that are compatible with your device (such as Vector ™).
• For more information, see the owner's manual for your power meter.
• Adjust your power zones to match your goals and abilities (Setting Your Power Zones, page 15).
• Use range alerts to be notified when you reach a specified power zone (Setting an Alert, page 23).
• Customize the power data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22).
Using Electronic Shifters
Before you can use compatible electronic shifters, such as
Shimano

®

Di2 ™ shifters, you must pair them with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 28). You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22). The fēnix 5X device displays current adjustment values when the sensor is in adjustment mode.

Situational Awareness
Your fēnix device can be used with the Varia Vision ™ device,
Varia ™ smart bike lights, and rearview radar to improve
situational awareness. See the owner's manual for your Varia
device for more information.
NOTE: You may need to update the fēnix software before
pairing Varia devices (Updating the Software Using Garmin
Connect Mobile, page 7).

Foot Pod Your device is compatible with the foot pod. You can use the foot pod to record pace and distance instead of using GPS when you are training indoors or when your GPS signal is weak. The foot pod is on standby and ready to send data (like the heart rate monitor). After 30 minutes of inactivity, the foot pod powers off to conserve the battery. When the battery is low, a message appears on your device. Approximately five hours of battery life remain.

Improving Foot Pod Calibration
Before you can calibrate your device, you must acquire GPS
signals and pair your device with the foot pod (Pairing Your
Wireless Sensors, page 28).
The foot pod is self-calibrating, but you can improve the
accuracy of the speed and distance data with a few outdoor runs
using GPS.
1 Stand outside for 5 minutes with a clear view of the sky.
2 Start a running activity.
3 Run on a track without stopping for 10 minutes.
4 Stop your activity, and save it.
Based on the recorded data, the foot pod calibration value
changes, if necessary. You should not need to calibrate the
foot pod again unless your running style changes.
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually
Before you can calibrate your device, you must pair your device
with the foot pod sensor (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors,
page 28).
Manual calibration is recommended if you know your calibration
factor. If you have calibrated a foot pod with another Garmin
product, you may know your calibration factor.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories.
3 Select your foot pod.
4 Select Cal. Factor > Set Value.
5 Adjust the calibration factor:
• Increase the calibration factor if your distance is too low.
• Decrease the calibration factor if your distance is too high.
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance
Before you can customize the foot pod speed and distance, you
must pair your device with the foot pod sensor (Pairing Your
Wireless Sensors, page 28).
You can set your device to calculate speed and distance using
your foot pod data instead of GPS data.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories.
3 Select your foot pod.
4 Select Speed or Distance.
5 Select an option:
• Select Indoor when you are training with GPS turned off, usually indoors.
• Select Always to use your foot pod data regardless of the GPS setting.

##### tempe ™

The tempe is an ANT+ wireless temperature sensor. You can attach the sensor to a secure strap or loop where it is exposed to ambient air, and therefore, provides a consistent source of accurate temperature data. You must pair the tempe with your device to display temperature data from the tempe.

Device Information Specifications Battery type Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery fēnix 5X battery life Up to 12 days in smartwatch mode Water rating 10 ATM1

1 The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating. Device Information 29

Operating and storage temperature range

From -20º to 50ºC (from -4º to 122ºF)

USB charging temperature range

From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF) Wireless frequencies 2.4 GHz @ 1.8 dBm nominal

Battery Information
The actual battery life depends on the features enabled on your
device, such as activity tracking, wrist-based heart rate,
smartphone notifications, GPS, internal sensors, and connected
sensors.
fēnix 5X Battery Life Mode
Up to 12 days Smartwatch mode with activity tracking and 24/7
wrist-based heart rate monitoring
Up to 20 hours GPS mode with wrist-based heart rate
Up to 35 hours UltraTrac GPS mode with gyro-based dead
reckoning

Data Management NOTE: The device is not compatible with Windows

®

95, 98, Me,

Windows NT

®

, and Mac

®

OS 10.3 and earlier.

Disconnecting the USB Cable If your device is connected to your computer as a removable drive or volume, you must safely disconnect your device from your computer to avoid data loss. If your device is connected to your Windows computer as a portable device, it is not necessary to safely disconnect the device. 1 Complete an action:

• For Windows computers, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the system tray, and select your device.
• For Apple computers, select the device, and select File > Eject. 2 Disconnect the cable from your computer.

Deleting Files

NOTICE
If you do not know the purpose of a file, do not delete it. Your
device memory contains important system files that should not
be deleted.
1 Open the Garmin drive or volume.
2 If necessary, open a folder or volume.
3 Select a file.
4 Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
NOTE: If you are using an Apple computer, you must empty
the Trash folder to completely remove the files.

#### Device Maintenance Device Care

NOTICE Do not use a sharp object to clean the device. Avoid chemical cleaners, solvents, and insect repellents that can damage plastic components and finishes. Thoroughly rinse the device with fresh water after exposure to chlorine, salt water, sunscreen, cosmetics, alcohol, or other harsh chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the case. Avoid pressing the keys under water. Keep the leather band dry. Avoid swimming or showering with the leather band. Exposure to water can damage the leather band.

Avoid extreme shock and harsh treatment, because it can degrade the life of the product. Do not store the device where prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures can occur, because it can cause permanent damage.

Cleaning the Device

NOTICE
Even small amounts of sweat or moisture can cause corrosion
of the electrical contacts when connected to a charger.
Corrosion can prevent charging and data transfer.
1 Wipe the device using a cloth dampened with a mild
detergent solution.
2 Wipe it dry.
After cleaning, allow the device to dry completely.
TIP: For more information, go to www.garmin.com/fitandcare.

Cleaning the Leather Bands 1 Wipe the leather bands with a dry cloth. 2 Use a leather conditioner to clean the leather bands.

Changing the QuickFit ™ Bands 1 Slide the latch on the QuickFit band, and remove the band from the watch.

2 Align the new band with the watch.
3 Press the band into place.
NOTE: Make sure the band is secure. The latch should close
over the watch pin.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the other band.

Metal Watch Band Adjustment If your watch includes a metal watch band, you should take your watch to a jeweler or other professional to adjust the length of the metal band.

Troubleshooting My device is in the wrong language You can change the device language selection if you have accidently selected the wrong language on the device. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Scroll down to the last item in the list, and select . 3 Scroll down to the second to last item in the list, and select . 4 Select . 30 Device Maintenance

5 Select your language.

Is my smartphone compatible with my
device?
The fēnix 5X device is compatible with smartphones using
Bluetooth wireless technology.
Go to www.garmin.com/ble for compatibility information.

My phone will not connect to the device If your phone will not connect to the device, you can try these tips.

• Turn off your smartphone and your device, and turn them back on again.
• Enable Bluetooth technology on your smartphone.
• Update the Garmin Connect Mobile app to the latest version.
• Remove your device from the Garmin Connect Mobile app to retry the pairing process. If you are using an Apple device, you should also remove your device from the Bluetooth settings on your smartphone.
• Bring your smartphone within 10 m (33 ft.) of the device.
• On your smartphone, open the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select or , and select Garmin Devices > Add Device to enter pairing mode.
• On your device, hold LIGHT, and select to turn on Bluetooth technology and enter pairing mode.
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my
watch?
The device is compatible with some Bluetooth sensors. The first
time you connect a sensor to your Garmin device, you must pair
the device and sensor. After they are paired, the device
connects to the sensor automatically when you start an activity
and the sensor is active and within range.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
3 Select an option:
• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 22).

Restarting Your Device 1 Hold LIGHT until the device turns off. 2 Hold LIGHT to turn on the device.

Restoring All Default Settings
NOTE: This deletes all user-entered information and activity
history.
You can restore all of the device settings to the factory default
values.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Restore Defaults > Yes.
Acquiring Satellite Signals
The device may need a clear view of the sky to acquire satellite
signals. The time and date are set automatically based on the
GPS position.
1 Go outdoors to an open area.
The front of the device should be oriented toward the sky.
2 Wait while the device locates satellites.
It may take 30–60 seconds to locate satellite signals.

Improving GPS Satellite Reception

• Frequently sync the device to your Garmin Connect account:
◦ Connect your device to a computer using the USB cable and the Garmin Express application.
◦ Sync your device to the Garmin Connect Mobile app using your Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
◦ Connect your device to your Garmin Connect account using a Wi‑Fi wireless network. While connected to your Garmin Connect account, the device downloads several days of satellite data, allowing it to quickly locate satellite signals.
• Take your device outside to an open area away from tall buildings and trees.
• Remain stationary for a few minutes.

The temperature reading is not accurate Your body temperature affects the temperature reading for the internal temperature sensor. To get the most accurate temperature reading, you should remove the watch from your wrist and wait 20 to 30 minutes. You can also use an optional tempe external temperature sensor to view accurate ambient temperature readings while wearing the watch.

Maximizing the Battery Life You can do several things to extend the life of the battery.

• Reduce the backlight timeout (Changing the Backlight Settings, page 28).
• Reduce the backlight brightness.
• Use UltraTrac GPS mode for your activity (UltraTrac, page 24).
• Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology when you are not using connected features (Connected Features, page 5).
• When pausing your activity for a longer period of time, use the resume later option (Stopping an Activity, page 2).
• Turn off activity tracking (Turning Off Activity Tracking, page 16).
• Use a watch face that is not updated every second. For example, use a watch face without a second hand (Customizing the Watch Face, page 26).
• Limit the smartphone notifications the device displays (Managing Notifications, page 6).
• Stop broadcasting heart rate data to paired Garmin devices (Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices, page 8).
• Turn off wrist-based heart rate monitoring (Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor, page 9). NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate monitoring is used to calculate vigorous intensity minutes and calories burned.
Activity Tracking
For more information about activity tracking accuracy, go to
garmin.com/ataccuracy.

My daily step count does not appear The daily step count is reset every night at midnight. If dashes appear instead of your step count, allow the device to acquire satellite signals and set the time automatically.

My step count does not seem accurate If your step count does not seem accurate, you can try these tips.

• Wear the device on your non-dominant wrist.
• Carry the device in your pocket when pushing a stroller or lawn mower.

Troubleshooting 31

• Carry the device in your pocket when actively using your hands or arms only. NOTE: The device may interpret some repetitive motions, such as washing dishes, folding laundry, or clapping your hands, as steps.
The step counts on my device and my Garmin
Connect account don't match
The step count on your Garmin Connect account updates when
you synchronize your device.
1 Select an option:
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect application ( (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer, page 7)).
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect Mobile app ( (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 7)). 2 Wait while the device synchronizes your data.

Synchronizing can take several minutes. NOTE: Refreshing the Garmin Connect Mobile app or the Garmin Connect application does not synchronize your data or update your step count.

The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate Your device uses an internal barometer to measure elevation changes as you climb floors. A floor climbed is equal to 3 m (10 ft.).

• Avoid holding handrails or skipping steps while climbing stairs.
• In windy environments, cover the device with your sleeve or jacket as strong gusts can cause erratic readings.
My intensity minutes are flashing
When you exercise at an intensity level that qualifies toward
your intensity minutes goal, the intensity minutes flash.
Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or
vigorous intensity level.
Getting More Information
You can find more information about this product on the Garmin
website.
• Go to support.garmin.com for additional manuals, articles, and software updates.
• Go to www.garmin.com/outdoor.
• Go to http://buy.garmin.com, or contact your Garmin dealer for information about optional accessories and replacement parts.

#### Appendix

Data Fields
%FTP: The current power output as a percentage of functional
threshold power.
%HRR: The percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart
rate minus resting heart rate).
10s Avg. Power: The 10-second moving average of power
output.
10s Avg Balance: The 10-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
24-Hour Max.: The maximum temperature recorded in the last
24 hours from a compatible temperature sensor.
24-Hour Min.: The minimum temperature recorded in the last
24 hours from a compatible temperature sensor.
30s Avg. Power: The 30-second moving average of power
output.
30s Avg Balance: The 30-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
3s Avg. Balance: The three-second moving average of the left/
right power balance.
3s Avg. Power: The 3-second moving average of power output.
500m Pace: The current rowing pace per 500 meters.
Aerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your aerobic
fitness level.
Anaerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your
anaerobic fitness level.
Average HR: The average heart rate for the current activity.
Average Pace: The average pace for the current activity.
Average Power: The average power output for the current
activity.
Average Swolf: The average swolf score for the current activity.
Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one length plus
the number of strokes for that length (Swim Terminology,
page 4). In open water swimming, 25 meters is used to
calculate your swolf score.
Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current
activity.
Avg. 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for
the current activity.
Avg. Ascent: The average vertical distance of ascent since the
last reset.
Avg. Balance: The average left/right power balance for the
current activity.
Avg. Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current
activity.
Avg. Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current
activity.
Avg. Descent: The average vertical distance of descent since
the last reset.
Avg. GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time balance for
the current session.
Avg. L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left leg for
the current activity.
Avg. L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the left
leg for the current activity.
Avg. Lap Time: The average lap time for the current activity.
Avg. Moving Speed: The average speed when moving for the
current activity.
Avg. Nautical Speed: The average speed in knots for the
current activity.
Avg. Overall Speed: The average speed for the current activity,
including both moving and stopped speeds.
Avg. PCO: The average platform center offset for the current
activity.
Avg. R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right leg for
the current activity.
Avg. R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the right
leg for the current activity.
Avg. Speed: The average speed for the current activity.
Avg. Stride Len.: The average stride length for the current
session.
Avg. Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length
during the current activity.
Avg. Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes
per minute (spm) during the current activity.
Avg. Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical oscillation for
the current activity.

32 Appendix

Avg. Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation to
stride length for the current session.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current activity.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled
per stroke during the current activity.
Avg GCT: The average amount of ground contact time for the
current activity.
Avg HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current activity.
Balance: The current left/right power balance.
Battery Level: The remaining battery power.
Bearing: The direction from your current location to a
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Cadence: Cycling. The number of revolutions of the crank arm.
Your device must be connected to a cadence accessory for
this data to appear.
Cadence: Running. The steps per minute (right and left).
Calories: The amount of total calories burned.
Compass Hdg.: The direction you are moving based on the
compass.
Course: The direction from your starting location to a
destination. Course can be viewed as a planned or set route.
You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Dest. Location: The position of your final destination.
Dest. Wpt: The last point on the route to the destination. You
must be navigating for this data to appear.
Di2 Battery: The remaining battery power of a Di2 sensor.
Dist. Per Stroke: Paddle sports. The distance traveled per
stroke.
Dist. Remaining: The remaining distance to the final
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Distance: The distance traveled for the current track or activity.
Distance To Next: The remaining distance to the next waypoint
on the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Elapsed Time: The total time recorded. For example, if you start
the timer and run for 10 minutes, then stop the timer for 5
minutes, then start the timer and run for 20 minutes, your
elapsed time is 35 minutes.
Elevation: The altitude of your current location above or below
sea level.
Estimated Total Distance: The estimated distance from the
start to the final destination. You must be navigating for this
data to appear.
ETA: The estimated time of day when you will reach the final
destination (adjusted to the local time of the destination). You
must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETA at Next: The estimated time of day when you will reach the
next waypoint on the route (adjusted to the local time of the
waypoint). You must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETE: The estimated time remaining until you reach the final
destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Floors Climbed: The total number of floors climbed up for the
day.
Floors Descended: The total number of floors climbed down for
the day.
Floors per Minute: The number of floors climbed up per minute.
Front: The front bike gear from a gear position sensor.
GCT: The amount of time in each step that you spend on the
ground while running, measured in milliseconds. Ground
contact time is not calculated while walking.
GCT Balance: The left/right balance of ground contact time
while running.
Gear Battery: The battery status of a gear position sensor.
Gear Combo: The current gear combination from a gear
position sensor.
Gear Ratio: The number of teeth on the front and rear bike
gears, as detected by a gear position sensor.
Gears: The front and rear bike gears from a gear position
sensor.
Glide Ratio: The ratio of horizontal distance traveled to the
change in vertical distance.
Glide Ratio Dest.: The glide ratio required to descend from your
current position to the destination elevation. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
GPS: The strength of the GPS satellite signal.
GPS Elevation: The altitude of your current location using GPS.
GPS Heading: The direction you are moving based on GPS.
Grade: The calculation of rise (elevation) over run (distance).
For example, if for every 3 m (10 ft.) you climb you travel
60 m (200 ft.), the grade is 5%.
Heading: The direction you are moving.
Heart Rate: Your heart rate in beats per minute (bpm). Your
device must be connected to a compatible heart rate monitor.
HR %Max.: The percentage of maximum heart rate.
HR Zone: The current range of your heart rate (1 to 5). The
default zones are based on your user profile and maximum
heart rate (220 minus your age).
Int. Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve
(maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current
swim interval.
Int. Avg. %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Avg. HR: The average heart rate for the current swim
interval.
Int. Distance: The distance traveled for the current interval.
Int. Max. %HRR: The maximum percentage of heart rate
reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the
current swim interval.
Int. Max. %Max.: The maximum percentage of maximum heart
rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Max. HR: The maximum heart rate for the current swim
interval.
Int. Pace: The average pace for the current interval.
Int. Swolf: The average swolf score for the current interval.
Intensity Factor: The Intensity Factor ™ for the current activity.
Interval Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during
the current interval.
Interval Time: The stopwatch time for the current interval.
Int Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length
during the current interval.
Int Strk Rate: The average number of strokes per minute (spm)
during the current interval.
Int Strk Type: The current stroke type for the interval.
L. Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Stk. Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap.
L. Lap Stk. Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap.
L. Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.

Appendix 33

L. Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
L. Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed lap.
L. Len. Stk. Rate: The average number strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed pool length.
L. Len. Stk. Type: The stroke type used during the last completed pool length.
L. Len. Strokes: The total number of strokes for the last completed pool length. Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current lap. Lap 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for the current lap. Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the current lap. Lap Balance: The average left/right power balance for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the current lap. Lap Distance: The distance traveled for the current lap. Lap Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current lap. Lap Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current lap. Lap GCT: The average amount of ground contact time for the current lap. Lap GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time balance for the current lap. Lap HR: The average heart rate for the current lap. Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the current lap. Lap L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left leg for the current lap. Lap L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the left leg for the current lap. Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the current lap. Lap Pace: The average pace for the current lap. Lap PCO: The average platform center offset for the current lap. Lap Power: The average power output for the current lap. Lap R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right leg for the current lap. Lap R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for the right leg for the current lap. Laps: The number of laps completed for the current activity. Lap Speed: The average speed for the current lap. Lap Stride Len.: The average stride length for the current lap. Lap Strk Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the current lap. Lap Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the current lap. Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current lap. Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the current lap. Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the current lap. Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the current lap.

Lap Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical oscillation for the current lap. Lap Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length for the current lap. Last Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the last completed lap. Last Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the last completed lap. Last Lap Cad.: Cycling. The average cadence for the last completed lap. Last Lap Cad.: Running. The average cadence for the last completed lap. Last Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the last completed lap. Last Lap Dist.: The distance traveled for the last completed lap. Last Lap HR: The average heart rate for the last completed lap. Last Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the last completed lap. Last Lap Pace: The average pace for the last completed lap. Last Lap Power: The average power output for the last completed lap. Last Lap Speed: The average speed for the last completed lap. Last Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the last completed lap. Last Len. Pace: The average pace for your last completed pool length. Last Len. Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed pool length. Lat/Lon: The current position in latitude and longitude regardless of the selected position format setting. Left PP: The current power phase angle for the left leg. Power phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power is produced. Left PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the left leg. Power phase peak is the angle range over which the rider produces the peak portion of the driving force. Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during the current activity. LL 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for the last lap. L Lap Dist P Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the last completed lap. L Lap Dist P Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the last completed lap. Location: The current position using the selected position format setting. Max. Ascent: The maximum rate of ascent in feet per minute or meters per minute since the last reset. Max. Descent: The maximum rate of descent in meters per minute or feet per minute since the last reset. Max. Elevation: The highest elevation reached since the last reset. Max. Lap Power: The top power output for the current lap. Max. Nautical Speed: The maximum speed in knots for the current activity. Maximum Speed: The top speed for the current activity. Max Power: The top power output for the current activity. Min. Elevation: The lowest elevation reached since the last reset. Moving Time: The total time moving for the current activity. Multisport Time: The total time for all sports in a multisport activity, including transitions. 34 Appendix

Muscle O2 Sat. %: The estimated muscle oxygen saturation
percentage for the current activity.
Nautical Dist: The distance traveled in nautical meters or
nautical feet.
Nautical Speed: The current speed in knots.
Next Waypoint: The next point on the route. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
NP: The Normalized Power ™ for the current activity.
Off Course: The distance to the left or right by which you have
strayed from the original path of travel. You must be
navigating for this data to appear.
Pace: The current pace.
PCO: The platform center offset. Platform center offset is the
location on the pedal platform where force is applied.
Pedal Smooth.: The measurement of how evenly a rider is
applying force to the pedals throughout each pedal stroke.
Perform. Cond.: The performance condition score is a real-time
assessment of your ability to perform.
Power: The current power output in watts.
Power to Weight: The current power measured in watts per
kilogram.
Power Zone: The current range of power output (1 to 7) based
on your FTP or custom settings.
Rear: The rear bike gear from a gear position sensor.
Repeat On: The timer for the last interval plus the current rest
(pool swimming).
Reps: During a strength training activity, the number of
repetitions in a workout set.
Rest Timer: The timer for the current rest (pool swimming).
Right PP: The current power phase angle for the right leg.
Power phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power
is produced.
Right PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the right
leg. Power phase peak is the angle range over which the
rider produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Set Timer: During a strength training activity, the amount of time
spent in the current workout set.
Speed: The current rate of travel.
Stopped Time: The total time stopped for the current activity.
Stride Length: The length of your stride from one footfall to the
next, measured in meters.
Stroke Rate: Swimming. The number of strokes per minute
(spm).
Stroke Rate: Paddle sports. The number of strokes per minute
(spm).
Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current
activity.
Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the
current activity.
Sunrise: The time of sunrise based on your GPS position.
Sunset: The time of sunset based on your GPS position.
Temperature: The temperature of the air. Your body
temperature affects the temperature sensor. You can pair a
tempe sensor with your device to provide a consistent source
of accurate temperature data.
Time in Zone: The time elapsed in each heart rate or power
zone.
Time of Day: The time of day based on your current location
and time settings (format, time zone, daylight saving time).
Timer: The current time of the countdown timer.
Time Seat.: The time spent seated while pedaling for the current
activity.
Time Seat. Lap: The time spent seated while pedaling for the
current lap.
Time Stand.: The time spent standing while pedaling for the
current activity.
Time Stand. Lap: The time spent standing while pedaling for
the current lap.
Time to Next: The estimated time remaining before you reach
the next waypoint in the route. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Torque Eff.: The measurement of how efficiently a rider is
pedaling.
Total Ascent: The total elevation distance ascended since the
last reset.
Total Descent: The total elevation distance descended since
the last reset.
Total Hemoglobin: The estimated muscle oxygen total for the
current activity.
TSS: The Training Stress Score ™ for the current activity.
V Dist to Dest: The elevation distance between your current
position and the final destination. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Vert. Spd.: The rate of ascent or descent over time.
Vertical Osc.: The amount of bounce while you are running.
The vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters for
each step.
Vertical Ratio: The ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length.
Vert Spd to Tgt: The rate of ascent or descent to a
predetermined altitude. You must be navigating for this data
to appear.
VMG: The speed at which you are closing on a destination along
a route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Work: The accumulated work performed (power output) in
kilojoules.

VO2 Max. Standard Ratings These tables include standardized classifications for VO2 max. estimates by age and gender. Males Percentile 20–29 30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79 Superior 95 55.4 54 52.5 48.9 45.7 42.1 Excellent 80 51.1 48.3 46.4 43.4 39.5 36.7 Good 60 45.4 44 42.4 39.2 35.5 32.3 Fair 40 41.7 40.5 38.5 35.6 32.3 29.4 Poor 0–40 <41.7 <40.5 <38.5 <35.6 <32.3 <29.4

Appendix 35

| Females | | | Percentile | | | | | 20–29 | | 30–39 | | 40–49 | | | | | | 50–59 | | | | 60–69 | 70–79 | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Superior | | | 95 | | | | | 49.6 | | 47.4 | | 45.3 | | | | | | 41.1 | | | | 37.8 | 36.7 | | |
| Excellent | | | 80 | | | | | 43.9 | | 42.4 | | 39.7 | | | | | | 36.7 | | | | 33 | 30.9 | | |
| Good | | | 60 | | | | | 39.5 | | 37.8 | | 36.3 | | | | | | 33 | | | | 30 | 28.1 | | |
| Fair | | | 40 | | | | | 36.1 | | 34.4 | | 33 | | | | | | 30.1 | | | | 27.5 | 25.9 | | |
| Poor | | | 0–40 | | | | | <36.1 | | <34.4 | | <33 | | | | | | <30.1 | | | | <27.5 | <25.9 | | |

Data reprinted with permission from The Cooper Institute. For more information, go to www.CooperInstitute.org.

FTP Ratings
These tables include classifications for functional threshold
power (FTP) estimates by gender.
Males Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 5.05 and greater
Excellent From 3.93 to 5.04
Good From 2.79 to 3.92
Fair From 2.23 to 2.78
Untrained Less than 2.23

Females Watts per Kilogram (W/kg) Superior 4.30 and greater Excellent From 3.33 to 4.29 Good From 2.36 to 3.32 Fair From 1.90 to 2.35 Untrained Less than 1.90

Tire Size Wheel Circumference (mm)
26 × 2.10 2068
26 × 2.125 2070
26 × 2.35 2083
26 × 1-1/2 2100
26 × 3.00 2170
27 × 1 2145
27 × 1-1/8 2155
27 × 1-1/4 2161
27 × 1-3/8 2169
29 x 2.1 2288
29 x 2.2 2298
29 x 2.3 2326
650 x 20C 1938
650 x 23C 1944
650 × 35A 2090
650 × 38B 2105
650 × 38A 2125
700 × 18C 2070
700 × 19C 2080
700 × 20C 2086
700 × 23C 2096
700 × 25C 2105
700C Tubular 2130
700 × 28C 2136
700 × 30C 2146
700 × 32C 2155
700 × 35C 2168
700 × 38C 2180
700 × 40C 2200
700 × 44C 2235
700 × 45C 2242
700 × 47C 2268

FTP ratings are based on research by Hunter Allen and Andrew Coggan, PhD, Training and Racing with a Power Meter (Boulder, CO: VeloPress, 2010).

Wheel Size and Circumference
Your speed sensor automatically detects your wheel size. If
necessary, you can manually enter your wheel circumference in
the speed sensor settings.
The tire size is marked on both sides of the tire. This is not a
comprehensive list. You can also measure the circumference of
your wheel or use one of the calculators available on the
internet.
Tire Size Wheel Circumference (mm)
20 × 1.75 1515
20 × 1-3/8 1615
22 × 1-3/8 1770
22 × 1-1/2 1785
24 × 1 1753
24 × 3/4 Tubular 1785
24 × 1-1/8 1795
24 × 1.75 1890
24 × 1-1/4 1905
24 × 2.00 1925
24 × 2.125 1965
26 × 7/8 1920
26 × 1-1.0 1913
26 × 1 1952
26 × 1.25 1953
26 × 1-1/8 1970
26 × 1.40 2005
26 × 1.50 2010
26 × 1.75 2023
26 × 1.95 2050
26 × 2.00 2055
26 × 1-3/8 2068
Symbol Definitions
These symbols may appear on the device or accessory labels.
Alternating current. The device is suitable for alternating current.
Direct current. The device is suitable for direct current only.
Fuse. Indicates a fuse specification or location.
WEEE disposal and recycling symbol. The WEEE symbol is
attached to the product in compliance with the EU directive
2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE).
It is intended to deter the improper disposal of this product and to
promote reuse and recycling.

36 Appendix

#### Index

A accessories 28, 29, 31, 32 activities 2, 3, 22, 24 custom 2, 3 favorites 2 saving 2 starting 2 activity tracking 15, 16 alarms 18, 22 alerts 19, 22–24, 27 heart rate 9 altimeter 21, 26 calibrating 27 ANT+ sensors 28, 29 applications 5, 7, 8 smartphone 1 auto climb 24 Auto Lap 23, 24 Auto Pause 24 auto scroll 24 B backlight 1, 28 bands 30 barometer 21, 27 calibrating 27 battery 30 charging 1 life 30 maximizing 6, 24, 31 bike sensors 29 Bluetooth sensors 28 Bluetooth technology 5, 6, 31 C cadence 3, 9, 10 alerts 23 sensors 29 calendar 16, 17 calibrating altimeter 27 compass 26 calorie, alerts 23 charging 1 cleaning the device 9, 30 clock 18, 19 compass 21, 26, 27 calibrating 26 Connect IQ 8 connecting 6, 7 controls menu 1, 26 coordinates 19 countdown timer 18 courses creating 20 playing 4 selecting 4 customizing the device 22, 26, 28 D data pages 22 sharing 29 storing 6, 7 transferring 6, 7 uploading 7 data fields 8 deleting all user data 30 history 22 personal records 18 distance 24 alerts 23, 27 dogleg 5 drills 4 E extended display 29

F fitness 13 foot pod 29 G Garmin Connect 1, 5–7, 16, 17 storing data 7 Garmin Express 2, 7 updating software 1 GLONASS 28 goals 18 GPS 24, 28 signal 31 green view, pin location 4 ground contact time 9, 10 GroupTrack 7, 27 H hazards 4 heading setting 27 heart rate 8 alerts 9, 23 monitor 8–10, 12 pairing sensors 8 zones 11, 14, 15, 21 history 21 deleting 22 sending to computer 6, 7

I
indoor training 2
inReach remote 25
inReach remote 25
intensity minutes 16, 32
intervals 4
workouts 17

J jumpmaster 3 K keys 1, 28 customizing 24

L lactate threshold 11, 13, 14 language 28 layup 5 lengths 4 LiveTrack 7 locations 19 deleting 19 editing 19 saving 19, 21

M main menu, customizing 25 man overboard (MOB) 20 map 20, 21, 23, 27 map points. See points of interest (POI) maps 22, 27 browsing 21 navigating 20, 21 updating 1 marine 27 measurements 5 measuring a shot 5 menu 1 metronome 3 MOB 20 multisport 2, 3, 21 N navigation 19, 21, 22, 27 Sight 'N Go 20 stopping 20 north reference 26 notifications 5, 6 phone calls 6 text messages 6

O odometer 5, 22 P pairing ANT+ sensors 8 Bluetooth sensors 31 sensors 28 smartphone 1, 31 performance condition 11, 13 personal records 18 deleting 18 phone calls 6 points of interest (POI) 19–21 power (force) 11 alerts 23 meters 12, 14, 29, 36 zones 15 profiles 2 user 14 projected finish time 13 R racing 18 recovery 10–12 resetting the device 31 routes 19 settings 23 running dynamics 9, 10 S satellite signals 31 saving activities 3 scorecard 5 screen 28 segments 17 settings 16, 22–28, 31 sharing data 29 shortcuts 1, 26 Sight 'N Go 20 skiing alpine 3 snowboarding 3 sleep mode 16 smartphone 7, 8, 24, 31 applications 5, 7 pairing 1, 31 snowboarding 3 software license 28 updating 1, 7 version 28 specifications 29 speed 24 speed and cadence sensors 29 statistics 5 stopwatch 19 storing data 6, 7 stress level 13, 26 stress score 13 stride length 9, 10 strokes 4 sunrise and sunset times 19 swimming 4 swing analysis 5 swolf score 4 system settings 28 T target 18 tempe 29, 31 temperature 29, 31 text messages 6 time alerts 23 settings 28 zones and formats 28 time zones 19 timer 3, 21 countdown 18 tones 3, 18 Index 37

TracBack 2, 20
tracks 19
training 5, 17, 18
plans 16, 17
Training Effect 11, 13
training load 12
training status 11
treadmill 2
triathlon training 3
troubleshooting 8–10, 30–32
U
UltraTrac 24
unit ID 28
units of measure 28
updates, software 7
uploading data 7
USB 7
disconnecting 30
user data, deleting 30
user profile 14
V
vertical oscillation 9, 10
vertical ratio 9, 10
VIRB remote 25
Virtual Partner 17, 18
VO2 max. 10–13, 35
W
watch faces 8, 26
watch mode 24
water resistance 30
waypoints 21
projecting 19
wheel sizes 36
Wi‑Fi 7
connecting 7
widgets 1, 8, 9, 24, 26
workouts 16
loading 16

| waypoints | | 21 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | projecting | 19 | |
| wheel sizes | | 36 | |

Z zones heart rate 14, 15 power 15 time 19

38 Index

### support.garmin.com

September 2018 GUID-46975363-04DD-408E-95A7-17D40075FC50 v4

7. Garmin Fenix 5 - Full Watch Specifications | SmartwatchSpex
   URL: https://www.smartwatchspex.com/garmin-fenix-5-specs/
   Garmin Fenix 5 - Full Watch Specifications | SmartwatchSpex

1. Home
2. Garmin
3. Garmin Fenix 5

# Garmin Fenix 5

Brand: Garmin Category: Smartwatch Add to Compare

Processor: Unknown

RAM & Storage: 64MB Storage

Battery: Up to 2 Weeks

Display: MIP Display, 1.2 Inch, 240x240 Pixels

Camera: No

OS: Garmin Connect IQ

## Specifications

### Where to Buy & Price

| Buy |
| --- |

### General

| Release | April, 2017 |
| --- | --- |
| Device Name | Garmin Fenix 5 |
| Device Type | GPS Sports Smartwatch |
| Device Model | 010-01688-00 (slate gray with black band), 010-01688-10 (black with black band), 010-01688-20 (slate gray with metal band), 010-01688-30 (Performer Bundle), 010-01688-02 (slate gray with amp yellow band) |
| Box Items | Fēnix 5, Charging/data cable, Documentation; Performer Bundle: Fēnix 5, HRM-Tri™ heart rate monitor, Charging/data cable, Documentation |

### Body

| Shape | Circular |
| --- | --- |
| Case Dimensions | 47 x 47 x 15.5 mm |
| Case/Bezel | Case: Fiber-reinforced polymer, Bezel: Stainless steel |
| Strap Material | Silicone or steel |
| Strap/Band Size | 22 mm |
| Replaceable Band | Yes (Garmin QuickFit) |
| Weight | 85 g (Silicon Band), 156 g (Metal band) |
| IP Rating | - |
| Water Resistance | 10ATM waterproof |
| Colors | 010-01688-00 (slate gray with black band), 010-01688-10 (black with black band), 010-01688-20 (slate gray with metal band), 010-01688-02 (slate gray with amp yellow band) |
| Other Information | - |

### Display

| Type | Sunlight-visible, transflective memory-in-pixel (MIP) |
| --- | --- |
| Screen Size | 1.2 Inch |
| Screen Resolution | 240 x 240 Pixels |
| Pixel Density | - |
| Multi Touch | Yes |
| Screen Protection | - |

### Platform

| Operating System | Garmin Connect IQ |
| --- | --- |
| Chipset | - |
| CPU | - |
| GPU | - |

### Memory

| RAM | - |
| --- | --- |
| Internal Memory | 64 MB |
| SD Card Slot | No |

### Cellular Network

| Technology | No |
| --- | --- |
| Bands | No |
| SIM | No |
| Speed | No |

### Activity Tracker

| Distance | Yes |
| --- | --- |
| Heart Rate | Yes |
| Steps | Yes |

### Connectivity

| Bluetooth | Yes |
| --- | --- |
| GPS | GPS + GLONASS |
| WiFi | No |
| NFC | No |
| USB | - |
| Radio | No |

### Control

| Touch | Yes |
| --- | --- |
| Watchface | Customizable |
| Voice Command | No |
| Personal Assistant | - |
| Smartphone Compatibility | iPhone, Android, Windows |
| Smartphone Companion App | Garmin Connect Mobile App |

### Notifications

| Activity Alert | Yes |
| --- | --- |
| SMS | Yes |
| Email | Yes |
| Incoming Call Alert | Yes |
| Calendar Reminder | Yes |
| Weather Forecast | Yes |

### Sensors

| Accelerometer | Yes |
| --- | --- |
| Gyro | Yes |
| Heart Rate | Yes |
| Light | - |
| Compass/Magnetometer | 3-axis compass |
| Vibration/Haptics engine | Yes |
| Other Sensors | Thermometer, Barometric altimeter |

### Sound

| Speaker | - |
| --- | --- |
| Microphone | No |

### Battery

| Capacity | - |
| --- | --- |
| Battery Life | Smartwatch Mode: 2 Weeks, GPS Mode: 24 - 60 Hours |
| Standby | - |
| Talk-Time | - |
| Wireless Charging | - |
| Charging Time | - |
| Quick Charging | - |

### Additional Features

| Language | English |
| --- | --- |
| App Store | Garmin Connect IQ Store |
| Builtin Payment Service | No |
| Bluetooth Music | - |
| Other Features | - |

### More Info, Price & Buy

| Buy |
| --- |

## Videos

### More from Garmin

Garmin Fenix 6 Pro View specs →

Garmin Fenix 5X Sapphire Edition View specs →

Garmin Fenix 3 Sapphire View specs →

### Search

### Recent Comparisons

### Newly Added

### Search

8. FĒNIX ® 5/5S/5X PLUS
   URL: https://static.garmin.com/pumac/fenix5s55xplus_OM_EN-SG.pdf
   ## FĒNIX ® 5/5S/5X PLUS Owner’s Manual

© 2018 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written
consent of Garmin. Garmin reserves the right to change or improve its products and to make changes in the
content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements.
Go to www.garmin.com for current updates and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.
Garmin ®, the Garmin logo, ANT+ ®, Auto Lap ®, Auto Pause ®, Edge ®, fēnix ®, TracBack ®, VIRB ®, and Virtual Partner ®
are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA and other countries. Connect IQ™, Garmin
Connect™, Garmin Explore™, Garmin Express™, Garmin Golf™, Garmin Move IQ™ , Garmin Pay™, HRM-Run™, HRM
Swim™, HRM-Tri™, QuickFit™, tempe™, TruSwing™, Varia™, Varia Vision™, and Vector™ are trademarks of Garmin Ltd.
or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
American Heart Association ® is a registered trademark of American Heart Association, Inc. Android™ is a trademark
of Google Inc. Apple ® and Mac ® are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The
Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is
under license. The Cooper Institute ®, as well as any related trademarks, are the property of The Cooper Institute.
Di2™ is a trademark of Shimano, Inc. Shimano ® is a registered trademark of Shimano, Inc. STRAVA and Strava™
are trademarks of Strava, Inc. Advanced heartbeat analytics by Firstbeat. Training Stress Score™ (TSS), Intensity
Factor™ (IF), and Normalized Power™ (NP) are trademarks of Peaksware, LLC. Wi ‑Fi ® is a registered mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance Corporation. Windows ® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product is ANT+ ® certified. Visit www.thisisant.com/directory for a list of compatible products and apps.

Table of Contents i

##### Table of Contents

Introduction������������������������������������������������� 1
Device Overview 1
Viewing the Controls Menu 1
Viewing Widgets 1
Charging the Device 1
Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device 1
Product Updates 2
Setting Up Garmin Express 2
Activities and Apps�������������������������������������� 2
Starting an Activity 2
Tips for Recording Activities 2
Stopping an Activity 2
Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity 2
Creating a Custom Activity 3
Indoor Activities 3
Recording a Strength Training Activity 3
Outdoor Activities 3
Viewing Your Ski Runs 3
Using the Metronome 3
Playing Audio Prompts During an Activity 4
Jumpmaster 4
Multisport 4
Creating a Multisport Activity 4
Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport
Activities 4
Swimming 4
Swim Terminology 4
Stroke Types 5
Tips for Swimming Activities 5
Resting During Pool Swimming 5
Training with the Drill Log 5
Golfing 5
Playing Golf 5
Hole Information 5
Moving the Flag 5
Viewing Hazards 6
Measuring a Shot 6
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances 6
Keeping Score 6
Updating a Score 6
TruSwing™ 6
Using the Golf Odometer 6
Tracking Statistics 6
Connected Features������������������������������������� 6
Enabling Bluetooth Notifications 7
Viewing Notifications 7
Receiving an Incoming Phone Call 7
Replying to a Text Message 7
Managing Notifications 7
Turning Off the Bluetooth Smartphone Connection
7
Turning On and Off Smartphone Connection Alerts
7
Locating a Lost Mobile Device 8
Entering Text with Instant Keyboard 8
Garmin Connect 8
Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect
Mobile 8
Updating the Software Using Garmin Express 9
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect
Mobile 9
Garmin Golf™ App 9
Starting a GroupTrack Session 9
Tips for GroupTrack Sessions 9
Garmin Explore™ 9
Wi‑Fi ® Connected Features ������������������������ 10
Setting Up WiFi Connectivity 10
Connect IQ Features ���������������������������������� 10
Downloading Connect IQ Features 10
Downloading Connect IQ Features Using Your
Computer 10
Garmin Pay������������������������������������������������ 10
Setting Up Your Garmin Pay Wallet 10
Paying for a Purchase Using Your Watch 10
Adding a Card to Your Garmin Pay Wallet 11
Managing Your Garmin Pay Wallet 11
Changing Your Garmin Pay Passcode 11
Music �������������������������������������������������������� 11
Installing a Third-Party Provider 11
Signing in to Your Music Provider 12
Downloading Audio Content from a Third-Party
Provider 12
Uninstalling a Third-Party Provider 12
Downloading Personal Audio Content Using
Garmin Express™ 12
Listening to Downloaded Music 12
Controlling Music Playback on a Connected
Smartphone 12
Music Playback Controls 12
Connecting Headphones using Bluetooth

ii Table of Contents

Technology 13
Heart Rate Features����������������������������������� 13
Wrist-based Heart Rate 13
Wearing the Device 13
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data 13
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget 13
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin
Devices 13
Turning Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor
14
Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor 14
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data 14
Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor 14
Running Dynamics 15
Training with Running Dynamics 15
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data 15
Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data 16
Performance Measurements 16
Turning Off Performance Notifications 17
Detecting Performance Measurements
Automatically 17
Training Status 17
About VO2 Max. Estimates 17
Recovery Time 18
Recovery Heart Rate 18
Training Load 19
Viewing Your Predicted Race Times 19
About Training Effect 19
Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level 19
Performance Condition 20
Lactate Threshold 20
Getting Your FTP Estimate 20
Pulse Oximeter������������������������������������������ 21
Viewing the Pulse Oximeter Widget 21
Turning On All-Day Pulse Oximeter Readings 21
Turning On Manual Pulse Oximeter Readings 22
Tips for Erratic Pulse Oximeter Data 22
Training����������������������������������������������������� 22
Setting Up Your User Profile 22
Fitness Goals 22
About Heart Rate Zones 22
Setting Your Power Zones 23
Activity Tracking 23
Auto Goal 23
Using the Move Alert 23
Sleep Tracking 23
Intensity Minutes 24
Garmin Move IQ™ 24
Activity Tracking Settings 24
Workouts 24
Following a Workout From the Web 24
Starting a Workout 25
About the Training Calendar 25
Interval Workouts 25
Creating an Interval Workout 25
Starting an Interval Workout 25
Stopping an Interval Workout 25
Segments 25
Strava™ Segments 25
Viewing Segment Details 26
Racing a Segment 26
Setting a Segment to Adjust Automatically 26
Using Virtual Partner ® 26
Setting a Training Target 26
Cancelling a Training Target 26
Racing a Previous Activity 26
Personal Records 27
Viewing Your Personal Records 27
Restoring a Personal Record 27
Clearing a Personal Record 27
Clearing All Personal Records 27
Clock��������������������������������������������������������� 27
Setting an Alarm 27
Deleting an Alarm 27
Starting the Countdown Timer 27
Using the Stopwatch 27
Adding Alternate Time Zones 27
Setting Clock Alerts 28
Syncing the Time with GPS 28
Navigation������������������������������������������������� 28
Saving Your Location 28
Editing Your Saved Locations 28
Projecting a Waypoint 28
Navigating to a Destination 28
Navigating to a Point of Interest 28
Points of Interest 28
Creating and Following a Course on Your Device
29
Creating a Round-Trip Course 29
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man
Overboard Location 29
Navigating with Sight ‘N Go 29

Table of Contents iii

Navigating to Your Starting Point During an
Activity 29
Navigating to the Starting Point of Your Last
Saved Activity 29
Stopping Navigation 29
Map 30
Viewing the Map 30
Saving or Navigating to a Location on the Map
30
Navigating with the Around Me Feature 30
Compass 30
Altimeter and Barometer 30
History ������������������������������������������������������ 30
Using History 30
Multisport History 31
Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone 31
Viewing Data Totals 31
Using the Odometer 31
Deleting History 31
Customizing Your Device ��������������������������� 31
Activities and App Settings 31
Customizing the Data Screens 32
Adding a Map to an Activity 32
Alerts 32
Activity Map Settings 33
Routing Settings 33
Auto Lap 33
Customizing the Lap Alert Message 34
Enabling Auto Pause 34
Enabling Auto Climb 34
3D Speed and Distance 34
Turning On and Off the Lap Key 34
Using Auto Scroll 34
UltraTrac 34
Power Save Timeout Settings 35
Changing the Order of an Activity in the Apps List
35
Widgets 35
Customizing the Widget Loop 35
VIRB Remote 35
Using the Stress Level Widget 36
Customizing the Controls Menu 36
Watch Face Settings 36
Customizing the Watch Face 36
Sensors Settings 37
Compass Settings 37
Altimeter Settings 37
Barometer Settings 37
Map Settings 38
Marine Map Settings 38
Showing and Hiding Map Data 38
GroupTrack Settings 38
Navigation Settings 38
Customizing Map Features 38
Setting Up a Heading Bug 38
Setting Navigation Alerts 38
System Settings 39
Time Settings 39
Changing the Backlight Settings 39
Customizing the Hot Keys 39
Changing the Units of Measure 39
Viewing Device Information 39
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance
Information 40
Wireless Sensors��������������������������������������� 40
Pairing Your Wireless Sensors 40
Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence Sensor
40
Training with Power Meters 40
Using Electronic Shifters 40
Situational Awareness 40
Foot Pod 40
Improving Foot Pod Calibration 40
Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually 41
Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance 41
tempe™ 41
Device Information ������������������������������������ 41
fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus Specifications 41
Battery Information 41
Data Management 41
Disconnecting the USB Cable 41
Deleting Files 42
Device Maintenance ���������������������������������� 42
Device Care 42
Cleaning the Device 42
Cleaning the Leather Bands 42
Changing the QuickFit™ Bands 42
Metal Watch Band Adjustment 42
Troubleshooting ���������������������������������������� 42
My device is in the wrong language 42
Is my smartphone compatible with my device? 43

iv Table of Contents

My phone will not connect to the device 43
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my watch? 43
My headphones will not connect to the device 43
My music cuts out or my headphones do not stay
connected 43
Resetting Your Device 43
Resetting All Default Settings 43
Acquiring Satellite Signals 43
Improving GPS Satellite Reception 43
The temperature reading is not accurate 44
Maximizing the Battery Life 44
Activity Tracking 44
My daily step count does not appear 44
My step count does not seem accurate 44
The step counts on my device and my Garmin
Connect account don’t match 44
The floors climbed amount does not seem
accurate 44
My intensity minutes are flashing 44
Getting More Information 44
Appendix ��������������������������������������������������� 45
Data Fields 45
VO2 Max. Standard Ratings 49
FTP Ratings 50
Wheel Size and Circumference 50
Symbol Definitions 51

Introduction 1

##### Introduction

WARNING See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other important information. Always consult your physician before you begin or modify any exercise program.

Device Overview

① LIGHT

Select to turn the backlight on and off.
Hold to view the controls menu.
Hold to turn the device on.

② START

Select to view the activity list and start or stop an activity. Select to choose an option in a menu.

③ BACK LAP

Select to return to the previous screen. Select to record a lap, rest, or transition during a multisport activity. Hold to view the watch face from any screen.

④ DOWN

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus. Hold to view the music controls from any screen.

⑤ UP MENU

Select to scroll through the widget loop and menus. Hold to view the menu.

Viewing the Controls Menu The controls menu contains options, such as turning on do not disturb mode, locking the keys, and turning the device off. You can also open the Garmin Pay™ wallet. NOTE: You can add, reorder, and remove the options in the controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page 36). 1 From any screen, hold LIGHT.

2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the options.
Viewing Widgets
Your device comes preloaded with several widgets,
and more are available when you pair your device with
a smartphone.
y Select UP or DOWN.
The device scrolls through the widget loop.
y Select to view additional options and functions
for a widget.
y From any screen, hold BACK to return to the watch
face.
y If you are recording an activity, select BACK to
return to the activity data pages.

Charging the Device

WARNING This device contains a lithium-ion battery. See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other important information.

NOTICE To prevent corrosion, thoroughly clean and dry the contacts and the surrounding area before charging or connecting to a computer. Refer to the cleaning instructions in the appendix. 1 Plug the small end of the USB cable into the charging port on your device.

2 Plug the large end of the USB cable into a USB port
on your computer.
3 Charge the device completely.

Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device

To use the connected features of the fēnix device, it

2 Activities and Apps

must be paired directly through the Garmin Connect™
Mobile app, instead of from the Bluetooth ® settings on
your smartphone.
1 From the app store on your smartphone, install and
open the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
2 Bring your smartphone within 10 m (33 ft.) of your
device.
3 Select LIGHT to turn on the device.
4 The first time you turn on the device, it is in pairing
mode.
TIP: You can hold LIGHT and select to manually
enter pairing mode.
5 Select an option to add your device to your Garmin
Connect account:
• If this is the first time you are pairing a device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, follow the on-screen instructions.
• If you already paired another device with the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the or menu, select Garmin Devices > Add Device, and follow the on-screen instructions.

Product Updates

On your computer, install Garmin Express™ (www.
garmin.com/express). On your smartphone, install the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
This provides easy access to these services for
Garmin ® devices:
y Software updates
y Map updates
y Data uploads to Garmin Connect
y Product registration
Setting Up Garmin Express
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB
cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

##### Activities and Apps

Your device can be used for indoor, outdoor, athletic, and fitness activities. When you start an activity, the device displays and records sensor data. You can save activities and share them with the Garmin Connect community. You can also add Connect IQ™ activities and apps to your device using the Connect IQ Mobile app (Connect IQ Features, page 10). For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.

Starting an Activity

When you start an activity, GPS turns on automatically (if required). When you stop the activity, the device

returns to watch mode.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 If necessary, follow the on-screen instructions to
enter additional information.
4 If necessary, wait while the device connects to your
ANT+ ® sensors.
5 If the activity requires GPS, go outside, and wait
while the device locates satellites.
6 Select to start the timer.
NOTE: The device does not record your activity
data until you start the timer.
Tips for Recording Activities
y Charge the device before starting an activity
(Charging the Device, page 1).
y Select LAP to record laps.
y Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Stopping an Activity

1 Select .
2 Select an option:

• To resume your activity, select Resume.
• To save the activity and return to watch mode, select Save.
• To suspend your activity and resume it at a later time, select Resume Later.
• To mark a lap, select Lap.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select Back to Start > TracBack. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity by the most direct path, select Back to Start > Route. NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To discard the activity and return to watch mode, select Discard > Yes. NOTE: After stopping the activity, the device saves it automatically after 30 minutes.

Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity

The list of your favorite activities appears when you
press from the watch face, and it provides quick
access to the activities you use most. The first time
you press to start an activity, the device prompts
you to select your favorite activities. You can add or
remove favorite activities at any time.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
Your favorite activities appear at the top of the list
with a white background. Other activities appear
with a black background.

Activities and Apps 3

3 Select an option:

• To add a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Set as Favorite.
• To remove a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Remove from Favorites.

Creating a Custom Activity

1 From the watch face, select > Add.
2 Select an option:

• Select Copy Activity to create your custom activity starting from one of your saved activities.
• Select Other to create a new custom activity. 3 If necessary, select an activity type. 4 Select a name or enter a custom name.
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select an accent color or customize the data screens.
• Select Done to save and use the custom activity. 6 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.

Duplicate activity names include a number, for example: Bike(2). 5 Select an option:

Indoor Activities

The fēnix device can be used for training indoors, such as running on an indoor track or using a stationary bike. GPS is turned off for indoor activities. When running or walking with GPS turned off, speed, distance, and cadence are calculated using the accelerometer in the device. The accelerometer is self calibrating. The accuracy of the speed, distance, and cadence data improves after a few outdoor runs or walks using GPS. TIP: Holding the handrails of the treadmill reduces accuracy. You can use an optional foot pod to record pace, distance, and cadence. When cycling with GPS turned off, speed and distance are not available unless you have an optional sensor that sends speed and distance data to the device (such as a speed or cadence sensor). Recording a Strength Training Activity You can record sets during a strength training activity. A set is multiple repetitions (reps) of a single move. 1 From the watch face, select > Strength. The first time you record a strength training activity, you will select which wrist your watch is on. 2 Select to start the set timer. 3 Start your first set. The device counts your reps. Your rep count appears when you complete at least six reps. TIP: The device can only count reps of a single

move for each set. When you want to change moves, you should finish the set and start a new one. 4 Select LAP to finish the set. The watch displays the total reps for the set. After several seconds, the rest timer appears. 5 If necessary, hold MENU, select Edit Last Set, and edit the number of reps. TIP: You can also add the weight used for the set. 6 When you are done resting, select LAP to start your next set. 7 Repeat for each strength training set until your activity is complete. 8 After your last set, select to stop the set timer. 9 Select Save.

Outdoor Activities

The fēnix device comes preloaded with outdoor
activities, such as running and cycling. GPS is turned
on for outdoor activities. You can add new activities
based on default activities, such as walking or rowing.
You can also add custom activities to your device
(Creating a Custom Activity, page 3).
Viewing Your Ski Runs
Your device records the details of each downhill skiing
or snowboarding run using the auto run feature. This
feature is turned on by default for downhill skiing and
snowboarding. It automatically records new ski runs
based on your movement. The timer pauses when you
stop moving downhill and when you are on a chairlift.
The timer remains paused during the chairlift ride. You
can start moving downhill to restart the timer. You can
view run details from the paused screen or while the
timer is running.
1 Start a skiing or snowboarding activity.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select View Runs.
4 Select UP and DOWN to view details of your last
run, your current run, and your total runs.
The run screens include time, distance traveled,
maximum speed, average speed, and total descent.
Using the Metronome
The metronome feature plays tones at a steady rhythm
to help you improve your performance by training at a
faster, slower, or more consistent cadence.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Metronome > Status > On.
6 Select an option:

4 Activities and Apps

• Select Beats / Minute to enter a value based on the cadence you want to maintain.
• Select Alert Frequency to customize the frequency of the beats.
• Select Sounds to customize the metronome tone and vibration. 7 If necessary, select Preview to listen to the metronome feature before you run. 8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2). The metronome starts automatically. 9 During your run, select UP or DOWN to view the metronome screen. 10 If necessary, hold MENU to change the metronome settings. Playing Audio Prompts During an Activity You can enable your fēnix device to play motivational status announcements during a run or other activity. Audio prompts play on your connected headphones using Bluetooth technology, if available. Otherwise, audio prompts play on your smartphone paired through the Garmin Connect Mobile app. During an audio prompt, the device or smartphone mutes the primary audio to play the announcement. NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Audio Prompts. 3 Select an option:
• To hear a prompt for each lap, select Lap Alert. NOTE: The Lap Alert audio prompt is enabled by default.
• To customize prompts with your pace and speed information, select Pace/Speed Alert.
• To customize prompts with your heart rate information, select Heart Rate Alert.
• To hear prompts when you start and stop the timer, including the Auto Pause ® feature, select Timer Events.
• To change the language or the dialect of the voice prompts, select Dialect. Jumpmaster

WARNING The jumpmaster feature is for use by experienced skydivers only. The jumpmaster feature should not be used as a primary skydiving altimeter. Failure to input the appropriate jump related information can lead to serious personal injury or death. The jumpmaster feature follows military guidelines for calculating the high altitude release point (HARP). The device detects automatically when you have jumped to begin navigating toward the desired impact point (DIP) using the barometer and electronic compass.

Multisport

Triathletes, duathletes, and other multisport

competitors can take advantage of the multisport
activities, such as Triathlon or Swimrun. During
a multisport activity, you can transition between
activities and continue to view your total time and
distance. For example, you can switch from biking
to running and view your total time and distance for
biking and running throughout the multisport activity.
You can customize a multisport activity, or you can
use the default triathlon activity set up for a standard
triathlon.
Creating a Multisport Activity
1 From the watch face, select > Add > Multisport.
2 Select a multisport activity type, or enter a custom
name. Duplicate activity names include a number.
For example, Triathlon(2).
3 Select two or more activities.
4 Select an option:
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select whether to include transitions.
• Select Done to save and use the multisport activity. 5 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites. Tips for Triathlon Training or Using Multisport Activities y Select to start your first activity. y Select LAP to transition to the next activity.

If transitions are turned on, the transition time is recorded separately from the activity times. y If necessary, select LAP to start the next activity. y Select UP or DOWN to view additional data pages.

Swimming

NOTICE The device is intended for surface swimming. Scuba diving with the device may damage the product and will void the warranty. NOTE: The device cannot record wrist heart rate data while swimming. Swim Terminology Length: One trip down the pool. Interval: One or more consecutive lengths. A new interval starts after a rest. Stroke: A stroke is counted every time your arm wearing the device completes a full cycle. Swolf: Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one pool length and the number of strokes for that length. For example, 30 seconds plus 15 strokes equals a swolf score of 45. For open water swimming, swolf is calculated over 25 meters. Swolf is a measurement of swimming efficiency

Activities and Apps 5

and, like golf, a lower score is better. Stroke Types Stroke type identification is available only for pool swimming. Your stroke type is identified at the end of a length. Stroke types appear when you are viewing interval history. You can also select stroke type as a custom data field (Customizing the Data Screens, page 32). Free Freestyle Back Backstroke Breast Breaststroke Fly Butterfly Mixed More than one stroke type in an interval Drill Used with drill logging (Training with the Drill Log, page 5) Tips for Swimming Activities y Before starting a pool swimming activity, follow the on-screen instructions to select your pool size or enter a custom size. The next time you start a pool swimming activity, the device uses this pool size. You can hold MENU, select the activity settings, and select Pool Size to change the size. y Select LAP to record a rest during pool swimming. The device automatically records swim intervals and lengths for pool swimming. y Select LAP to record an interval during open water swimming. Resting During Pool Swimming The default rest screen displays two rest timers. It also displays time and distance for the last completed interval. NOTE: Swim data is not recorded during a rest. 1 During your swim activity, select LAP to start a rest. The display reverses to white text on a black background, and the rest screen appears. 2 During a rest, select UP or DOWN to view other data screens (optional). 3 Select LAP, and continue swimming. 4 Repeat for additional rest intervals. Training with the Drill Log The drill log feature is available only for pool swimming. You can use the drill log feature to manually record kick sets, one-arm swimming, or any type of swimming that is not one of the four major strokes. 1 During your pool swim activity, select UP or DOWN to view the drill log screen. 2 Select LAP to start the drill timer. 3 After you complete a drill interval, select LAP.

The drill timer stops, but the activity timer continues to record the entire swim session. 4 Select a distance for the completed drill. Distance increments are based on the pool size selected for the activity profile. 5 Select an option:

• To start another drill interval, select LAP.
• To start a swim interval, select UP or DOWN to return to the swim training screens.

Golfing

Playing Golf
Before you play golf, you should charge the device
(Charging the Device, page 1).
NOTE: If you found a golf course with data that’s
inaccurate or outdated, please send us a report at Golf
Course Issue Report.
1 From the watch face, select > Golf.
2 Go outside, and wait while the device locates
satellites.
3 Select a course from the list of available courses.
4 Select Yes to keep score.
5 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
The device automatically transitions when you
move to the next hole.
6 After you complete your activity, select > End
Round > Yes.
Hole Information
The device calculates the distance to the front and
back of the green, and to the selected pin location
(Moving the Flag, page 5).
① Current hole number
② Distance to the back of the green
③ Distance to the selected pin location
④ Distance to the front of the green
⑤ Par for the hole
⑥ Map of the green
Moving the Flag
You can take a closer look at the green and move the
pin location.
1 From the hole information screen, select > Move

6 Connected Features

Flag.
2 Select UP or DOWN to move the pin position.
3 Select .
The distances on the hole information screen are
updated to show the new pin location. The pin
location is saved for only the current round.
Viewing Hazards
You can view distances to hazards along the fairway
for par 4 and 5 holes. Hazards that affect shot
selection are displayed individually or in groups to help
you determine the distance to layup or carry.
1 From the hole information screen, select >
Hazards.
• The distances to the front ① and back ② of the nearest hazard appear on the screen. • The hazard type ③ is listed at the top of the screen. • The green is represented as a half circle ④ at the top of the screen. The line below the green represents the center of the fairway. • Hazards ⑤ are shown below the green in approximate locations relative to the fairway. 2 Select UP or DOWN to view other hazards for the current hole. Measuring a Shot 1 Take a shot, and watch where your ball lands. 2 Select > Measure Shot. 3 Walk or drive to your ball.
The distance automatically resets when you move
to the next hole.
4 If necessary, select Reset to reset the distance at
any time.
Viewing Layup and Dogleg Distances
You can view a list of layup and dogleg distances for
par 4 and 5 holes.
Select > Layups.
Each layup and the distance until you reach each
layup appear on the screen.
NOTE: Distances are removed from the list as you
pass them.
Keeping Score
1 From the hole information screen, select >
Scorecard.
The scorecard appears when you are on the green.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the score. Your total
score is updated.
Updating a Score
1 From the hole information screen, select >
Scorecard.
2 Select UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
3 Select to select a hole.
4 Select UP or DOWN to change the score for that
hole. Your total score is updated.
TruSwing™
The TruSwing feature allows you to view swing metrics
recorded from your TruSwing device. Go to www.
garmin.com/golf to purchase a TruSwing device.
Using the Golf Odometer
You can use the odometer to record the time, distance,
and steps traveled. The odometer automatically starts
and stops when you start or end a round.
1 Select > Odometer.
2 If necessary, select Reset to reset the odometer to
zero.
Tracking Statistics
The Stat Tracking feature enables detailed statistics
tracking while playing golf.
1 From the hole information screen, hold MENU.
2 Select the activity settings.
3 Select Stat Tracking to enable tracking statistics.

##### Connected Features

Connected features are available for your fēnix device when you connect the device to a compatible smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology. Some features require you to install the Garmin Connect Mobile app on the connected smartphone. Go to www.garmin.com/apps for more information. Some features are also available when you connect your device to a wireless network. Phone notifications: Displays phone notifications and messages on your fēnix device. LiveTrack: Allows friends and family to follow your races and training activities in real time. You can invite followers using email or social media, allowing them to view your live data on a Garmin Connect tracking page. GroupTrack: Allows you to keep track of your connections using LiveTrack directly on screen and in real time. Activity uploads to Garmin Connect: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect

Connected Features 7

account as soon as you finish recording the activity. Connect IQ: Allows you to extend your device features with new watch faces, widgets, apps, and data fields. Software Updates: Allows you to update your device software. Weather: Allows you to view current weather conditions and weather forecasts. Bluetooth sensors: Allows you to connect Bluetooth compatible sensors, such as a heart rate monitor. Find my phone: Locates your lost smartphone that is paired with your fēnix device and currently within range. Find my device: Locates your lost fēnix device that is paired with your smarphone and currently within range. Instant Keyboard: Allows you to quickly enter text to your fēnix device using your smartphone’s keyboard.

Enabling Bluetooth Notifications

Before you can enable notifications, you must pair the
fēnix device with a compatible mobile device (Pairing
Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Smart Notifications >
Status > On.
3 Select During Activity.
4 Select a notification preference.
5 Select a sound preference.
6 Select Not During Activity.
7 Select a notification preference.
8 Select a sound preference.
9 Select Privacy.
10 Select a privacy preference.
11 Select Timeout.
12 Select the amount of time the alert for a new
notification appears on the screen.
Viewing Notifications
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the
notifications widget.
2 Select , and select a notification.
3 Select DOWN for more options.
4 Select BACK to return to the previous screen.
Receiving an Incoming Phone Call
When you receive a phone call on your connected
smartphone, the fēnix device displays the name or
phone number of the caller. You can accept or decline
the call. If your device is connected to a smartphone
with Android™, you can also decline with a text
message by selecting from a list of messages on your
fēnix device.
y To accept the call, select Accept.
y To decline the call, select Decline.
y To decline the call and immediately send a text
message reply, select Reply, and select a message
from the list.
Replying to a Text Message
NOTE: This feature is available only for smartphones
with Android.
When you receive a text message notification on your
fēnix device, you can send a quick reply by selecting
from a list of messages. You can customize messages
in the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
NOTE: This feature sends text messages using your
phone. Regular text message limits and charges
from your carrier and phone plan may apply. Contact
your mobile carrier for more information about text
message charges or limits.
1 From the watch face, select UP to view the
notifications widget.
2 Select , and select a text message notification.
3 Select DOWN > Reply.
4 Select a message from the list.
Your phone sends the selected message as an SMS
text message.
Managing Notifications
You can use your compatible smartphone to manage
notifications that appear on your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus
device.
Select an option:
y If you are using an Apple ® smartphone, use the
notifications settings on your smartphone to select
the items to show on the device.
y If you are using a smartphone with Android, from
the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Settings >
Smart Notifications.

Turning Off the Bluetooth Smartphone Connection

1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu. 2 Select to turn off the Bluetooth smartphone connection on your fēnix device. Refer to the owner’s manual for your mobile device to turn off Bluetooth wireless technology on your mobile device.

Turning On and Off Smartphone Connection Alerts

You can set the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device to alert you when your paired smartphone connects and disconnects using Bluetooth wireless technology. NOTE: Smartphone connection alerts are turned off by

8 Connected Features

default.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Phone > Alerts.

Locating a Lost Mobile Device

You can use this feature to help locate a lost mobile
device that is paired using Bluetooth wireless
technology and currently within range.
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select .
The fēnix device begins searching for your paired
mobile device. An audible alert sounds on your
mobile device, and the Bluetooth signal strength
displays on the fēnix device screen. The Bluetooth
signal strength increases as you move closer to
your mobile device.
3 Select BACK to stop searching.

Entering Text with Instant Keyboard

Instant Keyboard allows you to quickly enter text to
your fēnix device using Garmin Connect Mobile app.
A keyboard will appear in Garmin Connect Mobile
whenever a text field appears on your fēnix device.
As you type on the keyboard, the characters will be
entered simultaneously to the text field on your fēnix
device.
Instant Keyboard is enabled by default. To disable
Instant Keyboard, go to Settings > Instant Keyboard in
Garmin Connect Mobile.
NOTE: Garmin Connect Mobile must be open and
paired with your fēnix device when the text field
appears.

Garmin Connect

Your Garmin Connect account allows you to track your performance and connect with your friends. It gives you the tools to track, analyze, share, and encourage each other. You can record the events of your active lifestyle, including runs, walks, rides, swims, hikes, golf games, and more. It is also your online statistics tracker, where you can analyze and share all your rounds of golf.

You can create your free Garmin Connect account when you pair your device with your phone using the Garmin Connect Mobile app, or you can go to garminconnect.com. Store your activities: After you complete and save a timed activity with your device, you can upload that activity to your Garmin Connect account and keep it as long as you want. Analyze your data: You can view more detailed information about your fitness and outdoor activities, including time, distance, heart rate, calories burned, cadence, an overhead map view, and pace and speed charts. You can view more detailed information about your golf games, including scorecards, statistics, and course information. You can also view customizable reports. NOTE: To view some data, you mus pair an optional wireless sensor with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40).

Track your progress: You can track your daily steps,
join a friendly competition with your connections,
and meet your goals.
Share your activities: You can connect with friends to
follow each other’s activities or post links to your
activities on your favorite social networking sites.
Manage your settings: You can customize your device
and user settings on your Garmin Connect account.
Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect
Mobile
Before you can update your device software using the
Garmin Connect Mobile app, you must have a Garmin
Connect account, and you must pair the device with a
compatible smartphone (Pairing Your Smartphone with
Your Device, page 1).
Synchronize your device with the Garmin Connect
Mobile app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin
Connect Mobile, page 9).
When new software is available, the Garmin
Connect Mobile app automatically sends the
update to your device.

Connected Features 9

Updating the Software Using Garmin Express
Before you can update your device software, you must
download and install the Garmin Express application
and add your device (Using Garmin Connect on Your
Computer, page 9).
1 Connect the device to your computer using the
USB cable.
When new software is available, the Garmin
Express application sends it to your device.
2 After the Garmin Express application finishes
sending the update, disconnect the device from
your computer.
Your device installs the update.
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer
The Garmin Express application connects your device
to your Garmin Connect account using a computer.
You can use the Garmin Express application to upload
your activity data to your Garmin Connect account
and to send data, such as workouts or training plans,
from Garmin Connect website to your device. You can
also install device software updates and manage your
Connect IQ apps.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the
USB cable.
2 Go to www.garmin.com/express.
3 Download and install the Garmin Express
application.
4 Open the Garmin Express application, and select
Add Device.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect
Mobile
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select .
Garmin Golf™ App
The Garmin Golf app allows golfers to compete with
each other at different courses. More than 41,000
courses have a weekly leaderboard that anyone can
join. You can set up a tournament event and invite
players to compete. You can upload scorecards
from your compatible Garmin device to view detailed
statistics and shot analyses.
The Garmin Golf app syncs your data with your Garmin
Connect account. You can download the Garmin Golf
app from the app store on your smartphone.

Starting a GroupTrack Session

Before you can start a GroupTrack session, you must have a Garmin Connect account, a compatible smartphone, and the Garmin Connect Mobile app. These instructions are for starting a GroupTrack session with fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus devices. If your connections have other compatible devices, you can

see them on the map. The other devices may not be
able to display GroupTrack riders on the map.
1 Go outside, and turn on the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus
device.
2 Pair your smartphone with the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus
device (Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device,
page 1).
3 On the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device, hold MENU, and
select Settings > GroupTrack > Show on Map to
enable viewing connections on the map screen.
4 In the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the
settings menu, select LiveTrack > GroupTrack.
5 If you have more than one compatible device,
select a device for the GroupTrack session.
6 Select Visible to > All Connections.
7 Select Start LiveTrack.
8 On the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device, start an activity.
9 Scroll to the map to view your connections.
TIP: From the map, you can hold MENU and
select Nearby Connections to view distance,
direction, and pace or speed information for other
connections in the GroupTrack session.
Tips for GroupTrack Sessions
The GroupTrack feature allows you to keep track
of other connections in your group using LiveTrack
directly on the screen. All members of the group must
be your connections in your Garmin Connect account.
y Ride outside using GPS.
y Pair your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device with your
smartphone using Bluetooth technology.
y In the Garmin Connect Mobile app, from the
settings menu, select Connections to update the
list of connections for your GroupTrack session.
y Make sure all of your connections pair to their
smartphones and start a LiveTrack session in the
Garmin Connect Mobile app.
y Make sure all your connections are in range (40 km
or 25 mi.).
y During a GroupTrack session, scroll to the map to
view your connections (Adding a Map to an Activity,
page 32).

Garmin Explore™

The Garmin Explore website and mobile app allow you to plan trips and use cloud storage for your waypoints, routes, and tracks. They offer advanced planning both online and offline, allowing you to share and sync data with your compatible Garmin device. You can use the mobile app to download maps and navigate anywhere, without using your cellular service. You can download the Garmin Explore app from the app store on your smartphone, or you can go to explore.garmin.com.

10 Wi ‑Fi® Connected Features

##### Wi‑Fi ® Connected Features

The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device has WiFi connected
features. The Garmin Connect Mobile app is not
required for you to use WiFi connectivity.
Activity uploads to your Garmin Connect account:
Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin
Connect account as soon as you finish recording
the activity.
Workouts and training plans: Allows you to browse
for and select workouts and training plans on the
Garmin Connect site. The next time your device
has a WiFi connection, the files are wirelessly sent
to your device.
Software updates: Your device downloads and installs
the latest software update automatically when a
WiFi connection is available.

Setting Up WiFi Connectivity

1 Select an option:

• Download the Garmin Connect Mobile app, and pair your smartphone (Pairing Your Smartphone with Your Device, page 1).
• Go to www.garmin.com/express, and download the Garmin Express application. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up WiFi connectivity.

##### Connect IQ Features

You can add Connect IQ features to your watch from Garmin and other providers using the Connect IQ Mobile app. You can customize your device with watch faces, data fields, widgets, and apps. Watch Faces: Allow you to customize the appearance of the clock. Data Fields: Allow you to download new data fields that present sensor, activity, and history data in new ways. You can add Connect IQ data fields to built-in features and pages. Widgets: Provide information at a glance, including sensor data and notifications. Apps: Add interactive features to your watch, such as new outdoor and fitness activity types.

Downloading Connect IQ Features

Before you can download features from the Connect
IQ Mobile app, you must pair your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus
device with your smartphone.
1 From the app store on your smartphone, install and
open the Connect IQ Mobile app.
2 If necessary, select your device.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Downloading Connect IQ Features Using Your Computer

1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB
cable.
2 Go to apps.garmin.com, and sign in.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature, and download it.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

##### Garmin Pay

The Garmin Pay feature allows you to use your watch to pay for purchases in participating stores using credit cards from a participating financial institution.

Setting Up Your Garmin Pay Wallet

You can add one or more participating credit cards to your Garmin Pay wallet. Go to garmin.com/garminpay/ banks to find participating financial institutions. 1 From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select or . 2 Select Garmin Devices, and select your device. 3 Select Garmin Pay > Create Your Wallet. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Paying for a Purchase Using Your Watch

Before you can use your watch to pay for purchases,
you must set up at least one payment card.
You can use your watch to pay for purchases in a
participating store.
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
3 Enter your four-digit passcode.
NOTE: If you enter your passcode incorrectly three
times, your wallet locks, and you must reset your
passcode in the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
Your most recently used payment card appears.

4 If you have added multiple cards to your Garmin Pay wallet, select DOWN to change to another card (optional). 5 Within 60 seconds, hold your watch near the payment reader, with the watch facing the reader. The watch vibrates and displays a check mark when it is finished communicating with the reader.

Music 11

6 If necessary, follow the instructions on the card reader to complete the transaction. TIP: After you successfully enter your passcode, you can make payments without a passcode for 24 hours while you continue to wear your watch. If you remove the watch from your wrist or disable heart rate monitoring, you must enter the passcode again before making a payment.

Adding a Card to Your Garmin Pay Wallet

You can add up to ten credit cards to your Garmin Pay
wallet.
1 From the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device page in the
Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Garmin Pay >
.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the card
information and add the card to your wallet.
After the card is added, you can select the card on your
watch when you make a payment.
Managing Your Garmin Pay Wallet
You can view detailed information about each of your
payment cards, and you can suspend, activate, or
delete a card. You can also suspend or delete your
whole Garmin Pay wallet.
NOTE: In some countries, participating financial
institutions may restrict the wallet features.
1 From the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device page in the
Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Garmin Pay >
Manage Your Wallet.
2 Select an option:
• To suspend a specific card, select the card, and select Suspend. The card must be active to make purchases using your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device.
• To temporarily suspend all cards in your wallet, select Suspend Wallet. You cannot pay using your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device until you unsuspend at least one card using the app.
• To unsuspend your suspended wallet, select Unsuspend Wallet.
• To delete a specific card, select the card, and select Delete. The card is completely deleted from your wallet. If you want to add this card to your wallet in the future, you must enter the card information again.
• To delete all cards in your wallet, select Delete Wallet. Your Garmin Pay wallet and all the card information associated with it are deleted. You cannot pay using your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device until you create a new wallet and add a card.

Changing Your Garmin Pay Passcode

You must know your current passcode to change it.
Your passcode cannot be recovered. If you forget your
passcode, you must delete your wallet, create a new
one, and reenter your card information.
You can change the passcode required to access your
Garmin Pay wallet on your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device.
1 From the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device page in the
Garmin Connect Mobile app, select Garmin Pay >
Reset Passcode.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
The next time you pay using your fēnix 5/5S/5X
Plus device, you must enter the new passcode.

##### Music

NOTICE The copyright of music provided by third-party music services are owned by the record companies. The record companies license the music tracks or albums to third-party music services with a time limit, and the music license must be periodically updated and renewed. If you often listen to downloaded music offline, you will need to reconnect your watch to the internet every 7 days (via Wi-Fi or Garmin Connect Mobile) so that you can continue to make use of third-party offline music services. NOTE: This section is about three different music playback options. You can control music playback on your paired smartphone using your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device. On a fēnix, you can download audio content to your device from your computer or from a third-party provider, so you can listen when your smartphone is not nearby. To listen to audio content stored on your device, you must connect headphones with Bluetooth technology. You can use the music controls to control music playback on your smartphone or to play music stored on your device.

Installing a Third -Party Provider

Before you can download music or other audio files
to your device from a supported third-party music
service, you must install and sign in to the service in
the Garmin Connect Mobile app.
1 From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select or
.
2 Select Garmin Devices, and select your device.
3 Select Music, installed third-party provider will
appear under the INSTALLED list.
4 If your preferred music provider is not on the list,
select Get Music Apps, and follow the on-screen
instructions to install a supported music provider.

Signing in to Your Music Provider

Apple computers, the Garmin Express application
uses your iTunes ® library.
3 Select the checkboxes for songs, playlists, and
other audio files, and select Send to Device.
4 On your device, hold DOWN to open the music
controls.
5 Select > Music Providers > Sync All.
6 If necessary, in the fēnix list, select a category,
select the checkboxes, and select Remove From
Device to remove audio files.
Before you can sign in to your music provider you must
first connect the device to a Wi-Fi network.
1 On your device, hold DOWN to open the music
controls.
2 Select > Music Providers.
3 Select a connected provider.
4 With Garmin Connect Mobile open, select START.
5 A notification will appear on your smartphone,
prompting your to sign in. Follow the on-screen
instructions to sign in to your music provider.
NOTE: If you don’t see a notification, check the
notification settings on your smartphone.

Listening to Downloaded Music

Downloading Audio Content from a Third Party Provider

1 Hold DOWN from any screen to open the music
controls.
2 Connect your headphones with Bluetooth
technology.
3 Select , and select an option:
• To listen to music downloaded to the watch from your computer, select My Music.
• To listen to music from your smartphone, select Control Music on Phone.
• To listen to music from a third-party provider, select the name of the provider. 4 Select the music you want to play.

TIP: Select Play All Songs to start playing all the songs downloaded to the device in shuffle mode.

Before you can download audio content from a third
party provider, you must connect to a Wi-Fi network.
1 On your device, hold DOWN to open the music
controls.
2 Select > Music Providers.
3 Select a connected provider.
4 Select Playlists.
5 Select UP or DOWN to view available playlists
and tracks, and select START to select items to
download to the device.
6 Select Done to download the selected items to the
device.

Controlling Music Playback on a Connected Smartphone

| Uninstalling a Third | | | -Party Provider | | | | controls. | | | | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | | | | | | 2 select | > Controls Music. | | | |
| 1 | From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select | | | | | or | | | | | |

1 Hold DOWN from any screen to open the music 3 Use the icons to pause and resume playback, skip tracks, and adjust the volume.

Music Playback Controls

1 From the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select or
.
2 Select Garmin Devices, and select your device.
3 Select Music.
4 Select an installed third-party provider.
5 Select Uninstall, and follow the on-screen
instructions to uninstall the third-party provider
from your device.

Downloading Personal Audio Content Using Garmin Express™

Before you can send your personal music to your
device, you must install Garmin Express on your
computer (Garmin.com.sg/express).
You can download your personal .mp3 and .aac files to
the device from your computer.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the
included USB cable.
2 On your computer, open Garmin Express, select
your device, and select Music.
TIP: For Windows ® computers, you can select
and browse to the folder with your audio files. For

Select to manage content from third-party providers. Select to switch between playing audio from the device and controlling music on a connected smartphone. When playing audio from the device, select to browse the available audio files and playlists in your library.

12 Music

Select to adjust the volume.
Select to play and pause the current audio
file.
Select to skip to the next audio file in the
playlist. Hold to fast forward through the
current audio file.
Select to restart the current audio file.
Select twice to skip to the previous audio
file in the playlist. Hold to rewind through
the current audio file.
Select to change the repeat mode.
Select to change the shuffle mode.

Connecting Headphones using Bluetooth Technology

To listen to music loaded onto your fēnix device, you
must connect headphones using Bluetooth technology.
1 Bring the headphones within 2 m (6.6 ft.) of your
device.
2 Enable pairing mode on the headphones.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add
New > Headphones.
5 Select your headphones to complete the pairing
process.

##### Heart Rate Features

The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device has a wrist-based heart rate monitor and is also compatible with chest heart rate monitors (sold separately). You can view heart rate data on the heart rate widget. If both wrist-based heart rate and chest heart rate data are available, your device uses the chest heart rate data.

Wrist -based Heart Rate

Wearing the Device y Wear the device above your wrist bone. NOTE: The device should be snug but comfortable. For more accurate heart rate readings on the fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device, it should not move while running or exercising. For more accurate pulse oximeter readings on the fēnix 5X Plus device, you should remain motionless.

NOTE: The optical sensor is located on the back of the device.

y See Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data, page 13 for
more information about wrist-based heart rate.
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you
can try these tips.
y Clean and dry your arm before putting on the
device.
y Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect
repellent under the device.
y Avoid scratching the heart rate sensor on the back
of the device.
y Wear the device above your wrist bone. The device
should be snug but comfortable.
y Wait until the icon is solid before starting your
activity.
y Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes and get a heart rate
reading before starting your activity.
NOTE: In cold environments, warm up indoors.
y Rinse the device with fresh water after each
workout.
y While exercising, use a silicone band.
Viewing the Heart Rate Widget
The widget displays your current heart rate in beats
per minute (bpm) and a graph of your heart rate for the
last 4 hours.
1 From the watch face, select DOWN.
2 Select to view your average resting heart rate
values for the last 7 days.
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin Devices
You can broadcast your heart rate data from your fēnix
5/5S/5X Plus device and view it on paired Garmin
devices.
NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery
life.
1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU.
2 Select Options > Broadcast Heart Rate.
The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device starts broadcasting
your heart rate data, and appears.
NOTE: You can view only the heart rate widget
while broadcasting heart rate data from the heart
rate widget.
3 Pair your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device with your
Garmin ANT+ compatible device.

NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin compatible device. See your owner’s manual. TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, select any key, and select Yes. Broadcasting Heart Rate Data During an Activity You can set up your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device to broadcast your heart rate data automatically when you begin an activity. For example, you can broadcast your heart rate data to an Edge ® device while cycling, or to a VIRB ® action camera during an activity. NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data decreases battery life. 1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options > Broadcast During Activity. 3 Begin an activity (Starting an Activity, page 2). The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device starts broadcasting your heart rate data in the background. NOTE: There is no indication that the device is broadcasting your heart rate data during an activity. 4 If necessary, pair your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device with your Garmin ANT+ compatible device. NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin compatible device. See your owner’s manual. TIP: To stop broadcasting your heart rate data, stop the activity (Stopping an Activity, page 2). Turning Off the Wrist -based Heart Rate Monitor The default value for the Wrist Heart Rate setting is Auto. The device automatically uses the wrist-based heart rate monitor unless you pair an ANT+ heart rate monitor to the device. NOTE: Disabling the wrist-based heart rate monitor also disables the on-wrist detection feature for Garmin Pay payments, and you must enter a passcode before making each payment (Garmin Pay, page 10). 1 From the heart rate widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options > Status > Off.

Putting On the Heart Rate Monitor

You should wear the heart rate monitor directly on your skin, just below your sternum. It should be snug enough to stay in place during your activity. 1 If necessary, attach the strap extender to the heart rate monitor.

2 Wet the electrodes ① on the back of the heart rate monitor to create a strong connection between your chest and the transmitter.

3 Wear the heart rate monitor with the Garmin logo facing right- side up.

The loop ② and hook ③ connection should be on your right side.
4 Wrap the heart rate monitor around your chest, and
connect the strap hook to the loop.
NOTE: Make sure the care tag does not fold over.
After you put on the heart rate monitor, it is active and
sending data.
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you
can try these tips.
y Reapply water to the electrodes and contact
patches (if applicable).
y Tighten the strap on your chest.
y Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes.
y Follow the care instructions (Caring for the Heart
Rate Monitor, page 14).
y Wear a cotton shirt or thoroughly wet both sides of
the strap.
Synthetic fabrics that rub or flap against the heart
rate monitor can create static electricity that
interferes with heart rate signals.
y Move away from sources that can interfere with
your heart rate monitor.
Sources of interference may include strong
electromagnetic fields, some 2.4 GHz wireless
sensors, high-voltage power lines, electric motors,
ovens, microwave ovens, 2.4 GHz cordless phones,
and wireless LAN access points.
Caring for the Heart Rate Monitor
NOTICE
A buildup of sweat and salt on the strap can decrease
the ability of the heart rate monitor to report accurate
data.
y Rinse the heart rate monitor after every use.
y Hand wash the heart rate monitor after every seven
uses or one pool swim, using a tiny amount of mild
detergent, such as dishwashing liquid.
NOTE: Using too much detergent may damage the
heart rate monitor.
y Do not put the heart rate monitor in a washing

machine or dryer. y When drying the heart rate monitor, hang it up or lay it flat.

Running Dynamics

You can use your compatible fēnix device paired with the HRM-Run™ accessory or other running dynamics accessory to provide real-time feedback about your running form. The running dynamics accessory has an accelerometer that measures torso movement in order to calculate six running metrics. Cadence: Cadence is the number of steps per minute. It displays the total steps (right and left combined). Vertical oscillation: Vertical oscillation is your bounce while running. It displays the vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters. Ground contact time: Ground contact time is the amount of time in each step that you spend on the ground while running. It is measured in milliseconds. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance are not available while walking. Ground contact time balance: Ground contact time balance displays the left/right balance of your ground contact time while running. It displays a percentage. For example, 53.2 with an arrow pointing left or right. Stride length: Stride length is the length of your stride from one footfall to the next. It is measured in meters. Vertical ratio: Vertical ratio is the ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length. It displays a percentage. A lower number typically indicates better running form. Training with Running Dynamics Before you can view running dynamics, you must put on a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM Run accessory, and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40). 1 Select an option:

• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device are already paired, skip to step 7.
• If your running dynamics accessory and fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device are not already paired, complete all the steps in this procedure. 2 Hold MENU. 3 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 4 Select an activity. 5 Select the activity settings. 6 Select Data Screens > Add New. 7 Select a running dynamics data screen.

NOTE: The running dynamics screens are not available for all activities. 8 Go for a run (Starting an Activity, page 2). 9 Select UP or DOWN to open a running dynamics screen to view your metrics. Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data The running dynamics screens display a color gauge for the primary metric. You can display cadence, vertical oscillation, ground contact time, ground contact time balance, or vertical ratio as the primary metric. The color gauge shows you how your running dynamics data compare to those of other runners. The color zones are based on percentiles. Garmin has researched many runners of all different levels. The data values in the red or orange zones are typical for less experienced or slower runners. The data values in the green, blue, or purple zones are typical for more experienced or faster runners. More experienced runners tend to exhibit shorter ground contact times, lower vertical oscillation, lower vertical ratio, and higher cadence than less experienced runners. However, taller runners typically have slightly slower cadences, longer strides, and slightly higher vertical oscillation. Vertical ratio is your vertical oscillation divided by stride length. It is not correlated with height. Go to www.garmin.com/runningdynamics for more information on running dynamics. For additional theories and interpretations of running dynamics data, you can search reputable running publications and websites. Color Zone Percentile in Zone Cadence Range Ground Contact Time Range Purple >95 >183 spm <218 ms Blue 70–95 174–183 spm 218–248 ms Green 30–69 164–173 spm 249–277 ms Orange 5–29 153–163 spm 278–308 ms Red <5 <153 spm >308 ms Ground Contact Time Balance Data Ground contact time balance measures your running symmetry and appears as a percentage of your total ground contact time. For example, 51.3% with an arrow pointing left indicates the runner is spending more time on the ground when on the left foot. If your data screen displays both numbers, for example 48–52, 48% is the left foot and 52% is the right foot.

Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data If running dynamics data does not appear, you can try these tips. y Make sure you have a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Run accessory. Accessories with running dynamics have on the front of the module. y Pair the running dynamics accessory with your fēnix device again, according to the instructions. y If the running dynamics data display shows only zeros, make sure the accessory is worn right-side up. NOTE: Ground contact time and balance appears only while running. It is not calculated while walking.

Performance Measurements

These performance measurements are estimates that can help you track and understand your training activities and race performances. The measurements require a few activities using wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. Cycling performance measurements require a heart rate monitor and a power meter. These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat. For more information, go to www.garmin. com/physio.

NOTE: The estimates may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires you to complete a few activities to learn about your performance. Training status: Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. VO2 max.: VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body weight at your maximum performance. Recovery time: The recovery time displays how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next hard workout. Training load: Training load is the sum of your excess post- exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) over the last 7 days. EPOC is an estimate of how much

Color Zone Red Orange Green Orange Red
Symmetry Poor Fair Good Fair Poor
Percent of Other
Runners 5% 25% 40% 25% 5%
Ground Contact
Time Balance >52.2% L 50.8–52.2% L 50.7% L–50.7% R 50.8–52.2% R >52.2% R
While developing and testing running dynamics, the Garmin team found correlations between injuries and greater
imbalances with certain runners. For many runners, ground contact time balance tends to deviate further from
50–50 when running up or down hills. Most running coaches agree that a symmetrical running form is good. Elite
runners tend to have quick and balanced strides.
You can watch the color gauge or data field during your run or view the summary on your Garmin Connect
account after your run. As with the other running dynamics data, ground contact time balance is a quantitative
measurement to help you learn about your running form.
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio Data
The data ranges for vertical oscillation and vertical ratio are slightly different depending on the sensor and
whether it is positioned at the chest (HRM-Tri™ or HRM-Run accessories) or at the waist (Running Dynamics Pod
accessory).
Color Zone Percentile
in Zone

Vertical Oscillation Range at Chest

Vertical Oscillation Range at Waist

Vertical Ratio at Chest

Vertical Ratio at Waist

Purple >95 <6.4 cm <6.8 cm <6.1% <6.5% Blue 70–95 6.4–8.1 cm 6.8–8.9 cm 6.1–7.4% 6.5–8.3% Green 30–69 8.2–9.7 cm 9.0–10.9 cm 7.5–8.6% 8.4–10.0% Orange 5–29 9.8–11.5 cm 11.0–13.0 cm 8.7–10.1% 10.1–11.9% Red <5 >11.5 cm >13.0 cm >10.1% >11.9%

energy it takes for your body to recover after exercise. Predicted race times: Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate and published data sources to provide a target race time based on your current state of fitness. This projection also presumes you have completed the proper training for the race. HRV stress test: The HRV (heart rate variability) stress test requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. The device records your heart rate variability while standing still for 3 minutes. It provides your overall stress level. The scale is 1 to 100, and a lower score indicates a lower stress level. Performance condition: Your performance condition is a real- time assessment after 6 to 20 minutes of activity. It can be added as a data field so you can view your performance condition during the rest of your activity. It compares your real-time condition to your average fitness level. Functional threshold power (FTP): The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup to estimate your FTP. For a more accurate rating, you can conduct a guided test. Lactate threshold: Lactate threshold requires a chest heart rate monitor. Lactate threshold is the point where your muscles start to rapidly fatigue. Your device measures your lactate threshold level using heart rate data and pace. Turning Off Performance Notifications Performance notifications are turned on by default. Some performance notifications are alerts that appear upon completion of your activity. Some performance notifications appear during an activity or when you achieve a new performance measurement, such as a new VO2 max. estimate. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Performance Notifications. 3 Select an option. Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically The Auto Detection feature is turned on by default. The device can automatically detect your maximum heart rate, and lactate threshold during an activity. When paired with a compatible power meter, the device can automatically detect your functional threshold power (FTP) during an activity. NOTE: The device detects a maximum heart rate only when your heart rate is higher than the value set in your user profile. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Physiological Metrics > Auto Detection. 3 Select an option.

Training Status Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness level and performance. Your training status is based on changes to your training load and VO2 max. over an extended time period. You can use your training status to help plan future training and continue improving your fitness level. Peaking: Peaking means that you are in ideal race condition. Your recently reduced training load is allowing your body to recover and fully compensate for earlier training. You should plan ahead, since this peak state can only be maintained for a short time. Productive: Your current training load is moving your fitness level and performance in the right direction. You should plan recovery periods into your training to maintain your fitness level. Maintaining: Your current training load is enough to maintain your fitness level. To see improvement, try adding more variety to your workouts or increasing your training volume. Recovery: Your lighter training load is allowing your body to recover, which is essential during extended periods of hard training. You can return to a higher training load when you feel ready. Unproductive: Your training load is at a good level, but your fitness is decreasing. Your body may be struggling to recover, so you should pay attention to your overall health including stress, nutrition, and rest. Detraining: Detraining occurs when you are training much less than usual for a week or more, and it is affecting your fitness level. You can try increasing your training load to see improvement. Overreaching: Your training load is very high and counterproductive. Your body needs a rest. You should give yourself time to recover by adding lighter training to your schedule. No Status: The device needs one or two weeks of training history, including activities with VO2 max. results from running or cycling, to determine your training status. Tips for Getting Your Training Status To get the most out of the training status feature, you can try these tips. y Run outdoors with heart rate at least two times per week, or ride with heart rate and power at least two times per week. After using the device for one week, your training status should be available. y Record all of your fitness activities on this device, allowing it to learn about your performance. About VO2 Max. Estimates VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram

of body weight at your maximum performance. In simple terms, VO2 max. is an indication of athletic performance and should increase as your level of fitness improves. The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display your VO2 max. estimate. The device has separate VO2 max. estimates for running and cycling. You must run either outside with GPS or ride with a compatible power meter at a moderate level of intensity for several minutes to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate. On the device, your VO2 max. estimate appears as a number, description, and position on the color gauge. On your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about your VO2 max. estimate, including your fitness age. Your fitness age gives you an idea of how your fitness compares with a person of the same gender and different age. As you exercise, your fitness age can decrease over time.

Purple Superior
Blue Excellent
Green Good
Orange Fair
Red Poor
VO2 max. data is provided by FirstBeat. VO2 max.
analysis is provided with permission from The Cooper
Institute ®. For more information, see the appendix
(VO2 Max. Standard Ratings, page 38), and go to www.
CooperInstitute.org.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running
This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a
compatible chest heart rate monitor. If you are using
a chest heart rate monitor, you must put it on and
pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors,
page 40).
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user
profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 22),
and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart
Rate Zones, page 22). The estimate may seem
inaccurate at first. The device requires a few runs to
learn about your running performance.
1 Run for at least 10 minutes outdoors.
2 After your run, select Save.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance
widget.
4 Select to scroll through the performance
measurements.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling
This feature requires a power meter and wrist-based
heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. The
power meter must be paired with your fēnix 5/5S/5X
Plus device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40).
If you are using a chest heart rate monitor, you must
put it on and pair it with your device.
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user
profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 22)
and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart
Rate Zones, page 22). The estimate may seem
inaccurate at first. The device requires a few rides to
learn about your cycling performance.
1 Ride at a steady, high intensity for at least 20
minutes.
2 After your ride, select Save.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance
widget.
4 Select to scroll through the performance
measurements.
Recovery Time
You can use your Garmin device with wrist-based heart
rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display
how much time remains before you are fully recovered
and ready for the next hard workout.
NOTE: The recovery time recommendation uses your
VO2 max. estimate and may seem inaccurate at first.
The device requires you to complete a few activities to
learn about your performance.
The recovery time appears immediately following an
activity. The time counts down until it is optimal for
you to attempt another hard workout.
Viewing Your Recovery Time
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user
profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 22),
and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart
Rate Zones, page 22).
1 Go for a run.
2 After your run, select Save.
The recovery time appears. The maximum time is 4
days.
NOTE: From the watch face, you can select UP or
DOWN to view the performance widget, and select
to scroll through the performance measurements
to view your recovery time.
Recovery Heart Rate
If you are training with wrist-based heart rate or a
compatible chest heart rate monitor, you can check
your recovery heart rate value after each activity.
Recovery heart rate is the difference between your
exercising heart rate and your heart rate two minutes
after the exercise has stopped. For example, after a

typical training run, you stop the timer. Your heart rate is 140 bpm. After two minutes of no activity or cool down, your heart rate is 90 bpm. Your recovery heart rate is 50 bpm (140 minus 90). Some studies have linked recovery heart rate to cardiac health. Higher numbers generally indicate healthier hearts. TIP: For best results, you should stop moving for two minutes while the device calculates your recovery heart rate value. You can save or discard the activity after this value appears. Training Load Training load is a measurement of your training volume over the last seven days. It is the sum of your excess post-exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) measurements for the last seven days. The gauge indicates whether your current load is low, high, or within the optimal range to maintain or improve your fitness level. The optimal range is determined based on your individual fitness level and training history. The range adjusts as your training time and intensity increase or decrease. Viewing Your Predicted Race Times For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page 22), and set your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 22). Your device uses the VO2 max. estimate (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 17) and published data sources to provide a target race time based on your current state of fitness. This projection also presumes you have completed the proper training for the race. NOTE: The projections may seem inaccurate at first. The device requires a few runs to learn about your running performance. 1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance widget. 2 Select to scroll through the performance measurements. Your projected race times appear for 5K, 10K, half marathon, and marathon distances. About Training Effect Training Effect measures the impact of an activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. Training Effect accumulates during the activity. As the activity progresses, the Training Effect value increases, telling you how the activity has improved your fitness. Training Effect is determined by your user profile information, heart rate, duration, and intensity of your activity. Aerobic Training Effect uses your heart rate to measure how the accumulated intensity of an exercise affects your aerobic fitness and indicates if the workout had a maintaining or improving effect on your fitness level. Your EPOC accumulated during exercise is mapped to a range of values that account for your fitness level

and training habits. Steady workouts at moderate effort or workouts involving longer intervals (>180 sec) have a positive impact on your aerobic metabolism and result in an improved aerobic Training Effect. Anaerobic Training Effect uses heart rate and speed (or power) to determine how a workout affects your ability to perform at very high intensity. You receive a value based on the anaerobic contribution to EPOC and the type of activity. Repeated high- intensity intervals of 10 to 120 seconds have a highly beneficial impact on your anaerobic capability and result in an improved anaerobic Training Effect. It is important to know that your Training Effect numbers (from 0.0 to 5.0) may seem abnormally high during your first few activities. It takes several activities for the device to learn your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. You can add Training Effect as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your numbers throughout the activity. Color Zone

Training Effect Aerobic Benefit Anaerobic Benefit

From 0.0 to 0.9 No benefit. No benefit. From 1.0 to 1.9 Minor benefit. Minor benefit.

From 2.0
to 2.9

Maintains your aerobic fitness.

Maintains your anaerobic fitness.

From 3.0
to 3.9

Improves your aerobic fitness.

Improves your anaerobic fitness.

From 4.0
to 4.9

Highly improves your aerobic fitness.

Highly improves your anaerobic fitness.

5.0

Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time.

Overreaching and potentially harmful without enough recovery time. Training Effect technology is provided and supported by Firstbeat Technologies Ltd. For more information, go to www.firstbeat.com. Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level Stress level is the result of a three-minute test performed while standing still, where the fēnix device analyzes heart rate variability to determine your overall stress. Training, sleep, nutrition, and general life stress all impact how a runner performs. The stress level range is from 1 to 100, where 1 is a very low stress state and 100 is a very high stress state. Knowing your stress level can help you decide if your body is ready for a tough training run or yoga.

Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before you can view your heart rate variability (HRV) stress level, you must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40). TIP: Garmin recommends that you measure your stress level at approximately the same time and under the same conditions every day. 1 If necessary, select > Add > HRV Stress to add the stress app to the apps list. 2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites. 3 From the watch face, select > HRV Stress > . 4 Stand still, and rest for 3 minutes. Performance Condition As you complete your activity, such as running or cycling, the performance condition feature analyzes your pace, heart rate, and heart rate variability to make a real-time assessment of your ability to perform compared to your average fitness level. It is approximately your real-time percentage deviation from your baseline VO2 max. estimate. Performance condition values range from -20 to +20. After the first 6 to 20 minutes of your activity, the device displays your performance condition score. For example, a score of +5 means that you are rested, fresh, and capable of a good run or ride. You can add performance condition as a data field to one of your training screens to monitor your ability throughout the activity. Performance condition can also be an indicator of fatigue level, especially at the end of a long training run or ride. NOTE: The device requires a few runs or rides with a heart rate monitor to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate and learn about your running or riding ability (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page 17). Viewing Your Performance Condition This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. 1 Add Perform. Cond. to a data screen (Customizing the Data Screens, page 32). 2 Go for a run or ride. After 6 to 20 minutes, your performance condition appears. 3 Scroll to the data screen to view your performance condition throughout the run or ride. Lactate Threshold Lactate threshold is the exercise intensity at which lactate (lactic acid) starts to accumulate in the bloodstream. In running, it is the estimated level of effort or pace. When a runner exceeds the threshold, fatigue starts to increase at an accelerating rate. For experienced runners, the threshold occurs at approximately 90% of their maximum heart rate and

between 10k and half-marathon race pace. For average runners, the lactate threshold often occurs well below 90% of maximum heart rate. Knowing your lactate threshold can help you determine how hard to train or when to push yourself during a race. If you already know your lactate threshold heart rate value, you can enter it in your user profile settings (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page 22). Performing a Guided Test to Determine Your Lactate Threshold This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before you can perform the guided test, you must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40). The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your lactate threshold. The device will automatically detect your lactate threshold during runs at a steady, high intensity with heart rate. TIP: The device requires a few runs with a chest heart rate monitor to get an accurate maximum heart rate value and VO2 max. estimate. If you are having trouble getting a lactate threshold estimate, try manually lowering your maximum heart rate value. 1 From the watch face, select . 2 Select an outdoor running activity. GPS is required to complete the test. 3 Hold MENU. 4 Select Training > Lactate Threshold Guided Test. 5 Start the timer, and follow the on-screen instructions. After you begin your run, the device displays each step duration, the target, and current heart rate data. A message appears when the test is complete. 6 After you complete the guided test, stop the timer and save the activity. If this is your first lactate threshold estimate, the device prompts you to update your heart rate zones based on your lactate threshold heart rate. For each additional lactate threshold estimate, the device prompts you to accept or decline the estimate. Getting Your FTP Estimate Before you can get your functional threshold power (FTP) estimate, you must pair a chest heart rate monitor and power meter with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate (Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 18). The device uses your user profile information from the initial setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your FTP. The device will automatically detect your FTP during rides at a steady, high intensity with heart rate and power.

Pulse Oximeter 21

1 Select UP or DOWN to view the performance
widget.
2 Select to scroll through the performance
measurements.
Your FTP estimate appears as a value measured in
watts per kilogram, your power output in watts, and
a position on the color gauge.
Purple Superior
Blue Excellent
Green Good
Orange Fair
Red Untrained
For more information, see the appendix (FTP
Ratings, page 50).
NOTE: When a performance notification alerts
you to a new FTP, you can select Accept to save
the new FTP, or Decline to keep your current FTP
(Turning Off Performance Notifications, page 17).
Conducting an FTP Test
Before you can conduct a test to determine your
functional threshold power (FTP), you must pair a
chest heart rate monitor and a power meter with your
device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40), and
you must get your VO2 max. estimate (Getting Your
VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling, page 18).
NOTE: The FTP test is a challenging workout that takes
about 30 minutes to complete. Choose a practical and
mostly flat route that allows you to ride at a steadily
increasing effort, similar to a time trial.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select a cycling activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > FTP Guided Test.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you begin your ride, the device displays each
step duration, the target, and current power data. A
message appears when the test is complete.
6 After you complete the guided test, complete the
cool down, stop the timer, and save the activity.
Your FTP appears as a value measured in watts
per kilogram, your power output in watts, and a
position on the color gauge.
7 Select an option:
• Select Accept to save the new FTP.
• Select Decline to keep your current FTP.

##### Pulse Oximeter

WARNING The Garmin device, accessories, heart rate monitor, pulse oximeter sensor, and related data are intended to be used only for recreational purposes and not for medical purposes, and are not intended to diagnose, monitor, treat, cure, or prevent any disease or condition. The fēnix 5X Plus device has a wrist-based pulse oximeter to monitor the saturation of oxygen in your blood. Knowing your oxygen saturation can help you determine how your body is acclimatizing to high altitudes for alpine sport and expedition. When you view the pulse oximeter widget while you are not moving, your device analyzes your oxygen saturation and your elevation. On the device, your pulse oximeter readings appear as an oxygen saturation percentage and color on the graph. On your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about your pulse oximeter readings, including trends over multiple days.

① The oxygen saturation percentage scale.

② A graph of your average oxygen saturation readings for the last 24 hours.
③ Your most recent oxygen saturation reading.
④ The elevation scale.

⑤ A graph of your elevation readings for the last 24 hours.

Viewing the Pulse Oximeter Widget

The widget displays your most recent blood oxygen
saturation percentage, a graph of your hourly average
readings for the last 24 hours, and a graph of your
elevation for the last 24 hours.
1 While you are sitting or inactive, select UP or
DOWN to view the pulse oximeter widget.
2 Remain stationary for up to 30 seconds.
NOTE: If you are too active for the watch to
determine your oxygen saturation, a message
appears instead of a percentage. You can check
your oxygen saturation again after several minutes
of inactivity.
3 Select to view a graph of your pulse oximeter
readings for the last seven days.

Turning On All -Day Pulse Oximeter Readings

From the pulse oximeter widget, select > DOWN > OK. The device analyzes your oxygen saturation

throughout the day, when you are not moving. NOTE: Turning on all-day pulse oximeter mode decreases battery life.

Turning On Manual Pulse Oximeter Readings

1 From the pulse oximeter widget, hold MENU. 2 Select Options > Acclimation > Manual. The device analyzes your oxygen saturation when you view the pulse oximeter widget.

Tips for Erratic Pulse Oximeter Data

If the pulse oximeter data is erratic or does not appear, you can try these tips. y Remain motionless while the device reads your blood oxygen saturation. y Wear the device above your wrist bone. The device should be snug but comfortable. y Hold the arm wearing the device at heart level while the device reads your blood oxygen saturation. y Clean and dry your arm before putting on the device. y Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect repellent under the device. y Avoid scratching the optical sensor on the back of the device. y Rinse the device with fresh water after each workout.

##### Training

Setting Up Your User Profile

You can update your gender, birth year, height, weight, heart rate zone, and power zone settings. The device uses this information to calculate accurate training data. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > User Profile. 3 Select an option. Fitness Goals Knowing your heart rate zones can help you measure and improve your fitness by understanding and applying these principles. y Your heart rate is a good measure of exercise intensity. y Training in certain heart rate zones can help you improve cardiovascular capacity and strength. If you know your maximum heart rate, you can use the table (Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 23) to determine the best heart rate zone for your fitness objectives. If you do not know your maximum heart rate, use one of the calculators available on the Internet. Some gyms

and health centers can provide a test that measures
maximum heart rate. The default maximum heart rate
is 220 minus your age.
About Heart Rate Zones
Many athletes use heart rate zones to measure and
increase their cardiovascular strength and improve
their level of fitness. A heart rate zone is a set range of
heartbeats per minute. The five commonly accepted
heart rate zones are numbered from 1 to 5 according
to increasing intensity. Generally, heart rate zones are
calculated based on percentages of your maximum
heart rate.
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones
The device uses your user profile information from
the initial setup to determine your default heart rate
zones. You can set separate heart rate zones for sport
profiles, such as running, cycling, and swimming. For
the most accurate calorie data during your activity, set
your maximum heart rate. You can also set each heart
rate zone and enter your resting heart rate manually.
You can manually adjust your zones on the device or
using your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Heart Rate.
3 Select Max. HR, and enter your maximum heart
rate.
You can use the Auto Detection feature to
automatically record your maximum heart
rate during an activity (Detecting Performance
Measurements Automatically, page 17).
4 Select LTHR > Enter Manually, and enter your
lactate threshold heart rate.
You can perform a guided test to estimate your
lactate threshold (Lactate Threshold, page 20).
You can use the Auto Detection feature to
automatically record your lactate threshold during
an activity (Detecting Performance Measurements
Automatically, page 17).
5 Select Resting HR, and enter your resting heart
rate.
You can use the average resting heart rate
measured by your device, or you can set a custom
resting heart rate.
6 Select Zones > Based On.
7 Select an option:
• Select BPM to view and edit the zones in beats per minute.
• Select %Max. HR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Select %HRR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate).
• Select %LTHR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your lactate threshold heart rate. 8 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone.

Training 23

9 Select Add Sport Heart Rate, and select a sport
profile to add separate heart rate zones (optional).
10 Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add sport heart rate
zones (optional).
Letting the Device Set Your Heart Rate Zones
The default settings allow the device to detect your
maximum heart rate and set your heart rate zones as a
percentage of your maximum heart rate.
y Verify that your user profile settings are accurate
(Setting Up Your User Profile, page 22).
y Run often with the wrist or chest heart rate
monitor.
y Try a few heart rate training plans, available from
your Garmin Connect account.
y View your heart rate trends and time in zones using
your Garmin Connect account.
Heart Rate Zone Calculations

Zone

% of Maximum Heart Rate

Perceived Exertion Benefits

1 50–60%

Relaxed, easy pace, rhythmic breathing

Beginning-level aerobic training, reduces stress

2 60–70%

Comfortable pace, slightly deeper breathing, conversation possible

Basic cardiovascular training, good recovery pace

3 70–80%

Moderate pace, more difficult to hold conversation

Improved aerobic capacity, optimal cardiovascular training

4 80–90%

Fast pace and a bit uncomfortable, breathing forceful

Improved anaerobic capacity and threshold, improved speed

5 90–100%

Sprinting pace, unsustainable for long period of time, labored breathing

Anaerobic and muscular endurance, increased power

Setting Your Power Zones The values for the zones are default values based on gender, weight, and average ability, and may not match your personal abilities. If you know your functional threshold power (FTP) value, you can enter it and allow the software to calculate your power zones automatically. You can manually adjust your zones on the device or using your Garmin Connect account.

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > User Profile > Power Zones >
Based On.
3 Select an option:
• Select Watts to view and edit the zones in watts.
• Select % FTP to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your functional threshold power. 4 Select FTP, and enter your FTP value. 5 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone. 6 If necessary, select Minimum, and enter a minimum power value.

Activity Tracking

The activity tracking feature records your daily step count, distance traveled, intensity minutes, floors climbed, calories burned, and sleep statistics for each recorded day. Your calories burned includes your base metabolism plus activity calories. The number of steps taken during the day appears on the steps widget. The step count is updated periodically. For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy. Auto Goal Your device creates a daily step goal automatically, based on your previous activity levels. As you move during the day, the device shows your progress toward your daily goal ① .

If you choose not to use the auto goal feature, you can set a personalized step goal on your Garmin Connect account. Using the Move Alert Sitting for prolonged periods of time can trigger undesirable metabolic state changes. The move alert reminds you to keep moving. After one hour of inactivity, Move! and the red bar appear. Additional segments appear after every 15 minutes of inactivity. The device also beeps or vi+B1271brates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 39). Go for a short walk (at least a couple of minutes) to reset the move alert. Sleep Tracking While you are sleeping, the device automatically detects your sleep and monitors your movement

during your normal sleep hours. You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings on your Garmin Connect account. Sleep statistics include total hours of sleep, sleep levels, and sleep movement. You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account. NOTE: Naps are not added to your sleep statistics. You can use do not disturb mode to turn off notifications and alerts, with the exception of alarms (Using Do Not Disturb Mode, page 24). Using Automated Sleep Tracking 1 Wear your device while sleeping. 2 Upload your sleep tracking data to the Garmin Connect site (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 9). You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account. Using Do Not Disturb Mode You can use do not disturb mode to turn off the backlight, tone alerts, and vibration alerts. For example, you can use this mode while sleeping or watching a movie. NOTE: You can set your normal sleep hours in the user settings on your Garmin Connect account. You can enable the Sleep Time option in the system settings to automatically enter do not disturb mode during your normal sleep hours (System Settings, page 39). 1 Hold LIGHT. 2 Select . Intensity Minutes To improve your health, organizations such as the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the American Heart Association ®, and the World Health Organization, recommend at least 150 minutes per week of moderate intensity activity, such as brisk walking, or 75 minutes per week of vigorous intensity activity, such as running. The device monitors your activity intensity and tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous intensity activities (heart rate data is required to quantify vigorous intensity). You can work toward achieving your weekly intensity minutes goal by participating in at least 10 consecutive minutes of moderate to vigorous intensity activities. The device adds the amount of moderate activity minutes with the amount of vigorous activity minutes. Your total vigorous intensity minutes are doubled when added. Earning Intensity Minutes Your fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device calculates intensity minutes by comparing your heart rate data to your average resting heart rate. If heart rate is turned off, the device calculates moderate intensity minutes by analyzing your steps per minute. y Start a timed activity for the most accurate calculation of intensity minutes.

y Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or vigorous intensity level. y Wear your device all day and night for the most accurate resting heart rate. Garmin Move IQ™ When your movements match familiar exercise patterns, the Move IQ feature automatically detects the event and displays it in your timeline. The Move IQ events show activity type and duration, but they do not appear in your activities list or newsfeed. The Move IQ feature can automatically start a timed activity for walking and running using time thresholds you set in the Garmin Connect Mobile app. These activities are added to your activities list. Activity Tracking Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > Activity Tracking. Status: Turns off the activity tracking features. Move Alert: Displays a message and the move bar on the digital watch face and steps screen. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 39). Goal Alerts: Allows you to turn on and off goal alerts, or turn them off only during activities. Goal alerts appear for your daily steps goal, daily floors climbed goal, and weekly intensity minutes goal. Move IQ: Allows you to turn on and off Move IQ events. Turning Off Activity Tracking When you turn off activity tracking, your steps, floors climbed, intensity minutes, sleep tracking, and Move IQ events are not recorded. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activity Tracking > Status > Off.

Workouts

You can create custom workouts that include goals
for each workout step and for varied distances, times,
and calories. You can create workouts using Garmin
Connect or select a training plan that has built-in
workouts from Garmin Connect, and transfer them to
your device.
You can schedule workouts using Garmin Connect.
You can plan workouts in advance and store them on
your device.
Following a Workout From the Web
Before you can download a workout from Garmin
Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect account
(Garmin Connect, page 8).
1 Connect the device to your computer.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com.
3 Create and save a new workout.
4 Select Send to Device, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Training 25

5 Disconnect the device.
Starting a Workout
Before you can start a workout, you must download a
workout from your Garmin Connect account.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > My Workouts.
5 Select a workout.
NOTE: Only workouts that are compatible with the
selected activity appear in the list.
6 Select Do Workout.
7 Select to start the timer.
After you begin a workout, the device displays
each step of the workout, step notes (optional), the
target (optional), and the current workout data.
About the Training Calendar
The training calendar on your device is an extension of
the training calendar or schedule you set up in Garmin
Connect. After you have added a few workouts to the
Garmin Connect calendar, you can send them to your
device. All scheduled workouts sent to the device
appear in the training calendar list by date. When you
select a day in the training calendar, you can view or
do the workout. The scheduled workout stays on your
device whether you complete it or skip it. When you
send scheduled workouts from Garmin Connect, they
overwrite the existing training calendar.
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans
Before you can download and use a training plan from
Garmin Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect
account (Garmin Connect, page 8).
You can browse Garmin Connect to find a training plan,
schedule workouts and courses, and download the
plan to your device.
1 Connect the device to your computer.
2 Go to www.garminconnect.com.
3 Select and schedule a training plan.
4 Review the training plan in your calendar.
5 Select , and follow the on-screen instructions.

Interval Workouts

You can create interval workouts based on distance or
time. The device saves your custom interval workout
until you create another interval workout. You can use
open intervals for track workouts and when you are
running a known distance.
Creating an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Intervals > Edit > Interval > Type.
5 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
TIP: You can create an open-ended interval by
selecting the Open option.
6 Select Duration, enter a distance or time interval
value for the workout, and select .
7 Select BACK.
8 Select Rest > Type.
9 Select Distance, Time, or Open.
10 If necessary, enter a distance or time value for the
rest interval, and select .
11 Select BACK.
12 Select one or more options:
• To set the number of repetitions, select Repeat.
• To add an open-ended warm up to your workout, select Warm Up > On.
• To add an open-ended cool down to your workout, select Cool Down > On. Starting an Interval Workout 1 From the watch face, select . 2 Select an activity. 3 Hold MENU. 4 Select Training > Intervals > Do Workout. 5 Select to start the timer. 6 When your interval workout has a warm up, select LAP to begin the first interval. 7 Follow the on-screen instructions. After you complete all of the intervals, a message appears. Stopping an Interval Workout y At any time, select LAP to stop the current interval or rest period and transition to the next interval or rest period. y After all intervals and rest periods are complete, select LAP to end the interval workout and transition to a timer that can be used for cool down. y At any time, select to stop the timer. You can resume the timer or end the interval workout.

Segments

You can send running or cycling segments from your Garmin Connect account to your device. After a segment is saved to your device, you can race a segment, trying to match or exceed your personal record or other participants who have raced the segment. NOTE: When you download a course from your Garmin Connect account, you can download all of the available segments in the course. Strava™ Segments You can download Strava segments to your fēnix

5/5S/5X Plus device. Follow Strava segments to
compare your performance with your past rides,
friends, and pros who have ridden the same segment.
To sign up for a Strava membership, go to the
segments widget in your Garmin Connect account. For
more information, go to www.strava.com.
The information in this manual applies to both Garmin
Connect segments and Strava segments.
Viewing Segment Details
1 Select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Segments.
5 Select a segment.
6 Select an option:
• Select Race Time to view the time and average speed or pace for the segment leader.
• Select Map to view the segment on the map.
• Select Elevation Plot to view an elevation plot of the segment. Racing a Segment Segments are virtual race courses. You can race a segment, and compare your performance to past activities, others’ performance, connections in your Garmin Connect account, or other members of the running or cycling communities. You can upload your activity data to your Garmin Connect account to view your segment position. NOTE: If your Garmin Connect account and Strava account are linked, your activity is automatically sent to your Strava account so you can review the segment position. 1 Select . 2 Select an activity. 3 Go for a run or ride.

When you approach a segment, a message appears, and you can race the segment. 4 Start racing the segment. A message appears when the segment is complete. Setting a Segment to Adjust Automatically You can set your device to automatically adjust the target race time of a segment based on your performance during the segment. NOTE: This setting is enabled for all segments by default. 1 Select . 2 Select an activity. 3 Hold MENU. 4 Select Training > Segments > Auto Effort.

Using Virtual Partner ®

Your Virtual Partner is a training tool designed to help

you meet your goals. You can set a pace for the Virtual
Partner and race against it.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Virtual Partner.
6 Enter a pace or speed value.
7 Start your activity (Starting an Activity, page 2).
8 Select UP or DOWN to scroll to the Virtual Partner
screen and see who is leading.

Setting a Training Target

The training target feature works with the Virtual
Partner feature so you can train toward a set distance,
distance and time, distance and pace, or distance and
speed goal. During your training activity, the device
gives you real-time feedback about how close you are
to achieving your training target.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Set a Target.
5 Select an option:
• Select Distance Only to select a preset distance or enter a custom distance.
• Select Distance and Time to select a distance and time target. 6 Select Distance and Pace or Distance and Speed to select a distance and pace or speed target.

The training target screen appears and displays your estimated finish time. The estimated finish time is based on your current performance and the time remaining. 7 Select to start the timer. Cancelling a Training Target 1 During an activity, hold MENU. 2 Select Cancel Target > Yes.

Racing a Previous Activity

You can race a previously recorded or downloaded
activity. This feature works with the Virtual Partner
feature so you can see how far ahead or behind you
are during the activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Race an Activity.
5 Select an option:
• Select From History to select a previously

Clock 27

recorded activity from your device.

• Select Downloaded to select an activity you downloaded from your Garmin Connect account. 6 Select the activity.
The Virtual Partner screen appears indicating your
estimated finish time.
7 Select to start the timer.
8 After you complete your activity, select > Save.

Personal Records

When you complete an activity, the device displays any
new personal records you achieved during that activity.
Personal records include your fastest time over several
typical race distances and longest run or ride.
NOTE: For cycling, personal records also include most
ascent and best power (power meter required).
Viewing Your Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record.
5 Select View Record.
Restoring a Personal Record
You can set each personal record back to the one
previously recorded.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to restore.
5 Select Previous > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing a Personal Record
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to delete.
5 Select Clear Record > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Clearing All Personal Records
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select Clear All Records > Yes.
The records are deleted for that sport only.

##### Clock

Setting an Alarm

You can set up to ten separate alarms. You can set
each alarm to sound once or to repeat regularly.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock > Add Alarm.
3 Select Time, and enter the alarm time.
4 Select Repeat, and select when the alarm should
repeat (optional).
5 Select Sounds, and select a type of notification
(optional).
6 Select Backlight > On to turn on the backlight with
the alarm.
7 Select Label, and select a description for the alarm
(optional).
Deleting an Alarm
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alarm Clock.
3 Select an alarm.
4 Select Delete.

Starting the Countdown Timer

1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Timer.
3 Enter the time.
4 If necessary, select Restart > On to automatically
restart the timer after it expires.
5 If necessary, select Sounds, and select a type of
notification.
6 Select Start Timer.

Using the Stopwatch

1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Stopwatch.
3 Select to start the timer.

#### 4 Select LAP to restart the lap timer ① .

#### The total stopwatch time ② continues running.

5 Select to stop both timers.
6 Select an option.

Adding Alternate Time Zones

You can display the current time of day in additional

28 Navigation

time zones on the Alt. Time Zones widget. You can add
up to four alternate time zones.
NOTE: You may need to add the Alt. Time Zones widget
to the widget loop.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alt. Time Zones > Add Zone.
3 Select a time zone.
4 If necessary, select Yes to rename the zone.

Setting Clock Alerts

1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Alerts.
3 Select an option:

• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunset occurs, select Til Sunset > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise occurs, select Til Sunrise > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound every hour, select Hourly > On.

Syncing the Time with GPS

Each time you turn on the device and acquire satellites,
the device automatically detects your time zones and
the current time of day. You can also manually sync
the time with GPS when you change time zones, and to
update for daylight saving time.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clock > Sync With GPS.
3 Wait while the device locates satellites (Acquiring
Satellite Signals, page 43).

##### Navigation

Saving Your Location

You can save your current location to navigate back to
it later.
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Editing Your Saved Locations
You can delete a saved location or edit its name,
elevation, and position information.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Saved
Locations.
2 Select a saved location.
3 Select an option to edit the location.

Projecting a Waypoint

You can create a new location by projecting the
distance and bearing from your current location to a
new location.
1 If necessary, select > Add > Project Wpt. to add
the project waypoint app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, select > Project Wpt..
4 Select UP or DOWN to set the heading.
5 Select .
6 Select DOWN to select a unit of measure.
7 Select UP to enter the distance.
8 Select to save.
The projected waypoint is saved with a default name.

Navigating to a Destination

You can use your device to navigate to a destination or
follow a course.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate.
2 Select a category.
3 Respond to the on-screen prompts to choose a
destination.
4 Select Go To.
Navigation information appears.
5 Select to begin navigation.

Navigating to a Point of Interest

If the map data installed on your device includes points
of interest, you can navigate to them.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Points of Interest, and select a
category.
A list of points of interest near your current
location appears.
5 If necessary, select an option:
• To search near a different location, select Search Near, and select a location.
• To search for a point of interest by name, select Spell Search, enter a name, select Search Near, and select a location. 6 Select a point of interest from the search results. 7 Select Go.

Navigation information appears. 8 Select to begin navigation. Points of Interest A point of interest is a place that you may find useful or interesting. Points of interest are organized by category and can include popular travel destinations such as gas stations, restaurants, hotels, and

Navigation 29

entertainment venues.

Creating and Following a Course on Your Device

1 From the watch face, select > Navigate >
Courses > Create New.
2 Enter a name for the course, and select .
3 Select Add Location.
4 Select an option.
5 If necessary, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6 Select Done > Do Course. Navigation information
appears.
7 Select to begin navigation.

Creating a Round -Trip Course

The device can create a round-trip course based on a
specified distance and direction of navigation.
1 From the watch face, select .
2 Select Run or Bike.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Round -Trip Course.
5 Enter the total distance for the course.
6 Select a direction heading.
The device creates up to three courses. You can
select DOWN to view the courses.
7 Select to select a course.
8 Select an option:
• To begin navigation, select Go.
• To view the course on the map and pan or zoom the map, select Map.
• To view a list of turns in the course, select Turn By Turn.
• To view an elevation plot of the course, select Elevation Plot.

Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man Overboard Location

You can save a man overboard (MOB) location, and
automatically start navigation back to it.
TIP: You can customize the hold function of the keys
to access the MOB function (Customizing the Hot Keys,
page 39).
From the watch face, select > Navigate > Last
MOB. Navigation information appears.

Navigating with Sight ‘N Go

You can point the device at an object in the distance,
such as a water tower, lock in the direction, and then
navigate to the object.
1 From the watch face, select > Navigate > Sight
‘N Go.
2 Point the top of the watch at an object, and select
. Navigation information appears.

3 Select to begin navigation.

Navigating to Your Starting Point During an Activity

You can navigate back to the starting point of your
current activity in a straight line or along the path you
traveled. This feature is available only for activities
that use GPS.
1 During an activity, select > Back to Start.
2 Select an option:
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select TracBack.
• If you do not have a supported map or are using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the starting point of your activity in a straight line.
• If you are not using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the starting point of your activity using turn-by-turn directions.

#### Your current location ① , the track to follow ② , and your destination ③ appear on the map.

Navigating to the Starting Point of Your Last Saved Activity

You can navigate back to the starting point of your last saved activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled. This feature is available only for activities that use GPS. 1 Select > Navigate > Back to Start > Route. Turn-by-turn directions help you navigate to the starting point of your last saved activity if you have a supported map or are using direct routing. A line appears on the map from your current location to the starting point of the last saved activity if you are not using direct routing. NOTE: You can start the timer to prevent the device from timing out to watch mode. 2 Select DOWN to view the compass (optional). The arrow points toward your starting point.

Stopping Navigation

1 During an activity, hold MENU.
2 Select Stop Navigation.

30 History

Your device comes preloaded with maps and can
display several types of Garmin map data, including
topographical contours and nearby points of interest.
represents your location on the map. When you are
navigating to a destination, your route is marked with a
line on the map.
Viewing the Map
1 From the watch face, select > Map.
2 Hold MENU, and select an option:
• To pan or zoom the map, select Pan/Zoom. TIP: You can select to toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming. You can hold to select the point indicated by the crosshairs.
• To see nearby points of interest and waypoints, select Around Me. Saving or Navigating to a Location on the Map You can select any location on the map. You can save the location or start navigating to it. 1 From the map, hold MENU. 2 Select Pan/Zoom.

Controls and crosshairs appear on the map.

3 Pan and zoom the map to center the location in the
crosshairs.
4 Hold to select the point indicated by the
crosshairs.
5 If necessary, select a nearby point of interest.
6 Select an option:
• To start navigating to the location, select Go.
• To save the location, select Save Location.
• To view information about the location, select Review. Navigating with the Around Me Feature You can use the around me feature to navigate to nearby points of interest and waypoints. NOTE: The map data installed on your device must include points of interest to navigate to them. 1 From the map, hold MENU. 2 Select Around Me.

Icons indicating points of interest and waypoints appear on the map. 3 Select UP or DOWN to highlight a section of the

map. 4 Select . A list of points of interest and waypoints in the highlighted map section appear. 5 Select to select a location. 6 Select an option:

• To start navigating to the location, select Go.
• To view the location on the map, select Map.
• To save the location, select Save Location.
• To view information about the location, select Review.

Compass

The device has a 3-axis compass with automatic calibration. The compass features and appearance change depending on your activity, whether GPS is enabled, and whether you are navigating to a destination. You can change the compass settings manually (Compass Settings, page 37). To open the compass settings quickly, you can select from the compass widget.

Altimeter and Barometer

The device contains an internal altimeter and barometer. The device collects elevation and pressure data continuously, even in low-power mode. The altimeter displays your approximate elevation based on pressure changes. The barometer displays environmental pressure data based on the fixed elevation where the altimeter was most recently calibrated (Altimeter Settings, page 37). To open the altimeter or barometer settings quickly, select from the altimeter or barometer widgets.

##### History

History includes time, distance, calories, average pace or speed, lap data, and optional sensor information. NOTE: When the device memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten.

Using History

History contains previous activities you have saved on
your device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select an option:
• To view additional information about the activity, select Details.
• To select a lap and view additional information about each lap, select Laps.
• To select an interval and view additional information about each interval, select Intervals.
• To select an exercise set and view additional

information about each set, select Sets.

• To view the activity on a map, select Map.
• To view the impact of the activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness, select Training Effect (About Training Effect, page 19).
• To view your time in each heart rate zone, select Time in Zone (Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone, page 31).
• To view an elevation plot of the activity, select Elevation Plot.
• To delete the selected activity, select Delete. Multisport History Your device stores the overall multisport summary of the activity, including overall distance, time, calories, and optional accessory data. Your device also separates the activity data for each sport segment and transition so you can compare similar training activities and track how quickly you move through the transitions. Transition history includes distance, time, average speed, and calories. Viewing Your Time in Each Heart Rate Zone Before you can view heart rate zone data, you must complete an activity with heart rate and save the activity. Viewing your time in each heart rate zone can help you adjust your training intensity. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select History > Activities. 3 Select an activity. 4 Select Time in Zone.

Viewing Data Totals

You can view the accumulated distance and time data
saved to your device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals.
3 If necessary, select an activity.
4 Select an option to view weekly or monthly totals.

Using the Odometer

The odometer automatically records the total distance
traveled, elevation gained, and time in activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals > Odometer.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view odometer totals.

Deleting History

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select History > Options.
3 Select an option:

• Select Delete All Activities to delete all activities from the history.
• Select Reset Totals to reset all distance and

time totals. NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities. 4 Confirm your selection.

##### Customizing Your Device

Activities and App Settings

These settings allow you to customize each preloaded activity app based on your needs. For example, you can customize data pages and enable alerts and training features. Not all settings are available for all activity types. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an activity, and select the activity settings. 3D Distance: Calculates your distance traveled using your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. 3D Speed: Calculates your speed using your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground (3D Speed and Distance, page 34). Accent Color: Sets the accent color of each activity to help identify which activity is active. Alerts: Sets the training or navigation alerts for the activity. Auto Climb: Enables the device to detect elevation changes automatically using the built-in altimeter. Auto Lap: Sets the options for the Auto Lap ® feature (Auto Lap, page 33). Auto Pause: Sets the device to stop recording data when you stop moving or when you drop below a specified speed (Enabling Auto Pause, page 34). Auto Run: Enables the device to detect ski runs automatically using the built-in accelerometer. Auto Scroll: Enables you to move through all of the activity data screens automatically while the timer is running (Using Auto Scroll, page 34). Auto Set: Enables the device to start and stop exercise sets automatically during a strength training activity. Background Color: Sets the background color of each activity to black or white. ClimbPro: Displays ascent planning and monitoring screens while navigating. Countdown Start: Enables a countdown timer for pool swimming intervals. Data Screens: Enables you to customize data screens and add new data screens for the activity (Customizing the Data Screens, page 32). GPS: Sets the mode for the GPS antenna. Using the GPS + GLONASS or GPS + GALILEO options provides increased performance in challenging environments and faster position acquisition. Using the GPS and another satellite together can

reduce battery life more than using the GPS option only. Using the UltraTrac option records track points and sensor data less frequently (UltraTrac, page 34). Lap Key: Enables you to record a lap or a rest during the activity. Lock Keys: Locks the keys during multisport activities to prevent accidental key presses. Map: Sets the display preferences for the map data screen for the activity (Activity Map Settings, page 33). Metronome: Plays tones at a steady rhythm to help you improve your performance by training at a faster, slower, or more consistent cadence (Using the Metronome, page 3). Pool Size: Sets the pool length for pool swimming. Power Save Timeout: Sets the power-save timeout options for the activity (Power Save Timeout Settings, page 35). Rename: Sets the activity name. Repeat: Enables the Repeat option for multisport activities. For example, you can use this option for activities that include multiple transitions, such as a swimrun. Restore Defaults: Allows you to reset the activity settings. Routing: Sets the preferences for calculating routes for the activity (Routing Settings, page 33). Scoring: Enables or disables scorekeeping automatically when you start a round of golf. The Always Ask option prompts you when you begin a round. Segment Alerts: Enables prompts that alert you to approaching segments. Stat Tracking: Enables statistics tracking while playing golf. Stroke Detect.: Enables stroke detection for pool swimming. Transitions: Enables transitions for multisport activities. Customizing the Data Screens You can show, hide, and change the layout and content of data screens for each activity. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select the activity to customize. 4 Select the activity settings. 5 Select Data Screens. 6 Select a data screen to customize. 7 Select an option:

• Select Layout to adjust the number of data fields on the data screen.
• Select a field to change the data that appears in

the field.

• Select Reorder to change the location of the data screen in the loop.
• Select Remove to remove the data screen from the loop. 8 If necessary, select Add New to add a data screen to the loop.
You can add a custom data screen, or select one of
the predefined data screens.
Adding a Map to an Activity
You can add the map to the data screens loop for an
activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Map.
Alerts
You can set alerts for each activity, which can help
you to train toward specific goals, to increase your
awareness of your environment, and to navigate to
your destination. Some alerts are available only for
specific activities. There are three types of alerts: event
alerts, range alerts, and recurring alerts.
Event alert: An event alert notifies you once. The event
is a specific value. For example, you can set the
device to alert you when you reach a specified
elevation.
Range alert: A range alert notifies you each time the
device is above or below a specified range of
values. For example, you can set the device to alert
you when your heart rate is below 60 beats per
minute (bpm) and over 210 bpm.
Recurring alert: A recurring alert notifies you each time
the device records a specified value or interval. For
example, you can set the device to alert you every
30 minutes.
Alert Name Alert Type Description
Cadence Range You can set minimum and
maximum cadence values.

Calories Event, recurring

You can set the number of calories.

Custom Recurring

You can select an existing message or create a custom message and select an alert type. Distance Recurring You can set a distance interval. Elevation Range You can set minimum and maximum elevation values.

Last Lap Cad.: Running. The average cadence for the last completed lap. Last Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the last completed lap. Last Lap Dist.: The distance traveled for the last completed lap. Last Lap HR: The average heart rate for the last completed lap. Last Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the last completed lap. Last Lap Pace: The average pace for the last completed lap. Last Lap Power: The average power output for the last completed lap. Last Lap Speed: The average speed for the last completed lap. Last Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the last completed lap. Last Len. Pace: The average pace for your last completed pool length. Last Len. Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed pool length. Lat/Lon: The current position in latitude and longitude regardless of the selected position format setting. Left PP: The current power phase angle for the left leg. Power phase is the pedal stroke region where positive power is produced. Left PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the left leg. Power phase peak is the angle range over which the rider produces the peak portion of the driving force. Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during the current activity. LL 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for the last lap. L Lap Dist P Stk: Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the last completed lap. L Lap Dist P Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the last completed lap. Location: The current position using the selected position format setting. Max. Ascent: The maximum rate of ascent in feet per minute or meters per minute since the last reset. Max. Descent: The maximum rate of descent in meters per minute or feet per minute since the last reset. Max. Elevation: The highest elevation reached since the last reset. Max. Lap Power: The top power output for the current lap. Max. Nautical Speed: The maximum speed in knots for the current activity. Maximum Speed: The top speed for the current activity.

Max Power: The top power output for the current
activity.
Min. Elevation: The lowest elevation reached since the
last reset.
Moving Time: The total time moving for the current
activity.
Multisport Time: The total time for all sports in a
multisport activity, including transitions.
Muscle O2 Sat. %: The estimated muscle oxygen
saturation percentage for the current activity.
Nautical Dist: The distance traveled in nautical meters
or nautical feet.
Nautical Speed: The current speed in knots.
Next Waypoint: The next point on the route. You must
be navigating for this data to appear.
NP: The Normalized Power™ for the current activity.
Off Course: The distance to the left or right by which
you have strayed from the original path of travel.
You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Pace: The current pace.
PCO: The platform center offset. Platform center offset
is the location on the pedal platform where force is
applied.
Pedal Smooth.: The measurement of how evenly a
rider is applying force to the pedals throughout
each pedal stroke.
Perform. Cond.: The performance condition score is a
real-time assessment of your ability to perform.
Power: The current power output in watts.
Power to Weight: The current power measured in watts
per kilogram.
Power Zone: The current range of power output (1 to 7)
based on your FTP or custom settings.
Rear: The rear bike gear from a gear position sensor.
Repeat On: The timer for the last interval plus the
current rest (pool swimming).
Reps: During a strength training activity, the number of
repetitions in a workout set.
Rest Timer: The timer for the current rest (pool
swimming).
Right PP: The current power phase angle for the right
leg. Power phase is the pedal stroke region where
positive power is produced.
Right PPP: The current power phase peak angle for the
right leg. Power phase peak is the angle range over
which the rider produces the peak portion of the
driving force.
Set Timer: During a strength training activity, the
amount of time spent in the current workout set.
Speed: The current rate of travel.
Stopped Time: The total time stopped for the current
activity.
Stride Length: The length of your stride from one

Heart Rate Range

You can set minimum and maximum heart rate values or select zone changes. See About Heart Rate Zones, page 22 and Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page 23. Pace Range You can set minimum and maximum pace values. Power Range You can set the high or low power level. Proximity Event You can set a radius from a saved location. Run/Walk Recurring You can set timed walking breaks at regular intervals. Speed Range You can set minimum and maximum speed values. Stroke Rate Range You can set high or low strokes per minute.

Time Event, recurring You can set a time interval.

Setting an Alert
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Alerts.
6 Select an option:
• Select Add New to add a new alert for the activity.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert. 7 If necessary, select the type of alert. 8 Select a zone, enter the minimum and maximum values, or enter a custom value for the alert. 9 If necessary, turn on the alert. For event and recurring alerts, a message appears each time you reach the alert value. For range alerts, a message appears each time you exceed or drop below the specified range (minimum and maximum values). Activity Map Settings You can customize the appearance of the map data screen for each activity. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an activity, select the activity settings, and select Map. Configure Maps: Shows or hides data from installed map products. Use Sys. Settings: Enables the device to use the preferences from the system map settings. Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North Up option shows north at the top of the screen.

The Track Up option shows your current direction of travel at the top of the screen.

User Locations: Shows or hides saved locations on the
map.
Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for
optimal use of your map. When disabled, you must
zoom in or out manually.
Lock on Road: Locks the position icon, which
represents your position on the map, onto the
nearest road.
Track Log: Shows or hides the track log, or the path
you have traveled, as a colored line on the map.
Track Color: Changes the track log color.
Detail: Sets the amount of detail shown on the map.
Showing more detail may cause the map to redraw
more slowly.
Marine: Sets the map to display data in marine mode
(Marine Map Settings, page 38).
Draw Segments: Shows or hides segments, as a
colored line on the map.
Draw Contours: Shows or hides contour lines on the
map.
Routing Settings
You can change the routing settings to customize the
way the device calculates routes for each activity.
Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select
an activity, select the activity settings, and select
Routing.
Activity: Sets an activity for routing. The device
calculates routes optimized for the type of activity
you are doing.
Popularity Routing: Calculates routes based on the
most popular runs and rides from Garmin Connect.
Courses: Sets how you navigate courses using the
device. Use the Follow Course option to navigate a
course exactly as it appears, without recalculating.
Use the Use Map option to navigate a course using
routable maps, and recalculate the route if you
stray from the course.
Calculation Method: Sets the calculation method to
minimize the time, distance, or ascent in routes.
Avoidances: Sets the road or transportation types to
avoid in routes.
Type: Sets the behavior of the pointer that appears
during direct routing.
Auto Lap
Marking Laps by Distance
You can use Auto Lap to mark a lap at a specific
distance automatically. This feature is helpful for
comparing your performance over different parts of an
activity (for example, every 1 mile or 5 kilometers).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.

4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap.
6 Select an option:

• Select Auto Lap to turn Auto Lap on or off.
• Select Auto Distance to adjust the distance between laps. Each time you complete a lap, a message appears that displays the time for that lap. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System Settings, page 39). If necessary, you can customize the data pages to display additional lap data (Customizing the Data Screens, page 32). Customizing the Lap Alert Message You can customize one or two data fields that appear in the lap alert message. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity.
• To pause the timer automatically when you stop moving, select When Stopped.
• To pause the timer automatically when your pace or speed drops below a specified level, select Custom. Enabling Auto Climb You can use the auto climb feature to detect elevation changes automatically. You can use it during activities such as climbing, hiking, running, or biking. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Lap > Lap Alert.
6 Select a data field to change it.
7 Select Preview (optional).
Enabling Auto Pause
You can use the Auto Pause feature to pause the timer
automatically when you stop moving. This feature is
helpful if your activity includes stop lights or other
places where you must stop.
NOTE: History is not recorded while the timer is
stopped or paused.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Pause.
6 Select an option:
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.

4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Climb > Status.
6 Select Always or When Not Navigating.
7 Select an option:

• Select Run Screen to identify which data screen appears while running.
• Select Climb Screen to identify which data screen appears while climbing.
• Select Invert Colors to reverse the display colors when changing modes.
• Select Vertical Speed to set the rate of ascent over time.
• Select Mode Switch to set how quickly the device changes modes.

NOTE: The Current Screen option allows you to automatically switch to the last screen you were viewing before the auto climb transition occurred. 3D Speed and Distance You can set 3D speed and distance to calculate your speed or distance using both your elevation change and your horizontal movement over ground. You can use it during activities such as skiing, climbing, navigating, hiking, running, or biking. Turning On and Off the Lap Key You can turn on the Lap Key setting to record a lap or a rest during an activity using LAP. You can turn off the Lap Key setting to avoid recording laps due to accidental key presses during an activity. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity. 4 Select the activity settings. 5 Select Lap Key. The lap key status changes to On or Off based on the current setting. Using Auto Scroll You can use the auto scroll feature to cycle through all of the activity data screens automatically while the timer is running. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps. 3 Select an activity. NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities. 4 Select the activity settings. 5 Select Auto Scroll. 6 Select a display speed. UltraTrac The UltraTrac feature is a GPS setting that records track points and sensor data less frequently. Enabling the UltraTrac feature increases battery life but decreases the quality of recorded activities. You should use the UltraTrac feature for activities that demand

longer battery life and for which frequent sensor data updates are less important. Power Save Timeout Settings The timeout settings affect how long your device stays in training mode, for example, when you are waiting for a race to start. Hold MENU, select Settings > Activities & Apps, select an activity, and select the activity settings. Select Power Save Timeout to adjust the timeout settings for the activity. Normal: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after 5 minutes of inactivity. Extended: Sets the device to enter low-power watch mode after 25 minutes of inactivity. The extended mode can result in shorter battery life between charges.

Changing the Order of an Activity in the Apps List

1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Reorder.
5 Select UP or DOWN to adjust the position of the
activity in the apps list.

Widgets

Your device comes preloaded with widgets that provide at-a-glance information. Some widgets require a Bluetooth connection to a compatible smartphone. Some widgets are not visible by default. You can add them to the widget loop manually. ABC: Displays combined altimeter, barometer, and compass information. Alternate time zones: Displays the current time of day in additional time zones. Calendar: Displays upcoming meetings from your smartphone calendar. Calories: Displays your calorie information for the current day. Dog tracking: Displays your dog’s location information when you have a compatible dog tracking device paired with your fēnix device. Floors climbed: Tracks your floors climbed and progress toward your goal. Golf: Displays golf information for your last round. Heart rate: Displays your current heart rate in beats per minute (bpm) and a graph of your heart rate. Intensity minutes: Tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous activities, your weekly intensity minutes goal, and progress toward your goal. Last activity: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded activity, such as your last run, last ride, or

last swim. Last sport: Displays a brief summary of your last recorded sport. Music controls: Provides music player controls for your smartphone or on-device music. My day: Displays a dynamic summary of your activity today. The metrics include timed activities, intensity minutes, floors climbed, steps, calories burned, and more. Notifications: Alerts you to incoming calls, texts, social network updates, and more, based on your smartphone notification settings. Performance: Displays your current training status, training load, VO2 max. estimates, recovery time, FTP estimate, lactate threshold, and predicted race times. Sensor information: Displays information from an internal sensor or a connected ANT+ sensor. Steps: Tracks your daily step count, step goal, and data for the last 7 days. Stress: Displays your stress level and provides a breathing activity to help you relax. Sunrise and sunset: Displays sunrise, sunset, and civil twilight times. VIRB controls: Provides camera controls when you have a VIRB device paired with your fēnix device. Weather: Displays the current temperature and weather forecast. Xero™ bow sight: Displays laser location information when you have a Xero bow sight paired with your fēnix device. Customizing the Widget Loop You can change the order of widgets in the widget loop, remove widgets, and add new widgets. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Widgets. 3 Select a widget. 4 Select an option:

• Select Reorder to change the location of the widget in the widget loop.
• Select Remove to remove the widget from the widget loop. 5 Select Add Widgets. 6 Select a widget.
The widget is added to the widget loop.
VIRB Remote
The VIRB remote function allows you to control your
VIRB action camera using your device. Go to www.
garmin.com/VIRB to purchase a VIRB action camera.
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera
Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must
enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See

the VIRB Series Owner’s Manual for more information.
You must also set the VIRB widget to be shown in the
widget loop (Customizing the Widget Loop, page 35).
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the
watch face to view the VIRB widget.
3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB
camera.
4 Select .
5 Select an option:
• To record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
• To change video and photo settings, select Settings. Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the VIRB Series Owner’s Manual for more information. You must also set the VIRB widget to be shown in the widget loop (Customizing the Widget Loop, page 35). 1 Turn on your VIRB camera. 2 On your fēnix device, select UP or DOWN from the watch face to view the VIRB widget. 3 Wait while the device connects to your VIRB camera.
• To control the camera using the activity timer, select Settings > Timer Start/Stop. NOTE: Video recording automatically starts and stops when you start and stop an activity.
• To control the camera using the menu options, select Settings > Manual.
• To manually record video, select Start Recording. The video counter appears on the fēnix screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, select DOWN.
• To manually stop recording video, select .
• To take a photo, select Take Photo. Using the Stress Level Widget The stress level widget displays your current stress level and a graph of your stress level for the last several hours. It can also guide you through a breathing activity to help you relax. 1 While you are sitting or inactive, select UP or

When the camera is connected, a VIRB data screen is automatically added to the activity apps. 4 During an activity, select UP or DOWN to view the VIRB data screen. 5 Hold MENU. 6 Select VIRB Remote. 7 Select an option:

DOWN to view the stress level widget. TIP: If you are too active for the watch to determine your stress level, a message appears instead of a stress level number. You can check your stress level again after several minutes of inactivity. 2 Select to view a graph of your stress level for the last four hours. Blue bars indicate periods of rest. Yellow bars indicate periods of stress. Gray bars indicate times that you were too active to determine your stress level. 3 To start a breathing activity, select DOWN > , and enter a duration for the breathing activity in minutes.

Customizing the Controls Menu

You can add, remove, and change the order of the
shortcut menu options in the controls menu (Viewing
the Controls Menu, page 1).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Controls.
3 Select a shortcut to customize.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the shortcut in the controls menu.
• Select Remove to remove the shortcut from the controls menu. 5 If necessary, select Add New to add an additional shortcut to the controls menu.

Watch Face Settings

You can customize the appearance of the watch face
by selecting the layout, colors, and additional data.
You can also download custom watch faces from the
Connect IQ store.
Customizing the Watch Face
Before you can activate a Connect IQ watch face, you
must install a watch face from the Connect IQ store
(Connect IQ Features, page 10).
You can customize the watch face information and
appearance, or activate an installed Connect IQ watch
face.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Watch Face.
3 Select UP or DOWN to preview the watch face
options.
4 Select Add New to scroll through additional pre
loaded watch faces.
5 Select > Apply to activate a pre-loaded watch
face or an installed Connect IQ watch face.
6 If using a pre-loaded watch face, select >
Customize.
7 Select an option:

• To change the style of the numbers for the analog watch face, select Dial.
• To change the style of the hands for the analog watch face, select Hands.
• To change the style of the numbers for the digital watch face, select Layout
• To change the style of the seconds for the digital watch face, select Seconds.
• To change the data that appears on the watch face, select Data.
• To add or change an accent color for the watch face, select Accent Color.
• To change the background color, select Bkgd. Color.
• To save the changes, select Done.

Sensors Settings

Compass Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors &
Accessories > Compass.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the
compass sensor (Calibrating the Compass Manually,
page 37).
Display: Sets the directional heading on the compass
to letters, degrees, or milli-radians.
North Ref.: Sets the north reference of the compass
(Setting the North Reference, page 37).
Mode: Sets the compass to use electronic-sensor data
only (On), a combination of GPS and electronic
sensor data when moving (Auto), or GPS data only
(Off).
Calibrating the Compass Manually
NOTICE
Calibrate the electronic compass outdoors. To
improve heading accuracy, do not stand near objects
that influence magnetic fields, such as vehicles,
buildings, and overhead power lines.
Your device was already calibrated at the factory,
and the device uses automatic calibration by default.
If you experience irregular compass behavior, for
example, after moving long distances or after extreme
temperature changes, you can manually calibrate the
compass.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Compass > Calibrate > Start.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
TIP: Move your wrist in a small figure eight motion
until a message appears.
Setting the North Reference
You can set the directional reference used in
calculating heading information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Compass > North Ref..
3 Select an option:
• To set geographic north as the heading reference, select True.
• To set the magnetic declination for your location automatically, select Magnetic.
• To set grid north (000º) as the heading reference, select Grid.
• To set the magnetic variation value manually, select User, enter the magnetic variance, and select Done. Altimeter Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter. Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the altimeter sensor. Auto Cal.: Allows the altimeter to self-calibrate each time you turn on GPS tracking. Elevation: Sets the units of measure for elevation. Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the device uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting point by default. You can manually calibrate the barometric altimeter if you know the correct elevation. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter. 3 Select an option:
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Auto Cal ., and select an option.
• To enter the current elevation, select Calibrate. Barometer Settings Hold MENU, and select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Barometer. Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the barometer sensor. Plot: Sets the time scale for the chart in the barometer widget. Storm Alert: Sets the rate of barometric pressure change that triggers a storm alert. Watch Mode: Sets the sensor used in watch mode. The Auto option uses both the altimeter and barometer according to your movement. You can use the Altimeter option when your activity involves changes in altitude, or the Barometer option when your activity does not involve changes in altitude. Pressure: Sets how the device displays pressure data. Calibrating the Barometer Your device was already calibrated at the factory, and the device uses automatic calibration at your GPS

starting point by default. You can manually calibrate
the barometer if you know the correct elevation or the
correct sea level pressure.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories >
Barometer > Calibrate.
3 Select an option:
• To enter the current elevation or sea level pressure, select Yes.
• To calibrate automatically from the digital elevation model, select Use DEM.
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Use GPS.

Map Settings

You can customize how the map appears in the map
app and data screens.
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Map.
Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North
Up option shows north at the top of the screen.
The Track Up option shows your current direction
of travel at the top of the screen.
User Locations: Shows or hides saved locations on the
map.
Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for
optimal use of your map. When disabled, you must
zoom in or out manually.
Lock on Road: Locks the position icon, which
represents your position on the map, onto the
nearest road.
Track Log: Shows or hides the track log, or the path
you have traveled, as a colored line on the map.
Track Color: Changes the track log color.
Detail: Sets the amount of detail shown on the map.
Showing more detail may cause the map to redraw
more slowly.
Marine: Sets the map to display data in marine mode
(Marine Map Settings, page 38).
Draw Segments: Shows or hides segments, as a
colored line on the map.
Draw Contours: Shows or hides contour lines on the
map.
Marine Map Settings
You can customize how the map appears in marine
mode.
Hold MENU, and select Settings > Map > Marine.
Marine Chart Mode: Enables the nautical chart when
displaying marine data. This option displays
various map features in different colors so the
marine POIs are more readable, and so the map
reflects the drawing scheme of paper charts.
Spot Soundings: Enables depth measurements on the
chart.
Light Sectors: Shows and configures the appearance
of light sectors on the chart.
Symbol Set: Sets the chart symbols in marine mode.
The NOAA option displays the National Oceanic
and Atmospheric Administration chart symbols.
The International option displays the International
Association of Lighthouse Authorities chart
symbols.
Showing and Hiding Map Data
If you have multiple maps installed on your device, you
can choose the map data to show on the map.
1 Select > Map.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select the map settings.
4 Select Map > Configure Maps.
5 Select a map to activate the toggle switch, which
shows or hides the map data.

GroupTrack Settings

Hold MENU, and select Settings > GroupTrack.
Show on Map: Enables you to view connections on the
map screen during a GroupTrack session.
Activity Types: Allows you to select which activity
types appear on the map screen during a
GroupTrack session.

Navigation Settings

You can customize the map features and appearance
when navigating to a destination.
Customizing Map Features
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Navigation > Data Screens.
3 Select an option:
• Select Map to turn on or off the map.
• Select Guide to turn on or off the guide screen that displays the compass bearing or course to follow while navigating.
• Select Elevation Plot to turn on or off the elevation plot.
• Select a screen to add, remove, or customize. Setting Up a Heading Bug You can set up a heading indicator to display on your data pages while navigating. The indicator points to your target heading. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Navigation > Heading Bug. Setting Navigation Alerts You can set alerts to help you navigate to your destination. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Navigation > Alerts. 3 Select an option:

• To set an alert for a specified distance from your final destination, select Final Distance.
• To set an alert for the estimated time remaining until you reach your final destination, select Final ETE.
• To set an alert when you stray from the course, select Off Course.
• To enable turn-by-turn navigation prompts, select Turn Prompts. 4 If necessary, select Status to turn on the alert. 5 If necessary, enter a distance or time value, and select .

System Settings

Hold MENU, and select Settings > System. Language: Sets the language displayed on the device. Time: Adjusts the time settings (Time Settings, page 39). Backlight: Adjusts the backlight settings (Changing the Backlight Settings, page 39). Sounds: Sets the device sounds, such as key tones, alerts, and vibrations. Do Not Disturb: Turns on or off do not disturb mode. Use the Sleep Time option to turn on do not disturb mode automatically during your normal sleep hours. You can set your normal sleep hours on your Garmin Connect account. Hot Keys: Allows you to assign shortcuts to device keys (Customizing the Hot Keys, page 39). Auto Lock: Allows you to lock the keys automatically to prevent accidental key presses. Use the During Activity option to lock the keys during a timed activity. Use the Not During Activity option to lock the keys when you are not recording a timed activity. Units: Sets the units of measure used on the device (Changing the Units of Measure, page 39). Format: Sets general format preferences, such as the pace and speed shown during activities, the start of the week, and geographical position format and datum options. Data Recording: Sets how the device records activity data. The Smart recording option (default) allows for longer activity recordings. The Every Second recording option provides more detailed activity recordings, but may not record entire activities that last for longer periods of time. USB Mode: Sets the device to use MTP (media transfer protocol) or Garmin mode when connected to a computer. Reset: Allows you to reset user data and settings (Resetting All Default Settings, page 43). Software Update: Allows you to install software updates downloaded using Garmin Express.

Time Settings
Hold MENU, and select Settings > System > Time.
Time Format: Sets the device to show time in a 12-
hour, 24- hour, or military format.
Set Time: Sets the time zone for the device. The Auto
option sets the time zone automatically based on
your GPS position.
Time: Allows you to adjust the time if it is set to the
Manual option.
Alerts: Allows you to set hourly alerts, as well as
sunrise and sunset alerts that sound a specific
number of minutes or hours before the actual
sunrise or sunset occurs.
Sync With GPS: Allows you to manually sync the time
with GPS when you change time zones, and to
update for daylight saving time.
Changing the Backlight Settings
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Backlight.
3 Select an option:
• Select During Activity.
• Select Not During Activity. 4 Select an option:
• Select Keys to turn on the backlight for key presses.
• Select Alerts to turn on the backlight for alerts.
• Select Gesture to turn on the backlight by raising and turning your arm to look at your wrist.
• Select Timeout to set the length of time before the backlight turns off.
• Select Brightness to set the brightness level of the backlight. Customizing the Hot Keys You can customize the hold function of individual keys and combinations of keys. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > System > Hot Keys. 3 Select a key or combination of keys to customize. 4 Select a function. Changing the Units of Measure You can customize units of measure for distance, pace and speed, elevation, weight, height, and temperature. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > System > Units. 3 Select a measurement type. 4 Select a unit of measure.

Viewing Device Information

You can view device information, such as the unit ID,
software version, regulatory information, and license
agreement.
1 Hold MENU.

40 Wireless Sensors

2 Select Settings > About.
Viewing E -label Regulatory and Compliance
Information
The label for this device is provided electronically. The
e-label may provide regulatory information, such as
identification numbers provided by the FCC or regional
compliance markings, as well as applicable product
and licensing information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 From the settings menu, select About.

##### Wireless Sensors

Your device can be used with wireless ANT+ or Bluetooth sensors. For more information about compatibility and purchasing optional sensors, go to http://buy.garmin.com.

Pairing Your Wireless Sensors

The first time you connect a wireless sensor to your
device using ANT+ or Bluetooth technology, you must
pair the device and sensor. After they are paired, the
device connects to the sensor automatically when you
start an activity and the sensor is active and within
range.
1 If you are pairing a heart rate monitor, put on
the heart rate monitor (Putting On the Heart Rate
Monitor, page 14).
The heart rate monitor does not send or receive
data until you put it on.
2 Bring the device within 3 m (10 ft.) of the sensor.
NOTE: Stay 10 m (33 ft.) away from other wireless
sensors while pairing.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add
New.
5 Select an option:
• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

After the sensor is paired with your device, the sensor status changes from Searching to Connected. Sensor data appears in the data screen loop or a custom data field.

Using an Optional Bike Speed or Cadence Sensor

You can use a compatible bike speed or cadence
sensor to send data to your device.
y Pair the sensor with your device (Pairing Your
Wireless Sensors, page 40).
y Set your wheel size (Wheel Size and Circumference,
page 50).
y Go for a ride (Starting an Activity, page 2).

Training with Power Meters

y Go to www.garmin.com/intosports for a list of ANT+
sensors that are compatible with your device (such
as Vector™).
y For more information, see the owner’s manual for
your power meter.
y Adjust your power zones to match your goals and
abilities (Setting Your Power Zones, page 23).
y Use range alerts to be notified when you reach a
specified power zone (Setting an Alert, page 33).
y Customize the power data fields (Customizing the
Data Screens, page 32).

Using Electronic Shifters

Before you can use compatible electronic shifters, such as Shimano ® Di2™ shifters, you must pair them with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40). You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 32). The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device displays current adjustment values when the sensor is in adjustment mode.

Situational Awareness

Your fēnix device can be used with the Varia Vision™ device, Varia™ smart bike lights, and rearview radar to improve situational awareness. See the owner’s manual for your Varia device for more information. NOTE: You may need to update the fēnix software before pairing Varia devices (Updating the Software Using Garmin Connect Mobile, page 8).

Foot Pod

Your device is compatible with the foot pod. You can
use the foot pod to record pace and distance instead
of using GPS when you are training indoors or when
your GPS signal is weak. The foot pod is on standby
and ready to send data (like the heart rate monitor).
After 30 minutes of inactivity, the foot pod powers
off to conserve the battery. When the battery is low, a
message appears on your device. Approximately five
hours of battery life remain.
Improving Foot Pod Calibration
Before you can calibrate your device, you must acquire
GPS signals and pair your device with the foot pod
(Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40).
The foot pod is self-calibrating, but you can improve
the accuracy of the speed and distance data with a
few outdoor runs using GPS.
1 Stand outside for 5 minutes with a clear view of
the sky.
2 Start a running activity.
3 Run on a track without stopping for 10 minutes.
4 Stop your activity, and save it.
Based on the recorded data, the foot pod

fēnix 5 Plus battery life Up to 10 days fēnix 5X Plus battery life Up to 18 days Water rating 10 ATM* Operating and storage temperature range

From -20º to 45ºC (from -4º to 113ºF)

Charging temperature range

From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF)

Wireless frequencies/ protocols

fēnix 5S Plus: 13 MHz @ -70.53 dBm nominal, 2.4 GHz @ 23.4 dBm nominal; fēnix 5 Plus: 13 MHz @ -69.33 dBm nominal, 2.4 GHz @ 22.9 dBm nominal; fēnix 5X Plus: 13 MHz @ -71.23 dBm nominal, 2.4 GHz @ 23.4 dBm nominal *The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 100 m. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.

calibration value changes, if necessary. You should not need to calibrate the foot pod again unless your running style changes. Calibrating Your Foot Pod Manually Before you can calibrate your device, you must pair your device with the foot pod sensor (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40). Manual calibration is recommended if you know your calibration factor. If you have calibrated a foot pod with another Garmin product, you may know your calibration factor. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories. 3 Select your foot pod. 4 Select Cal. Factor > Set Value. 5 Adjust the calibration factor:

• Increase the calibration factor if your distance is too low.
• Decrease the calibration factor if your distance is too high. Setting Foot Pod Speed and Distance Before you can customize the foot pod speed and distance, you must pair your device with the foot pod sensor (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page 40). You can set your device to calculate speed and distance using your foot pod data instead of GPS data. 1 Hold MENU. 2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories. 3 Select your foot pod. 4 Select Speed or Distance. 5 Select an option:
• Select Indoor when you are training with GPS turned off, usually indoors.
• Select Always to use your foot pod data regardless of the GPS setting.
Battery Information
The actual battery life depends on the features enabled
on your device, such as activity tracking, wrist-based
heart rate, smartphone notifications, GPS, internal
sensors, and connected sensors.
fēnix
5S Plus
Battery
Life

fēnix 5 Plus Battery Life fēnix 5X Plus Battery Life

Mode

Up to 6 days

Up to 10 days

Up to 18 days

Smartwatch mode with activity tracking and 24/7 wrist based heart rate monitoring

Up to 10 hours

Up to 18 hours

Up to 30 hours

GPS mode with wrist- based heart rate

tempe™

Up to 4 hours

Up to 7 hours

Up to 11 hours

GPS mode with wrist- based heart rate and streaming music

The tempe is an ANT+ wireless temperature sensor. You can attach the sensor to a secure strap or loop where it is exposed to ambient air, and therefore, provides a consistent source of accurate temperature data. You must pair the tempe with your device to display temperature data from the tempe.

Up to 22 hours

Up to 38 hours

Up to 64 hours

UltraTrac GPS mode with gyro based dead reckoning

##### Device Information

Data Management fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus Specifications

NOTE: The device is not compatible with Windows ® 95, 98, Me, Windows NT ®, and Mac ® OS 10.3 and earlier. Disconnecting the USB Cable If your device is connected to your computer as a removable drive or volume, you must safely disconnect

| Battery type | Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery |
| --- | --- |
| battery life | Up to 6 days |

fēnix 5S Plus

Device Information 41

your device from your computer to avoid data loss. If
your device is connected to your Windows computer
as a portable device, it is not necessary to safely
disconnect the device.
1 Complete an action:
• For Windows computers, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the system tray, and select your device.
• For Apple computers, select the device, and select File > Eject. 2 Disconnect the cable from your computer. Deleting Files
corrosion of the electrical contacts when connected
to a charger.
Corrosion can prevent charging and data transfer.
1 Wipe the device using a cloth dampened with a
mild detergent solution.
2 Wipe it dry.
After cleaning, allow the device to dry completely.
TIP: For more information, go to www.garmin.com/
fitandcare.
Cleaning the Leather Bands
1 Wipe the leather bands with a dry cloth.
2 Use a leather conditioner to clean the leather
bands.

Changing the QuickFit™ Bands

1 Slide the latch on the QuickFit band, and remove the band from the watch.

| 1 Open the Garmin drive or volume. 2 If necessary, open a folder or volume. 3 Select a file. 4 Press the Delete key on your keyboard. NOTE: If you are using an Apple computer, you must empty the Trash folder to completely remove the files. Device Care Do not use a sharp object to clean the device. | Device Maintenance NOTICE |
| --- | --- |
| Avoid chemical cleaners, solvents, and insect repellents that can damage plastic components and finishes. | |
| Thoroughly rinse the device with fresh water after exposure to chlorine, salt water, sunscreen, cosmetics, alcohol, or other harsh chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the case. | |
| Avoid pressing the keys under water. | |
| Keep the leather band dry. Avoid swimming or showering with the leather band. Exposure to water can damage the leather band. | |
| Avoid extreme shock and harsh treatment, because it can degrade the life of the product. | |
| Do not store the device where prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures can occur, because it can cause permanent damage. | |

NOTICE If you do not know the purpose of a file, do not delete it. Your device memory contains important system files that should not be deleted. Cleaning the Device

2 Align the new band with the watch.
3 Press the band into place.
NOTE: Make sure the band is secure. The latch
should close over the watch pin.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the other
band.

Metal Watch Band Adjustment

If your watch includes a metal watch band, you should take your watch to a jeweler or other professional to adjust the length of the metal band.

##### Troubleshooting

My device is in the wrong language

You can change the device language selection if you
have accidently selected the wrong language on the
device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Scroll down to the last item in the list, and select .
3 Scroll down to the second to last item in the list,
and select .

NOTICE Even small amounts of sweat or moisture can cause

42 Device Maintenance

Troubleshooting 43
4 Select .
5 Select your language.

Is my smartphone compatible with my device?

The fēnix 5/5S/5X Plus device is compatible with smartphones using Bluetooth wireless technology. Go to www.garmin.com/ble for compatibility information.

My phone will not connect to the device y Enable Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone. y Bring your phone within 10 m (33 ft.) of the device. y On your smartphone, open the Garmin Connect Mobile app, select or , and select Garmin Devices > Add Device to enter pairing mode. y On your device, hold LIGHT, and select to turn on Bluetooth technology and enter pairing mode.

Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my watch?

The device is compatible with some Bluetooth
sensors. The first time you connect a sensor to your
Garmin device, you must pair the device and sensor.
After they are paired, the device connects to the sensor
automatically when you start an activity and the
sensor is active and within range.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > Sensors & Accessories > Add
New.
3 Select an option:
• Select Search All.
• Select your sensor type.

You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page 32).

My headphones will not connect to the device

If your headphones were previously connected to your smartphone using Bluetooth wireless technology, they may connect to your smartphone before connecting to your device. You can try these tips. y Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone. Refer to the owner’s manual for your smartphone for more information. y Stay 10 m (33 ft.) away from your smartphone while connecting headphones to your device. y Pair your headphones with your device (Connecting Headphones using Bluetooth Technology, page 13).

My music cuts out or my headphones do not stay connected

When using a fēnix device connected to headphones using Bluetooth technology, the signal is strongest when there is a direct line of sight between the device and the antenna on the headphones. y If the signal passes through your body, you may experience signal loss or your headphones may become disconnected. y It is recommended to wear your headphones with the antenna on the same side of your body as your fēnix device.

Resetting Your Device

1 Hold LIGHT for at least 25 seconds.
2 Hold LIGHT for one second to turn on the device.

Resetting All Default Settings

You can reset all of the device settings to the factory
default values.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Settings > System > Reset.
3 Select an option:
• To reset all of the device settings to the factory default values and delete all user-entered information and activity history, select Delete Data and Reset Settings. NOTE: If you have set up a Garmin Pay wallet, this option deletes the wallet from your device. If you have music stored on your device, this option deletes your stored music.
• To reset all of the device settings to the factory default values and save all user-entered information and activity history, select Reset Default Settings.

Acquiring Satellite Signals

The device may need a clear view of the sky to
acquire satellite signals. The time and date are set
automatically based on the GPS position.
1 Go outdoors to an open area.
The front of the device should be oriented toward
the sky.
2 Wait while the device locates satellites.
It may take 30–60 seconds to locate satellite
signals.
Improving GPS Satellite Reception
y Frequently sync the device to your Garmin Connect
account:
• Connect your device to a computer using the USB cable and the Garmin Express application.
• Sync your device to the Garmin Connect Mobile app using your Bluetooth enabled smartphone.
• Connect your device to your Garmin Connect

44 Troubleshooting

account using a WiFi wireless network. While connected to your Garmin Connect account, the device downloads several days of satellite data, allowing it to quickly locate satellite signals. y Take your device outside to an open area away from tall buildings and trees. y Remain stationary for a few minutes.

The temperature reading is not accurate

Your body temperature affects the temperature reading for the internal temperature sensor. To get the most accurate temperature reading, you should remove the watch from your wrist and wait 20 to 30 minutes. You can also use an optional tempe external temperature sensor to view accurate ambient temperature readings while wearing the watch.

Maximizing the Battery Life

You can do several things to extend the life of the
battery.
y Reduce the backlight timeout (Changing the
Backlight Settings, page 39).
y Reduce the backlight brightness.
y Use UltraTrac GPS mode for your activity (UltraTrac,
page 34).
y Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology when
you are not using connected features (Connected
Features, page 6).
y When pausing your activity for a longer period
of time, use the resume later option (Stopping an
Activity, page 2).
y Turn off activity tracking (Turning Off Activity
Tracking, page 24).
y Use a Connect IQ watch face that is not updated
every second.
For example, use a watch face without a second
hand (Customizing the Watch Face, page 36).
y Limit the smartphone notifications the device
displays (Managing Notifications, page 7).
y Stop broadcasting heart rate data to paired Garmin
devices (Broadcasting Heart Rate Data to Garmin
Devices, page 13).
y Turn off wrist-based heart rate monitoring (Turning
Off the Wrist-based Heart Rate Monitor, page 14).
NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate monitoring is used to
calculate vigorous intensity minutes and calories
burned.

Activity Tracking

For more information about activity tracking accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy. My daily step count does not appear The daily step count is reset every night at midnight.

If dashes appear instead of your step count, allow the device to acquire satellite signals and set the time automatically. My step count does not seem accurate If your step count does not seem accurate, you can try these tips. y Wear the device on your non-dominant wrist. y Carry the device in your pocket when pushing a stroller or lawn mower. y Carry the device in your pocket when actively using your hands or arms only. NOTE: The device may interpret some repetitive motions, such as washing dishes, folding laundry, or clapping your hands, as steps. The step counts on my device and my Garmin Connect account don’t match The step count on your Garmin Connect account updates when you synchronize your device. 1 Select an option:

• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect application (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer, page 9).
• Synchronize your step count with the Garmin Connect Mobile app (Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect Mobile, page 9). 2 Wait while the device synchronizes your data.

Synchronizing can take several minutes. NOTE: Refreshing the Garmin Connect Mobile app or the Garmin Connect application does not synchronize your data or update your step count. The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate Your device uses an internal barometer to measure elevation changes as you climb floors. A floor climbed is equal to 3 m (10 ft.). y Avoid holding handrails or skipping steps while climbing stairs. y In windy environments, cover the device with your sleeve or jacket as strong gusts can cause erratic readings. My intensity minutes are flashing When you exercise at an intensity level that qualifies toward your intensity minutes goal, the intensity minutes flash. Exercise for at least 10 consecutive minutes at a moderate or vigorous intensity level.

Getting More Information

You can find more information about this product on the Garmin website. y Go to support.garmin.com for additional manuals, articles, and software updates.

y Go to http://buy.garmin.com, or contact your Garmin dealer for information about optional accessories and replacement parts.

##### Appendix

Data Fields

%FTP: The current power output as a percentage of
functional threshold power.
%HRR: The percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum
heart rate minus resting heart rate).
10s Avg. Power: The 10-second moving average of
power output.
10s Avg Balance: The 10-second moving average of
the left/ right power balance.
24 -Hour Max.: The maximum temperature recorded in
the last 24 hours from a compatible temperature
sensor.
24 -Hour Min.: The minimum temperature recorded in
the last 24 hours from a compatible temperature
sensor.
30s Avg. Power: The 30-second moving average of
power output.
30s Avg Balance: The 30-second moving average of
the left/ right power balance.
3s Avg. Balance: The three-second moving average of
the left/ right power balance.
3s Avg. Power: The 3-second moving average of power
output.
500m Pace: The current rowing pace per 500 meters.
Aerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on your
aerobic fitness level.
Anaerobic TE: The impact of the current activity on
your anaerobic fitness level.
Average HR: The average heart rate for the current
activity.
Average Pace: The average pace for the current
activity.
Average Power: The average power output for the
current activity.
Average Swolf: The average swolf score for the current
activity. Your swolf score is the sum of the time
for one length plus the number of strokes for that
length (Swim Terminology, page 4). In open water
swimming, 25 meters is used to calculate your
swolf score.
Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate
reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart
rate) for the current activity.
Avg. 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500
meters for the current activity.
Avg. Ascent: The average vertical distance of ascent
since the last reset.
Avg. Balance: The average left/right power balance for
the current activity.
Avg. Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the
current activity.
Avg. Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the
current activity.
Avg. Descent: The average vertical distance of descent
since the last reset.
Avg. GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time
balance for the current session.
Avg. L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left
leg for the current activity.
Avg. L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for
the left leg for the current activity.
Avg. Lap Time: The average lap time for the current
activity.
Avg. Moving Speed: The average speed when moving
for the current activity.
Avg. Nautical Speed: The average speed in knots for
the current activity.
Avg. Overall Speed: The average speed for the current
activity, including both moving and stopped
speeds.
Avg. PCO: The average platform center offset for the
current activity.
Avg. R. PP: The average power phase angle for the
right leg for the current activity.
Avg. R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for
the right leg for the current activity.
Avg. Speed: The average speed for the current activity.
Avg. Stride Len.: The average stride length for the
current session.
Avg. Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool
length during the current activity.
Avg. Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number
of strokes per minute (spm) during the current
activity.
Avg. Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical
oscillation for the current activity.
Avg. Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical
oscillation to stride length for the current session.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance
traveled per stroke during the current activity.
Avg Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance
traveled per stroke during the current activity.
Avg GCT: The average amount of ground contact time
for the current activity.
Avg HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum
heart rate for the current activity.
Balance: The current left/right power balance.
Battery Level: The remaining battery power.
Bearing: The direction from your current location to a
destination. You must be navigating for this data

to appear. Cadence: Cycling. The number of revolutions of the crank arm. Your device must be connected to a cadence accessory for this data to appear. Cadence: Running. The steps per minute (right and left). Calories: The amount of total calories burned. Compass Hdg.: The direction you are moving based on the compass. Course: The direction from your starting location to a destination. Course can be viewed as a planned or set route. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Dest. Location: The position of your final destination. Dest. Wpt: The last point on the route to the destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Di2 Battery: The remaining battery power of a Di2 sensor. Dist. Per Stroke: Paddle sports. The distance traveled per stroke. Dist. Remaining: The remaining distance to the final destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Distance: The distance traveled for the current track or activity. Distance To Next: The remaining distance to the next waypoint on the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Elapsed Time: The total time recorded. For example, if you start the timer and run for 10 minutes, then stop the timer for 5 minutes, then start the timer and run for 20 minutes, your elapsed time is 35 minutes. Elevation: The altitude of your current location above or below sea level. Estimated Total Distance: The estimated distance from the start to the final destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear. ETA: The estimated time of day when you will reach the final destination (adjusted to the local time of the destination). You must be navigating for this data to appear. ETA at Next: The estimated time of day when you will reach the next waypoint on the route (adjusted to the local time of the waypoint). You must be navigating for this data to appear. ETE: The estimated time remaining until you reach the final destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Floors Climbed: The total number of floors climbed up for the day. Floors Descended: The total number of floors climbed down for the day.

Floors per Minute: The number of floors climbed up
per minute.
Front: The front bike gear from a gear position sensor.
GCT: The amount of time in each step that you
spend on the ground while running, measured in
milliseconds. Ground contact time is not calculated
while walking.
GCT Balance: The left/right balance of ground contact
time while running.
Gear Battery: The battery status of a gear position
sensor.
Gear Combo: The current gear combination from a gear
position sensor.
Gear Ratio: The number of teeth on the front and rear
bike gears, as detected by a gear position sensor.
Gears: The front and rear bike gears from a gear
position sensor.
Glide Ratio: The ratio of horizontal distance traveled to
the change in vertical distance.
Glide Ratio Dest.: The glide ratio required to descend
from your current position to the destination
elevation. You must be navigating for this data to
appear.
GPS: The strength of the GPS satellite signal.
GPS Elevation: The altitude of your current location
using GPS.
GPS Heading: The direction you are moving based on
GPS.
Grade: The calculation of rise (elevation) over run
(distance). For example, if for every 3 m (10 ft.) you
climb you travel 60 m (200 ft.), the grade is 5%.
Heading: The direction you are moving.
Heart Rate: Your heart rate in beats per minute (bpm).
Your device must be connected to a compatible
heart rate monitor.
HR %Max.: The percentage of maximum heart rate.
HR Zone: The current range of your heart rate (1 to 5).
The default zones are based on your user profile
and maximum heart rate (220 minus your age).
Int. Avg. %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate
reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart
rate) for the current swim interval.
Int. Avg. %Max.: The average percentage of maximum
heart rate for the current swim interval.
Int. Avg. HR: The average heart rate for the current
swim interval.
Int. Distance: The distance traveled for the current
interval.
Int. Max. %HRR: The maximum percentage of heart
rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting
heart rate) for the current swim interval.
Int. Max. %Max.: The maximum percentage of
maximum heart rate for the current swim interval.

Int. Max. HR: The maximum heart rate for the current swim interval. Int. Pace: The average pace for the current interval. Int. Swolf: The average swolf score for the current interval. Intensity Factor: The Intensity Factor™ for the current activity. Interval Lengths: The number of pool lengths completed during the current interval. Interval Time: The stopwatch time for the current interval. Int Strk/Len: The average number of strokes per pool length during the current interval. Int Strk Rate: The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the current interval. Int Strk Type: The current stroke type for the interval. L. Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the last completed lap. L. Lap Stk. Rate: Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap. L. Lap Stk. Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed lap. L. Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap. L. Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap. L. Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the last completed lap. L. Len. Stk. Rate: The average number strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed pool length. L. Len. Stk. Type: The stroke type used during the last completed pool length. L. Len. Strokes: The total number of strokes for the last completed pool length. Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart rate) for the current lap. Lap 500m Pace: The average rowing pace per 500 meters for the current lap. Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for the current lap. Lap Balance: The average left/right power balance for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Cycling. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Cadence: Running. The average cadence for the current lap. Lap Descent: The vertical distance of descent for the current lap. Lap Distance: The distance traveled for the current lap.

Lap Dist Per Stk: Swimming. The average distance
traveled per stroke during the current lap.
Lap Dist Per Stk: Paddle sports. The average distance
traveled per stroke during the current lap.
Lap GCT: The average amount of ground contact time
for the current lap.
Lap GCT Bal.: The average ground contact time
balance for the current lap.
Lap HR: The average heart rate for the current lap.
Lap HR %Max.: The average percentage of maximum
heart rate for the current lap.
Lap L. PP: The average power phase angle for the left
leg for the current lap.
Lap L. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for
the left leg for the current lap.
Lap NP: The average Normalized Power for the current
lap.
Lap Pace: The average pace for the current lap.
Lap PCO: The average platform center offset for the
current lap.
Lap Power: The average power output for the current
lap.
Lap R. PP: The average power phase angle for the right
leg for the current lap.
Lap R. PPP: The average power phase peak angle for
the right leg for the current lap.
Laps: The number of laps completed for the current
activity.
Lap Speed: The average speed for the current lap.
Lap Stride Len.: The average stride length for the
current lap.
Lap Strk Rate: Swimming. The average number of
strokes per minute (spm) during the current lap.
Lap Strk Rate: Paddle sports. The average number of
strokes per minute (spm) during the current lap.
Lap Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes
for the current lap.
Lap Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of
strokes for the current lap.
Lap Swolf: The swolf score for the current lap.
Lap Time: The stopwatch time for the current lap.
Lap Vert. Osc.: The average amount of vertical
oscillation for the current lap.
Lap Vert. Ratio: The average ratio of vertical oscillation
to stride length for the current lap.
Last Lap %HRR: The average percentage of heart rate
reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart
rate) for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Ascent: The vertical distance of ascent for
the last completed lap.
Last Lap Cad.: Cycling. The average cadence for the
last completed lap.

Time to Next: The estimated time remaining before you reach the next waypoint in the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Torque Eff.: The measurement of how efficiently a rider is pedaling. Total Ascent: The total elevation distance ascended since the last reset. Total Descent: The total elevation distance descended since the last reset. Total Hemoglobin: The estimated muscle oxygen total for the current activity. TSS: The Training Stress Score™ for the current activity. V Dist to Dest: The elevation distance between your current position and the final destination. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Vert. Spd.: The rate of ascent or descent over time. Vertical Osc.: The amount of bounce while you are running. The vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters for each step. Vertical Ratio: The ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length. Vert Spd to Tgt: The rate of ascent or descent to a predetermined altitude. You must be navigating for this data to appear. VMG: The speed at which you are closing on a destination along a route. You must be navigating for this data to appear. Work: The accumulated work performed (power output) in kilojoules.

footfall to the next, measured in meters. Stroke Rate: Swimming. The number of strokes per minute (spm). Stroke Rate: Paddle sports. The number of strokes per minute (spm). Strokes: Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current activity. Strokes: Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the current activity. Sunrise: The time of sunrise based on your GPS position. Sunset: The time of sunset based on your GPS position. Temperature: The temperature of the air. Your body temperature affects the temperature sensor. You can pair a tempe sensor with your device to provide a consistent source of accurate temperature data. Time in Zone: The time elapsed in each heart rate or power zone. Time of Day: The time of day based on your current location and time settings (format, time zone, daylight saving time). Timer: The current time of the countdown timer. Time Seat.: The time spent seated while pedaling for the current activity. Time Seat. Lap: The time spent seated while pedaling for the current lap. Time Stand.: The time spent standing while pedaling for the current activity. Time Stand. Lap: The time spent standing while pedaling for the current lap.

VO2 Max. Standard Ratings

| | | Males | | | | | Percentile | | | 20–29 | | 30–39 | | | | 40–49 | | | 50–59 | | 60–69 | | 70–79 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | Superior | | | | | | 95 | | 55.4 | | 54 | | | 52.5 | | | | 48.9 | | 45.7 | | 42.1 | |
| | Excellent | | | | | | 80 | | 51.1 | | 48.3 | | | 46.4 | | | | 43.4 | | 39.5 | | 36.7 | |
| | | Good | | | | | 60 | | 45.4 | | 44 | | | 42.4 | | | | 39.2 | | 35.5 | | 32.3 | |
| | | | Fair | | | | 40 | | 41.7 | | 40.5 | | | 38.5 | | | | 35.6 | | 32.3 | | 29.4 | |
| | | | Poor | | | | 0–40 | | <41.7 | | <40.5 | | | <38.5 | | | | <35.6 | | <32.3 | | <29.4 | |
| | Females | | | | | | Percentile | | | 20–29 | | 30–39 | | | | 40–49 | | | 50–59 | | 60–69 | | 70–79 |
| | Superior | | | | | | 95 | | 49.6 | | 47.4 | | | 45.3 | | | | 41.1 | | 37.8 | | 36.7 | |
| | Excellent | | | | | | 80 | | 43.9 | | 42.4 | | | 39.7 | | | | 36.7 | | 33 | | 30.9 | |
| | | Good | | | | | 60 | | 39.5 | | 37.8 | | | 36.3 | | | | 33 | | 30 | | 28.1 | |
| | | | Fair | | | | 40 | | 36.1 | | 34.4 | | | 33 | | | | 30.1 | | 27.5 | | 25.9 | |
| | | | Poor | | | | 0–40 | | <36.1 | | <34.4 | | | <33 | | | | <30.1 | | <27.5 | | <25.9 | |

These tables include standardized classifications for VO2 max. estimates by age and gender.
Data reprinted with permission from The Cooper Institute. For more information, go to www.CooperInstitute.org.

FTP Ratings

These tables include classifications for functional
threshold power (FTP) estimates by gender.
Males Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 5.05 and greater
Excellent From 3.93 to 5.04
Good From 2.79 to 3.92
Fair From 2.23 to 2.78
Untrained Less than 2.23
Females Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 4.30 and greater
Excellent From 3.33 to 4.29
Good From 2.36 to 3.32
Fair From 1.90 to 2.35
Untrained Less than 1.90

Wheel Size and Circumference

Your speed sensor automatically detects your wheel
size. If necessary, you can manually enter your wheel
circumference in the speed sensor settings.
The tire size is marked on both sides of the tire. This
is not a comprehensive list. You can also measure
the circumference of your wheel or use one of the
calculators available on the internet.
Tire Size Wheel Circumference (mm)
20 × 1.75 1515
20 × 1-3/8 1615
22 × 1-3/8 1770
22 × 1-1/2 1785
24 × 1 1753
24 × 3/4 Tubular 1785
24 × 1-1/8 1795
24 × 1.75 1890
24 × 1-1/4 1905
24 × 2.00 1925
24 × 2.125 1965
26 × 7/8 1920
26 × 1-1.0 1913
26 × 1 1952
26 × 1.25 1953
26 × 1-1/8 1970
26 × 1.40 2005
26 × 1.50 2010
26 × 1.75 2023
26 × 1.95 2050
26 × 2.00 2055

26 × 1-3/8 2068
26 × 2.10 2068
26 × 2.125 2070
26 × 2.35 2083
26 × 1-1/2 2100
26 × 3.00 2170
27 × 1 2145
27 × 1-1/8 2155
27 × 1-1/4 2161
27 × 1-3/8 2169
29 x 2.1 2288
29 x 2.2 2298
29 x 2.3 2326
650 x 20C 1938
650 x 23C 1944
650 × 35A 2090
650 × 38B 2105
650 × 38A 2125
700 × 18C 2070
700 × 19C 2080
700 × 20C 2086
700 × 23C 2096
700 × 25C 2105
700C Tubular 2130
700 × 28C 2136
700 × 30C 2146
700 × 32C 2155
700 × 35C 2168
700 × 38C 2180
700 × 40C 2200
700 × 44C 2235
700 × 45C 2242
700 × 47C 2268
FTP ratings are based on research by Hunter Allen
and Andrew Coggan, PhD, Training and Racing with a
Power Meter (Boulder, CO: VeloPress, 2010).

Symbol Definitions

These symbols may appear on the device or accessory labels.

Alternating current. The device is suitable for alternating current. Direct current. The device is suitable for direct current only. Fuse. Indicates a fuse specification or location. WEEE disposal and recycling symbol. The WEEE symbol is attached to the product in compliance with the EU directive 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). It is intended to deter the improper disposal of this product and to promote reuse and recycling.

### support.Garmin.com/en-SG

November 2018 190-02325-2H Rev. A

fēnix 5/5S - Specifications

fēnix 5X - Specifications

fēnix® 5/5S Owner’s Manual

FĒNIX® 5/5S

fēnix® 5X Owner’s Manual

FĒNIX ® 5/5S/5X PLUS